Multilin: 8 Series 845

GE Vernova
Multilin
8 Series 845
Technical Manual
Transformer Protection System
Hardware Version: C
Firmware Version: 4.10
Publication Reference: 1601-0651-C410-1
Copyright statement
Copyright © 2023 GE Vernova. All rights reserved.
EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista D&I Setup software are registered trademarks of GE Vernova.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Vernova. This documentation is furnished on license and may
not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Vernova. The content of this manual is for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Disclaimer
It is the responsibility of the user to verify and validate the suitability of all GE Grid Automation products. This
equipment must be used within its design limits. The proper application including the configuration and setting of
this product to suit the power system assets is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all
local or regional safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk damage to
property/the environment, personal injuries or fatalities and shall be the sole responsibility of the person/entity
applying and qualifying the product for use.
The content of this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install, configure and maintain
this product for its intended applications. This guidance is not intended to cover every possible contingency that
may arise during commissioning, operation, service, or maintenance activities. Should you encounter any
circumstances not clearly addressed in this document, please contact your local GE service site.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
It is the sole responsibility of the user to secure their network and associated devices against cybersecurity
intrusions or attacks. GE Vernova and its affiliates are not liable for any damages or losses arising from or
related to such security intrusion or attacks.
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1
1.1 Chapter Overview 3
1.2 Foreword 4
1.2.1 Target Audience 4
1.2.2 Typographical conventions 4
1.2.3 Nomenclature 5
1.3 Product overview 6
1.4 General description of the 8 Series 7
1.5 Functions and features 9
1.6 Security Overview 12
1.7 Order Codes 14
1.8 Cautions, warnings and notes 18
1.8.1 Safety words and definitions 18
1.8.2 General Cautions and Warnings 18
1.9 Must-read Information 21
1.9.1 Storage 21
1.10 For Further Assistance 22
1.10.1 Repairs 22
Chapter 2 Installation 23
2.2 Product Identification 26
2.3 Dimensions 27
2.4 Mounting 28
2.4.1 Standard Panel Mount 28
2.5 Draw-out Unit Withdrawal and Insertion 33
2.6 Removable Power Supply 35
2.7 Removable Magnetic Module 36
2.8 Remote Module I/O (RMIO) 39
2.9 IP20 Back Cover 41
2.10 Arc Flash Sensor 42
2.11 Physical considerations of wiring 45
2.11.1 Terminal Strip Types 46
2.11.2 Wire Size 47
2.12 Terminal connections 48
2.12.1 General connections 49
2.13 Terminal Identification 51
2.14 RMIO Module Installation 53
2.15 Phase Sequence and Transformer Polarity 55
2.16 Ground CT inputs 56
2.17 Zero-Sequence CT Installation 57
2.18 Voltage Inputs 58
2.19 Restricted Ground Fault Inputs 59
2.20 Control Power 60
2.21 Contact Inputs 61
2.22 Output Relays 63
2.23 Serial Communications 66
2.24 IRIG-B 68
Contents
2.25 Typical Wiring Diagrams 69
Chapter 3 Interfaces 73
3.2 First access 76
3.3 Front panel options 77
3.3.1 Graphical Display Pages 78
3.3.1.1 Menu hierarchy 79
3.3.1.2 Working with Graphical Display Pages 80
3.3.1.3 Single Line Diagram 83
3.3.2 Three-pushbutton front panel LEDs 86
3.3.3 Ten-pushbutton front panel LEDs 88
3.3.4 Home screen icons 91
3.3.5 Relay Messages 92
3.3.5.1 Target Messages 92
3.3.5.2 Self-test errors 92
3.3.5.3 Out of Service 97
3.3.5.4 Flash Messages 97
3.3.6 Label Removal 97
3.4 Software Interface 99
3.4.1 EnerVista D&I Setup software 99
3.4.1.1 Hardware & Software Requirements 99
3.4.1.2 Installing EnerVista D&I Setup software 99
3.4.1.3 Upgrading EnerVista D&I Setup software 100
3.4.2 Connecting EnerVista D&I Setup software to the relay 100
3.4.2.1 Using the Quick Connect Feature 100
3.4.2.2 Configuring Ethernet Communications 100
3.4.2.3 Connecting to the Relay 101
3.4.2.4 Configuring USB Address 101
3.4.3 Working with Setpoints 103
3.4.3.1 Entering Setpoints 103
3.4.3.2 Using Setpoint Files 105
3.4.3.3 Downloading and saving Setpoint files 106
3.4.3.4 Adding Setpoint files to the environment 106
3.4.3.5 Creating a new Setpoints file 106
3.4.3.6 Upgrading Setpoint files to a new revision 107
3.4.3.7 Printing Setpoints 107
3.4.3.8 Printing values from a connected device 108
3.4.3.9 Loading Setpoints from a File 108
3.4.3.10 Uninstalling files and clearing data 108
3.4.4 Quick Setup 108
3.4.5 Upgrading relay firmware 109
3.4.5.1 Loading new relay firmware 109
3.4.6 SLD Configurator 110
3.4.6.1 Control Objects 112
3.4.6.2 Status Objects 114
3.4.6.3 Metering Objects 115
3.4.6.4 Device Status Object 115
3.4.6.5 Static Objects 115
3.4.6.6 Front Panel Interaction 115
3.4.7 FlexCurve Editor 118
3.4.8 Transient Recorder (Waveform Capture) 119
3.4.9 Protection Summary 122
ii 1601-0651
Contents
3.4.10 FlexLogic Favourites 123

3.4.11 Offline Settings File Conversion 123
3.4.11.1 Converting legacy files 123
3.4.11.2 Conversion Summary Report 124
3.4.11.3 Results Window 124
Chapter 4 About Setpoints 127

4.2 About Setpoints 130
4.3 Protection and Trip Breaker Selection 131
4.3.1 Programming Output Relays for Breaker Tripping and Closing 136
4.4 Setpoints Entry Methods 142
4.5 Common Setpoints 143
4.6 Logic Diagrams 146
Chapter 5 Device Setpoints 147

5.2 Device menu hierarchy 150
5.3 Custom Configuration 151
5.4 Real-time Clock 154
5.4.1 PTP Configuration 154
5.4.2 Clock 156
5.4.3 SNTP Protocol 158
5.5 Security 159
5.5.1 Basic Security 162
5.5.2 CyberSentry 164
5.6 Communications 172
5.6.1 General communications setup 172
5.6.2 Modbus Protocol 172
5.6.3 Modbus configurable parameters 173
5.6.4 RS485 175
5.6.5 USB 175
5.6.6 Ethernet Ports 175
5.6.6.1 Network Settings Menu 176
5.6.7 Routing 177
5.6.8 DNP Protocol settings 180
5.6.9 IEC60870-5-104 185
5.6.10 IEC60870-5-103 187
5.6.11 IEC 61850 187
5.6.11.1 IEC61850 Configurator 188
5.7 Transient Recorder 191
5.8 Data Logger 193
5.9 Fault Reports 196
5.10 Event Data 198
5.11 Flex states 199
5.12 Front Panel 200
5.12.1 Programmable LEDs 200
5.12.1.1 LED allocation tables 201
5.12.2 Programmable Pushbuttons 203
5.12.2.1 Ten Pushbutton allocation tables 209
5.12.3 Tab Pushbuttons 210
1601-0651 iii
Contents
5.12.4 Annunciator 213

5.12.5 Display Properties 216
5.12.5.1 Support for Cyrillic languages 218
5.12.6 Scratchpad 218
5.12.7 Default Screens 218
5.12.8 Home Screens 219
5.12.9 FlexScreens 220
5.13 Resetting 222
5.14 Installation 223
5.15 Self-test errors 225
5.16 Clear Records 230
Chapter 6 System Setpoints 231

6.2 System menu hierarchy 234
6.3 Current Sensing 235
6.4 Voltage sensing 236
6.5 Power Sensing 238
6.6 Power System 239
6.7 Preset Values 241
6.8 Transformer 242
6.8.1 General setup 242
6.8.2 Phase relationships 245
6.8.3 Magnitude compensation 245
6.8.4 Phase compensation 247
6.8.5 Magnitude, Phase Angle, and Zero Sequence Compensation 256
6.8.6 Differential and Restraint Current Calculations 256
6.8.7 Transformer Types and Phase Shift compensation angles 259
6.8.8 Transformer Status Detection 270
6.8.9 Thermal inputs 275
6.8.10 On-load Tap Changer 275
6.9 Breakers 284
6.10 Switches 287
6.11 FlexCurves 291
Chapter 7 Input and Output Setpoints 295

7.2 Inputs 298
7.2.1 Contact Inputs 298
7.2.2 Virtual Inputs 300
7.2.3 Remote Inputs 301
7.3 Outputs 303
7.3.1 Output Relays 305
7.3.1.1 Relay selected for breaker Trip 306
7.3.1.2 Relay selected for breaker close 308
7.3.1.3 Auxiliary Output Relays 309
7.3.2 Virtual Outputs 311
7.3.3 Analog Outputs 312
Chapter 8 Protection 317
iv 1601-0651
Contents

8.2 Protection 320
8.2.1 Transformer elements overview 320
8.2.1.1 PercentDifferential 320
8.2.1.2 Transformer Overload 333
8.2.2 Current elements overview 336
8.2.2.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves 337
8.2.2.2 Percent of load-to-trip 351
8.2.2.3 Phase Time Overcurrent Protection (51P) 351
8.2.2.4 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50P) 356
8.2.2.5 Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection (67P) 358
8.2.2.6 Neutral Time Overcurrent Protection (51N) 363
8.2.2.7 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50N) 366
8.2.2.8 Neutral Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N) 369
8.2.2.9 Ground Time Overcurrent Protection (51G) 375
8.2.2.10 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50G) 378
8.2.2.11 Ground Directional Overcurrent Protection (67G) 380
8.2.2.12 Restricted Ground Fault (87G) 385
8.2.2.13 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection (51_2) 390
8.2.2.14 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50_2) 394
8.2.3 Voltage elements overview 397
8.2.3.1 Undervoltage Curves 398
8.2.3.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) 399
8.2.3.3 Auxiliary Undervoltage (27X) 403
8.2.3.4 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) 405
8.2.3.5 Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection (59X) 410
8.2.3.6 Neutral Overvoltage Protection (59N) 413
8.2.3.7 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Protection (59_2) 416
8.2.3.8 Volts per Hertz (24) 419
8.2.4 Power elements 426
8.2.4.1 Directional Power (32) 426
8.2.5 Frequency elements 432
8.2.5.1 Frequency Protection Common Setup 432
8.2.5.2 Underfrequency (81U) 432
8.2.5.3 Overfrequency (81O) 436
8.2.5.4 Frequency Rate of Change (81R) 440
Chapter 9 Monitoring 445

9.2 Monitoring Overview 448
9.3 Transformer monitoring 449
9.3.1 Harmonic Derating 449
9.3.2 Thermal Elements 452
9.3.3 Hottest spot 454
9.3.4 Aging Factor 456
9.3.5 Loss of transformer life 457
9.3.6 Tap Changer Failure 459
9.4 Breaker monitoring 462
9.4.1 Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring 462
9.4.2 Breaker Arcing Current 468
9.4.3 Breaker Health 471
9.5 Functions 476
9.5.1 Power Factor (55) 476
1601-0651 v
Contents
9.5.2 Demand 482

9.5.2.1 Current Demand 484
9.5.2.2 Real Power Demand 485
9.5.2.3 Reactive Power 487
9.5.2.4 Apparent Power Demand 490
9.5.3 Pulsed Outputs 492
9.5.4 Digital Counters 496
9.6 Harmonic Detection 500
9.7 Transient Ground Fault Detection 503
9.7.1 Transient Ground Fault Detection settings 508
9.7.2 Transient Ground Fault Detection logic 511
9.8 Resistance Temperature Detector Functions 516
9.8.1 RTD Temperature 516
9.8.2 RTD Trouble 521
9.9 Loss of Communications 522
Chapter 10 Control 525

10.2 Control Overview 528
10.3 Setpoint Group 529
10.4 Local Control Mode (Breaker and Switches) 532
10.5 Breaker Control 542
10.6 Switch Control (89) 546
10.7 Virtual Input Control 549
10.8 Trip Bus 550
10.9 Breaker Failure (50BF) 553
10.9.1 Breaker Failure Setup 554
10.9.2 Initiate 557
10.10 Arc Flash Protection 560
10.11 VT Fuse Failure (VTFF) 563
10.11.1 VT Fuse Failure settings 563
10.12 Digital Elements 566
Chapter 11 Flexlogic 569

11.2 FlexLogic 572
11.2.1 Timers 575
11.2.2 Non-volatile Latches 576
11.2.3 FlexLogic Equation 577
11.2.4 Viewing FlexLogic Graphics 579
11.2.5 FlexElements 580
11.2.5.1 FlexElement settings 581
11.2.5.2 FlexElements - Examples 584
Chapter 12 Testing 589

12.2 Testing display hierarchy 592
12.3 Simulation 593
12.3.1 Simulation Setup 593
12.3.2 Simulation Pre-Fault 594
vi 1601-0651
Contents
12.3.3 Simulation Fault 595

12.3.4 Simulation Post-Fault 596
12.4 Test LEDs 597
12.5 Contact Inputs 598
12.6 Output Relays 599
Chapter 13 Status 601

13.2 Summary 604
13.3 Breaker status 607
13.4 Information 608
13.5 Communications status 611
13.5.1 GOOSE 611
13.5.2 Communications Status settings 611
13.6 Other status settings 616
Chapter 14 Metering 621

14.2 Metering Overview 624
14.3 Metering Summary 628
14.4 Transformer metering 630
14.4.1 Windings 632
14.4.2 Thermal Elements 633
14.4.3 Tap Changer 633
14.5 Impedance/admittance 634
14.6 Currents 635
14.7 Neutral IOC 637
14.8 Voltages 638
14.9 Frequency 641
14.9.1 High-speed frequency 642
14.9.2 Volts Per Hertz 642
14.10 Harmonics 643
14.10.1 Harmonic Magnitude 643
14.10.2 Harmonic Detection 644
14.11 Synchrocheck 646
14.12 Percent Differential Current 647
14.13 Power functions 648
14.13.1 Power 648
14.13.2 Power Factor 651
14.13.3 Directional Power 651
14.14 Energy 652
14.14.1 Energy (X) 652
14.14.2 Energy Log 652
14.15 Demand 655
14.15.1 Current Demand 655
14.15.1.1 Current Demand 1(X) 655
14.15.1.2 Current Demand K1 655
14.15.1.3 Current Demand K2 656
14.16 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure 657
14.17 Arc Flash 658
14.18 Resistance Temperature Detectors 659
1601-0651 vii
Contents
14.19 Analog Inputs 660

14.20 FlexElements 661
Chapter 15 Records 663

15.2 Events 666
15.2.1 Event Viewer 666
15.3 Transient Records 670
15.4 Fault Reports 671
15.5 Data Logger 673
15.6 Breakers 674
15.6.1 Breaker Arcing Current 674
15.6.2 Breaker Health 674
15.7 Digital Counters 676
15.8 Remote Modbus Device 677
15.9 Clear Records 680
Chapter 16 Transformer monitoring and diagnostics 681

16.2 Overview 684
16.3 DGA Monitoring 685
16.4 Device Data 687
16.5 Dissolved Gas Analysis 688
16.6 Learned Data Records 689
16.7 Energization Records 690
16.8 Digital Fault Records 691
16.9 Models 692
16.9.1 Transformer Models 692
16.9.2 DGA Models 692
16.10 Historical Maximum Record 694
16.11 Transformer Health Report 695
16.12 DGA Historical Trend 696
Chapter 17 Maintenance 697

17.2 Environmental Health Report 700
17.3 General Maintenance 702
17.3.1 In-service Maintenance 702
17.3.2 Out-of-service Maintenance 702
17.3.3 Unscheduled Maintenance (System Interruption) 702
Chapter 18 Specifications 703

18.1 Device 705
18.1.1 Annunciator panel 705
18.1.2 Custom configurations 705
18.2 Protection elements 706
18.2.1 Transformer Percent Differential Protection 706
18.2.2 Transformer Overload 706
18.2.3 Instantaneous phase differential function 706
viii 1601-0651
Contents
18.2.4 Restricted ground fault (87G) 707

18.2.5 Phase directional overcurrent (67P) 707
18.2.6 Neutral directional overcurrent (67N) 707
18.2.7 Ground directional overcurrent (67G) 708
18.2.8 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P) 708
18.2.9 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (50N) 708
18.2.10 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G) 709
18.2.11 Phase time overcurrent (51P/V) 709
18.2.12 Neutral/ground time overcurrent (51N/G) 710
18.2.13 Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 710
18.2.14 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 711
18.2.15 Phase overvoltage (59P) 711
18.2.16 Neutral overvoltage (59N) 712
18.2.17 Auxiliary overvoltage (59X) 712
18.2.18 Negative sequence overvoltage (59_2) 712
18.2.19 Phase undervoltage (27P) 713
18.2.20 Auxiliary undervoltage (27X) 713
18.2.21 Voltage Interruption 714
18.2.22 Volts per Herz (24) 714
18.2.23 Overfrequency (81O) 714
18.2.24 Underfrequency (81U) 715
18.2.25 Rate of change of frequency (81R) 715
18.2.26 Directional power 716
18.2.27 RTD protection 716
18.2.28 Arc flash HS phase/ground instantaneous overcurrent (50P/50G) 716
18.3 Control 717
18.3.1 Synchrocheck 717
18.3.2 Breaker control 717
18.3.3 Local control mode 717
18.3.4 Switch control 717
18.3.5 Trip bus 717
18.3.6 Digital Elements 718
18.4 Monitoring 719
18.4.1 Winding hottest spot 719
18.4.2 Aging acceleration factor 719
18.4.3 Transformer loss of life 719
18.4.4 Harmonic derating 719
18.4.5 Tap changer failure 719
18.4.6 Power factor (55) 719
18.4.7 Breaker arcing current 720
18.4.8 Breaker failure 720
18.4.9 Breaker health 720
18.4.10 Trip circuit monitoring 720
18.4.11 Close circuit monitoring 721
18.4.12 Demand 721
18.4.13 Harmonic detection 721
18.5 Recording 722
18.5.1 Transient recorder 722
18.5.2 Event data 722
18.5.3 Data logger 722
18.5.4 Event recorder 722
18.5.5 Last trip data 723
1601-0651 ix
Contents
18.5.6 Fault reports 723

18.6 User-programmable elements 724
18.6.1 FlexLogic 724
18.6.2 FlexElements 724
18.6.3 FlexStates 724
18.6.4 Non-volatile latches 724
18.6.5 FlexCurves 725
18.6.6 Tab pushbuttons 725
18.6.7 User-programmable LEDs 725
18.6.8 User-programmable pushbuttons 725
18.7 Metering 726
18.7.1 RMS parameters 726
18.7.2 Phasors 727
18.7.3 Frequency 727
18.7.4 Current and voltage harmonics 728
18.8 Inputs 729
18.8.1 Tap changer input 729
18.8.2 AC currents 729
18.8.3 AC voltages 729
18.8.4 Analog inputs 729
18.8.5 Frequency 730
18.8.6 Arc flash sensor/fiber 730
18.8.7 Contact Inputs 730
18.8.8 IRIG-B input 731
18.8.9 RTD inputs 731
18.8.10 Ohms input 731
18.8.11 Tap changer input 731
18.9 Outputs 732
18.9.1 Analog outputs 732
18.9.2 Form C output relays 732
18.9.3 Form A voltage monitor 733
18.9.4 Solid state relays 733
18.9.5 Pulsed outputs 733
18.9.6 Coil actuator outputs 734
18.10 Power supply 735
18.10.1 Voltage supplies 735
18.10.2 Power consumption 735
18.10.3 Voltage loss ride-through 735
18.11 Communications 736
18.11.1 Ethernet 736
18.11.2 USB 736
18.11.3 Serial 736
18.11.4 WiFi 737
18.11.5 Remote Modbus 737
18.11.6 Controller Area Network 737
18.12 Certifications and approvals 738
18.12.1 Approvals 738
18.12.2 Testing and Certification 738
18.13 Environmental 740
18.14 Long-term storage 741
Appendix A Appendix A 743
x 1601-0651
Contents
1 Warranty 745
1601-0651 xi
Contents
xii 1601-0651
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 - Introduction
2 1601-0651
1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides some general information about the technical manual and an introduction to the device(s)
described in this technical manual.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 3
Foreword 4
Product overview 6
General description of the 8 Series 7
Functions and features 9
Security Overview 12
Order Codes 14
Cautions, warnings and notes 18
Must-read Information 21
For Further Assistance 22
1601-0651 3
1.2 FOREWORD
This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of the relay, as well as a comprehensive set of
instructions for using it. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are already familiar with
protection engineering and have experience in this discipline. The description of principles and theory is limited to
that which is necessary to understand the product. For further details on general protection engineering theory, we
refer you to the publication, Protection and Automation Application Guide, which is available online.
We have attempted to make this manual as accurate, comprehensive and user-friendly as possible. However we
cannot guarantee that it is free from errors. Nor can we state that it cannot be improved. We would therefore be
very pleased to hear from you if you discover any errors, or have any suggestions for improvement. Our policy is to
provide the information necessary to help you safely specify, engineer, install, commission, maintain, and eventually
dispose of this product. We consider that this manual provides the necessary information, but if you consider that
more details are needed, please contact us.
1.2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

This manual is aimed towards all professionals charged with installing, commissioning, maintaining,
troubleshooting, or operating any of the products within the specified product range. This includes installation and
commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating the product.
The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have knowledge of
handling electronic equipment. Also, system and protection engineers have a thorough knowledge of protection
systems and associated equipment.
1.2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual.
● Description of software menu items, buttons, labels or hardware keys and buttons written in bold type and
colored dark blue.
For example: Select Save from the file menu
● The names for special keys, appear in in upper case bold type and colored dark blue.
For example: ENTER
● Filenames, paths, code, and text that appears on a command line interface use the courier font
For example: Example\File.text
● Special terminology is written with leading capitals
For example: Line Differential Relay
● If reference is made to the relay's internal settings database on the relay's LCD screen, the menu items are
written in bold italics
For example: SECURITY (on the relay's LCD screen), or Security (in the EnerVista D&I Setup software
software)
● Menu paths are shown with > separators. this applies to both software menu paths and relay menu paths
For example: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS (for relay path), or File > Save (for software
path)
4 1601-0651
● Setting values are written with the courier font and are italicized
For example: Enabled
● Multilin products, use Flexlogic operands. Flexlogic operands are written in light blue uppercase courier font
For example: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
● Notes are written in italic and are surrounded by a by a blue border.
For example:
Note:
This is a note
1.2.3 NOMENCLATURE
Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout
the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product-
specific terms used by GE Vernova. The first instance of any acronym or term used in a particular chapter is
explained. In addition, a separate glossary is available on the GE Vernova website.
We would like to highlight the following changes of nomenclature however:
● The word relay and IED (Intelligent Electronic Device) are both used to describe the protection device. The
term IED is associated with the IEC61850 standard, whereas the term relay is the long-used traditional term.
It may also be referred to simply as the device' or the product.
● American English and spelling is used throughout this manual.
● The term 'Earth' and American term 'Ground' are equivalent. You may find either used in the manual.
1601-0651 5
1.3 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The Multilin 845 is a microprocessor-based device intended for the management and primary protection of the
medium to large size medium voltage (MV) and high voltage (HV) power transformers. Both 2-winding and 3-
winding transformers are supported. The relay also provides a number of primary and backup current and voltage
based protection functions.
This relay supports the control of the circuit breakers at each winding plus a range of monitoring and control
functions.
Each relay provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote human interfaces. They
also display the present trip/alarm conditions, and many of the measured system parameters. It also provides a rich
recording facility for items such as last trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy
consumption.
6 1601-0651
1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 8 SERIES

Each relay provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote human interfaces. They
also display the present trip/alarm conditions, and most of the more than 35 measured system parameters.
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy consumption is also
performed.
To meet diverse utility standards and industry requirements, you can program these relays to meet specific
requirements. This flexibility will naturally make a piece of equipment difficult to learn. To aid new users in getting
basic protection operating quickly, setpoints are set to typical default values and advanced features are disabled.
You can reprogram these settings any time.
It is possible for you to program these relays using the front panel keys and display. However, due to the numerous
settings, this manual method can be laborious. To simplify programming and provide a more intuitive interface, you
can enter setpoints with a PC running the EnerVista D&I Setup software. Even with minimal computer knowledge,
this menu-driven software provides easy access to all front panel functions. Actual values and setpoints can be
displayed, altered, stored, and printed. If settings are stored in a setpoint file, they can be downloaded at any time to
the front panel program port of the relay via a computer cable connected to the USB port of any personal computer.
CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5125 32-bit microprocessor that measures all
analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output relays, and a Freescale MPC8358 32-bit microprocessor
that controls all the advanced Ethernet communication protocols.
Analog Input and Waveform Capture

Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the source instrument
transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 11.5 kHz low pass analog anti-aliasing filter. All signals
are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are
converted to digital values by a 16-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
The raw samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus emulating a fault
recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the software for display and diagnostics.
Frequency
Frequency measurement is accomplished by measuring the time between zero crossings of the composite signal of
three-phase bus voltages, line voltage or three-phase currents. The signals are passed through a low pass filter to
prevent false zero crossings. Frequency tracking utilizes the measured frequency to set the sampling rate for
current and voltage which results in better accuracy for the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) algorithm for off-
nominal frequencies.
The main frequency tracking source uses three-phase bus voltages. The frequency tracking is switched
automatically by an algorithm to the alternative reference source, i.e., three-phase currents signal or line voltage for
the configuration of tie-breaker, if the frequency detected from the three-phase voltage inputs is declared invalid.
The switching will not be performed if the frequency from the alternative reference signal is detected invalid. Upon
detecting valid frequency on the main source, the tracking will be switched back to the main source. If a stable
frequency signal is not available from all sources, then the tracking frequency defaults to the nominal system
frequency.
1601-0651 7
Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics

All waveforms are processed eight times every cycle with a DC decaying removal filter and a DFT. The resulting
phasors have fault current transients and all harmonics removed. This results in an overcurrent relay that is
extremely secure and reliable and one that will not overreach.
Processing of AC Current Inputs

The DC Decaying Removal Filter is a short window digital filter, which removes the DC decaying component from
the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is done for all current signals used for
overcurrent protection; voltage signals use the same DC Decaying Removal Filter. This filter ensures no overreach
of the overcurrent protection.
The DFT uses exactly one cycle of samples to calculate a phasor quantity which represents the signal at the
fundamental frequency; all harmonic components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. power, etc.) are
based upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic components. RMS
(root mean square) values are calculated from one cycle of samples prior to filtering.
Protection Elements
All voltage, current and frequency protection elements are processed eight times every cycle to determine if a
pickup has occurred or a timer has expired. The voltage and current protection elements use RMS current/voltage,
or the magnitude of the phasor.
8 1601-0651
1.5 FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES

-.

"# "# ! !
$ $ % %
$ $
! ,# ,# %& %&
"#

"#$
% %
%
%& &

&

& & &

( /
% % %&
% %
%&
0,# (
!&P
,#
'
( &
)* ( &
(
+
( +
. .$ . - # ,N , ,( #O .O
@AB 12345672892 :27;9<;=74 >?5;98

CDEFGEHIJKLM
Figure 1: Single Line Diagram
1601-0651 9
ANSI Device Numbers and Functions

ANSI Device Description ANSI Device Description
24 Volts per Hertz 51_2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
25 Synchrocheck 55 Power Factor
27P Phase Undervoltage 59N Neutral Overvoltage
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 59P Phase Overvoltage
32 Directional Power 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
49 Hottest Spot Temperature 59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
Aging Factor 67G Ground Directional Element
Loss of Life 67N Neutral Directional Element
50/87 Instantaneous Differential Overcurrent 67P Phase Directional Element
50BF Breaker Failure 81O Overfrequency
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 81U Underfrequency
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 81R Frequency Rate of Change
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 87G Restricted Ground Fault (RGF)
50_2 Negative Sequence Instantaneous 87T Transformer Differential
Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent AFP Arc Flash Protection
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent VTFF Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
51P Phase Time Overcurrent n/a PseudoVoltage
Other Device Functions

Description Description
Analog Input Non-volatile Latches
Analog Output OPC-UA Communications
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) Output Relays
Breaker Control Setpoint Groups (6)
Breaker Health Transformer Dissolved Gas Analysis
Data Logger Transformer Energization Reports
Demand Transformer Integrated Fault Report
Digital Counters Transformer Overload
Event Recorder Transformer Loss of Life
Fault Report Trip Bus (6)
FlexElements Transient Recorder (Oscillography)
FlexLogic Equations Trip and Close Coil Monitoring
Flex States User-programmable LEDs
IEC 61850 Communications User-programmable Pushbuttons
Metering: current, voltage, power, PF, energy, frequency, Virtual Inputs (32)
harmonics, THD
Modbus User Map Virtual Outputs (32)
10 1601-0651
B!'(
!" %
2 %3
# $
% P %%
[ %$
%
1 %
) %
) %
%
%

\%
%
3 P
P %
&'( %
P%\
./'0 ,
)% P%
* % 1
) + O
%%
]^_àbcd e^fbcghij
+% 2 %3
$ 3 %
# 456785 97:;<= >5?@A5
,
% 1 -
# % klmnnmop
%-
CDEFGHDIJKL MINFE
[ %$
1P
QRS TUVWXYXZ
[%
,
Figure 2: Main Menu Hierarchy
1601-0651 11
1.6 SECURITY OVERVIEW

The following security features are available:
BASIC SECURITY
The basic security feature is present in the default offering of the relay. The relay introduces the notion of roles for
different levels of authority. Roles are used as login names with associated passwords stored on the device. The
following roles are available at present: Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Factory and Viewer, with a fixed
permission structure for each one. Note that the Factory role is not available for users, but strictly used in the
manufacturing process.
The relay can still use the SETPOINT ACCESS switch feature, but enabling the feature can be done only by an
Administrator. Setpoint access is controlled by a keyed switch to offer some minimal notion of security.
CYBERSENTRY
The CyberSentry Embedded Security feature is a software option that provides advanced security services. When
the software option is purchased, the Basic Security is automatically disabled.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
● An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
client that is centrally managed, enables user attribution, and uses secure standards based strong
cryptography for authentication and credential protection.
● A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to device
operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA
server. At present the defined roles are: Administrator, Engineer, Operator and Viewer.
● Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and
devices using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in
Galois Counter Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH
and approved by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for
cryptographic systems.
● Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management
(SIEM) systems for centralized cyber security monitoring.
There are two types of authentication supported by CyberSentry that can be used to access the device:
● Device Authentication – in which case the authentication is performed on the device itself, using the
predefined roles as users (No RADIUS involvement).
○ Device authentication using local roles may be done either from the front panel or through EnerVista.
● Server Authentication - in which case the authentication is done on a RADIUS server, using individual user
accounts defined on the server. When the user accounts are created, they are assigned to one of the
predefined roles recognized by the relay.
○ Device authentication using RADIUS server may be done only through EnerVista.
Note:
USB does not currently support CyberSentry security.
EnerVista Viewpoint Monitor does not currently support CyberSentry security.
With the CyberSentry security option, many communication settings cannot be changed remotely. All communication settings
can still be changed through the relay front panel.
12 1601-0651
When both device and server authentication are enabled, the relay automatically directs authentication requests to
the device or the respective RADIUS server, based on user names. If the user ID credential does not match one of
the device local accounts, the relay automatically forwards the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided. If
a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In
this situation, use local device accounts to gain access to the system.
USER ROLES
User Access Levels are used to grant varying permissions to specific user roles. User roles are used by both Basic
Security and CyberSentry.
The following user roles are supported:
● Administrator: The Administrator role has complete read and write access to all settings and commands.
The role does not allow concurrent access. The Administrator role also has an operand to indicate when it is
logged on.
● Engineer: This role has similar rights to the Administrator role, except that some commands, the security
settings modification and firmware upload are not allowed.
● Operator: The Operator role is present to facilitate operational actions that may be programmed and
assigned to buttons on the front panel. The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the
command menu/section. The Operator can also use the Virtual Input command under the control menu/
section. The Operator can view settings from EnerVista or the front panel but does not have the ability to
change any settings. This role is not a concurrent role.
● Viewer: The Viewer role has read-only access to all 8 Series 845 settings. This role allows concurrent
access. The Viewer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the device. This role can
download settings files and records from the device.
● Factory: This is an internal non-user accessible role used for manufacturing diagnostics. The ability to enable
or disable this role is a security setting that the Administrator controls.
GENERAL RULES FOR USER ROLES WITH CYBERSENTRY

1. The only concurrent role is Observer. If the user is logged in through serial, front panel, or over the network,
that counts as the role being logged in for concurrency reasons.
2. Both EnerVista and the front panel provide a one-step logoff. For the front panel, the root menu has a logoff
command. From EnerVista right-clicking on a device and providing a logoff function from the context menu is
sufficient.
3. The EnerVista Login Screen has User Name: and Password: fields for the default remote (Radius)
authentication, but when a Local Authentication checkbox is selected the User Name: field changes to a
drop down menu where the user can select one of the predefined roles.
1601-0651 13
1.7 ORDER CODES

Support of some of the features are order code dependent. Each relay is ordered with a number of required and
optional modules. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of
ordering. The information to specify a relay model is provided in the following Order Code table:
845 order codes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # # 12 # # # 16 17 18 19 20 # 845-EP5R5G5HNNANNGAPFM2ESWAN
845 - P5 R G5 H N N A N N G A P F M 2 E S W A N 845 Transformer Protection System

E 5
APPLICATION:
E Standard
PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT J:
N Two windings, no voltage

N
P1 1A three-phase current inputs (J1), voltage inputs (J2)
P5 5A three-phase current inputs (J1), voltage inputs (J2)
PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT K:
M 1A three-phase current inputs (K1), 1A three-phase current inputs (K2)

1
5
X
H 1A three-phase current inputs (K1) - two windings with voltage
1
H 5A three-phase current inputs (K1) - two windings with voltage
5
R 1A three-phase current inputs (K1), 1A three-phase current inputs (K2) - three windings with voltage
1
R 5A three-phase current inputs (K1), 5A three-phase current inputs (K2) - three windings with voltage
5
GROUND CURRENTS:
G1 1A ground input (1 per phase current bank)
G5 5A ground input (1 per phase current bank)
Q1 5A ground input (J1), 1A ground input (K1)
Q2 5A (J1) + 1A (K1) + 1A (K2)
Q3 1A (J1) + 5A (K1) + 5A (K2)
POWER SUPPLY:
H 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC
R 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC - Extended Ride-through
L 24 to 48 VDC
SLOT B:
N None
R 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120)
S 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10)
C 15 Digital Inputs (24 V DC, Ext Supply)
SLOT C:
14 1601-0651
N None
R 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120)
S 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10)
C 15 Digital Inputs (24 V DC, Ext Supply)
SLOT F:
A 2 Form A (Vmon) Relays, 2 Form C Relays, 1 Critical Failure Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Critical Failure Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
SLOT G:
N None
A 2 Form A (Vmon) Relays, 3 Form C Relays, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
B 9 Form A Relays, 10 Digital Inputs
D 8 Double Pole Outputs
K 5 Form A Relays, 1 Form C Relay, 10 Digital Inputs
L 7 DcmA O/P, 4 DcmA I/P, 1 RTD, 1 Ohms Input
M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Form C Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
P 8 Double Pole Outputs - C
SLOT H:
N None
A 2 Form A Relays, 3 Form C Relays, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
B 9 Form A Relays, 10 Digital Inputs
D 8 Double Pole Outputs
F 10 Digital Inputs, 4 Arc Flash Inputs
K 5 Form A Relays, 1 Form C Relay, 10 Digital Inputs
M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Form C Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)
P 8 Double Pole Outputs - C
FACEPLATE:
M Basic: Membrane Keypad with 3 Pushbuttons
A Advanced: Membrane Keypad with 10 Pushbuttons
CURRENT PROTECTION:
S Basic: 87T, 50/87, 50P, 50N, 50G, 51P, 51N, 51G, Transformer Overload
M Standard: Basic, 50_2, 51_2, RGF
A Advanced: Standard, 67P, 67G, 67N
VOLTAGE MONITORING AND PROTECTION:
N None
S Standard: 27P, 27X, 59P, 59N, 59X, 81O/U
P Advanced: Standard, 24, 25, 32, 55, 59_2, 81R
CONTROL
B Basic: Setpoint Group Control, Virtual Inputs, Trip Bus, Breaker Control, Digital Elements
F Standard: Setpoint Group Control, Virtual Inputs, Trip Bus, Breaker Control, Digital Elements, FlexLogic, 50BF, VTFF
T Advanced HMI: Standard, Tab Pushbuttons, Annunciator Panel, Configurable SLDs with Bay Control
1601-0651 15
MONITORING
B Basic: Breaker Coil Monitoring, Breaker Arcing, Harmonics, THD, Demand, Trip Counters, Harmonic Derating Factor
C Standard: Basic, Breaker Health, Health Report, Thermal Elements, Tap Changer, Learned Data, Energization and Historical Max
Record
A Advanced: Standard, Harmonic Detection
M M&D: Standard, Dissolved Gas Analysis, Integrated Fault Report
COMMUNICATIONS:
S E Standard: Front USB, 1x Rear RS485 (Modbus RTU/TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), 1x Ethernet RJ45 port (Modbus TCP,
DNP).
1 E Advanced: Standard + IEC 60870-5-104, 1588, SNTP, OPC-UA
1 P Advanced + PRP + HSR
2 A Advanced + Basic IEC 61850
2 E Advanced + PRP + HSR + Basic IEC 61850
3 A Advanced + IEC 61850
3 E Advanced + PRP + HSR + IEC 61850
4 E Advanced + 1x additional RS485 Port + HSR + PRP + IEC 61850
ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
N None
None, no additional communication ports. RJ45 Port 1 Enabled, RJ45 Port 2 disabled
S ST, Multi-mode 1310nm - With 1E to 3E, the user gets 2x Fiber ST Ports with Redundancy, RJ45 ports 1 and 2 are disabled. With
4E user gets 2x Fiber ST ports and 2xRJ45 Ports with Redundancy selectable on 2 ports
C RJ45, Copper 10/100M - With 1E to 3E, the user gets 2x RJ45 ports with Redundancy, RJ45 ports 1 and 2 are disabled. With 4E
user gets 4x RJ45 Ports with Redundancy selectable on 2 ports.
T 1x additional RS485 Port and 1x additional RJ45 Copper 10/100M port, Redundancy not available with Communications option
SE.
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION:
N None
W WiFi 802.11
SECURITY
B Basic
A Advanced: CyberSentry Level 1
FW OPTION
N FW version 3.xx or earlier
4 FW version 4.xx
● Harsh Environment Coating is a standard feature on all relays.

● Advanced security is only available with advanced communications (1E, 1P, 3A, 3E). When you select the
advanced communications option, the Ethernet port on the main CPU is disabled.
● Retrofit order codes must be configured using the GE Multilin Online Store (OLS) based on the existing relay
order code and additional requirements. Refer to the GE website and search for the Buy Retrofit Kit for
further information.
Remote Module I/O (RMIO)

The Remote RTD module provides additional protection.
16 1601-0651
RMIO1 * G G * *
Power Supply L | | | | 24 - 48 V DC
H | | | | 110 - 250 V DC / 110 - 230 V AC
I/O Module 1 G | | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 2 G | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 32 G | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X | None
I/O Module 4 G Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X None
1. RMIO requires firmware version 2.00 and later and hardware version B. Check the hardware
version under Status > Information > Main CPU. If RMIO support is required for relays with earlier
hardware versions, contact the factory.
2. RMIO comes standard with 6 RTDs (Modules 1 and 2).
892800RMIO-A1.fm
Other Accessories
● 18J0-0030 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 1 3/8”
● 18J0-0029 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 3”
● 8 Series Retrofit Kit, 750/760 to 850
● 8 Series Retrofit Kit, 735 to 850
1601-0651 17
1.8 CAUTIONS, WARNINGS AND NOTES

Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.
1.8.1 SAFETY WORDS AND DEFINITIONS

The following symbols and formatting are used in this document indicate certain types of information:
Caution:
Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
equipment
Warning:
Risk of electric shock
Warning:
Risk of damage to eyesight
Note:
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
1.8.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Caution:
Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution
indicators are reviewed.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions
abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired and can result in impaired operation and injury.
Warning:
Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
Caution:
Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.
18 1601-0651
Warning:
Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk
of shock and/or fire, for example from high voltage connected to low voltage
terminals.
Caution:
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type,
terminal torque settings, voltage, current magnitudes applied, and adequate
isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are un-compromised for safety purposes during
device operation and service.
All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable and
un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
It is recommended that a field external switch, circuit breaker be connected near
the equipment as a means of power disconnect. The external switch or circuit
breaker is selected in accordance with the power rating.
This product itself is not Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). However, it can be
used in the computation of site specific Arc Flash analysis when the arc flash
option is ordered. If a new appropriate Hazard Reduction Category code for the
installation is determined, user should follow the cautions mentioned in the arc
flash installation section.
The critical failure relay must be connected to annunciate the status of the device
for all applications and in particular when the arc flash option is ordered.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage
input match the ratings specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or
voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be
thoroughly familiar with all safety cautions and warnings in this manual and with
applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Warning:
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to
current transformers, voltage transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make
sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to attempting work on the
device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current
transformers. Make sure that current transformer secondary circuits are shorted
out before making or removing any connection to the current transformer (CT)
input terminals of the device.
1601-0651 19
Caution:
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages
or currents are connected to such equipment and that trip and close commands to
the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated, unless this is
required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant
procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers,
isolators, and other switching apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the
primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working on or around this
primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
Warning:
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL)
Class 1M. Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view
directly with optical instruments.
Note:
To ensure the settings file inside the relay is updated, wait 30 seconds after a setpoint change before cycling power.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial environments. Not
to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
20 1601-0651
1.9 MUST-READ INFORMATION

The following general statements apply and are repeated in the relevant sections of the manual.
● Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current settings to a file on your PC. After the
firmware has been upgraded, it is necessary to load this file back into the device.
● The SNTP and IRIG-B settings take effect after rebooting the relay.
● Commands may be issued freely through other protocols than Modbus (i.e., DNP, IEC 104, and, IEC 61850)
without user authentication or encryption of data taking place, even if the relay has the advanced security
feature enabled.
● Note that the factory role password may not be changed.
● Both DNP and IEC104 protocols can work at the same time, but consider that there is only one point map.
So, both protocols use the same configured points.
● The 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
● The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault,
the element needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to change the directional signal. Some protection
elements such as Instantaneous Overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the directional signal has
changed. A coordination time of at least 10 ms must therefore be added to all the instantaneous protection
elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element. If current reversal is a concern, a longer
delay – in the order of 20 ms – is needed.
● The same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral Displacement. When using the
curve to determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element, substitute the ratio of neutral
voltage to Pickup level for the current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the curve plot.
● The relay is not approved as, or intended to be, a revenue metering instrument. If used in a peak load control
system, consider the accuracy rating and method of measurement employed, and the source VTs and CTs, in
comparison with the electrical utility revenue metering system.
● In bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents is less than 25% of the interrupting rating and can
be significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
● For future reference, make a printout of the conversion report immediately after the conversion in case
conversion reports are removed or settings modified from the 8 Series Setup Software.
● To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “FA_1 NO” and “FA_1 COM” to connect the Trip
coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “FA_1 COM” and “FA_1 OPT/V” voltage monitor).
● WiFi and USB do not currently support CyberSentry security. For this reason WiFi is disabled by default if the
CyberSentry option is purchased. WiFi can be enabled, but be aware that doing so violates the security and
compliance model that CyberSentry is supposed to provide.
● In Power factor monitoring, SWITCH-IN and SWITCH-OUT are mutually exclusive settings. (845, 850)
1.9.1 STORAGE
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage
temperature range outlined in the Specifications.
If applicable, use the factory-provided dust caps on all Arc Flash sensor fiber and connectors when not in use, to
avoid dust contamination in the transceiver and sensor plugs.
1601-0651 21
1.10 FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE

For current manuals and software go to:
Website: www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/ProductListing.htm
For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: [email protected]
Europe e-mail: [email protected]
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
1.10.1 REPAIRS
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
●Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
●Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
●Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
●Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to
cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains
at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
● Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
● Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
● Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
22 1601-0651
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
Chapter 2 - Installation
24 1601-0651

This chapter describes the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay.
Chapter Overview 25
Product Identification 26
Dimensions 27
Mounting 28
Draw-out Unit Withdrawal and Insertion 33
Removable Power Supply 35
Removable Magnetic Module 36
Remote Module I/O (RMIO) 39
IP20 Back Cover 41
Arc Flash Sensor 42
Physical considerations of wiring 45
Terminal connections 48
Terminal Identification 51
RMIO Module Installation 53
Phase Sequence and Transformer Polarity 55
Ground CT inputs 56
Zero-Sequence CT Installation 57
Voltage Inputs 58
Restricted Ground Fault Inputs 59
Control Power 60
Contact Inputs 61
Output Relays 63
Serial Communications 66
IRIG-B 68
Typical Wiring Diagrams 69
1601-0651 25
2.2 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

The product identification label is located on the side panel of the relay. This label indicates the product model,
serial number, and date of manufacture. The following figure shows an example of such a label.
Note:
This example label is specific to a particular order code of the 850 and may not represent your model.
Figure 3: Product label example
26 1601-0651
2.3 DIMENSIONS
The relay dimensions are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting, and panel cutouts, are shown in the
following sections.

Figure 4: Relay Dimensions
1601-0651 27
2.4 MOUNTING
The relay can be mounted two ways: standard panel mount or optional tab mounting, if required.
● Standard panel mounting: From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout. From the rear of
the panel, screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions.
● Optional tab mounting: The V tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown in the
following figure. Use needle nose pliers to bend the retaining V tabs outward to about 90°. Use caution and
do not bend and distort the wall of the enclosure adjacent to the tabs. The relay can now be inserted and can
be panel wired.
Figure 5: V Tabs Located on Case Side
2.4.1 STANDARD PANEL MOUNT

The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.
Caution:
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.
28 1601-0651
Figure 6: Standard panel mount
Figure 7: Panel cutout dimensions
1601-0651 29
Depth reducing collar

Three different sizes of optional depth reducing collar are available for mounting relays in narrow-depth service
panels, or wherever space is an issue.
Note:
The drill hole locations are different when a depth reducing collar is used. See the Depth reducing collar panel cutout figure
below.

● 18J0-0029 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 3”

!

Figure 8: Depth reducing collar dimensions
30 1601-0651

Figure 9: Depth reducing collar panel cutout
1601-0651 31
7,-6:-;7"# ; "& <&=

$ '( )2*7,*-*5 1>?@A)54
BCD?EFBFC GH>IEA )0 BF JK 1)./ #L4
!"#$ !%&&'

$ '( )**+,*-)* ).-/0"# 1-2.+334
$ '( )**+,*-)) -"# 1/5.6334
$ '( )**+,*-0* -./0"# 1+0.-334
7 8"8 !'"9 #"
7+6/*-'6.MNH

Figure 10: Depth reducing collar installation
To mount an 8 Series relay with a depth reducing collar, follow these steps:
1. Drill mounting holes as shown on the Depth reducing collar panel cutout figure above.
2. Mount the collar on the captive unit using eight screws.
3. Mount the combined unit and collar on the panel using eight screws.
32 1601-0651
2.5 DRAW-OUT UNIT WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
Caution:
Turn off control power before drawing out or re-inserting the relay to prevent mal-operation.
Follow the steps outlined in the diagrams below to insert and withdraw.
1601-0651 33
STEP 1
SCALE 0.400
HANDLE TO BE LIFTED TO 90
POSITION WHILE SLIDING
DRAW-OUT UNIT INTO
CAPTIVE UNIT
STEP 3
STEP 2
PUSH HANDLE DOWN

AND TIGHTEN THE SCREW
MAINTAIN HANDLE LIFTED POSITION
WITH 16 IN-LB TORQUE
UNTIL DRAW-OUT UNIT
HANDLE SHOULD BE FLUSH
IS FULLY INSERTED
WITH FRONT PANEL SURFACE
Figure 11: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram
34 1601-0651
2.6 REMOVABLE POWER SUPPLY

Follow the steps outlined in the below diagram to insert (#1) or remove (#2) the power supply from the unit.

Figure 12: Insert or Remove the Power Supply
Figure 13: Unlatch Module
1601-0651 35
2.7 REMOVABLE MAGNETIC MODULE
Warning:
You must follow all preparation steps before removing the CT/VT magnetic module.
Warning:
You must identify all current and voltage sources connected to the relay before
starting the removal process.
Warning:
Only suitably-qualified personnel may remove the magnetic module from an
installed relay.
Warning:
Appropriate PPE is required based on the arc flash calculations.
Caution:
LOTO (Lockout Tag Out) of the system is required prior to module removal/
replacement.
Follow the procedures outlined below to remove or replace the CT/VT magnetic module.
PREPARATION
1. Shut down and de-energize all systems connected to the relay.
2. Review all cautions and warnings in the introduction.
Warning:
A relay, with the magnetic module removed, does NOT have an internal automatic
CT shorting mechanism.
Warning:
Hazardous voltages may exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current
transformers.
Warning:
Make sure that in-field current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out
before making or removing any connection to the current transformer (CT) input
terminals.
36 1601-0651

Figure 14: Removing/replacing the CT/VT Magnetic Module
REMOVAL
Caution:
replacement.
1. Remove the draw-out unit from the chassis. Carefully set aside.
2. Within the captive chassis, unscrew the mounting screw (as indicated in the following figure).
3. Insert the magnetic module extractor tool as shown in the following figure, without engaging the pins.
4. Slide the tool to the left, engaging the pins fully (see arrow in figure).
5. Pull the tool handle towards the operator to disengage the module, and carefully remove the module from the
chassis.
6. Remove the tool from the module, and save for future use.
REPLACEMENT
Caution:
replacement.
Ensure the replacement CT /VT module is the same type as the removed module.
Alternate models and configurations may be unsafe for use.
1. Insert the extractor tool into the front of the module, then slide the tool to the left to engage the tool pins.
2. Place the module/tool at the front of the chassis so that it is flush with the left and bottom sides.
3. Slide the module/tool into the back of the chassis as far as it will go, making sure the connectors mate while
keeping the module flush to the left and bottom sides of the chassis.
4. Tighten the captive mounting screw using a torque of 6 in-lbs.
5. Remove the tool from the magnetics module and save for future use.
6. Insert the draw-out unit.
7. Re-energize the relay system.
1601-0651 37
8. Remove the external shorting equipment from the CT inputs.

9. Ensure the In Service LED on the relay front panel is green.
10. Navigate to the Target message screen (press Home and then Targets) and check that the Target screen
does not show any Self-Test errors. Self-Test errors may indicate that the module has not been mounted
properly.
11. Verify that CTs and VTs, digital inputs and other circuits are all metering correctly.
38 1601-0651
2.8 REMOTE MODULE I/O (RMIO)

If using the Remote RTD module, follow these installation steps.
Figure 15: RMIO - DIN rail mounting - Base & Expansion units
Figure 16: RMIO - Base Unit screw mounting
1601-0651 39
Figure 17: RMIO - Expansion Unit screw mounting
40 1601-0651
2.9 IP20 BACK COVER

If using the IP20 back cover, follow these installation steps.
1. Place the IP20 cover in the orientation shown over the CT/VT terminal blocks, routing wiring through the
cover slots.
2. Secure the cover with the 4 screws provided. Suggested tightening torque is 8 lb-in (0.9 Nm).
Figure 18: IP20 Back Cover installation
1601-0651 41
2.10 ARC FLASH SENSOR

The Arc Flash sensor houses the fiber optics and membrane that are used to detect the arc flash. Two mounting
screw holes are provided to affix the sensors to the panel.
Caution:
If the Arc Flash Protection is used, operands for Arc Flash sensor failures must be
assigned to an auxiliary output relay. This must be connected to the control logic of
the breaker equipment to ensure safe operations when the output relay is asserted.
In the event of this assertion, the Hazard Reduction Category code cannot be
maintained unless backup protection is continuing to maintain it.
Caution:
Arc Flash sensor fiber is pressure sensitive and must be handled carefully to avoid
damage. Read the following guidelines fully before proceeding.
Take care when handling the Arc Flash sensor fiber.

● Do not bend the sensor fiber sharply (with a radius of less than 25 mm (1 inch)). Sharp bends can damage
the fiber. Do not pull or tug loops of sensor fiber, as sharp bends may result.
● Do not clamp the sensor fiber tightly during installation. The sensor fiber should be held in place loosely for
the best long-term performance. Avoid over-tightening ties which may deform or break the sensor fiber.
● Do not pull or tug sensor fiber with force, as this may cause internal damage or separate the fiber from the
cable connector.
● Do not twist the sensor fiber, as twisting can damage the fiber resulting in substandard performance.
● Do not attach sensor fiber directly to the bus.
● Avoid surface temperatures above 70°C or 158°F to prolong the life of the fiber.
● Secure all sensor fibers (loosely but securely) away from any moving parts.
● Use the factory-provided dust caps on all Arc Flash sensor fiber and connectors when not in use, to avoid
dust contamination in the transceiver and sensor plugs.
42 1601-0651
Installlation
Figure 19: AF Sensor - front, side and top view

Figure 20: AF Sensor - dimensions of sensor tip
Note:
The sensor fiber should be secured loosely for the best long-term performance. Avoid over-tightening ties which may deform
or break the sensor fiber.
Before installing the AF sensor unit, ensure that all other drilling and installation is complete to minimize possible
damage to the sensitive unit.
1601-0651 43
To install the AF sensor and route the sensor fiber, follow these steps:
1. Choose a location for the sensor clear of any obstructions that could shield the sensor from arc flash light.
2. Mount the sensor securely, using the mounting screw holes.
3. Once the sensor is securely mounted, carefully route the sensor fiber from the AFS sensor to the base unit,
minimizing loops and curves for the strongest possible signal.
4. Secure all sensor fibers (loosely but securely) away from any moving parts.
Note:
Both the AF sensor connections (CH 1 through CH 4) and the sensor cables are shipped with dust caps in place to avoid dust
contamination. The small rubber dust caps must be removed before operation.
44 1601-0651
2.11 PHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS OF WIRING

When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs must be oriented as shown in the picture below. This is to
ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere with the lug body.
S W
WAS
1 2 3
LO
T L
T L
BLO
D D
Figure 21: Positioning the lugs correctly
Figure 22: Correct Installation Method
Figure 23: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)
1601-0651 45
2.11.1 TERMINAL STRIP TYPES

There are two types of removable terminal strips as shown: right-angle plugs with side screw connections, and
straight plugs with front screw connections.
Figure 24: Right-angle plugs with side screw connections
46 1601-0651
Figure 25: Straight plugs with front screw connections
2.11.2 WIRE SIZE

Use the following guideline for wiring to terminal strips A, B, C, D, F, G, H:
● 12 AWG to 24 AWG
● Suggested wiring screw tightening torque: 4.5 in-lbs (0.5 N-m)
● Usage of ferrules or pin terminals is recommended
● Suggested wire stripping / pin contact length:
○ Right-angle connection type plug: 7 to 8 mm
○ Front connection type plug: 12 mm
Use the following guideline for wiring to terminal blocks J, K:
● 12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without 9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum
diameter ring terminals.
● 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum
diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
● Suggested wiring screw tightening torque: 15 in-lb (1.7 N-m)
● Suggested mounting screw tightening torque (to attach terminal block to chassis): 8 in-lb (0.9 N-m)
1601-0651 47
2.12 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

All the terminal strips are labeled with a slot letter to identify the module slot position and numbers to identify the
terminals within the module.
Note:
Make sure that the first letter on the terminal strip corresponds to the slot location identified on the chassis silkscreen.
Due to the possible number of applications, it is not possible to present typical connections for all possible schemes.
The information in this section covers the main aspects of interconnectivity, in the general areas of inputs, outputs,
communications and grounding. The figure below shows the rear terminal layout of the 8 Series platform.
48 1601-0651
2.12.1 GENERAL CONNECTIONS
I AC A A

C C C C
B D
1 1 1 1 E E
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 P T
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7 R
8 8 8
9 9 9
1 1 1
P T
F G H 21 21
31 31
1 1 1 41 41
2 2 2 R
3 3 3 51 51
4 4 4 61 61
5 5 5 71 71
6 6 6 81 81
7 7 7
8 8 8 J K
9 9 9 1 1
1 1 1
11 11 11 2 2
21 21 21 3 3
4 4
5 $%&' ( ); +,-. / .: 5
31 31 31
41 41 41 6 6
51 51 51 7 7
61 61 61 8 8
71 71 71 9 9
81 81 81
91 91 91 1 1
2 2 2 11 11
21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 13 $%&' ( )* +,-. / .0 13
23 23 23 41 41
42 42 42
51 51
16 16
I AC AA!" #
1601-0651 49
Figure 26: Rear Terminal Layout of the Platform
Power Supply
H - HV Power Supply L - LV Power Supply
Terminal Description Terminal Description
(DC Voltage input polarity)
1 Line 1 +ve (positive)
2 Neutral 2 -ve (negative)
3 Ground 3 Ground
Communications
SE - Comms - Basic Ethernet 1E/1P/3E/3A - Comms - Advanced Ethernet
Terminal Description Terminal Description
1 IRIG-B (+) 1 IRIG-B (+)
2 IRIG-B (-) 2 IRIG-B (-)
3 RS485_1 (+) 3 RS485_1 (+)
4 RS485_1 (-) 4 RS485_1 (-)
5 RS485_1 COM 5 RS485_1 COM
6 RESERVED 6 RESERVED
7 RESERVED 7 RESERVED
8 optional RMIO COM 8 optional RMIO COM
9 optional RMIO + 9 optional RMIO +
10 optional RMIO - 10 optional RMIO -
RJ45 ETHERNET RJ45 NOT USED
50 1601-0651
2.13 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

! " " #
"! $% &' ()
*+ ! " " # "! $% &' ,)
- +%" ' " % .!/ ( * 0 1.(*2
$% " 3 &' ( '0
-- .!3 & "' "'!" 45 % .' ! *+

Figure 27: Optional I/O card terminal mappings
AC Analog, Slot J (2W/3W with VTs)

AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, 4 VT
Terminal Description
1601-0651 51
AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, 4 VT

1 CT1 PhA
2 CT1 PhA RETURN
3 CT1 PhB
4 CT1 PhB RETURN
5 CT1 PhC
6 CT1 PhC RETURN
7 CT1 N/G
8 CT1 N/G RETURN
9 VT1A IN
10 VT1A RETURN
11 VT1B IN
12 VT1B RETURN
13 VT1C IN
14 VT1C RETURN
15 VT1N IN
16 VT1N RETURN
AC Analog, Slot K
AC Inputs - 2 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT
Terminal Description
1 CT2 PhA
2 CT2 PhA RETURN
3 CT2 PhB
4 CT2 PhB RETURN
5 CT2 PhC
6 CT2 PhC RETURN
7 CT2 N/G
8 CT2 N/G RETURN
9 CT3 PhA
10 CT3 PhA RETURN
11 CT3 PhB
12 CT3 PhB RETURN
13 CT3 PhC
14 CT3 PhC RETURN
15 CT3 N/G
16 CT3 N/G RETURN
52 1601-0651
2.14 RMIO MODULE INSTALLATION

The optional remote module (RMIO) is designed to be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for
multiple RTD cables to run back from the motor, which may be in a remote location, to the switchgear.
Although the RMIO is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from
high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.
Figure 28: RMIO unit showing 2 IO_G modules
PU U I I I I
1 1 1 1
L
S N
G

T 9 9 9 9
R 8 8 8 8
7 7 7 7
6 6 6 6
ot + B 5 5 5 5
1 1 1 1
- B
B
C

Figure 29: RMIO terminal identification with 4 IO_G modules
1601-0651 53
w !"#g$%&
g&u'5 bu
er e I I = <

ZT (*) SHELD TWSTED PAR B RMO +
: OPTOCOUPLER 6'!&7 ;w$&
OPTOCOUPLER : B RMO -
DATA
DATA D COM
SCADA, PLC, OR B3 COMMON

PERSONAL COMPUTER
GROUND THESHELD ATTHE (*)TERMNATNGMPEDANCEATEACH END 8942181.
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTERONLY (typically 0 ohms and nF)
Figure 30: RMIO wiring diagram
54 1601-0651
2.15 PHASE SEQUENCE AND TRANSFORMER POLARITY

For correct operation of the relay features, follow the instrument transformer polarities, shown in the wiring
diagrams. Note the solid square markings that are shown with all instrument transformer connections. When the
connections adhere to the drawing, the arrow shows the direction of power flow for positive watts and the positive
direction of lagging vars. The phase sequence is user programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.
Depending on order code, the relay can have up to four (4) current inputs in each J slot and K slot. Three of them
are used for connecting to the phase CT phases A, B, and C. The fourth input is a ground input that can be
connected to either a ground CT placed on the neutral from a Wye connected transformer winding, or to a donut
type CT measuring the zero sequence current from a grounded system. The relay CTs are placed in a packet
mounted to the chassis of the relay. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 1 to 12000 A primaries may be used.
Caution:
Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary
rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or
inadequate protection.
Caution:
IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs correctly measure up to 46
times the current input’s nominal rating. Time overcurrent curves become
horizontal lines for currents above 20 × PKP.
1601-0651 55
2.16 GROUND CT INPUTS

Before making ground connections, be aware that the relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current
from the sum of the three phase current phasors. The following figures show three possible ground connections
using the ground current input (Terminals J7 and J8).
The ground input (Terminals J7 and J8) is used in conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as source, or in the neutral
of wye-connected source CTs. The ground current input can be used to polarize the neutral. When using the
residual connection, set the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY
setpoint.

Figure 31: Ground Inputs
56 1601-0651
2.17 ZERO-SEQUENCE CT INSTALLATION

The figure below shows the various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence current CT, so
that ground fault current can be detected. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero Sequence CT is recommended.
U
G o oo o

4 o
m o o
Sc Sc
A B C N " $ %
G o
o
T& '(&)*+,
-)./ 01 &*
LOA
l&2+ .3+1
99 !"#
LOA
Figure 32: Zero Sequence (Core Balance) CT Installation
1601-0651 57
2.18 VOLTAGE INPUTS

The relays have four channels for AC voltage inputs, each with an isolating transformer in each J and K slot.
Voltage transformers up to a maximum 5000:1 ratio may be used. The nominal secondary voltage must be in the 10
to 240 V range.
The Bus VT connections most commonly used, wye and delta (or open delta), are shown in the typical wiring
diagram. The single Auxiliary voltage input is commonly used as the line voltage. For LEA inputs, the line voltage
connection is line to neutral voltages. The line VT input channel, used for the synchrocheck feature, can be
connected for phase-neutral voltages Van, Vbn, or Vcn; or for phase-phase voltages Vab, Vbc, or Vca as shown.

Figure 33: Line VT Connections
Caution:
If Delta VTs are used for three-phase voltages, the zero sequence voltage (V0) and
neutral ground polarizing voltage (–V0) are zero. Also, with the Delta VT
connection, the phase-neutral voltage cannot be measured and is not displayed.
58 1601-0651
2.19 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT INPUTS

Restricted Ground Fault protection, (also referred to as Restricted Earth Fault protection), is often applied to
transformers having grounded Wye windings to provide ground fault detection for faults near the transformer
neutral. Each current bank on the relay has 3 phase current inputs and one ground input. Any of the available inputs
on the relay current banks can be selected as a signal input for an RGF element.
The phase and ground input CT connections to the relay are shown below:
'&()#*&+$& #$$%$&

! "

,-.//0123456
Figure 34: Restricted Ground Fault Inputs
1601-0651 59
2.20 CONTROL POWER

Control power is supplied to the relay such that it matches the relay’s installed power supply range.
Caution:
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If
the applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds
MUST be connected for normal operation regardless of control power supply type.
For more details, please refer to the power supply section.
Caution:
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest
practical path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding cable should be
used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog
number 8660 is suitable.
Figure 35: Control Power Connection
60 1601-0651
2.21 CONTACT INPUTS

Depending on the order code, the relay has a different number of contact inputs which can be used to operate a
variety of logic functions for circuit switching device control, external trips, blocking of protection elements, etc. The
relay has contact inputs and virtual inputs that are combined in a form of programmable logic to facilitate the
implementation of various schemes.
The voltage threshold at which the contact inputs detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24
V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Wet or Dry input signal types can be connected to contact input terminals as shown in the figure: Wet and Dry
Contact Input Wiring Examples.
Dry inputs use an internal +24V supply. The voltage threshold must be set to 17V for the inputs to be recognized
using the internal +24V.
Note:
The same type of input signal must be connected to all contact inputs on the same contact input card.
1601-0651 61
I
SI
SI
(
I
SI
SI
( Y
E
D
SY
Figure 36: Wet and Dry Contact Input Wiring Examples
62 1601-0651
2.22 OUTPUT RELAYS

The locations of the output relays have a fixed assignment for the platform called the master identifier. I/O options
that include inputs occupy the fixed assigned output locations so in these cases the relay assignment maps to the
master identifier.
The output relays for the 8 Series 845 relay are fully programmable, and can be assigned in the transformer
breakers menu for breaker tripping or closing. The output relays assigned for breaker closing, are automatically
excluded from the menus for output selection for the rest of the elements.
The critical failure output relay is reserved as Relay_8 and it is omitted and is not programmable.
Slots F, G, H Terminal Master Identifier Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, A
Terminal# SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal# SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H
1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17 1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17
13 RELAY_5 RELAY_13 RELAY_21 13 Digital In_1 Digital In_8 Digital In_15
20 RELAY_7 RELAY_15 RELAY_23 20 Common Common Common
21 RELAY_7 RELAY_15 RELAY_23 21 +24V +24V +24V
1601-0651 63
Slots F, G, H Terminal Master Identifier Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, A

Slots F, G, H with I/O options M, L, F Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, L, A

1 RELAY_1 Analog Out_1 Digital In_8 1 RELAY_1 Analog Out_1 RELAY_9
3 Reserved Analog Out_3 Digital In_10 3 RELAY_1 Analog Out_3 RELAY_9
6 Reserved Analog Out_6 Digital In_13 6 RELAY_2 Analog Out_6 RELAY_10
8 RELAY_3 Return Digital In_15 8 RELAY_3 Return RELAY_11
9 Reserved Shield Digital In_16 9 RELAY_3 Shield RELAY_11
10 RELAY_4 Analog In_1 Digital In_17 10 RELAY_4 Analog In_1 RELAY_12
11 RELAY_4 Analog In_2 Common 11 RELAY_4 Analog In_2 RELAY_12
12 Reserved Analog In_3 +24V 12 RELAY_4 Analog In_3 RELAY_12
13 Digital In_1 Analog In_4 ARC FLASH 13 Digital In_1 Analog In_4 Digital In_8
Sensor 1 Sensor 2
14 Digital In_2 Return Sensor 3 Sensor 4 14 Digital In_2 Return Digital In_9
15 Digital In_3 Shield 15 Digital In_3 Shield Digital In_10
16 Digital In_4 Ohms Input + 16 Digital In_4 Ohms Input + Digital In_11
17 Digital In_5 Ohms Input - 17 Digital In_5 Ohms Input - Digital In_12
18 Digital In_6 Shield 18 Digital In_6 Shield Digital In_13
19 Digital In_7 RTD_Hot 19 Digital In_7 RTD_Hot Digital In_14
20 Common RTD_Comp 20 Common RTD_Comp Common
21 +24V RTD_Return 21 +24V RTD_Return +24V
22 RELAY_8 Shield 22 RELAY_8 Shield RELAY_16
23 RELAY_8 Reserved 23 RELAY_8 Reserved RELAY_16
24 RELAY_8 Reserved 24 RELAY_8 Reserved RELAY_16
Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, F Slots F, G, H with I/O options A, N, F

Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal # SLOT F SLOT H
1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 Digital In_15 1 RELAY_1 Digital In_8
64 1601-0651
Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, F Slots F, G, H with I/O options A, N, F

Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal # SLOT F SLOT H
11 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 Common 11 RELAY_4 Common
12 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 +24V 12 RELAY_4 +24V
13 Digital In_1 Digital In_8 ARC FLASH 13 Digital In_1 ARC FLASH
Sensor 1 Sensor 1 Sensor
14 Digital In_2 Digital In_9 Sensor 2 14 Digital In_2 2 Sensor 3
15 Digital In_3 Digital In_10 Sensor 3 15 Digital In_3 Sensor 4
Sensor 4
16 Digital In_4 Digital In_11 16 Digital In_4
20 Common Common 20 Common
21 +24V +24V 21 +24V
22 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 22 RELAY_8
1601-0651 65
2.23 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to thirty-two relays can be daisy-chained together on a communication
channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added.
Commercially available repeaters can also be used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable
should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms and total wire length should not exceed 1,200 meters (4,000
ft).
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge
protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an
opto-coupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling.

F 4;9 E
% 5'G H

5 5'G (

G

/
II J
'( )*+), J
5'G H
4;9 / 5'G (
47<=+>?@@< 1&2 AB3, ?CD 1 C09

%& '( )*+),

,
- .
/ 0
1&22 3 45222 6789 F 4;9
5'G H
5'G (

:
!"#$
Figure 37: RS485 wiring diagram
Caution:
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded at
the master end. Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed
communications.
The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed, either
internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in the figure above, to avoid ground loops.
Correct polarity is also essential. The relays must be wired with all the positive (+) terminals connected together and
all the negative (–) terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or
stub connected configurations. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm
¼ watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals. Some systems allow the
66 1601-0651
shield (drain wire) to be used as a common wire and to connect directly to the COM terminal; others function
correctly only if the common wire is connected to the COM terminal, but insulated from the shield. Observing these
guidelines ensure a reliable communication system immune to system transients.
1601-0651 67
2.24 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be synchronized among connected
devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG-B time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either
DC level shift or amplitude modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain
the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
! "#
$%& '())*'+,()
(%+,()-.
<=<>?@
A<BC DEFC
>CGC=HAE= 3 01 /
IJK LMNOP QR
STUVNPWJX TQJWVSPXJ 4 02
LNYZSV KSZ [X WLXJ\
56275189:;0

Figure 38: IRIG-B connection
68 1601-0651
2.25 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

The following illustrates the electrical wiring of the Draw out unit.
1601-0651 69
-./0123.45.
! "#$ %& '(!)!( %= '(!)!( ! "#$

; <
*+$,
: :
*+$, ' 78 87
9 9
*+$, " 78 78
6 6
788 9: ;<=<>? <>
<>7:=@A:<B>
CD>@DE

'()*()+
'()*()+
+,-.)*/*
+,-.)*/*
" )/.0,12
)/.0,12
©®¯¬©°
3// +,-.)*
¨©ª«¬
()4.0 '(,()+ ()
' ()30,.50(-)
61).12
]g ]^f ]^^ ]ê ]^d àb àc ]^_ z{ z| z} z~ z z z z NO NP NQ

R R Q Q P P S S XR Y XQ Y XP Y X h Y XR Y XQ Y XP Y X h Y ¸

·
¶
¶
WT[Y²

±[\
opqrs q opqrs t opqrs u opqrs q opqrs t opqrs u ijklmn µ

TU VW XYZ[ \ [Y XYZ[ \ vww xvy ´ x-w yvxx./
§ 10
- ¡ yv0
¢£¤¤¥ ¢££¦¤¢£
ÆÇÈ ¼½B 2^ É -.¹º »¼ ½¾.
%& '(!)!( 7898:;< 86=>: ½
ÆÇÎ ¼½º þûJýKýþLM 2e ¿ÀÁÂ Ê Ë¹.ËÌ¹-
7898:;< 86=>: ¹ ÃÄÁÅ
ÆÇÈ 2d ÆÇÈ
¼½A 7898:;< 86=>: B
%= '(!)!( ÆÇÎ ¼½@
7898:;< 86=>: º 2F É -.¹º »Í ½¾.
¼½? 7898:;< 86=>: A

2I ¿ÀÁÂ Ê Ë¹.ËÌ¹-
þûJýKýþLM ÃÄÁÅ
¼½E 7898:;< 86=>: @ 2_ ÆÇÈ
¼½D 7898:;< 86=>: ?

2H
¼¹C 345546
®©¯« * ¬«°+ ®³
þûJýKýþLM 2G
¼¹½ ¸¹º »
! ¨¬© "#³« ©# ° $©®#¯©¬# ®%
U

2g , "©°¯%«
±²
¶ 2^f +«« #®+¯¬*¯#©® $ ®*°
ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ Ö ]Yjh [\]\^_` \abc^ j þûJýKýþLM 2^^ &©¬ ³«¯#° + ©® ª# ¬# ®%
ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ × ]Yjg [\]\^_` \abc^ i 2ê

ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ Ø ]Yjf [\]\^_` \abc^ h

X XVU 2ee vxv N y
ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ Ù ]Yje [\]\^_` \abc^ g

2VXU[ 2ed yä- -ä
ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ Ú ]Yjd [\]\^_` \abc^ f !" #$ %&!'( w. x-w
UV 2eF
ÏÐÑ ÒÓÔÕÓÔ Û ]Yjk [\]\^_` \abc^ e

]YjZ [\]\^_` \abc^ d
'"Ü Ü!"ÝÜ!( ]Yiq noppoa
]Yij lig m W©ª^ É ËÞ315 »¼ ½¾.
þûJýKýþLM å W©ªe ßàáâã Ê Ë¹.ËÌ¹-
ÆÇÎ ÃÄÁÅ
Yj [\]\^_` \abc^ j W©ªd
Yi [\]\^_` \abc^ i W©ªF É ËÞ315 »Í ½¾.
W©ªI ßàáâã Ê Ë¹.ËÌ¹-
Yh [\]\^_` \abc^ h æçèéêéæëì íî ÃÄÁÅ
Yg W©ª_ ÆÇÎ
[\]\^_` \abc^ g
Yf [\]\^_` \abc^ f W©ªH
Ye [\]\^_` \abc^ e

æçèéêéæëì íí W©ªG
Yd [\]\^_` \abc^ d
W©ªg

Yk [\]\^_` \abc^ k

W ©ª^f
YZ ¶
[\]\^_` \abc^ Z
æçèéêéæëì íï W ©ª^^
Yjq [\]\^_` \abc^ jq
Yjj noppoa W ©ªê
Yji lig m r «s tuvz wxtyz { W©ªee
§ ¬®¥ ¬ ¥¯¥¬§¥°§£ ¦ £± § ² ¬ ¦¬ ¬®§ æçèéêéæëì íð W ©ªed
nYj |\}~ \abc^ j W ©ªeF
nYi |\}~ \abc^ i !" $ %&!'# !"%!(
nYh |\}~ \abc^ h µ
nYg |\}~ \abc^ g
Yo^ }j
^[ j
nopb }i ¬¯³
nj Yo^ ^[ ji ~^ca }h
^[ d
ni nopb Yo^ }g
^[ i ¬¯³
nh ~^ca ^[ dk nopb }f
ng Yo^ Yo^ }e
^[ k ^[ h
nf nopb nopb }d
ne Yo^ ^[ hg ~^ca }k
^[ Z
nd nopb Y\~`[ }Z
nk ~^ca ^[ Zjq Yo^ }jq
^[ g
nZ Y\~`[ nopb }jj
njq Yo^ Yo^ }ji
^[ jq ^[ f
njj nopb nopb }jh
nji Yo^ s tuv tuv wxt yz{ ^[ fe ~^ca }jg
^[ jj
njh nopb Yo^ }jf
¡ ¢£ ¤ ¥ ¦£§§ ^[ e
njg ~^ca nopb }je
Z\TYVU njf Yo^ Y\~`[ }jd
^[ ji
TÚZ[ nje nopb ~~m~[ }jk
njd Y\~`[
«¯)«¬®«¯ njk ~~m~[
tqu oqs spss o r
*+,
¨áàÜ FàÞáâ RSTU W
òóóôõöò÷ôø üúóý çèééêëìçíîìèëï
ùúû ÇÈÉÇÊËÇÈ
¾¿ÀÁÂÃÄÅÆÆÁÂ
ÇÈÉÇÊËÇÈ
ÄÅÆÆÁÂ æãÃÂþÿ
rs tuv wxt yz{
Âþÿ æãÃÂþÿ
Z\TYVU RSTU V
TÚZ[ ÛÜÝÞß FàÞáâ øùúúûüýøþÿýùü ÏÐÑÐÏÒÐÓ ÌÍÎ O ÌPÍ NQI
IRST
ULO
åæÀ ÍÎÍHIJ IKLMKL ÍÎÍHIJ NÎMKL ÎMKL
N
ãäÆÁ À ó óôõö÷
e j e j j e j s s
a a n a p p
· · ñ
V W X Y Z [ \ d bh
i V W X Y d bh
i
bh
i c
k m d bh
i r
o
r
o
¶ ¶ p p
µ X
c c k c q q
µ X X X X X X X b
a
g
f X X X X b
a
g
f X ñ g
f
g
l b
a
g
f p
o
p
o
³Ô ³ð ³ñ ³ Ø ³ Ù ³ò ³× ³Ö ³´ ³ ÔÕ ]V ]W ]X ]Y ]Z ][ ]\ ]^ ]_ ]V` ]VV ]VW ]VX ]VY ]VZ ]V[ ]V\ ]V^ ]V_ ]W` ]WV]WW]WX ]WY EFGH IGJKL MK NEHHGNKOEH
N yy x
§¢ ¥ ¥¡°¬£±

¬¬± £¡£¥£
¬G ¡
¬±
¢¥°§£ ¬£§¤ °£ ²±¤£¤
¥ §¢¢¡£ £±¤ ±§F
>? >@A >@@ >@B >@C >@D
¥±F ¡£¥£¤ ¥±F ¡£¥£¤

¡£££¤ ¥±¥§² ¡£££¤ ¥±¥§²
¥¥¡££
¥¥¡££ ¬±
Figure 39: Typical Wiring for a 2-Winding Transformer with VTs on HV Side (892841A4)
70 1601-0651
JKLMKLN JKLMKLN
NOPQLMRM NOPQLMRM
LRQSOTU LRQSOTU
VRR NOPQLM
KLWQS JKOKLN KL
KLVSOQXSKPL
YTLQTU

Z[\]^\ Z[\]^ _ Z[\]^ ` Z[\]^\ Z[\]^ _ Z[\]^ `

}w
|{
zyu
uwxuv }
t yx
w| ¡¢ £¤ ¥¤ ¦§
abc def {w £¨ ©ª«§ ¬« ««®
mbn ijfodfghihpqdigjk
prdpsil | ¯¡ ª ®
¢ «¢¬«
° §« ¢ ±««®
}w
|{
zyu
uwxuv
t
}
w}| xy
{uz
xyuw |w{
w|
tuv

~
~

!%#$ 0/.- !%#$ /0-. /0-. 2 54 !%#$ /0-. *&)'' *&)''
"! ,+ "! ,+ ,+ 1, 13 "! ,+ '(& '(&

A@D @6C 69EG:7@

C?;G@G?7 @:9C:=6@<=:
GI ?F9;
G7C<@
D6EA: ;FG:A> @? E: B=?<7>:>
6@ CADHD?9C<@:= :7> ?7A8
678 9:6;<=:> ?=
9:@:=:> 676A?B 678 9:6;<=:> ?=
C6=69:@:= ?<@C<@; 9:@:=:>676A?B
C6=69:@:= G7C<@;
²³´²µ¶·¶¸¹º»
Figure 40: Typical Wiring for a 2-Winding Transformer without VTs (892843A3)
1601-0651 71
ËÌÍÎÏÐÑÌÒÓÌ
ÛÜ ÝÞßàáßÞ ¸¹º»¼ ½¾¿
Ú
Ø
¸¹º»¼ ½¾¿ ÖÕ
ÀÁ ÂÃÄÅÆÄÃ ×
¸ÇÈ¿É º Ù ÕÖ
Ø Ô
¸ÇÈ¿É Ê ÖÕ
¸ÇÈ¿É ½
×
ÖÕ Û ÝÞßàáßÞ ¸¹º»¼ ½¾¿
Ô Ø
ÖÕ
ð
± µ

×
ÕÖ
¡¢£ ¤¥
ï
ÒÒ² Ô
± ´ µ
± ´ µ
± ´ µ µ´´ µ´´
µ´´ Ò² Ò²
½
Ò²
º QMRSPMT
µ´ LMNOP

Ê
ïÒÒ²
/0 /1 /2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /7 ! " # $ % & ~ ~ ~~ ~~~ ~ ÒÓ ÒÔ ÒÕ
? î
> æåä ãéêåè åíìé
¤ö ¤ö ¤õ ¤õ ¤ô ¤ô ¤÷ ¤÷ ü ö ý üõ ý ü ô ý ü ý ü ö ý üõ ý ü ô ý ü ý ü ö ý üõ ý ü ô ý ü ý
=< ã çæ ë û.øÿýV
Uÿ
¤øù¥úû£ üýþÿ¥
'()*+,
-ÿ..£ý¥ üýþÿ¥

; ± ²³
89:; K µ´
Ë=>?@AB ACD?B?AE= 89:; < ´
@FGHA@HI @FGGJ@H?FG
[\ Ê]¼º^¼] MNP Q ËÌ@A BC DEÌ
MNO ]^Æ »¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ ^ ¶
FGHI R S@ÌST@Ë
MNP ]^[ »¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ Z ÎÏÐÑ 0 ¶
MNP JKHL
[_ Ê]¼º^¼] MNO ]^Å »¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ Æ éèê ¤ ¶
Q SUÑÏÓ BC DEÌ
MNP ]^Ä »¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ [ ëì ¶Ê
VWXYZ R S@ÌST@Ë
MNO JKHL
í
[ Ê]¼º^¼] MNO ]^Ã
]^É
»¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ Å
»¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ Ä ïî
íé ·µ¶ ÎÏÐÑ 1
¤ ¶
¶Í
³´²
]^È »¼½¼¾¿À ¼ºÁÂ¾ Ã íðñ
¶Ì
]ZÇ ·¸¹¹¸º
°¯ ÎÏÐÑ 2 ¶Ë ¸¹º»¼½¾¿À
ÅÊ ËÁ¹ÌÍÉ»Á»Â½ÃÄ
Î¹ÍÂ ÅÆ ÇÆ È½¸É
Ï¹¸Íº¹ÁÍ¸Ð
Ôea ÕÖ×ÚÛ×ÞÕ×ØÙÚÕÙßàÚßØÛÜáÕßâÚÝ àb ]Z^ YZ[ \
±¯° ¶
ÑÃÌ¹Âº½Ð»À Ä»» Í¸ÄºÁ¾ÎºÍ¹¸
àb cdefde g
Ú Öçå ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ç
® ¶
Ï½¸¾½Â Ò¹Á É»º½ÍÂÄ ¹¸ ÓÍÁÍ¸Ð
àb cdefde h
Ú Öçä ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ æ
ÎÏÐÑ 3 ¶
àb cdefde i
Ú Öçã ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ å èé ¶
àb cdefde j
Ú Öçâ ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ä êë -.ü¥ü-úù ¶ Ò
q q
àb cdefde k
Ú Öçá ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ã
ìí
ïî
¶úüùÿ.£ ¶ ± ±
àb cdefde l
Ú Öçò ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ â íé
£¤¥¦ §¨ ©ª¥«¬ .£ùú¢ ¶ Ê ² ±
Ê½m m¼½nm¼]

Ú Öç× ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ á íð

Ú Öæø õö÷÷öÞ
ñ

Ú Öæç óæä ô 01 Q ËÌ@A Bo DEÌ
r
û
01 FGHI R S@ÌST@Ë
ÎÏÐÑ
¤
û
û 01 MNP JKHL
Öç
Öæ
ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ç
û 01Ê FGHI Q ËÌ@A Bp DEÌ
ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ æ
01Í R S@ÌST@Ë
·µ¶ stuvwvsxyz{ ¤ MNP JKHL
Öå ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ å û
Öä ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ä û 01
³´² 01Ì
èé
Öã ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ã êë û
Öâ ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ â ìí
°¯ stuvwvsxyzz û 01Ë
Öá ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ á ïî
éí ±¯° û 01
Öò ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ò ðí
ñ ® û 01
Ö× ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ ×
stuvwvsxyz| û 01
Öçø ØÙÚÙÛÜÝ ÙÞßàÛ çø
û 01
Öçç
Öçæ
õö÷÷öÞ
óæä ô 89:; ù : 2ú ûü:ý þ:ÿ;û: 9 û 01
Ù ÙÞßàÛ ç /#% ( 34#5-3 -6-3/-7/+ .(+8 /#% 9 3 .3%( 34#5/ stuvwvsxyz} û 01
õÖç
õÖæ Ù ÙÞßàÛ æ £¤¥¦ ¨ ©ª¥«§ ¥¦©¥¬¤ û 01 Ê
õÖå Ù ÙÞßàÛ å
õÖä Ù ÙÞßàÛ ä
ÖöÛ ç
ÛØ ç õö÷ß æ PS :
õç ÖöÛ
ÛØ á ÛØ çæ ÛàÞ å
ÖöÛ ä
õæ
õå
õö÷ß

Ûà Þ ÛØ áò ÛØ æ õö÷ß ã PS :
ÖöÛ â
õä
õã
ÖöÛ
õö÷ß
ÛØ ò ÛØ å õö÷ß á
õâ ÖöÛ
ÛØ × ÛØ åä ÛàÞ ò
õá õö÷ß ÖÙÝØ ×
õò
Ûà Þ ÛØ ×çø ÛØ ä ÖöÛ çø
õ×
ÖÙ ÝØ õö÷ß çç
ÖöÛ çæ
õçø
õçç
ÖöÛ
õö÷ß
ÛØ çø ÛØ ã õö÷ß çå
õçæ ÖöÛ
ÛØ çç 89:; : ú ûü:ý : ûü:ý8 þ:ÿ;û: 9 ÛØ ãâ ÛàÞ çä
ÖöÛ çã
õçå
õçä
õö÷ß

Ûà Þ !""#$% &' #() *#""+$ $%,- .+// ÛØ â õö÷ß çâ
õçã ÖöÛ
ÛØ çæ ÖÙÝØ çá
þ£. øýúù
-øjþÿ¥£. õçâ õö÷ß ôØ çò
õçá
ÖÙ ÝØ
OSOPROS
¡ ¢
õçò
ô Ø
ª ê ¤¥¦§ ©

®¯° ¦§¨ ©ª«¬®¯ª°±ª ²ª¯³±´³µ¯¬ ¶·³±°

klmmnopkqrplos

£ «¬
«¬ £ «¬ 89:; ùú ûü:ý9 þ:ÿ;û: 9
þ£. øýúù ¤¥¦§ ¨
-øjþÿ¥£. ê |}~~|} bc _à
¢£
¡ w wxyz{
$ *) :9 $< ?> /+ :9 314 314
)*(

"#! '(& 786 6;"#! ;='& -., 876 2101 2101
% % 5 + 5 0 0
Wd Wt Wu W h W i Wv Wg Wf WX W de éêëì íëîïð ñï òéììëòïóéì
Ò
OPQ PRS \]^_àb

STUVPVTW b`]c`d\bed`
VX TYZU
VWS[P
tuvwx yz{xw| }~ vx ~|x|
u} wtt~ }x x| ~w
âã âäå âää âäæ âäç âäè
fgh ijfklmjn om @AB CD@EFGDH IG

ijpjmjn fgfqor CDJDGDH @A@KIL
sfmfijpjm olpslpk M@G@CDJDG NAMFJE
Figure 41: Typical Wiring for a 3-Winding Transformer (892789A4)
72 1601-0651
CHAPTER 3
INTERFACES
Chapter 3 - Interfaces
74 1601-0651

Chapter Overview 75
First access 76
Front panel options 77
Software Interface 99
1601-0651 75
3.2 FIRST ACCESS

There are two methods of interfacing with the relay.
● Using the relay keypad and display.
● Using the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods using both of these methods.
When first accessing the relay, log in as Administrator either through the front panel or through EnerVista D&I Setup
software connected serially (so that no IP address is required). Use the default password (the default password is
0).
Basic Security
If the relay is in the commissioning phase and you want to bypass authentication, switch the SETPOINT ACCESS
setting on or assign it to a contact input. Once the setting is on, you have complete administrator access from the
front panel. If a contact input is chosen, the access is also conditional on the activation of the respective contact
input.
For more information on setpoint access and other security features available with basic security, refer to Basic
Security.
CyberSentry
If logging in through EnerVista D&I Setup software, choose Device authentication and login as Administrator.
Note:
If the relay is in the commissioning phase, to bypass authentication use the setpoint access feature to gain administrative
access to the front panel in the same way as with basic security.
76 1601-0651
3.3 FRONT PANEL OPTIONS

Relays from hardware version C (firmware version 4 onwards) can be delivered with following different front panels:
● The 10-pushbutton membrane faceplate
● The 3-pushbutton membrane faceplate
The front panels provide menu navigation through a selection of navigation pushbuttons and a high quality graphical
display. The 3-button faceplate includes 3 programmable function pushbuttons and 17 programmable LEDs.
The 10-Pushbutton Membrane faceplate includes 10 programmable function pushbuttons for a total of 22
programmable LEDs.
The front panel provides menu navigation through a selection of navigation pushbuttons and a high quality graphical
display. A USB type B port allows connection to a PC with EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
The following figures show the different options.
Note:
These figures are representative only. They may not reflect the exact model that this manual describes.
Figure 42: 3-pushbutton membrane front panel
1601-0651 77
Figure 43: 10-pushbutton membrane front panel
3.3.1 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY PAGES

The front panel liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under various lighting conditions. When the keypad and
display are not being used and there are no active Targets, the Home screen with system information is displayed
after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Escape key during the display of the default message, returns
the display to the previous display screen. Any Trip, Alarm, or Pickup operation causing a new active Target is
displayed immediately, automatically overriding the Home screen.
78 1601-0651
3.3.1.1 MENU HIERARCHY
B!'(
!" %
2 %3
# $
% P %%
[ %$
%
1 %
) %
) %
%
%

\%
%
3 P
P %
&'( %
P%\
./'0 ,
)% P%
* % 1
) + O
%%
]^_àbcd e^fbcghij
+% 2 %3
$ 3 %
# 456785 97:;<= >5?@A5
,
% 1 -
# % klmnnmop
%-
CDEFGHDIJKL MINFE
[ %$
1P
QRS TUVWXYXZ
[%
,
Figure 44: Menu hierarchy
1601-0651 79
Figure 45: Typical paging operation from the Main Menu
3.3.1.2 WORKING WITH GRAPHICAL DISPLAY PAGES

The display contains five main menu items labeled Targets, Status, Metering, Setpoints, and Records located at the
bottom of the screen. Choosing each main menu item displays the corresponding sub-menu.
80 1601-0651
Figure 46: Typical paging
There are two ways of navigating through the menu:

● using the pushbuttons corresponding to the soft tabs from the screen
● by selecting the item from the list of items on the screen using the Up and Down pushbuttons to move the
yellow highlighted line, and pressing the Enter pushbutton.
1601-0651 81

Figure 47: Tab Pushbuttons
The tab pushbuttons are used to enter the menu corresponding to the label on the tabs. If more than 5 tabs exist,
the first and the last tab are labeled with arrows to allow you to scroll to the other tabs.

Figure 48: Keypad Pushbuttons
Each Keypad pushbutton serves the following function:

● The Home pushbutton is used to display the home screen, and all screens defined under the Front Panel/
Screens menu as default screens.
● The Help pushbutton is used to provide the Modbus address corresponding to the present location when in
the Actual Values menu.
● The Enter pushbutton has a dual function. It is used to display a sub-menu when an item is highlighted. It is
also used to save the desired value for any selected setpoint.
● The Up, and Down pushbuttons are used to select/highlight an item from a menu, as well as select a value
from the list of values for a chosen item.
82 1601-0651
● The Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons on the membrane faceplate are used to move the yellow
highlight. These pushbuttons are also used on special screens to navigate to multiple objects.
● The Escape pushbutton is used to display the previous menu. This pushbutton can also be used to cancel a
setpoint change.
● The Reset pushbutton clears all latched LED indications, target messages, and latched output relays,
providing the conditions causing these events are not present.
To change (or view) an item on (or from) the menus:

● Use the pushbuttons that correspond to the tabs (Targets, Status, Metering, Setpoints, Records) on the
screen to select a menu.
● Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to highlight an item.
● Press Enter to view a list of values for the chosen item. (Some items are view-only.)
● Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to highlight a value.
● Press Enter to assign the highlighted value to the item.
3.3.1.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
BKR1 LED setting for Breaker symbol color configuration

In all devices the Breaker symbol color is configurable as per the color scheme setting in Setpoints > Device >
Front Panel > Display Properties > Color Scheme.
Single Line Diagram for 845 and Breaker/Transformer status color

The relay has a single line diagram (SLD) that represents the power system. The single line diagram provided is
pre-configured to show:
● Breaker status
● AC input connection
● Rated Winding voltage
Accompanying the single line diagram are typical metered values associated with the power system.
The single line diagram is configured as the default menu but this can be changed under Setpoints > Device >
Front Panel > Default Screen.
1601-0651 83
Figure 49: SLD and typical metered values screen
The breaker status icon changes state according to the breaker status input and the color scheme setting
(Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display Properties > Color Scheme) to show Breaker status.
The winding voltage setting for each breaker is displayed on the associated branch. The winding configuration icon
will display either a 2-winding or 3-winding transformer based on the order code.
The transformer status is indicated in the top right of the display.
When breaker detection Connected/Disconnected (Racked-In/Racked-Out) is configured, the symbols change with
respect to the Connected/Disconnected state of the breaker. The following table further illustrates this with an
example of the switching device Close state when the color scheme is set to Green (Open).
84 1601-0651
*The relay considers the breaker state Connected when detection of the Connected/Disconnected state of the
breaker is not configured. Connected/Disconnected detection is not configured when setpoint Connected (under
Setpoints > System > Breaker) is set to Off.
The parameters displayed in the Front panel screen example are as follows for a 2-Winding Transformer with VT:
Parameter Input for the value
W1 Ia Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ia
W1 Ib Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ib
W1 Ic Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ic
W2 Ia Metering\ CT Bank 2 -K1\ K1 Ia
W2 Ib Metering\ CT Bank 2 -K1\ K1 Ib
W2 Ic Metering\ CT Bank 2 -K1\ K1 Ic
P: Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 Real
Q: Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 Reactive
PF Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 PF
The parameters displayed in the Front panel screen example are as follows for a 2-Winding Transformer without VT:
P: Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 Real
Q: Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 Reactive
PF Metering\ Power 1\ Pwr1 PF
The parameters displayed in the Front panel screen example are as follows for 3-Winding Transformer:
W1 Ia Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ia
1601-0651 85
W1 Ib Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ib

W1 Ic Metering\ CT Bank 1 -J1\ J1 Ic
3.3.2 THREE-PUSHBUTTON FRONT PANEL LEDS
Note:
The rugged front panel is is not available for all models. See the order codes for details
Front panel LED details:

● Number of LEDs: 17
● Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand
● Reset mode: self-reset or latched
The front panel provides two columns of 7 LED indicators each, and 3 LED pushbutton indicators. The IN-SERVICE
(LED 1) indicator from the first LED column is a non-programmable LED. LED 3 in the first LED column is
programmable and defaulted to PICKUP. The bottom 3 LED indicators from the first column, and the 7 LED
indicators from the second LED column are fully programmable. The indicators TRIP (LED 2), and ALARM (LED 3),
are also programmable, and can be triggered by either a selection of FlexLogic operand assigned in their own
menu, or by the operation of any protection, control or monitoring element with function selected as Trip, Alarm,
or Latched Alarm.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or Target Message once the condition has been cleared
(latched conditions can also be reset via the RESETTING menu).
86 1601-0651

Figure 50: LED numbering
Some status indicators are common while some are feature specific which depend on the availability in the order
code. The common status indicators in the first column are described below.
Status Indicator Description
IN SERVICE Green color = Relay powered up, passed self-test has been programmed, and ready to serve.
This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal
systems are OK, and that the device has been programmed.
Red color = Relay failed self test, has not been programmed, or out of service.
TRIP This LED indicates that the element selected to produce a trip has operated. This indicator
always latches; as such, a Reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated.
Latching of the indicator depends on the selected protection function. A Reset command must
be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
PICKUP This LED indicates that at least one element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
TEST MODE This LED indicates that the relay has been set into Test Mode.
MESSAGE This LED indicates the presence of Target Messages detected by the relay.
LOCAL MODE This LED indicates that the relay is operating in local mode.
Breaker status indication is based on the breaker’s 52a and 52b contacts. With both contacts wired to the relay and
configured, closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact and opened 52b contact. Vice-versa the
open breaker status is determined by opened 52a contact and closed 52b contact. If both 52a and 52b contacts are
open, due to a breaker being racked out from the switchgear, both the Breaker Open and Breaker Closed LED
Indicators will be off.
The Event Cause indicators in the first column are described as follows:
1601-0651 87
Events Cause LEDs are turned On or Off by protection elements that have their respective target settings selected
as either Self-Reset or Latched. If a protection element target setting has Self-Reset selected, then the
corresponding Event Cause LEDs remain On as long as the operate operand associated with the element remains
asserted. If a protection element target setting is Latched, then the corresponding Event Cause LEDs turn On
when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and will remain On until the RESET button on
the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
Default labels are shipped in the package of every product, together with custom templates. A custom LED template
is available for editing and printing. You can download the document GET-20035 from the website. The default
labels can be replaced by user-printed labels. Customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations
where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators.
3.3.3 TEN-PUSHBUTTON FRONT PANEL LEDS
Note:
The Ten-pushbutton front panel is only available for the 850. See the order codes for details.
Front panel LED details:

● Number of LEDs: 22 (LEDs 13 and 14 are not available)
● Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand
● Reset mode: self-reset or latched
The 10 Pushbutton-Membrane front panel provides one column of 12 multi-color LED indicators and 10 single-color
LED pushbutton indicators. The IN-SERVICE (LED 1) and the PICKUP (LED 4) indicators from the first LED column
are non-programmable LEDs. The indicators TRIP (LED 2), and ALARM (LED 3) are programmable, and can be
triggered by either a selection of FlexLogic operand assigned in their own menu, or by the operation of any
protection, control or monitoring element with function selected as Trip, Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or Target Message once the condition has been cleared
(latched conditions can also be reset via the RESETTING menu).
88 1601-0651
Figure 51: LED numbering
1601-0651 89
Figure 52: Typical LED Indicator Panel
Some status indicators are common while some are feature specific which is dependent upon the order code. The
common status indicators in the first column are described below.
Status Indicator Description
IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is present, all monitored inputs, outputs, and
internal systems are OK, and that the device is programmed.
TRIP This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This
indicator always latches so a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be
reset.
ALARM This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated.
Latching of the indicator depends on the selected protection function. The Reset
command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
PICKUP This LED indicates that at least one element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
TEST MODE This LED indicates that the relay has been set into Test Mode.
MESSAGE This LED indicates the presence of Target Messages detected by the relay.
PHASE A FAULT This LED indicates that phase A of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
PHASE B FAULT This LED indicates that phase B of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
PHASE C FAULT This LED indicates that phase C of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
GROUND FAULT This LED indicates that the Ground Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
50P INST OC This LED indicates that the Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
90 1601-0651
27 PHASE UV This LED indicates that the Phase Undervoltage 1 function has operated.
(Order Code without Autoreclose)
LOCKOUT This LED indicates that the Autoreclose function has reached the lockout stage.
(Order Code with Autoreclose)
3.3.4 HOME SCREEN ICONS

The next figure shows the icons available on the front screen. For descriptions of these screen icons see the
following table.
Figure 53: Home Screen Icons
Icon Type Description of Icon

Security Access User not logged in - green and locked
User logged in - Icon is red and unlocked
Setpoint Group Identifies the active setpoint group
Active Target When the target auto navigation setting is disabled, the message LED and the Active Target
icon are the only indication of active target messages.
Breaker Health The Breaker Health icon is blue when the setting for the breaker health function is not
disabled. When the setting is disabled the icon is gray.
Settings Save Indicates that a setting is being saved on the relay (i.e., when changing one of relay settings).
Icon is ON (relay is saving to flash memory) Icon is OFF (relay is not saving to flash memory)
Local Mode Indicates that Local Mode is active. During Local Mode, the control for the breakers and
disconnect switches can be performed only by the relay front panel.
Note:
The security icon only represents the security access level through the front panel.
Do not remove power from the relay whenever the Settings Save icon is ON. When power is removed the data being saved
can also be lost.
1601-0651 91
3.3.5 RELAY MESSAGES
3.3.5.1 TARGET MESSAGES

Targets are messages displayed on the screen when any change of state of protection, control, monitoring, or digital
signal takes place. Depending on the model, targets for each element are enabled, or latched by default. You can
disable targets for any particular element if desired.
Target Messages are displayed in order of their activation, whereas in cases of simultaneous activation, they are
displayed in the order outlined below (from highest to lowest priority):
1. Targets generated by pressing programmable pushbutton
2. Targets generated by Contact inputs
3. Targets generated by Protection, Control and Monitoring elements
4. Targets generated by communications.
In cases where the Pickup and Operate flags from an element are detected at the same time, the Pickup flag is not
displayed. The Operate flag is displayed instead.
LED #6, from the first column of LEDs, is factory configured to be triggered by the FlexLogic operand ANY
TARGET, to indicate the presence of at least one target message. This LED is labeled as MESSAGE. The LED can
be programmed to any other FlexLogic operand by choice.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
The timeout applies to every screen apart from the default screen. Examples include viewing, metering, or
navigating to a screen with setting, etc. If no further navigation is performed, no pushbutton is touched, and/or no
target is initiated for the time specified in the message timeout setpoint, the display goes back to the default screen
(the metering summary screen).
The target message overrides the message timeout. The message timeout starts timing after each target message,
and if no more activity is recorded for the specified time, the display goes back to the default screen.
Pressing a programmable pushbutton activates a new screen with a Target Message corresponding to the
programmed pushbutton action. The pushbutton Target Message is displayed for 10 seconds then defaults to the
screen that was displayed before pressing the pushbutton. The pushbutton Target Message is recorded in the list
with other generated Target Messages.
Target Messages can be cleared either by pressing the pushbutton corresponding to the CLEAR tab, or by initiating
a RESET command. The CLEAR command clears only the Target Messages, while initiating a RESET clears not
only the Target Messages, but also any latched LEDs and output relays.
3.3.5.2 SELF-TEST ERRORS

The relay performs self-diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to
ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating
either a minor or major problem. Minor errors indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection
and control functionality of the relay. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Caution:
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
92 1601-0651
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay does the following:

● Displays a detailed description of the error on the relay display as a target message
● Records the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder
● Flashes the ALARM LED
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● De-energize the relay assigned under setting Major Self-Test Relay if the relay is programmed for failsafe
operation or energized if programed for non-failsafe operation.
● De-energize all output relays
● Turn off the IN SERVICE LED
● Flash the TRIP LED
● Assert the Self-Test Trip OP FlexLogic operand
● Display Major Self-test error with the error code as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder
When Alarm is selected as a function, upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● Flash the ALARM LED.
● Assert Self-Test Alarm OP FlexLogic operand.
● Display Major Self-test error as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Under both conditions, the targets cannot be cleared if the error is still active.
Figure 54: Minor Errors
1601-0651 93
Figure 55: Major Errors
94 1601-0651
Minor self-test errors

Minor Self-test Error Description of Problem Frequency of Test What to Do
Message1
Order Code Error Hardware doesn't match order Every 1 second
code
CPU S/N Invalid CPU card doesn’t have valid Every 1 second
data to match the order code.
Slot “$” IO S/N Invalid2 IO card located in slot $ Every 1 second
doesn’t have valid data to
match the order code.
Comms S/N Invalid Comms card doesn’t have Every 1 second
valid data to match the order
code.
CPanel S/N Invalid Control Panel doesn’t have Every 1 second
code.
PSU S/N Invalid Power Supply Unit doesn’t Every 1 second
have valid data to match the
order code. If alert doesn’t self-reset then
contact factory. Otherwise
RTC Error The CPU cannot read the time Every 1 second
monitor re-occurrences as
from the real time clock
errors are detected and self-
Product Serial Invalid The product serial number Every 1 second reset
doesn’t match the product
type
Comm Alert #1 Every 1 second
Communication error between
CPU and Comms board
FLASH Error The permanent storage Every 1 second
memory has been corrupted
SPI Error Communication error between Every 1 second
CPU and LEDs, Keypad or
peripheral memory devices
Invalid MAC Address MAC address is not in the Every 1 second
product range
Calibration Error Unit has default calibration Boot-up and every 1 second
values
Clock Not Set Clock has the default time Every 1 second Set clock to current time
WiFi Default Settings SSID and Passphrase is the Every 1 second Set SSID and Passphrase
factory default
Link Error Primary3 Port 1 or Port 4 (depending on Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
order code) is not connected connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), and ensure master or
peer device is functioning. If
none of these apply, contact
the factory.
1601-0651 95

Message1
Link Error Secondary Port 5 is not connected Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
connected, check cable
the factory.
Traffic Error Primary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
Broadcast and Uni-cast traffic check network for
on port 1 or port 4 malfunctioning devices
Traffic Error Secondary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
on port 5 malfunctioning devices
Ambient Temperature >80C The ambient temperature Every 1 second Inspect mounting enclosure
surrounding the product has for unexpected heat sources
exceeded 80C (i.e loose primary cables) and
remove accordingly
Event Rate High Abnormally high amounts of Every 1 second Ensure settings are not set
events have been generated close to nominal ratings.
so the relay has stopped Ensure FlexLogic equations
logging to prevent further do not have impractical timing
issues for status events
IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has Every 1 second Ensure IRIG-B cable is
been detected connected, check cable
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver
is functioning, and check input
signal level (it may be less
than specification). If none of
these apply, contact the
factory.
CAN_1 Error Every 1 second
Version Mismatch CPU and Comms do not have Boot-up and Every 1 second Ensure that both the CPU and
the same revision on firmware Comms FW was uploaded
during the upgrade process
SelfTestFWUpdate The updating of the firmware Every 1 second Re-try uploading firmware. If
failed the upload doesn’t work a
second time contact factory
Remote CAN IO Mismatch RMIO card detection Every 1 second Check RRTD connections,
mismatch check if the RRTD
configuration is still valid,
Validate CANBUS IO.
1 Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures
2$ is the slot ID (i.e. F, G, H etc.)
3 To disable Link Error Primary target when not in use with SE order code, change IP address to 127.0.0.1
96 1601-0651
Major Self-test Error Latched Target Description of Frequency of Test What to do

Message Message Problem
Relay Not Ready No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
INSTALLATION setting whenever the settings and then set
indicates relay is not in PRODUCT SETUP the PRODUCT SETUP
a programmed state. INSTALLATION setting INSTALLATION setting
is altered. to Ready.
Major Self-Test (error Yes Unit hardware failure Every 1 second Contact the factory and
code) detected supply the failure code
as noted on the display.
Note:
When a total loss of power is present, the Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 8) is de-energized.
3.3.5.3 OUT OF SERVICE

When the relay is shipped from the factory, DEVICE IN SERVICE is set to Not Ready. The IN SERVICE LED will
be orange and the critical fail relay will be de-energized but this will not be classified as a major self-test. An out of
service event will be generated in the event recorder.
3.3.5.4 FLASH MESSAGES

Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response to pressing certain
keys. The factory default flash message time is 2 seconds.
3.3.6 LABEL REMOVAL

For versions up to 3.xx, the front panels are supplied with a label removal tool for removing the LED label and user-
programmable pushbutton label.
1601-0651 97
The following procedures describes how to use the label removal tool.
1. Bend the tabs of the tool upwards as shown in the image.
2. Slide the label removal tool under the LED label as shown in the next image. Make sure the bent tabs are
pointing away from the relay. Move the tool inside until the tabs enter the pocket.
3. Remove the tool with the LED label.

The following describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton label from the front panel.
1. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label as shown in the next image. Make sure
the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
Remove the tool and user-programmable pushbutton label as shown in image.
98 1601-0651
3.4 SOFTWARE INTERFACE
3.4.1 ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

Although you can enter settings manually using the control panel keys, you can also use a PC to download
setpoints through the communications port. EnerVista D&I Setup software is used to make this as convenient as
possible. With EnerVista D&I Setup software, it is possible to:
● Program and modify settings
● Load setting files from a computer
● Save setting files to a computer
● Read actual values
● Monitor status
● Read pre-trip data and event records
● Get help on any topic
● Upgrade the firmware
The software allows immediate access to all features with easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows
environment. This section provides the necessary information to install the software, upgrade the relay firmware,
and write and edit setting files.
The software can run without a relay connected to the computer. In this case, settings may be saved to a file for
future use. If a relay is connected to a PC and communications are enabled, you can configure the relay from the
setting screens. In addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual value
screens.
3.4.1.1 HARDWARE & SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

EnerVista D&I Setup software has the following system requirements:
● Dual-core processor
● Microsoft Windows 10 or higher; 32-bit or 64-bit.
● At least 1 GB of free hard disk space is available.
● At least 2 GB of RAM is installed.
● 1280 x 800 display screen
The EnerVista D&I Setup software can be installed from the GE Multilin website.
3.4.1.2 INSTALLING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

Use the following procedure to install EnerVista D&I Setup software using the EnerVista D&I Setup software
Launchpad application (found on the GE Multilin website).
1. Double-click the installation package and follow the instructions to install the software on the local PC.
2. When the installation is complete, start the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad application.
3. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
4. In the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
required Protection System. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release.
5. Click the Add Now button to list software items. EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad obtains the latest
installation software from the Web and automatically starts the installation process. A status window with a
progress bar is shown during the downloading process.
1601-0651 99
6. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the software is to be installed.
7. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files are installed in the directory indicated, the USB driver is
loaded into the computer, and the installation program automatically creates icons and adds the EnerVista
D&I Setup software to the Windows start menu.
8. The required device is added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad IED
Setup window.
If you are going to communicate from your computer to the relay using the USB port:
1. Connect the USB cable from your computer to the relay's USB port.
2. Launch EnerVista D&I Setup software from the LaunchPad. Then in EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series
setup software > Device Setup, select USB as the Interface type.
3. Select the Read Order Code button.
3.4.1.3 UPGRADING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

The latest software can be downloaded from the GE website.
After upgrading, check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does not display, try uninstalling
the software and reinstalling the new version.
3.4.2 CONNECTING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE TO THE RELAY
3.4.2.1 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE

The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel USB port of a relay.
Select USB and press the Connect button. Alternatively, Ethernet or WiFi (not all models) can be used as the
interface.
When connected, a new site called Quick Connect appears in the Site List window.
The Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for communications through whichever
interface has been chosen.
3.4.2.2 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relevant Ethernet port.
Note:
The relay supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.
1. Install and start the latest version of the software (available from the GE Multilin Website). See the previous
section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a
new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of the site can also be
entered. In this example, we will use Substation 1 as the site name.
4. The new site appears in the upper-left list.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
100 1601-0651
6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field, and a description (optional).
7. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must
be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
8. Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the relay (from the Setpoints >
Device > Communications menu).
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the relay and upload the order code. If a communications
error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window
(or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista D&I Setup software window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications.
3.4.2.3 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, communications with the relay can be
initiated.
1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the + box to list the available devices
for the given site.
2. The required device trees can be expanded by clicking the + box. The following list of headers is shown for
each device:
○ Device Definition
○ Status
○ Metering
○ Quick Setup
○ Setpoints
○ Records
○ Maintenance
3. Expand the Setpoints > Device > Front Panel list item and double click on Display Properties or Default
Screens to open the settings window.
4. The settings window opens with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista D&I Setup
software window.
5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relay,
and that the relay has been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier).
The settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and command windows can be displayed and
edited in a similar manner. Actual Values windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged
and resized, if necessary.
3.4.2.4 CONFIGURING USB ADDRESS

By default, the relay USB port uses the network address 172.16.0.2. In some cases this IP is part of the corporate
network for the computer and conflicts with existing computers or other devices on that network. To resolve this
conflict, change the USB address to be in a different network. This change must be made to the computer settings,
1601-0651 101
the relay settings, and the EnerVista D&I Setup software settings in order to connect to the relay through the USB
port.
1. Open the Windows Control Panel and select Network and Internet > Network Sharing. The exact path may
vary depending on the version of Windows.
2. Click Change adapter settings.
3. Find the GE RNDIS Device (or GE RNDIS Device #2) and right-click the network it is on to open the
Properties window.
4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
5. In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, ensure that Use the following IP Address
is selected, and enter an appropriate IP address.
102 1601-0651
6. Click OK to save the new settings.

7. In the EnerVista D&I Setup software, navigate to File > Preferences > USB and change the IP address to
match. This address will now be used by EnerVista D&I Setup software when the interface selected is USB.
8. Click OK to save the new settings.

9. On the front panel of the relay, navigate to Setpoint > Device > Communications > USB.
10. Change both the USB IP Address and USB GWY IP Address setpoints to match the IP address the
computer is now using.
The relay should now communicate with the computer through the USB port.
3.4.3 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS

When a settings file is being uploaded to a device, the DEVICE IN SERVICE setting switches to Not Ready for the
duration of the upload. This ensures that all new settings are applied before the device is operational. A settings file
uploads operations including the following:
● EnerVista D&I Setup software menu option Write Settings File to Device
● Logic Designer changes saved online
● SLD configuration saved online
● IEC 61850 configuration saved online
● FlexLogic configuration saved online
● CID file uploaded to device
Individual setting changes from the device front panel or the EnerVista D&I Setup software Online Window do not
change the state of the DEVICE IN SERVICE setting.
3.4.3.1 ENTERING SETPOINTS

The following System Setup page is used as an example to illustrate entering setpoints. In this example, we will
changing the voltage sensing setpoints.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing menu item.
1601-0651 103
3. Select the Aux. VT Secondary setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This displays three
arrows: two to increment/decrement the value and another to launch the numerical keypad.
4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface used to enter values within the
setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value.
Click on X to exit from the keypad and retain the old value.
104 1601-0651
5. For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Phase VT Connection below), clicking anywhere
within the setpoint value box displays a drop-down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this
list.
6. In the Setpoints > System Setup > Voltage Sensing dialog box, click on Save to save the values into the
relay. Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click Restore to retain previous values. Click
Default to restore Default values.
7. For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. relay name), the value may be entered directly within
the setpoint value box.
Note:
When using Setpoint Groups, an element from one group can be dragged and dropped on the same element in another
group, copying all settings.
3.4.3.2 USING SETPOINT FILES

The EnerVista D&I Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
1. In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating
relays.
2. Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then saving the settings when
complete.
3. Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving them to the relay when
complete.
Setting files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A setting file contains data pertaining to
the following types of relay settings:
● Device Definition
● Relay Setup
● System Setup
● Protection
● Control
● Inputs/Outputs
1601-0651 105
● Monitoring
● FlexLogic
● Quick setup
● Protection summary
● IEC 61850 configurator
● Modbus user map
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The relay displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front panel display.
3.4.3.3 DOWNLOADING AND SAVING SETPOINT FILES

You should make a backup of the in-service settings before any changes are made or any work undertaken on
commissioned devices. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use that file to restore
settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay.
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Saving setpoints is also
highly recommended before making any setpoint changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista D&I Setup software window are accessed in the Files Window. Use the following
procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured.
2. Select the desired device from the site list.
3. Select Read Device Settings from the online menu item, or right-click on the device and select Read Device
Settings to obtain settings information from the device.
4. After a few seconds, the software requests the name and destination path of the setpoint file. The
corresponding file extension is automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry
is added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.
3.4.3.4 ADDING SETPOINT FILES TO THE ENVIRONMENT

EnerVista D&I Setup software allows you to review and manage a large group of setpoint files. Use the following
procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1. In the offline pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Settings File item.
2. The Open dialog box is displayed, prompting to select a previously saved setpoint file.
3. Browse for the file to be added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.
3.4.3.5 CREATING A NEW SETPOINTS FILE

Eenrvista allows you to create a new setpoint files independent of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a
relay at a later date. The following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
1. In the Offline pane, right click and select the New Settings File item. The Create New Settings File box
appears, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct firmware version. It is important to
define the correct firmware version to ensure that setpoints not available in a particular version are not
downloaded into the relay.
2. Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the
device and the purpose of the file.
106 1601-0651
4. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name box.
5. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to replace an existing file. All
setpoint files should have the extension .CID.
6. Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a complete path, is added
to the software environment.
Note:
Offline settings files can be created for invalid order codes in order to support file conversion from different products,
upgrades, and special orders. To validate an order code, visit the GE Multilin online store.
Filenames for setting files cannot have a period character (.) other than the one that is added in front of CID.
3.4.3.6 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILES TO A NEW REVISION

It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the firmware has been
upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
2. Select the Status > Information > Main CPU menu item and record the Firmware Version.
3. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series setup software
environment.
4. In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5. From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and note the
File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a
New File Version that matches the Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu. For example, if the firmware
revision is J0J08AA150.SFD (Firmware Revision 1.50) and the current setpoint file revision is 1.10, change
the New File Version to 1.5x.
6. Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the Description field.
7. Select the desired firmware version from the New File Version field.
8. When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision.
3.4.3.7 PRINTING SETPOINTS

EnerVista D&I Setup software allows you to print partial or complete lists of setpoints. Use the following procedure
to print a list of setpoints:
1. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a relay.
2. If printing from an online device, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item. If printing from a
previously saved setpoints file, select the Offline > Print Settings File menu item.
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box appears. Select Setpoints in the upper section and select either Include
All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which
are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
4. Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device
(in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options.
1601-0651 107
3.4.3.8 PRINTING VALUES FROM A CONNECTED DEVICE

A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the desired relay.
2. From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either
Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features
which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and
selecting the Print Device Information option.
3.4.3.9 LOADING SETPOINTS FROM A FILE
Note:
An error message occurs when attempting to upload a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the relay
firmware.
The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a setpoints file, it must first be
added to the software environment.
1. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the main window.
2. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully
compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target relay.
3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an incompatibility, an
Incompatible device order codes, versions or Serial Locks error will occur.
If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data is transferred to the relay.
An indication of the percentage completed is shown in the bottom of the main window.
3.4.3.10 UNINSTALLING FILES AND CLEARING DATA

The relay can be decommissioned by turning off the power to the unit and disconnecting the wires to it. Files can be
cleared after uninstalling Emervista or the relay, for example to comply with data security regulations. On the
computer, settings files can be identified by the .CID extension.
To clear the current settings file do the following:
1. Create a default settings file.
2. Write the default settings file to the relay.
3. Delete all other files with the .CID extension.
4. Delete any other data files, which can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or .csv.
You cannot directly erase the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory can be deleted. Do this from
the front panel or EnerVista D&I Setup software using: Records > Clear Records
3.4.4 QUICK SETUP

The Quick Setup item can be accessed online or offline in EnerVista D&I Setup software. Settings changes can be
made from both of these screens.
108 1601-0651
Quick Setup is designed for quick and easy user programming. Power system parameters, and settings for some
simple overcurrent elements are easily set. The Quick Setup screen works as follows:
● Settings names and units can be viewed at this screen. To view the range of the settings, hover the cursor
over the setpoint value field.
● Configure and save the settings as required.
● The Save, Restore and Default buttons function the same as in the individual setting setup screens.
● Attempting to enter and save a setting value which exceeds the range gives a warning dialog box. Correct the
setting value and save to proceed.
Note:
In Quick Setup, the value is not replaced with the maximum value of the setting.
For example, the Phase CT Primary setting has a range of 1 to 12000, but the user enters 12001 and tries to
save it. Quick Setup displays a warning dialog. Pressing OK leaves the setting value at 12001, but not 12000
(max. value) as is the case with other views.
3.4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE

To upgrade the firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful completion of this procedure,
the relay will have new firmware installed with the factory default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available
from the GE website.
Note:
EnerVista D&I Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a relay.
Uploading firmware on a WiFi interface is not allowed.
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current settings to a file on your PC. After the firmware has been
upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back into the relay.
3.4.5.1 LOADING NEW RELAY FIRMWARE

Do the following to load new firmware into the relay's flash memory.
1. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file.
2. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item. A screen appears with information on how long the
upload will take. Select OK to proceed.
3. EnerVista D&I Setup software requests the new firmware file. Locate the folder that contains the firmware file
to load into the relay.The firmware filename has the following format.

/

! " #
$ %&
$&# ' # ()*+, - .
A screen appears advising that a backup of the settings file should be made before proceeding with the
firmware upgrade. Select YES to proceed.
4. EnerVista D&I Setup software now prepares the relay to receive the new firmware file. The front panel
momentarily displays Upload Mode.
1601-0651 109
5. A screen appears confirming the firmware versions of the target device and the selected .SFD. Click YES to
proceed with the firmware loading process.
6. EnerVista D&I Setup software will prompt the user to reboot the relay after both the Boot 1 and Boot 2
uploads.
Note:
The relay should be rebooted BEFORE pressing OK.
7. Wait for the Comms upload process to complete.

8. Wait for the Mains upload process to complete.
9. EnerVista D&I Setup software notifies you when the relay is successfully updated.
Note:
Wait for the relay to boot up, then cycle power to the relay to complete the firmware update process.
After successfully updating the firmware, the relay is not in service and requires setpoint programming. To
communicate with the relay, the communication settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communication is established, you must reload the saved setpoints back into the relay.
Modbus addresses assigned to features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, min/max
values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are
rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
3.4.6 SLD CONFIGURATOR

The SLD Configurator allows users to create customized single line diagrams (SLD) for the front panel display. The
SLDs must be configured from the SLD Configurator in the EnerVista D&I Setup software, located under Setpoints
> SLD Configurator. The SLD Configurator allows breakers, switches, metering, and status items on the SLD.
SLDs are viewed from the relay front panel and individual SLD pages can be selected for the default home screen
pages. The relay provides several SLD pages. Each page can have a combination of active and passive objects.
Status, metering, and control objects are active while the static images for bus, generator, motor, transformer,
ground, etc. are passive objects.
110 1601-0651
Figure 56: SLD Page
For optimum use, the first SLD page can be used for the overall SLD and the subsequent pages can be used for
breaker/switch specific CT/VT placement, metering and status. Once the configurable SLDs are programmed, they
are saved within the relay settings file. The SLD pages can also be saved individually as local XML files. The locally
stored XML files can then be reloaded to generate another diagram. SLDs represent objects using GE symbols
(similar to ANSI).
Figure 57: Template SLD
The following figure shows the objects that are available for design in the SLD Configurator and their maximum
usage limits [X]. The maximum limit reflects the maximum possible order code.
1601-0651 111
Figure 58: SLD Configurator Component Library
3.4.6.1 CONTROL OBJECTS

The control objects consist of selectable breakers and disconnect switches. The following figure shows the different
symbols in the GE Standard style and IEC style. If the switching element is tagged, blocked, or bypassed, indicators
with the letters T, B, and By appear on the lower right corner of the element. The breaker/switch name is displayed
at the top of the object.
Note:
The displayed breaker name is configured in the setpoint Setpoints > System > Breakers > Breaker[X] > Name. This
setpoint has a 13-character limit. The name should be kept to a minimum so that it appears properly on the SLD.
112 1601-0651
Figure 59: Control Object Symbols
Note:
GE symbols are color-coded ANSI symbols.
The control objects status follows the color scheme from the Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display
Properties > Color Scheme setting. By default, this setting is set to Green (open). If set to Red (open), the
status colors are reversed.
If the setting is used, the breaker symbols automatically change to the Truck CB symbols. The SLD assumes that if
the Breaker Racked-In/Racked-Out input is used (anything other than Off), the appropriate Truck CB symbol will
be used.
The following figure shows the orientation available for the control objects. The default position for the control
objects is 0 degrees. Orientation in multiple directions allows for configuration of the single line diagram according
to the existing drawings and ensure the correct side for the fixed/moving contacts.
1601-0651 113
Figure 60: Orientation for Breakers and Switches
3.4.6.2 STATUS OBJECTS

The status objects consist of digital operands. Up to 15 digital status elements can be configured per SLD page.
The status object acts as an LED on the screen. If the diagram shows a gray circle, it means the assigned input is
low. If it shows a red circle, the assigned input is high. The following figure shows an example of the Reclose
Blocked signal in both On and Off state.
Figure 61: Reclose Blocked signal
In addition, Remote Breaker status objects are added for GE and IEC style. Remote breaker status allows
monitoring of three distant breakers. These objects are not controllable and hence cannot be used for selection and
operation.
114 1601-0651
3.4.6.3 METERING OBJECTS

The metering objects consist of metering elements. Up to 15 metering elements can be configured per SLD page.
The metering object has an input for all the available FlexAnalog values. The units for these values are dynamically
scaled as per the defaults. The following figure shows the metering element on a configured SLD.
Figure 62: Metering Element on configured SLD
3.4.6.4 DEVICE STATUS OBJECT

The configurable SLD feature in the relay allows only one device status object per SLD page. The device status
does not have any properties. It is simply shown as Status: [device status].
3.4.6.5 STATIC OBJECTS

Static objects are used as simple bitmap images or text/drawing blocks to complete the single line diagram. There is
no control associated with these static objects. The static objects consist of drawing tools, text object, and power
system components.
3.4.6.6 FRONT PANEL INTERACTION

8 Series relays use the Select-Before-Operate (SBO) mechanism for local control of breakers and switches [IEC
61850-7-2]. Initially, the diagram can be browsed through all available breakers and switches by using the
navigation keys. After navigation, selection must be made for the breaker or switch object by pressing the Enter
key. After selecting the desired switch or breaker, control operations can then be carried out on the selected switch
or breaker. The relay allows local opening, closing, tagging, blocking, and bypassing. Front panel control is only
allowed when the relay is in Local Mode.
3.4.6.6.1 NAVIGATION
The SLD can be accessed in two ways from the front panel of the relay. The original location for the SLD pages is
under Status > Summary > Single Line Diagram > SLD [X]. However, a more convenient way to access an SLD
1601-0651 115
page is by setting it as a default home screen at Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Home Screens > Home
Screen1. Pressing the home button more than once rotates through the configured home screens. If the desired
SLD is set to Home Screen 2 through Home Screen 10, it can be activated by pressing home button until it
appears on the screen. If no home screen is configured, the default screens become active. If the default screens
are disabled, Status > Summary > Values screen is shown.
3.4.6.6.2 BREAKER/SWITCH BROWSING AND SELECTION

While in the SLD screen, only one page is active at any point of time. If SLD1 is active, only breakers and switches
on SLD1 can be operated and controlled. By default, when entering the SLD menu, the screen displays SLD1.
SLD2 through SLD6 can be accessed through the navigation pushbuttons as shown in the Active element
selection with flash message figure, found later in this section.
To browse through the control elements on the SLD page, the navigation keys can be used. On the rugged front
panel, the up and down keys can be pressed for navigation and on the membrane front panel, up, down, left, and
right keys can be pressed. With the rugged front panel navigation, pressing down sequentially rotates through all
the available breakers and switches on the screen. Pressing the up key rotates through in a reverse order. With the
membrane front panel, the up, down, left, and right keys can navigate to the closest breaker/switch depending on
the key press direction.
While browsing through switches/breakers the active element is shown with a blue colored border around it. To
select a breaker/switch, the browsing indicator border must be around the desired breaker or switch. The breaker or
switch can then be selected by pressing the Enter key. As the breaker or switch is being selected, a flash message
appears indicating that the breaker or switch has been selected as shown in the following figure. Once the element
is selected for operation, the SLD control pushbuttons appear and the color of the highlighter will change to maroon
indicating that the breaker or switch is selected. By default, the control pushbuttons are programmed for Tag,
Block, and Bypass. For each control action, a flash message is displayed.
116 1601-0651
Figure 63: Active element selection with flash message
Browsing and selection is allowed only when the relay is in Local Mode and the user has security access of at least
operator level. To check if the relay is in local mode, look for an LM symbol on the task pane at the top of the
screen. Pressing navigation keys on SLD pages while in remote mode does nothing.
Control pushbuttons appearing on the SLD page are only active while a control object is selected.
The control object is deselected if you navigate to any screen other than the SLD or by pressing the Escape key. If
no action is taken after selection, the object is automatically deselected after the Bkr/Sw Select timeout setting
(Setpoints > Control > Control Mode > Bkr/Sw Select Timeout). Once deselected, the control pushbutton labels
return to the SLD page navigation labels and the color of the box around the object changes back to blue for
browsing. Pressing Escape once more removes the browsing highlight around the objects. If inactive during
browsing for the timeout setting (Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Message Timeout), the browsing highlight
around the object disappears. If an object is selected, Home button operation is prohibited. The object must be de-
selected by pressing Escape in order for the Home button to function.
After upgrading from firmware versions 1.3x to 1.7x, the breaker/contactor starting/stopping operations from the
front panel now follow a select-before-operate mechanism. The breaker/contactor must be first selected by
browsing and pressing the Enter key for selection. Once selected, the function can be started or stopped with the
front panel’s pushbuttons.
3.4.6.6.3 CONTROL OPERATIONS

The control operations carried out through the front panel of the relay are done only in Local Mode (Setpoints >
Control > Local Control Mode > Local Mode). Opening and closing operations can be carried out by pressing the
Open and Close pushbuttons on the relay front panel. Other operations such as tagging, blocking and bypassing
can be carried out by pressing the control pushbuttons that appear after the control object selection.
Note:
Remote operations are allowed for opening, closing, blocking, and bypassing. Tagging must be done locally.
It is recommended that tagging is only used for maintenance purposes. When a breaker or a switch is tagged, it cannot be
bypassed although the letters By may appear below the element on SLD.
If breaker is selected and relay status is changed to Out-of-Service, the breaker control actions, such as tag, blocked, bypass
and open/close are blocked. The breaker may remain in the selected state, but no action can be executed.
1601-0651 117
Once the selected breaker or switch is tagged, a letter T appears below the associated element. Similarly, for
blocking, letter B appears and for bypassing, letters By appear below the associated breaker or switch as shown in
the last column of the following figure. The blocking and bypassing letters also appear if the breakers/switches are
blocked or bypassed remotely. These are linked to their respective breaker/switch in the SLD Configurator window
so that when that breaker/switch is deleted, the letters also get deleted.
Permitted breaker/switch operations are described in the following figure when various letter indications are present
under the control element.
3.4.7 FLEXCURVE EDITOR

The FlexCurve Editor is designed to graphically view and edit the FlexCurve. The FlexCurve Editor screen is shown
as follows for FlexCurves A, B, C, and D:
118 1601-0651
● The Operate Curves are displayed, which can be edited by dragging the tips of the curves
● A Base curve can be plotted for reference, to customize the operating curve. The blue colored curve in the
picture is a reference curve. It can be Extremely Inverse, Definite Time, etc.
● The Trip (Reset and Operate) Times in the tables and curves work interactively i.e., changing the table value
affects the curve shape and vice versa.
● Save Configured Trip Times.
● Export Configured Trip Times to a CSV file
● Load Trip Times from a CSV File
● The screen above shows the model for viewing FlexCurves. Select Initialize to copy the trip times from the
selected curve to the FlexCurve.
3.4.8 TRANSIENT RECORDER (WAVEFORM CAPTURE)

EnerVista D&I Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the relay at the
instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
1601-0651 119
Note:
The COMTRADE Version used on 8 Series relays is C37.111-1999.
● With EnerVista D&I Setup software running and communications established, select the Records >
Transients > Transient Records menu item to open the Transient Recorder Viewer window.
● Click on Trigger to trigger a waveform capture.
● To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Waveform Capture window
appears as shown below.
● Click on the Save button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new window appears, requesting
the file name and path. One file is saved as a COMTRADE file, with the extension CFG. The other file is a
DAT file, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
● To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the corresponding
COMTRADE file.
120 1601-0651
● The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.

● The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To match the captured
waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time and date shown in the graph, then find the
event that matches the same time in the event recorder. The event record provides additional information on
the cause and system conditions at the time of the event.
1601-0651 121
● From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button
to open the COMTRADE Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes. Change the color of each
graph as desired and select other options as required by checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store
these graph attributes and to close the window. The Waveform Capture window reappears based on the
selected graph attributes.
● To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the View Phasors button
to display the following window:
3.4.9 PROTECTION SUMMARY

Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of different settings from Grouped
Elements and Monitoring Elements.
The Protection Summary Screen allows the user to:
● view the output relay assignments for the elements
● modify the output relay assignments for the elements
● view the Function status for the elements
● navigate to the respective element screen on a button click.
122 1601-0651
With EnerVista D&I Setup software running and communications established, select the Setpoints > Protection
Summary menu item to open the Protection Summary window.
3.4.10 FLEXLOGIC FAVOURITES

With EnerVista D&I Setup software version 2.70 and above, use the FlexLogic Favourites to create a customized
list of FlexLogic operands that use Format Code FC142.
Select Edit FlexLogic Favourites from either the offline menu or the popup menu from an offline CID file to access
a screen where the FlexLogic Favourite list can be modified. The FlexLogic Favourites screen includes a left tree
that shows all the FlexLogic Operands available for the CID file. The right tree shows all the FlexLogic operands
included in the Favourites list.
In the FlexLogic Favourites screen, press the Smart Update button to examine the CID file. Any FlexLogic
operands associated with an enabled feature/element will be added to the FlexLogic Favourites list. Operands will
never be automatically removed from the Favourites list, but can be removed manually by selecting the operand
and pressing the << button. Operands can also be added to the Favourites list by selecting the operands in the left
tree and pressing the >> button.
Select the check-box to use FlexLogic Favourites in any screen with a setting that is configured using the FlexLogic
operand (FC142).
FlexLogic Favourites is enabled when the settings are shown in BOLD and the background color of the setting is
brighter.
3.4.11 OFFLINE SETTINGS FILE CONVERSION

EnerVista D&I Setup software supports conversion of offline settings files created in the SR Series platform. This
feature allows the conversion of existing offline setting files to 8 Series files.
EnerVista D&I Setup software reduces the manual effort required when moving from an older product to a newer
product. The settings file conversion feature takes an existing settings file and generates a new settings file
compatible with the relay specified with the order code. After the import is complete, the results are displayed in an
interactive results window.
3.4.11.1 CONVERTING LEGACY FILES

Enervista version 1.4x and above supports conversion of SR 7xx files to 8-series settings files.
The conversion can only be initialized from the Offline/New Settings File commands located in the taskbar, as
follows:
1. In the menu taskbar, click on Offline and select the New Settings File item. The Create New Settings File
dialog box appears, which allows for the setpoint file conversion.
2. Select the Firmware Version and Order Code option for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the
device and purpose for the file.
4. To select the file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name box.
1601-0651 123
5. To select the SR settings file used for initialization, check the box to the left of Initialize Settings from SR
Settings File.
6. To locate and select the file to convert, click the ellipsis button beside the Initialize Settings from SR Settings
File box.
7. Click OK to begin the conversion and complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, is added to the software environment.
Note:
EnerVista 8 Series Setup version 1.4x and above supports conversion of 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 files. If the file version is less than
5.0 it must be converted to 5.2 using the latest 745 EnerVista Setup before doing the 845 conversion.
Note:
If there are settings that are not applicable to the later model, they are ignored and will not appear in the settings list.
3.4.11.2 CONVERSION SUMMARY REPORT

At the end of the conversion process, the results are summarized in a Settings Conversion Report.
The report is found under Device Definition in the offline file window.
Note:
Print the Settings Conversion Report immediately following conversion for future reference in case the report is removed or
the settings are modified from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
3.4.11.3 RESULTS WINDOW

The conversion summary results window has the following columns:
● SettingName: the same tree structure as in the offline window, but with status icons
● SettingValue: the converted value for the settings file
● Original SettingName: setting name of the input file
● Original SettingValue: setting value of the input file
Note:
All other settings available (not shown in the conversion report) in the file are set to default and must be verified before putting
the relay into service.
Settings in the results window are linked to setting screens. Click in the results window to navigate to the corresponding
settings window.
Status Icons
The status icons show the conversion results:
Manual configuration required
Successful conversion
124 1601-0651
Value is not supported
Print Report
If desired, the conversion summary report can be printed using the File/Print command in the taskbar or it can be
printed from the GUI print button.
Note:
Even if the report shows that a conversion has been successful (green checkbox icon), all settings must still be verified before
putting the relay in service.
1601-0651 125
126 1601-0651
CHAPTER 4
ABOUT SETPOINTS
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints
128 1601-0651

Chapter Overview 129
About Setpoints 130
Protection and Trip Breaker Selection 131
Setpoints Entry Methods 142
Common Setpoints 143
Logic Diagrams 146
1601-0651 129
4.2 ABOUT SETPOINTS

The relay has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the relay extremely flexible.
These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of menus which are available from the paths shown below. Each
setpoints menu has sub-sections that describe in detail the setpoints found on that menu.
Note:
Use the path provided to access the menus from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
Certain named settings allow custom names. Do not create 13-character long names using the largest width characters (i.e.
WWWWWWWWWWWWW). Doing so can cause the last 3 characters to overlap the setting name when viewed from the HMI
or the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
Figure 64: Main Setpoints Display Hierarchy
130 1601-0651
4.3 PROTECTION AND TRIP BREAKER SELECTION

Depending on order code, the relay provides protection for either two-winding, or three-winding transformers. Based
on this, either two or three breakers can be configured for status monitoring, tripping and closing. Each breaker
menu provides a selection of trip output and/or close output relay. Depending on the selected output relays, and the
function setting for the protection, control and monitoring elements, some conditions apply.
● All ouputs selected for BKR # Trip Output Select under Breaker setup menu are available for selection in
the menus of all elements, except in the outputs selection for BKR# Close Output Select.
● For all elements, the default value for the trip selected outputs under Breaker setup shows Do Not
Operate. The user can select these relays from the menu of the element.
● All outputs selected for BKR# Close Output Select, are automatically excluded from the list of outputs
available under the menus of all elements including the list of output selection for BKR# Trip Output Select
setpoint. The close output relays can be used for closing the breakers Remotely or Locally as part of the
Breaker Control feature.
● By default the form-A circuit monitoring outputs Aux Relay 1 is selected for tripping Breaker 1, Aux Relay 2 is
selected for tripping Breaker 2, and Aux Relay 9 for tripping Breaker 3. Outputs for closing of the breakers are
not selected.
Note:
If the output selected under BKR # Close Breaker Select is replaced by another output, the old output which is no longer
used for closing, will automatically show up in the menu of the elements with the default value Do Not Operate. The newly
selected output is automatically excluded from the list of outputs for selection under all element menus. When excluded from
the list of outputs for element menus, the output is inactive for any element.
Programming Output Relays for Breaker Tripping and Closing

The programming of the output relays for tripping individual breakers is performed once, when selected under
setpoint BKR 1(2,3) Trip Relay Select, and BKR 1(2,3) Close Relay Select from the Setpoints > System >
Breakers > Breaker 1(2,3) menu.
From these screens, Relay 1, Relay 2, and Relay 9 are selected as default outputs for tripping Breaker 1, Breaker
2, and Breaker 3 respectively. Output relays for closing the breakers are not selected. The user can program any
output relay from the list of output relays for breaker tripping, or closing.
Protection Element Trip Selections

Selective tripping of the transformer breakers from the protection element can be programmed from two places:
● From the Relay HMI: Protection Element Menu
● From the PC program: Element’s Menu or Protection Summary
From the Relay HMI: Protection Element Menu

If Trip is selected as a Function for an element, and upon operation of that element, the LED TRIP will turn on.
Similarly when Alarm, or Latched Alarm is selected, upon element operation, the LED ALARM will turn on.
Selecting Configurable is not associated with an LED.
1601-0651 131
Example 1: Programming an IOC1 element as a Trip function

1. Select Trip from the list of selections available for the setpoint Function.
2. Select the output relays for tripping the breakers, and any other aux relays if necessary.
3. Selecting Trip does not automatically change the values of the breaker trip selected output relays to
Operate from the menus of the protection, control or monitoring elements. Regardless of the selected
element function, the values for all output relays from the menu elements will show Do Not Operate. The
user must select the desired output relays to be energized upon element operation.
Example 2: Programming an IOC1 element to Alarm
132 1601-0651
These same steps also apply if the element is programmed to Latched Alarm or Configurable.
1. Select Alarm from the list of selections available for the setpoint Function.
2. If necessary, select the output relays to operate as an Alarm upon IOC1 operation.
3. To distinguish the element functionality upon function selection, and to prevent the user from making
programming mistakes, a mechanism affecting the output relays selected for breaker tripping is implemented
and will activate upon changing the function from Disabled to Alarm, Latched Alarm, or
Configurable.
○ The output relays selected for tripping of the breakers will be de-activated in the IOC1 element menu.
The rest of the outputs are fully programmable and operational.
○ The setting for these trip selected output relays can be changed, i.e. from Do Not Operate to
Operate, but the physical relay will not be energized. This is to prevent operation of the trip output
relay by mistake, when the function used is Alarm, or Configurable.
4. Changing the function back to Trip, will enable the breaker trip selected output relays from the IOC1 menu
to be programmable.
From PC Program: Element Menu or Protection Summary

Using the PC program, there are two places where the menu of each protection, control, or monitoring element can
be accessed: The element’s individual menu, and the Protection Summary menu.
Element Menu - The element function can be set as Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable.
Depending on the selected function, the relay applies the following rules:
1601-0651 133

1. Select Output Relays 1 and 2 to trip breaker 1 and 2 respectively.
Figure 65: Transformer Breakers setup

2. Select Trip for the setpoint Function. When Trip is selected, all output relays are accessible for
Operate/Do Not Operate programming.
Figure 66: Function setpoint for Phase IOC 1 selected as Trip
134 1601-0651
Example 2: Programming an IOC1 element as an Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable function

1. Select Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable for the setpoint Function. When Alarm, Latched Alarm
or Configurable is selected as a Function, the Output Relays 1 and 2, which have been assigned to trip
Breaker 1 and 2 respectively, are de-activated for operation.
Protection Summary- The selection of Function, and the selection of output relays for Operate/Do Not
Operate for each element are reflected in the Protection Summary window as shown. Once the Protection
Summary window is open, Operate or Do Not Operate can be selected for any output relay (except the ones
selected for breaker close) by checking/unchecking the appropriate box. The user can also access the individual
menu for any of the listed elements and make changes.
1601-0651 135
Figure 67: Protection Summary screen
Note:
Use the protection summary window for programming all of the elements and output relays needed for the application. Please
note, that the output relays selected for breaker closing are excluded from the menus of all elements, and they are made
inactive (cannot be selected) in the Protection Summary menu. The check boxes related to these outputs automatically
become inactive, and they cannot be checked/unchecked by the user.
The check boxes for the relay outputs assigned for breaker tripping will automatically become inactive, if the function of an
element is set to Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable. In all other cases, the check boxes corresponding to those
output relays will be active, and available for selection.
4.3.1 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT RELAYS FOR BREAKER TRIPPING AND

CLOSING
The programming of the output relays for tripping individual breakers is performed once, when selected under
setpoint BKR 1(2,3) Trip Relay Select, and BKR 1(2,3) Close Relay Select from the Setpoints > System >
Breakers > Breaker 1(2,3) menu.
136 1601-0651
From these screens, Relay 1, Relay 2, and Relay 9 are selected as default outputs for tripping Breaker 1, Breaker
2, and Breaker 3 respectively. Output relays for closing the breakers are not selected. The user can program any
output relay from the list of output relays for breaker tripping, or closing.
Selective tripping of the transformer breakers from the protection element can be programmed from two places:
● From the Relay HMI: Protection Element Menu
● From the PC program: Element’s Menu or Protection Summary
From the Relay HMI: Protection Element Menu

If Trip is selected as a Function for an element, and upon operation of that element, the TRIP LED will turn on.
Similarly when Alarm, or Latched Alarm is selected, upon element operation, the ALARM LED will turn on.
Selecting Configurable is not associated with an LED.
1. Select Trip from the list of selections available for the setpoint Function.
2. Select the output relays for tripping the breakers, and any other aux relays if necessary.
3. Selecting Trip does not automatically change the values of the breaker trip selected output relays to
Operate from the menus of the protection, control or monitoring elements. Regardless of the selected
element function, the values for all output relays from the menu elements will show Do Not Operate. The
user must select the desired output relays to be energized upon element operation.
Example 2: Programming an IOC1 element to Alarm
1601-0651 137
These same steps also apply if the element is programmed to Latched Alarm or Configurable.
1. Select Alarm from the list of selections available for the setpoint Function.
2. If necessary, select the output relays to operate as an Alarm upon IOC1 operation.
3. To distinguish the element functionality upon function selection, and to prevent the user from making
programming mistakes, a mechanism affecting the output relays selected for breaker tripping is implemented
and will activate upon changing the function from Disabled to Alarm, Latched Alarm, or
Configurable.
○ The output relays selected for tripping of the breakers will be de-activated in the IOC1 element menu.
The rest of the outputs are fully programmable and operational.
○ The setting for these trip selected output relays can be changed, i.e. from Do Not Operate to
Operate, but the physical relay will not be energized. This is to prevent operation of the trip output
relay by mistake, when the function used is Alarm, or Configurable.
4. Changing the function back to Trip, will enable the breaker trip selected output relays from the IOC1 menu
to be programmable.
From PC Program: Element Menu or Protection Summary

Using the PC program, there are two places where the menu of each protection, control, or monitoring element can
be accessed: The element’s individual menu, and the Protection Summary menu.
Element Menu - The element function can be set as Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable.
Depending on the selected function, the relay applies the following rules:
138 1601-0651

1. Select Output Relays 1 and 2 to trip breaker 1 and 2 respectively.
Figure 68: Transformer Breakers setup

2. Select Trip for the setpoint Function. When Trip is selected, all output relays are accessible for
Operate/Do Not Operate programming.
Figure 69: Function setpoint for Phase IOC 1 selected as Trip
1601-0651 139
Example 2: Programming an IOC1 element as an Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable function

1. Select Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable for the setpoint Function. When Alarm, Latched Alarm
or Configurable is selected as a Function, the Output Relays 1 and 2, which have been assigned to trip
Breaker 1 and 2 respectively, are de-activated for operation.
Protection Summary- The selection of Function, and the selection of output relays for Operate/Do Not
Operate for each element are reflected in the Protection Summary window as shown. Once the Protection
Summary window is open, Operate or Do Not Operate can be selected for any output relay (except the ones
selected for breaker close) by checking/unchecking the appropriate box. The user can also access the individual
menu for any of the listed elements and make changes.
140 1601-0651
Figure 70: Protection Summary screen
Note:
Use the protection summary window for programming all of the elements and output relays needed for the application. Please
note, that the output relays selected for breaker closing are excluded from the menus of all elements, and they are made
inactive (cannot be selected) in the Protection Summary menu. The check boxes related to these outputs automatically
become inactive, and they cannot be checked/unchecked by the user.
The check boxes for the relay outputs assigned for breaker tripping will automatically become inactive, if the function of an
element is set to Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable. In all other cases, the check boxes corresponding to those
output relays will be active, and available for selection.
1601-0651 141
4.4 SETPOINTS ENTRY METHODS

Before placing the relay in operation, you must enter the setpoints, which define the system characteristics, inputs,
relay outputs, and protection settings. You can use one of the following methods:
● Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
● Front USB port, connected to a portable computer running the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
● Rear Ethernet, copper or fiber port connected to portable computer running the EnerVista D&I Setup software
software.
● Rear RS485 port and a SCADA system running user-written software.
● If applicable for your model, using the Wi-Fi wireless connection to a portable computer running the EnerVista
D&I Setup software software.
Using a computer is the easiest method, as files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry. To facilitate
this process, the EnerVista D&I Setup software software is is available for download. The relay leaves the factory
with setpoints programmed to default values, and it is these values that are shown in all the setpoint message
illustrations.
At a minimum, you must set the Setpoints > System setpoints for the system to function correctly. To safeguard
against the installation of a relay whose setpoints have not been entered, the Out-Of-Service self-test warning is
displayed. In addition, the Critical Failure relay is de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the
intended application, you should change the Setpoints > Device > Installation > Device In Service setpoint from
Not Ready (the default) to Ready. Before putting the relay in the Ready state, you should work through each page
of setpoint messages, entering values either by keypad or computer.
142 1601-0651
4.5 COMMON SETPOINTS

To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation and similar types of
setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat operation descriptions for this class of setpoint
throughout the manual, a general description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular
feature are included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is described below.
FUNCTION
The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the operational characteristic of each feature. The range
for this setpoint is: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm and Configurable.
If the FUNCTION setpoint is selected as Disabled, then the feature is not operational.
If FUNCTION is selected as Trip or Latched Trip, then the feature is operational. When the Trip or Latched
Trip function is selected and the feature operates, the output relay #1 Trip operates (when selected as Trip
Relay), and the TRIP LED is lit.
When the Latched Trip function is selected and the feature operates, the TRIP LED and trip output operands will
remain latched. The Latched Trip can be reset by issuing the reset command.
If FUNCTION is selected as Alarm or Latched Alarm, then the feature is operational. When this function is
selected and the feature operates, the ALARM LED is lit and any assigned auxiliary output relays operate. The Trip
output relay does not operate, and the TRIP LED is not lit.
When FUNCTION is selected as Latched Alarm, operation of the Latched Alarm function depends on the
selection of the setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION, configured under Path: Setpoints > Device > Installation.
When the setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION is set to Self-Reset while an element is set to Latched Alarm,
only the Alarm LED will remain latched. When setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION to Latched, both Alarm LED
and element will remain latched.
When Alarm is selected and the feature operates, the ALARM LED flashes, and it self-resets when the operating
conditions are cleared.
If FUNCTION is selected as Configurable, the feature is fully operational but outputs are not driving any action,
such as output relay #1, ALARM LED or anything else. Operands from this element must be programmed to the
required action which may be as simple as the auxiliary output relay from the list of available relays in the element
itself; FlexLogic, Trip Bus etc.
Note:
The FlexLogic operands generated by the operation of each feature are active, and available to assign to outputs, or use in
FlexLogic equations, regardless of the selected function, except when the function is set to Disabled.
PICKUP
The setpoint selects the threshold equal to or above (for over elements) or equal to or below (for under elements)
which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.
PICKUP DELAY
The setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay an input signal from appearing as an output.
DROPOUT DELAY
The setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay dropping out the output signal after being generated.
1601-0651 143
TDM
The setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier which modifies the operating times per the selected inverse
curve. For example, if an IEEE Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM=2, and the fault current is 5 times
bigger than the pickup level, operation of the element can not occur until 2.59 s after pickup.
OUTPUT RELAYS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS setpoint selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an
output. The range is Operate or Do Not Operate, and can be applied to any combination of the auxiliary output
relays. The default setting is Do Not Operate.
The available auxiliary relays vary depending on the order code.
DIRECTION
The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for overcurrent features which are subject to control
from a directional element. The range is Disabled, Forward, and Reverse. If set to Disabled, the element is
allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. There is no supervision from the directional element. If set to
Forward, the OC element is allowed to operate when the fault is detected by the directional element in forward
direction. In this mode, the OC element does not operate for fault in reverse direction. If set to Reverse, the OC
element is allowed to operate when the fault is detected in reverse direction, and does not operate in forward
direction.
RESET
Selection of an Instantaneous or a Timed reset is provided by this setting. If Instantaneous is selected, the
element resets instantaneously providing the quantity drops below 97 to 98% of the pickup level before the time for
operation is reached. If Timed is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for the
selected inverse curve.
BLOCK
The <ELEMENT_NAME> BLOCK setpoint selects an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, which when
active, blocks the feature from running. When set to On the feature is always blocked; when set to Off, block is
disabled.
EVENTS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> EVENTS setpoint can be set to Enabled, or Disabled. If set to Enabled, the events
associated with the pickup, operation, or other conditions of the feature are recorded in the Event Recorder.
TARGETS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> TARGETS setpoint can be set to Disabled, Self-Reset, or Latched. If set to Self-
Reset, or Latched, the targets associated with the pickup, operation, or another condition of the feature are
displayed on the screen of the 8 Series 845 relay. The targets disappear from the screen when Self-Reset is
selected, and the conditions are cleared. The targets stay on the screen, when Latched is selected, and the
conditions are cleared.
144 1601-0651
Note:
The targets of status, control and pickup conditions are always self-reset type, regardless of the Self-Reset, or Latched
configuration of setpoint <ELEMENT_NAME> TARGETS.
To ensure the settings file inside the relay is updated, wait 30 seconds after a setpoint change before cycling power.
When IP addresses are changed and sent as a Settings file, the unit reboots twice.
1601-0651 145
4.6 LOGIC DIAGRAMS

Refer to the logic diagrams provided for a complete understanding of the operation of each feature. These
sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input parameter, and internal logic is used in a feature to
obtain an output. In addition to these logic diagrams, the Setpoints chapter provides written descriptions for each
feature.
● Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled SETPOINT. The exact wording of the displayed setpoint
message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint selections are listed below the name and are
incorporated in the logic.
● Comparator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled RUN with the associated pickup/dropout
setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the detector is controlled by the signal entering the RUN
inset. The measurement/comparison can only be performed if a logic 1 is provided at the RUN input. The
relationship between a setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following symbols: < (less than), >
(greater than), etc.
● Pickup and Dropout Time Delays: Shown as a block with indication of two timers – the tPKP (Pickup Delay),
and tDPO(Dropout Delay).
● LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol (X).
● Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter (logical NOT), is shown
as a circle: O
● FlexLogic operands: Shown as a block with a heading labeled FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS. Each feature
produces output flags (operands) which can be used further for creating logic in the FlexLogic equation editor,
or Trip Bus, or can be directly assigned to trigger an output. The operands from all relay features constitute
the list of FlexLogic operands.
146 1601-0651
CHAPTER 5
DEVICE SETPOINTS
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints
148 1601-0651

This chapter describes the Device setpoint menu settings in detail.
Device menu hierarchy 150
Custom Configuration 151
Real-time Clock 154
Security 159
Communications 172
Transient Recorder 191
Data Logger 193
Fault Reports 196
Event Data 198
Flex states 199
Front Panel 200
Resetting 222
Installation 223
Self-test errors 225
Clear Records 230
1601-0651 149
5.2 DEVICE MENU HIERARCHY

@ AbG P
Ral Tm Cl ck
485
cury UB
C mmuca W-F
Set point s v !
Eh
"# $%& Tra Rc rdr
G =
'()*%$ zaa { ggr DNP P
DNP/ IE 104 P L

O*%)*%$ aul R r
IE 60870-5-104
+,.%!% .( ~ zaa
IE 60870-5-103
M.( %., (2
l} a HJK QVXYVZ[Z\V] ^_`fjq w`qj
9.(%,.: HJK\V] `qjf ¡ _¢
? @ AbG D £
;:x<.2 !
|$% (2 P = >??>b LED

r al
P = >??>b PB
Rg >b PB

alla
D> P
D >G
D >G

Figure 71: Device Display Hierarchy
150 1601-0651
5.3 CUSTOM CONFIGURATION

The custom configuration features allows you to customize the configurations as desired.
Configuration Mode
The 8-series platform, supports a multitude of functions and features including:
● Protection and Control (P&C)
● Asset Monitoring
● Flexible Logic Engine (FlexLogic)
● Records and Reporting
● Time Synchronization
● Testing/Simulation
Taking into consideration user experience, configuration mode controls how the Setpoints are presented by only
displaying settings that are typically used, or settings that are important to configure.
Two configuration modes are supported:
● Simplified - In this mode, some of the functions, features and settings are hidden or made read-only (grayed
out). All the settings made in Regular configuration mode are still applied during simplified mode (they are
either hidden or read-only), so simplified configuration mode can also be seen as a way of locking advanced
setpoints.
● Regular - In this mode, all function/features and setpoints of the device are editable and nothing is hidden or
grayed out.
Configuration mode is applicable to the Setpoints items only and does not control view/presentation to other main
menu items, such as Device Definition, Status, Metering, Records, Commands and Maintenance. The configuration
mode setting is available to be changed by the Administrator role. The configuration mode control is applicable to
device HMI and setup software, as well as online and offline setting files.
Note:
Configuration mode does not disable the device functionality or settings. It only controls the view or presentation on the HMI
and setup software screens. Therefore, settings which are hidden or Read-only are preserved and applied within the device.
The home icon on the home page changes color according to the configuration mode. When in Simplified
configuration mode, the home icon color is green. When in regular mode the home icon color is blue.
Example 1: Setting items view control

The Phase TOC 1 function in Regular mode has 14 editable setpoints. In the Simplified mode this function has only
6 out of the 14 setpoints made available to edit. 5 setpoints are hidden, and 3 setpoints are read/view-only.
Note:
All setpoints under Regular mode are still applied and used by the device. For example the Input is hidden but configured as
Phasor during Regular mode, therefore Phase TOC 1 still applies Phasor as an input. Similarly, Reset is read-only, and
Phase TOC 1 still applies Instantaneous for resetting. The read-only settings are greyed out.
1601-0651 151
r Simplified
..\Current\Phase TOC 1 ..\Current\Phase TOC 1
Item Name Value Unit Item Name Value Unit
Function Disabled Function Disabled
Signal Input CT Bank 1 -J1 Signal Input CT Bank 1 -J1
Input Phasor
Pickup 1.000 x CT
Pickup 1.000 x CT
Curve IEEE Mod Inverse
Curve IEEE Mod Inverse
TDM 1.00
TDM 1.00
Reset Instantaneous
Reset Instantaneous
Direction Disabled Direction Disabled
Voltage Restraint Disabled Voltage Restraint Disabled
Volt Lower Limit 0.1 p.u. Relays Do Not Operate
Block Off PTOC 1
Relays Do Not Operate
Events Enabled
Targets Self-Reset
PTOC 1
Figure 72: Comparison of the setpoints for Regular and Simplified mode
Example 2: Function/Feature view control

The differences in the Inputs setpoint screens for Regular and Simplified mode are shown below. Under Simplified
mode, the Virtual Inputs and Remote Inputs are hidden for any configuration change. However, the device will still
accept and process virtual and remote inputs based on what is configured during Regular mode. This way,
Simplified configuration mode does not change the behavior of the device.
r Simplified
..\Setpoints\Inputs ..\Setpoints\Inputs
Item Name Item Name
Contact Inputs Contact Inputs
Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs
Remote Inputs
Inputs MA In
Inputs V Inputs MA In Rem In
Figure 73: Comparison of the Inputs screens for Regular and Simplified mode
152 1601-0651
CONFIG MODE
Path: Setpoints > Device > Config Mode
Range: Simplified, Regular
Default: Regular
This setting allows selection of the configuration mode while the device is accessed by the Administrator role. In
Regular configuration mode, all values in settings/functions can be edited. In Simplified configuration mode,
selected settings/functions are hidden or the values are read-only to enhance user experience with minimum
setpoint changes.
1601-0651 153
5.4 REAL-TIME CLOCK

Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock
The relay is capable of receiving a time reference from several time sources in addition to its own internal clock for
the purpose of time-stamping events, transient recorders and other occurrences within the relay. The accuracy of
the time stamp is based on the time reference that is used. The relay supports an internal clock, SNTP, IRIG-B, and
PTP IEEE 1588 (version 2) as potential time references.
If two or more time sources are available, the time source with the higher priority shown in Time Sources table is
used where 1 is considered to be the highest priority. Please note that the time source priority of PTP and IRIG-B
can be swapped. If both PTP and IRIG-B are available, by default the clock syncs to PTP over IRIG-B. If PTP is not
available, the CPU syncs the internal clock to IRIG-B.
Time Sources
Time Source Priority
PTP (IEEE1588) 1*
IRIG-B 2*
SNTP 3
Internal Clock 4
* The priority of IRIG-B and PTP can be swapped.
Note:
Synchronization by IEC103, DNP, Modbus and IEC104 is not going to be issued if there is a sync source from IRIG-B, SNTP
or PTP.
5.4.1 PTP CONFIGURATION

Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > Precision Time
PORT 4(5) PTP FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When the port setting is selected as Disabled PTP is disabled on the port. The relay does not generate, or
listen to, PTP messages on the port.
PORT 4(5) PATH DELAY ADDER

Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1 ns
Default: 0 ns
The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in the setting prior to the time being used to
synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant Power Profile (PP) network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms
compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, the setting is zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not
all delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the
message. The setting can be used to approximately compensate for the delay. Since the relay is not aware of
154 1601-0651
network switching that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always
completely corrects for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces worst-case error to half of
the range between minimum and maximum uncompensated delay if these values are known.
PORT 4(5) PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

Range: -1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1 ns
Default: 0 ns
The setting corresponds to Delay Asymmetry in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate
for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two
fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so the setting is set to zero.
In unusual cases where the length of link is different in different directions, the setting is to be set to the number
of nanoseconds longer the Ethernet propagation delay is to the relay compared with the mean of path
propagation delays to and from the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers
and the propagation speed in the fibers that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is
9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the relay is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the
path delay asymmetry is +1000 ns.
STRICT POWER PROFILE

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™ 2011) requires that the grandmaster clock be power profile compliant, that
the delivered time have a worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented. With
the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay selects as master only clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238
identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power
profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks
are present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

Range: 0 to 255
Default: 0
The setting is set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to which they can be synchronized.
A network may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number.
More commonly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY

Range: 0 to 7
Default: 4
The setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the
relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP (Power Profile) the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is
recommended that in accordance with PTP it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no
effect.
1601-0651 155
PTP VLAN ID
Range: 0 to 4095
Default: 0
The setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP (Power Profile). As these messages have a
destination address that indicates they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be
left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
PTP PRIORITY
Range: 1, 2
Default: 1
The setting sets the priority of PTP time for the relay. If set to 1 and IRIG-B is available, the relay syncs the
relay’s time reference to the PTP time. If set to 2 and IRIG-B is available, the relay syncs its reference to IRIG-B
time.
5.4.2 CLOCK
Path:Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > Clock
DATE
Format: Month/Day/Year
Range: Month: 1 to 12; Day: 1 to 31; Year: 2008 to 2094
Default: 01/01/2008
TIME
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59:0 to 59
Default: 00:00:00
LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC

Range: –24.00 to 24.00 hrs in steps of 0.5 hrs
Default: 0.00 hrs
REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS

Default: Enabled (FW 3.00), Disabled (FW4.10
IRIG-B
156 1601-0651
Default: Disabled
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

Default: Disabled
DST START MONTH

Range: January to December (all months)
Default: Not Set
DST START DAY

Range: SUN to SAT (all days of the week)
Default: Not Set
DST START WEEK

Range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
DST START HOUR

Range: 0 to 23
Default: 2
DST END MONTH

Range: January to December (all months)
Default: Not Set
DST END WEEK

Range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
DST END DAY

Range: SUN to SAT (all days of the week)
Default: Not Set
DST END HOUR

Range: 0 to 23
Default: 2
Note:
IRIG-B is available in all relays. A failure on IRIG-B triggers an event and a target message.
IRIG-B is auto-detected. The signal type is detected in the hardware, so there are no configurable options.
1601-0651 157
5.4.3 SNTP PROTOCOL

8 series relays accept time synchronization from up to two different SNTP servers. In order to define number of
SNTP servers to be used, different settings for each SNTP server must be configured.
● If one SNTP server is used to synchronize the relay, the SNTP Server and UDP port settings must be
configured with the corresponding settings.
● If two SNTP servers are used to synchronize the relay, the SNTP Server IP and UDP port for the main server
must be configured, along with the SNP Server 2 IP and UDP port for the back-up server.
Note:
8 Series relays only support SNTP unicast. It may take 2-3 minutes for the relay to synchronize with the SNTP server.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > SNTP
SNTP FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SNTP SERVER IP ADDRESS

Range: Standard IP Address Format
Default: 0.0.0.0
SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 123
SNTP SERVER 2 IP ADDRESS

Range: Standard IP Address Format
Default: 0.0.0.0
SNTP 2 UDP PORT NUMBER

Default: 123
Note:
The SNTP and PTP settings take effect after rebooting the relay.
158 1601-0651
5.5 SECURITY
OVERVIEW
The Multilin delivers full cyber security data classification with the use of security levels that help the user to comply
with security standards and guidelines. For Cyber Security, there is a choice of two order code options - Basic or
Advanced Security (CyberSentry):
● Basic Security – The basic security feature is the default offering of the product. It supports role based
access control (RBAC), encrypted communication between the IED and EnerVista configuration software,
with other functionalities such as security events storage on the IED, Inactivity Timeout and Lockout based on
authentication failure.
● CyberSentry – This feature refers to the advanced security options available as a software option. When this
option is purchased, it is automatically enabled and Basic Security is disabled. It supports the same
functionality as a Basic Security IED, but additionally it supports user management with non-shared accounts,
centralized authentication and logging of security events in syslog format to the configured syslog server. It
also supports the configuration of two US servers and two syslog servers to ensure redundancy and
availability.
GENERAL RULES FOR ROLES

● In an Advanced security device, all the roles (defined on the device as well as defined on the RADIUS server)
are password protected. In a basic security device, all the roles are password protected, except for the
Viewer role which is user-defined on the device. A user with Viewer capability, defined on the RADIUS server,
is password protected.
● All the roles, except for the Viewer role, support only one session at one time.
● The Viewer role has read-only access to all values in the relay except for one service command which is
described in the Password Recovery Procedure section below.
● In an Advanced security IED, all the roles can choose to log out. In a basic security IED, all the roles, except
for the Viewer, are able to log out.
● The setpoint access is used for the purpose of bypassing security on the interface defined by the BYPASS
ACCESS setting.
● The setpoint access setting may be either switched directly on or assigned to a digital input.
● If the setpoint access setting is assigned to a digital input, the digital input needs to be activated through a
physical key (jumper).
● The setpoint access setting may be set only by an Administrator.
PASSWORD COMPLEXITY
The password complexity is available on both Basic Security and Advanced Security.
If password complexity is enabled, a user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following
requirements:
● Passwords cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user's full name that exceed two
consecutive characters
● Passwords must be 8 to 20 characters in length
● Passwords must contain characters from the following four categories: - English uppercase characters (A
through Z) - English lowercase characters (a through z) - Base 10 digits (0 through 9) - Non-alphanumeric
characters (e.g. ~, !, @, #, $,%,&)
1601-0651 159
PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCEDURE

In the event of losing all passwords, the 8 Series 845 can be reset to factory defaults by following the procedure
below:
1. Send an email to the customer support department providing a valid serial number and using a recognizable
corporate email account. (Worldwide e-mail: [email protected])
2. Customer support provides the code to reset the relay to factory defaults.
3. Enter the code provided from the front panel, under the menu Setpoints > Device > Installation > Service
Command to reset the relay to factory defaults.
Note:
Even a Viewer may execute this operation.
The current limitation for the maximum number of Viewer sessions from EnerVista is three when the
Communications card is present.
When the communications card is not present, a maximum of two Viewer sessions may be initiated through
EnerVista. If two Viewers are connected, a third connection is only allowed for an Administrator. No Operator has
access. However, if an Operator is connected, before any other user, only one Viewer is allowed so that an
Administrator can connect. This is because the maximum number of TCP connections from EnerVista, when the
Communications card is not present, is only three. (With a Communications card, the maximum number of TCP
connections is five.)
SECURE TUNNELING
The following items are supported in the feature:
● Under the CyberSentry option, the Multilin supports SSH secure tunneling of MODBUS communications
between itself and EnerVista setup software.
● SSH secure tunneling is supported on Ethernet only.
● If bypass security is set (through setpoint access), the communications over Ethernet is not encrypted.
SECURITY EVENTS STORED ON IED

The Security_Events.CSV file stores security events information. A total of 1024 events are stored in a circular
buffer in a non-volatile memory. Once the file reaches its limit, the oldest event will get over-written by the newest
event.The following information will be supported and stored in the events file for each event:
● Event Number
● Data/Time (UTC)
● Username
● IP Address
● Role
● Activity Value
This file will be stored on the IED and is accessible from SFTP clients for users with the Administrator role. For
Basic Security, this is the only file to give security audit information to the user. This file is useful for Advanced
Security users if the syslog server is either not configured or not functioning.
ROLE ACCESS MAP

The detailed role access map is defined in the following figure.
160 1601-0651
Role Access Map

Roles Administrator Engineer Operator Viewer
Targets R R R R
Settings
Security Settings RW R R R
Change own PW (Basic Security) Yes Yes Yes No
Change own PW (Advanced Security) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Create New/Modify Users, Assign RW No No No

Roles (Advanced Security)
Non-Security Settings RW RW R R
FlexLogic RW RW R R
IEC 61850 Settings RW RW R R
Factory Settings No No No No
Commands
Date/Time Change RW RW No No
BKR Related RW RW RW No
Clear Records RW No No No
Restore Defaults RW No No No
Reset W W W No
File Operations
Config File Read R R R R
Config File Write W W No No
Actual Values
Status R R R R
Metering R R R R
Reports
Events R R R R
Waveforms R R R R
Security Audit Log R R No No
1601-0651 161
Maintenance
Upload Firmware W No No No
Modbus Analyzer R R R R
Note:
Commands may be issued freely through protocols other than Modbus (e.g. DNP and IEC 61850) without user-authentication
or encryption of data taking place, even if the relay has the advanced security feature enabled.
5.5.1 BASIC SECURITY

The 8 Series 845 Basic Security supports four roles: Administrator, Engineer, Operator and Viewer.
The main settings structure is available from Path: Setpoints > Device > Security.
LOGIN
The setting allows a user to login with a specific role.
1. Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password.
2. If the wrong password is entered, an Authentication Failed! message is displayed
3. If the maximum failed authentications occur an Account Blocked! message is displayed.
4. The Viewer is the default choice and it does not require a password.
LOGOUT
This setting logs out the current user and logs in as Viewer. If the user is already an Viewer, this setting does not
apply. When logging out, a switch to Viewer role is performed.
CHANGE PASSWORDS
1. The Change local passwords menu is shown on the front panel and EnerVista on a successful login of
Administrator role.
2. If password complexity is enabled, the rules as defined in Security must be obeyed. If password complexity is
disabled this setting accepts 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters. See Path: Setpoints > Device > Security >
Change Local Passwords.
3. The default password is 0, which is programmed from the factory.
4. The login setting in this menu is similar to that in the parent security settings.
5. The Viewer does not have password associated with it, so it is not shown in this setting.
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS

The Administrator role can change this setting. This setting resets all the settings, communication and Security
passwords, and all records.
ACCESS LOCKOUT
Access lockout is the number of failed authentications (the default is 3 and the maximum is 99) before the device
blocks subsequent authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of 0 means Access Lockout is disabled.
162 1601-0651
ACCESS LOCKOUT PERIOD

Access lockout period is the period of time in minutes of a lockout (the default is 3 and the maximum is 9999). A
value of 0 means that there is no lockout period.
ACCESS TIMEOUT
Access timeout is the time of idleness before a logged in user is automatically logged out. This timeout applies to all
users, independent of the communication channel (serial, Ethernet or direct access).
PASSWORD COMPLEXITY
This setting is available so that the option of selecting between simple passwords and complex ones is provided.
● The setting is only available to Administrator.
● By default Password Complexity is Disabled.
● When Password Complexity is Enabled, it follows the rules defined in Security.
BYPASS ACCESS
This feature allows security authentication to be bypassed. Once this setting is anything other than Disabled, the
user gets Administrator access rights on the configured interface for the period of time when the SETPOINT
ACCESS setting is On. For example, if user configures BYPASS ACCESS as Local, then no user authentication is
needed to access the device over USB or HMI when SETPOINT ACCESS is On. Another option is to configure
BYPASS ACCESS as HMI only - enabling the user to view and modify all settings, view actual values or execute
commands. The use of this feature should be restricted only in commissioning phase or when it is considered safe.
SETPOINT ACCESS
This setting is only available to Administrator. It is used for the purpose of bypassing security. It can be either
switched on or assigned to a digital input. If assigned to a digital input, the digital input needs to be activated
through a physical key.
Note:
If the maximum number of Viewer roles already logged in on the relay has been reached, you must log in on the Security
screen within one minute of making the connection otherwise your session is terminated.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE

When the factory service mode feature is enabled, the device may go into factory service mode. The default value
is Disabled.
REQUIRE PW FOR RESET KEY

This setting is only available to the Administrator. The Require PW for Reset Key is used for the purpose of
bypassing security. If this setting is Enabled and an alarm or trip occurs on the relay, the Reset button is not
available to the Operator. Only the Administrator can reset the relay with their password.
REQUIRE PW FOR D/T CHANGE

The date/time can be set by any role, if this setting is disabled. If this setting is enabled the date/time can only be
set by the Administrator.
1601-0651 163
REQUIRE PW FOR CONTROL

If this setting is disabled, Operator controls do not require a password. If this setting is Enabled, an Operator
password is required. By default Require PW for Control is Enabled.
5.5.2 CYBERSENTRY
The following features are supported in the CyberSentry feature:
● CyberSentry provides secure tunneling of MODBUS communications between itself and the EnerVista setup
software, using SSH.
● All the roles supported in the Basic Security are supported.
● Server authentication using RADIUS is added.
SECURITY SETTINGS STRUCTURE

The figure below shows the location of the Security settings in the device display hierarchy.
164 1601-0651
< L' ' K L>

< L' =E'
' K L>
=E
G (( <((
' <((
= > ? @ (
<(( =
<(( = A>
<((
A ((B> C

"#$%&# ? J K>

AD (E FA <>>((
D (E FA <>>((
(E A H I
AD > ( FA <>>((
D > ( FA <>>((
> ( < LD A
MNOPQRN ST UVR MNWNX YNZ
[.\]25. 7^ _65 àb )*+,-.
HB A ((B>
)*+,-. /012,2345+465
' '( 7+338650
'@ A ((B>
HB A ((B>
)*+,-. 9:.5+465
7+338650
'@ A ((B>
! ;

Figure 74: Security Settings Structure
SECURITY SETTINGS
AUTHENTICATION METHOD
Range: Device, Server/Device, Device/Server
Default: Device/Server
The AUTHENTICATION METHOD setting allows user to configure the priority for authentication method for each
authentication attempt. If user selects Device Authentication, then only Local authentication will be utilized. The
relay will not communicate with RADIUS server for authentication. When user selects Server/Device
Authentication then the relay will first connect with remote RADIUS server for authentication but if that is not
reachable then it will authenticate user based on local database of credentials. If Device/Server
authentication is selected, then priority for authentication will be given to device credentials database driven. If
that fails, then the relay will try to connect to remote RADIUS server for authentication.
1601-0651 165
LOGIN
Range: Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Viewer
Default: Viewer
The setting allows a user to login with a specific role.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. If the wrong password is entered,
an Authentication Failed! message is displayed. If the maximum failed authentications occur, the Account
Blocked! message is displayed. Viewer is the default and it does not require a password.
LOGOUT
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting logs out the current user. When logging out from the panel, a switch to the Viewer role is performed.
DEVICE AUTHENTICATION
Range: Yes, No
Default: Yes
Device authentication setting offers the option to disable or enable this type of authentication. By default device
authentication is on, but the option to turn it off is provided and may be chosen when a RADIUS server is
accessible and will be used exclusively.
Only an Administrator role may change this setting. If an Administrator disables it, the role remains logged in, but
it is not allowed to write any other settings. In Enervista, a popup window warns that such changes are not going
to be saved.
If device authentication is disabled, Enervista still displays both radio buttons for choosing between device and
server authentication. See the EnerVista Setup section below. However the drop down menu, when local is
selected, has only the Administrator option. Once logged in, this role is only able to switch on device
authentication. After switching on the device authentication, the Administrator gains write access to all the other
settings without the need to logout and login again.
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS

Range: Yes, No
Default: No
An Administrator role is able to change this setting. This resets all the settings, communication and security
passwords, and all records.
ACCESS LOCKOUT
Range: 0-99
Default: 3
This is the set number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent authentication attempts for
the lockout period. A value of 0 means that Access Lockout is disabled.
ACCESS LOCKOUT PERIOD

Range: 0-9999 minutes
166 1601-0651
Default: 3 minutes
This is the set period of time in minutes of a lockout. A value of 0 means that there is no lockout period.
Note:
The lockout period is measured from the moment the maximum number of failed authentications has been reached.
Additional attempts to login during the lockout period do not extend this time.
ACCESS TIMEOUT
Range: 2-999 minutes
Default: 5 minutes
This is the time of idleness before a logged in user is automatically logged out. The Access Timeout setting
applies to all users, independent of the communication channel (serial, Ethernet or direct access).
ENABLE PASSWORD COMPLEXITY

Default: Disabled
This setting is available to provide the option of selecting between simple passwords and complex ones. It is
only available to the Administrator role.The default password is ChangeMe1# When password complexity is
enabled, it follows the rules defined in Security.
SYSLOG PRIMARY IP ADDRESS

Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254
Default: 0.0.0.0
This is the Primary IP address of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.
SYSLOG SECONDARY IP ADDRESS

Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254
Default: 0.0.0.0
This is the Secondary IP address of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.
SYSLOG PORT NUMBER

Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 514
This sets the UDP port number of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.
SETPOINT ACCESS
Range: Off, On, Digital Input
Default: Off
This setting is only available to the Administrator role. Setpoint Access may be assigned to a digital input.
When the digital input is activated, the user has Administrator access to the front panel.
1601-0651 167
FACTORY SERVICE MODE

Default: Disabled
When the feature is Enabled, the Factory role is accessible and the device can enter factory service mode.The
setting may be changed only by an Administrator.
Note:
The factory role password cannot be altered.
REQUIRE PW FOR RESET KEY

Default: Disabled
If this setting is Enabled and an alarm or trip occurs on the relay, the Reset button is not available to the
Operator. Only the Administrator can reset the relay with their password.
REQUIRE PW FOR D/T CHANGE

Default: Disabled
The date/time can be set by any role, if this setting is disabled. If this setting is enabled the date/time can only be
set by an Administrator.
CHANGE PASSWORD SETTINGS

The two menu items: Change Administrator Password, and Change Observer Password are available only to
Administrator, which is the only role that has permissions to change passwords for itself and the other local roles.
Each password change menu has two settings: New Password and Confirm Password. With Enable Password
Complexity enabled, each setting can have 6 to 20 alphanumeric characters. With Enable Password Complexity
disabled, each setting takes 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters.
If Enable Password Complexity is enabled, its rules must be obeyed. The default password is 0. The Viewer role
does not have a password associated with it, so there is no need to show it in the list of password changing roles.
ENERVISTA SETUP
For the software setup the following applies:
● Some security settings (such as Radius configuration) are only accessible and configurable through the
Enervista program.
● The Enervista software only allows for changes that are permitted by the user’s logged in role. For example,
the Observer role cannot write to any settings, but can only view.
168 1601-0651
● If the settings file is modified off line, the relay checks for the role of the user and allows the download only if
the role is Administrator (see table below). If the role is different, Enervista notifies the user via a pop-up
window that this operation is allowed only for Administrators.
● The Enervista Login Screen has two radio buttons to choose between device and server authentication.
○ If server authentication is chosen, the screen provides User Name: and Password: fields
○ If device authentication is chosen the User Name: field changes to a drop down menu. If device
authentication is enabled internally, the drop down menu contains all predefined roles. If device
authentication is disabled, the drop down menu has only the Administrator option. This is to allow for
switching on the device authentication. Once logged in, the Administrator is only able to turn on the
device authentication, but once the device authentication is enabled, access to all the other settings is
granted.
● A file download may be performed only from the relay.
Role
File Access Administrator Engineer Operator Viewer
Read (Download from 8 Series All files Yes Yes Yes Yes
845)
Write (Upload to 8 Series 845) Settings file Yes No No No
Firmware Yes No No No
Note:
In special cases security settings, such as RADIUS IP address and port, if modified offline, can result in interruption of service
when applied online, if the user is not aware of the change having been made. For this reason, if these settings have been
modified, offline, they will not be written during the file write operation.
RADIUS SETTINGS
The following are settings that need to be configured through Enervista in order to set up communication with two
RADIUS servers. For configuring the RADIUS server itself, consult the RADIUS documentation. An example is
provided, see Communications Guide.
Setting Name Description Range Default Units Minimum
Permissions
Primary Radius IP IP address of primary Radius 0.0.0.0 to 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address server. Default value indicates no 223.255.255.254
Primary Radius server is
configured, and so Radius is
disabled.
Secondary Radius IP address of primary Radius 0.0.0.0 to 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
IP Address server. Default value indicates no 223.255.255.254
Secondary Radius server is
configured, and so Radius is
disabled.
Primary Radius authentication port 1 to 65535 1812 - Administrator
Authentication Port
Vendor ID An identifier that specifies Radius 1 to 65535 Value that - Administrator
vendor specific attributes used represents General
with the protocol. Electric (2910)
1601-0651 169
Radius Authentication method used by PEAPv0, EAP- EAP-TTLS - Administrator

Authentication Radius server. Currently fixed to TTLS, PEAP, PAP
Method EAP-TTLS.
Timeout Timeout in seconds in between 0 to 9999 10 sec Administrator
re-transmission requests
Retries Number of retries before giving 0 to 9999 3 - Administrator
up
Radius Shared Secret used in See password N/A - Administrator
Authentication authentication. It is only displayed section for
(Shared) Secret as asterisks. This setting must requirements
meet the CyberSentry password
requirements.
Confirm Radius Confirmation of the shared See password N/A - Administrator
Authentication secret. Only display as asterisks. section for
(Shared) Secret requirements
SECURITY EVENTS
The event recorder records the events described in the following table.
Event Record Level Description
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4) A failed authentication with time stamp in UTC time
when it occurred.
USER_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Error (3) The user lockout has occurred because of too many
failed authentication attempts.
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Notice (5) An event to indicate setting change(s).
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged in.
MANUAL_LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged out or
timed out. Origin: Username and IP:MAC
TIMED_LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged out or
timed out. Origin: Username and IP:MAC
PRIM_RADIUS_UNREACH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Critical (2) RADIUS server is unreachable. Origin: RADIUS server
IP address and port number.
SEC_RADIUS_UNREACH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Critical (2) RADIUS server is unreachable. Origin: RADIUS server
IP address and port number.
CLEAR_EVENT_RECORDS, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) Clear event records command was issued.
CLEAR_TRANSIENT_RECORDS, ORIGIN, Notice (5) Clear transient records command was issued.
TIMESTAMP:
BYPASS ACCESS ACTIVATED Critical (1) Bypass access has been activated.
BYPASS ACCESS DEACTIVATED Critical (1) Bypass access has been deactivated.
PRIM_SYSLOG_UNREACHABLE Critical (2) SYSLOG server is unreachable. Origin: SYSLOG
server IP address and port number
SEC_SYSLOG_UNREACHABLE Critical (2) SYSLOG server is unreachable. Origin: SYSLOG
server IP address and port number
MODBUS TCP Enabled Warning (4) Port 502 has been opened for Read/Write
MODBUS TCP Disabled Warning (4) Port 502 Closed
MODBUS TCP ReadOnly Warning (4) Port 502 has been opened for Read Only operations.
170 1601-0651
Firmware Upload Successful Notice (5) [IEEE 1686] requires audit logging for firmware related
aspects. A software is generic that includes also
firmware.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
The following operands are added for CyberSentry.
CyberSentry FlexLogic Operand Description
AUTHENTICATION FAIL Operand set for Failed Authentication self test and alarm
UNAUTH SETTING CHANGE ATTEMPT Operand set for unauthorized setting change action
RADIUS SRV UNAVAILABLE Operand set for RADIUS servers unavailable self test
1601-0651 171
5.6 COMMUNICATIONS
8-series relays relays have a two-stage communications capability. The base CPU supports the Modbus protocol
through the Ethernet, USB and serial ports. In addition, the base CPU also supports the IEC 103, DNP serial, DNP
TCP/IP, Ethernet and TFTP protocol. Once the communications module option is added to the base, the
communications module supports IEC 61850 Ed.2. The communications CPU also supports Modbus TCP, DNP
TCP, TFTP, SFTP, and SNTP protocol.
5.6.1 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
Note:
The below settings are applied only to devices with IEC 61850 order codes.
MULTI-LEVEL CONTROL
Default: Disabled
When set to Enabled, control authority from multiple levels (Bay, Station and Remote) are allowed
simultaneously, based on Local/Remote status and status authority status. Otherwise only one level has the
authority to control, based on Local/Remote status and status authority status.
IED LOCAL STATUS

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates whether the IED is in Local or Remote mode. When the operand value is
set, the IED is in Local mode and any commands from remote protocols (IEC 61850, DNP3, IEC 104 or 103,
Modbus) are rejected.
5.6.2 MODBUS PROTOCOL

All Ethernet ports and serial communication ports support the Modbus protocol. The only exception is if the serial
port has been configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista
D&I Setup software (which is a Modbus master application) to communicate with the relay.
The relay implements a subset of the Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. The Modbus protocol
is hardware-independent. That is, the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations.
This includes USB, RS485, fiber optics, etc. Modbus is a single master / multiple slave type of protocol suitable for a
multi-drop configuration.
The relay is always a Modbus slave with a valid slave address range 1 to 254.
DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE

One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from a relay typically consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1
stop bit. This produces a 10-bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates.
Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The relay supports operation at 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps baud rate. The USB interface supports ModBus TCP/IP.
172 1601-0651
FUNCTION CODE SUPPORTED

The following functions are supported:
● FUNCTION CODE 03H - Read Setpoints
● FUNCTION CODE 04H - Read Actual Values
● FUNCTION CODE 05H - Execute Operation
● FUNCTION CODE 06H - Store Single Setpoint
● FUNCTION CODE 07H - Read Device Status
● FUNCTION CODE 08H - Loopback Test
● FUNCTION CODE 10H - Store Multiple Setpoints
● FUNCTION CODE 42H - Group Settings Read
● FUNCTION CODE 43H - Group Settings Write
When a ModBus master such as the EnerVista D&I Setup software communicates with the relay over Ethernet, the
relay slave address, TCP port number and IP address for the associated port must be configured and are also
configured within the Master for this device. The default ModBus TCP port number is 502.
5.6.3 MODBUS CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS

The following ModBus parameters are configurable:
Path:Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS

Default: 254
For the RS485 ports each 8 Series 845 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast
address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices
can have the same address, otherwise conflicts resulting in errors occur. Generally, each device added to the
link uses the next higher address starting at 1.
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER

Default: 502
The TCP port number used with Modbus over Ethernet. Note that the maximum number of simultaneous
Modbus connections supported over Ethernet is three for an 8 Series 845 without the communications card and
five for an 8 Series 845 with the communications card.
COMPATIBILITY
Range: Disabled, SR750, FlexMap
Default: Disabled
Compatibility mode changes the Modbus actual value registers to emulate an SR750 or SR735 relay. The
emulation supports typical actual value data for common data items.
Starting in version 2.90, choose FlexMap for SR750 support to include support for additional SR750 registers.
See the 8 Series Protective Relay Communications guide for the list.
1601-0651 173
Note:
When in compatibility mode the rear RS485 port and the rear Ethernet ports are not accessible via EnerVista D&I Setup
software so it is not possible to change any settings, view actual values or retrieve records. When in compatibility mode the
actual values supported can be read via the rear RS485 or rear Ethernet Ports using Modbus Master e.g. PLC or DCS. The
front USB port should be used for connection and EnerVista D&I Setup software activities.
FLEXMAP FILE
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: SR735XA290.000 or SR750XA290.000
The Flexmap File describes the translation from the Multilin Modbus memory map to the target Modbus memory
map.
For SR750 support enter the filename SR750XA290.000.
For SR735 support enter the filename SR735XA290.000.
MODBUS 485 READ ACTUALS

Range: Function Code 03h, Function Code 04h
Default: Function Code 04h
The Modbus 485 Read Actuals setting configures the Function Code that the relay responds to from a Modbus
Master when Actual Values are requested. Use this setting in scenarios where the Modbus Master can only
communicate using Function Code 03h for requesting Actual Values.
Note:
This setting applies only to the RS485 connection.
When this setting is changed to Function Code 03h, retrieving configuration settings through the RS485 port is not possible.
MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT

Range: 0 to 3600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
The Modbus Activity Timeout specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is
used to declare the Modbus Loss of Communication state.
The Modbus state is always Active if the Modbus Activity Timeout is 0 s.
MODBUS ERROR RESPONSES

The following exception response codes are implemented.
Error ID Exception Description
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 8
Series 845.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an
allowable address for the 8 Series 845.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within
range for the selected data address.
174 1601-0651
5.6.4 RS485
On the rear, the relay is equipped with two RS485 serial communication ports. The RS485 port has settings for
baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other
equipment connected to this port. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or a
PC using the RS485 port.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > RS485
BAUD RATE
Range: 2400, 4800, 9600, 1200, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
PORT PROTOCOL
Range: Modbus, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Default: Modbus
5.6.5 USB
The USB parameters are as follows:
IP Address: 172.16.0.2
IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
IP GWY IP Address: 172.16.0.1
Note:
Whenever the device is rebooted, the USB cable needs to be unplugged and plugged in again for proper communication to be
established over USB.
Connecting multiple relays over USB to a single PC is not possible because in the case of USB, the IP address of
the device 172.16.0.2 is constant.
5.6.6 ETHERNET PORTS

The following communication offerings are available.
Base Offering
● 2x Copper (RJ45) Ports
● Modes: 10/100 Mbps
● Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 61850 GOOSE, SNTP, IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)
1601-0651 175
Advanced Offering
● 4x Copper (RJ45) Ports or 2x Fiber
● Modes: 10/100 Mbps (copper)
● 100Mbps (Fiber)
● Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 61850 GOOSE, SNTP, IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)
5.6.6.1 NETWORK SETTINGS MENU

This section describes the network settings menu. If the communications card is installed network port 1 is no
longer available. When using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different network or subnet
using the IP addresses and mask, else communication becomes unpredictable when more than one port is
configured to the same subnet.
Note:
Use the softkeys and Down/Up key to enter an IP address. When entering an IP address you must press the BACK key first
to switch between softkey mode and the Down/Up key mode.
NETWORK 1, 2, 4, 5
Range: Standard IPV4 Address format
Default: 192.168.11.11 (Port 1)
Default: 192.168.11.12 (Port 2)
Default: 192.168.11.13 (Port 4)
Default: 192.168.11.14 (Port 5)
The setting sets the port’s IPV4 address in standard IPV4 format.
Note:
The setting is valid on Port 2(5) if Prt1(4) is set to Independent
Note:
The setting is valid on Port 2 if Prt1 Operation is set to Independent.
Note:
172.17.X.X/16 and 172.18.X.X/16 are reserved IPs.
PRT1(1,2,4,5) SUBNET IP MASK

Range: Standard IPV4 mask format
Default: 255.255.255.0 (Port 1, 2, 4, 5)
This setting specifies the IPv4 mask associated with the corresponding port IP address.
176 1601-0651
PRT1 OPERATION
Range: Independent, LLA, PRP
Default: Independent
This setting determines the mode of operation for ports 1 and 2: Independent, LLA or PRP.
Independent operation: Ports 1, 2, 4 and 5 operate independently with their own MAC and IP address.
LLA operation: Ports 1, 2, 4 and 5 use port 1’s MAC and IP address settings while port 2 is in standby mode in
that it does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link. If port 1 is active and the link
loss problem is detected, communications is switched to port 2 immediately. Port 2 is, in effect, acting as a
redundant or backup link to the network for port 1.
LLA (Link Loss Alert): is a proprietary feature supported by the fiber optic ports. When enabled, this feature is
able to detect a failure of the fiber link. If Prt1 Operation is set to LLA, the detection of a link failure by this
feature triggers the transfer of communications. If LLA is enabled on a port with a non-fiber SFP, the target
message LLA not supported by Prt (1 or 2) is displayed on the keypad and an event is logged.
Note:
LLA is not available on port 4,5 copper (RJ45). When the port operation is selected, the relay requires a reboot for the setting
to be applied.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) operation: Ports 1 and 2 use the same MAC address and combine
information at the link layer. It is intended to only be used if the two ports are connected to separate parallel
LAN’s. In this mode of operation, both ports cannot be connected to the same LAN. The receiving devices (8
Series 845) process the first frame received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy entity (LRE) or
similar service that operates below layer 2. Aside from LRE, PRP uses conventional Ethernet hardware but both
ports must know they are in PRP. Ports of PRP devices operating with the same Internet Protocol (IP) addresses
for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) must operate
correctly.
Duplicate Discard mode: This is the normal setting for PRP operation and once set it allows the sender LRE to
append a six-octet field that contains a sequence number, the Redundancy Control Trailer (RCT) to both frames
it sends. The receiver LRE uses the sequence number of the RCT and the source MAC address to detect
duplicates. It forwards only the first frame of a pair to its upper layers.
Note:
NOTE: redundancy operations work in pairs Port1/2 and Port4/5 only. It is not interchangeable between all ports.
5.6.7 ROUTING
When the configuration card is present, a default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes can be configured.
The default route is used as the last choice, if no other route towards a given destination is found.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Routing > Default Route
GATEWAY ADDRESS
Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1
1601-0651 177
This setting sets the gateway of the default route to be used by IP traffic sent from the relay, if no other route
towards a given IP destination is found.
This setting is available only if the communications card is present.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Routing > Static RT1 (2 to 6)
RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) DESTINATION

Range: Standard IPV4 network address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1
This setting sets the destination IPv4 route. This setting is available only if the communications card is present.
RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) MASK

Range: Standard IPV4 network mask format
Default: 255.0.0.0
This setting sets the IP mask associated with the route. This setting is available only if the communications card
is present.
RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) GATEWAY

Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1
This setting sets the destination IP route. This setting is available only if the communications card is present.
RULES FOR ADDING AND DELETING STATIC ROUTES

1. By default, the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to
saying that the static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and
gateway must also be kept as default values.
2. By default, the value of the default route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means the default route is not
configured.
3. Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route
destination is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all
the rules listed in Important Notes below.
178 1601-0651
4. To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. A default gateway address configured must
be validated against Rule #5, the next rule.
5. Routes are deleted by replacing the route destination with the default address (127.0.0.1). When deleting a
route, the mask and gateway must also be put back to their default values.
6. The default route is deleted by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127.0.0.1.
Note:
Host routes are not supported at present.
The route mask has IPv4 mask format. In binary this is a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed by one or more
contiguous bits of 0.
The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that RtDestination & RtMask == RtDestination
This is an example of a good configuration: RtDestination= 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
This is an example of a bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
The route destination must not be a connected network.
The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as well.
This can be verified by checking that: RtGwy & Prt4Mask) == (Prt4IP & Prt4Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt5Mask) == (Prt5IP &
Prt5Mask)
TARGETS
Wrong Route Config
Description: A route with mismatched destination and mask has been configured.
Message: Wrong route configuration.
Solution: Rectify the IP address and mask of the mis-configured route.
TOPOLOGY
Figure 75: Topology Example
In the topology example above, the Multilin device is connected through the two Ethernet ports available on the
communications card.
1601-0651 179
Port1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router 1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
Port2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to EnerVista D&I Setup software through Router 2.
Router 2 has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
Configuration
Network addresses:
PRT21IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2PRT2
SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
Routing Settings:
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0RT1
GATEWAY = 10.1.2.1
Behavior:
One static network route was added to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where a laptop running Enervista is located.
This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This gateway is the address of Router
2, which is aware of destination 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from the device and destined to
Enervista.
5.6.8 DNP PROTOCOL SETTINGS

Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP protocol
DNP Channel 1(2) Port

Range: None, Network - TCP, Network - UDP
Default: None
The DNP Channel 1 Port and DNP Channel 2 Port settings select the communications port assigned to the
DNP protocol for each channel. When set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on
channels 1 or 2. When set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP.
DNP Address
Default: 65519
The DNP address sets the DNP slave address. This number identifies the device on a DNP communications
link. Each DNP slave must be assigned a unique address.
DNP Client Address 1(2)

Range: standard IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
The DNP Client Address settings can force the device to respond to a maximum of two specific DNP masters.
DNP TCP/UDP Port 1(2)

180 1601-0651
Default: 2000
Note:
DNP Channel 1 Port will take the DNP TCP/UDP Port 1 and DNP Client Address 1 to allow/reject connections. The same
relation is used by channel 2.
DNP Unsol Resp Function

Default: Disabled
This setting will take effect for Ethernet communication only if the main card is present or a comms card is
available in the device. This setting enables/disables the unsolicited response functionality. It is disabled for
RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism.
DNP Unsol Resp Timeout

Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
Default: 5 s
Sets the time the relay waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.
Unsol Resp Max Retries

Default: 10
Sets the number of times the device retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the
master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries.
Unsol Resp At Startup (F/W version 4.00 onwards)

Default: Disabled
When relay is rebooting, unsolicited responses work without an Enable message needed, but this is only
possible once the Master resets the communications with the relay. This happens with both Reset Link or Class
1 request messages.
DNP Unsol Resp Dest Addr

Default: 1
Sets the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited
responses are sent is determined by the device from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP
message.
DNP Time Sync IIN Period

Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
Default: 1440 min
1601-0651 181
This setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the device. Changing this
time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
Note:
If the requirement for synchronization is more than a couple of seconds, consider synchronization via other means such as
IRIG-B or 1588. Given network asymmetry, the consistency of the network latency, clock drift, and additional delays due to
routers located between the client and the device all contribute error.
DNP Message Fragment Size

Default: 240
This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow
for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary
which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
DNP OBJECT 1(32) Default Variation

These settings allow selection of the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and
32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or
3 scans.
TCP Connection Timeout

Default: 120 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic
on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted.. This
frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
The menu path for the DNP/IEC104 point lists is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists
Binary Input/MSP Points
Analog Input/MME Points
Binary Outp/CSC/CDC Pnts
Binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure the binary inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol to
a maximum of 96 points. The data source for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic operands. For a complete list, see Format Code FC142.
The menu path for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Binary Input/MSP Points
Point 0 Entry
...
Point 255 Entry
182 1601-0651
Analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure up to 255 analog input points for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The menu path for the
analog input point (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Analog Input / MME Points
Analog IP Point 0 Entry
Point 0 Scale Factor
Point 0 Deadband
DNP ANALOG INPUT POINT 0(255) SCALE FACTOR

Range: / 0.001, / 0.01, / 0.1, / 1, / 10, / 100, / 1000, / 10000, / 100000
Default: /1
These are numbers used to scale analog input point values. Each setting represents the scale factor for the
analog input point. For example, if the DNP PHASE A VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to / 1000,
and the Phase A voltage is 72000 V, the Phase A voltage sent on to the relay is 72 V. The settings are useful
when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters.
Note:
A scale factor of / 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10.
DNP ANALOG INPUT POINT 0(255) DEADBAND

Default: 30000
The setting is the threshold value to define the condition to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input
data. Each setting represents the default deadband value for the associated analog input. For example, to
trigger unsolicited responses from the relay when phase A current changes by 15 A, the DNP Current Deadband
for Phase A current should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object
34 points can be used to change deadband values from the default for each individual DNP analog input point.
Whenever power is removed and re-applied, the new deadbands are in effect.
Binary output points (DNP) or CSC/CDC points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure the binary output points for the DNP protocol, or the CSC/CDC points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol to a maximum of 16 points. The data source for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by
assigning FlexLogic operands. The menu path for the binary output points (DNP) or CSC/CDC points (IEC
60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Binary Output / CSC/CDC Points
Binary Output Point 0 ON
Binary Output Point 0 OFF
...
Binary Output Point 31 ON
Binary Output Point 31 OFF
1601-0651 183
Note:
The DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104
point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

The DNP binary input data points are configured through the DNP/IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT/MSP
POINTS menu. When a freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the
corresponding frozen counter point.
● Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
● Change Event Object Number: 2
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time),
Configurable
● Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
● Change Event Buffer Size: 1024
● Default Class for All Points: 1
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION COUNTERS

The following details lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze
function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter
point. Digital Counter values are represented as 16 or 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be
unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.
BINARY COUNTERS
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze
and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without
time)
● Default Class for all points: 3
FROZEN COUNTERS
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without
time)
● Default Class for all points: 3
184 1601-0651
BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS POINT INDEX NAME/DESCRIPTION

● 0 Digital Counter 1
ANALOG INPUTS
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed
numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is
32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement. The deadbands for all Analog
Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in
volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values
according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
1. A default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3
scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings.
This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
2. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08,
are responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. For change event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the relay is not restarted, but the DNP process is
restarted.
5.6.9 IEC60870-5-104
The IEC 60870-5-104 communications protocol is supported on Ethernet ports 4 and 5 only. Setting changes
become active after rebooting.
Note:
Both DNP and IEC104 protocol can work at the same time, but consider that there is only one point map. So, the two
protocols use the same data mapping, i.e., same point index and same point source.
The relay supports up to two IEC104 client connections simultaneously.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > IEC 60870-5-104
1601-0651 185
Channel 1 Port
Channel 2 Port
Common Address of ASDU
Client Address 1
Client Address 2
TCP Port Number 1
TCP Port Number 2
Cyclic Data Period
Object Info Addrs Bnry
Object Info Addrs Analog
Object Info Addrs Countrs
Object Info Addrs Cmnd
Object Info Analog Param
By default the Object Information Address for the different data is as follows:
M_SP (Single Points) = 1000
M_ME (Measured value) = 2000
M_IT (Integrated Totals) = 3000
C_SC or C_DC (Single or Double Command) = 4000
P_ME_NB (Parameter of measured value) = 5000
Each Measured value has a Parameter of measured value (P_ME_NB) associated to its threshold.
The IEC 60870-5-104 Deadbands settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses
containing M_ME_NB_1 analog data. Each setting represents the threshold value for each M_ME_NB_1 analog
point.
For example, to trigger spontaneous responses when a current value changes by 15 A, the Analog Point xx
Deadband setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
P_ME_NB_1 (parameter of measured value, scaled value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the
default, for each individual M_ME_NB_1 analog point. There are three ways to send the measurands to the Master
station. The measurands are part of the General Group and Group 2, so when a general interrogation or group 2
interrogation takes place all the measurands are included in the response. Also, there is a cyclic data period setting
where it is configured in the scan period to send the measurands to the Master. And the last way, is by sending
spontaneously when a deadband overflow takes place. The IEC104 Channels sub-menu information is shown
below.
Commands are executed over the Binary Outputs. The first 8 Binary Outputs are configured to receive Select/
Operate Commands and the next 8 Binary Outputs are configured to receive Direct Execute Commands.
The IEC104 CHANNEL 1 PORT and IEC104 CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned
to the IEC104 protocol for each channel. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the IEC104 protocol can be
used over TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. The IEC104 NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the relay to
respond to a maximum of two specific IEC104 masters which own the configured IP Addresses. The settings in this
sub-menu are shown below.
186 1601-0651
Note:
IEC104 CHANNEL 1 PORT takes the Port Number 1 and Client Address 1 to allow or reject connections. The same
method is used by channel 2.
GROUPS OF DATA
The data is organized into groups in order to provide values when the controlling station requests them by a general
or group interrogation.
Group 1 is set by the 96 Single Points (M_SP).
Group 2 is set by the 32 Measured values (M_ME).
Group 3 is set by the 32 Measured thresholds (P_ME).
These 96 Single Points and 32 Measured Values are also sent as a response to a General Interrogation.
The Integrated Totals (M_IT) has its own Counter Group 1, and it is sent as a response to a General Request
Counter.
5.6.10 IEC60870-5-103
The point map for the 103 is different from the one shared by the IEC104 and DNP protocols. IEC 60870-5-103
serial communications protocol is supported on the rear RS485 port only.
The DNP, IEC 103 and Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously. Only one instance of DNP 3.0, IEC 103 or
Modbus can run on the RS485 serial port.
Path: SETPOINTS > DEVICE > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
IEC103 Common ASDU Addrs

Default: 0
IEC103 Sync Timeout

Range: 0 to 1440 minutes in steps of 1 min
Default: 0 min
All binary inputs are configured from FlexLogic operands. For a complete list, see Format Code FC142.
Note:
Pay attention when configuring the function type and information number of the different points, because they must be unique.
There is no mechanism in the EnerVista D&I Setup software or the front panel HMI to detect duplication of the information
index.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since IEC 60870-5-103 point lists
must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.
5.6.11 IEC 61850

The optional communications processor supports both the IEC 61850 GOOSE and IEC 61850 MMS Server service
as per IEC 61850 standard Ed. 2. The GOOSE messaging service provides the ability for the relay to Publish/
Subscribe Digital Input and other element statuses and its Quality and Timestamp to/from other IEDs with
supporting GOOSE messaging service. Server support allows remote control center, RTU/Gateway, local HMI or
1601-0651 187
other client role devices access to the relay for monitoring and control. The configuration of IEC 61850 services is
accomplished using the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
The IEC 61850 Server (i.e. the relay) reports information to the IEC 61850 Client, such as the Local HMI, RTU and
Gateway. This information consists of logical device data, data sets, data control block, logical nodes and their data
attributes.
Appendix B lists the implementation details of IEC 61850, including the logical nodes and number of instances for
each that are supported..
Data Obj data attribute Type FC Name Description
PhyHealth ENS This physical device’s health
stVal ENUMERATED ST 3 when ANY MAJOR ERROR ==On; 2
when ANY MINOR ERROR==On; 1
otherwise
5.6.11.1 IEC61850 CONFIGURATOR

The relay supports the IEC 61850 protocol, which is an order code option.
The IEC 61850 configurator is found in both the online and offline section of the EnerVista D&I Setup software for
configuring the online and offline settings file respectively.
ONLINE SETTINGS FILE

Two options are available to configure the relay’s online settings file.
1. Configuration
○ Configure the device through the Device Setup or Quick connect screen.
○ The IEC 61850 Configurator item is displayed after Maintenance.
○ Launch the online IEC 61850 configurator screen, by double-clicking on IEC61850 Configurator.
○ Select the required settings from the different tab displays (in the configurator screen) to complete the
IEC 61850 configuration.
2. Online right-click option
○ Select any online relay and right click on the selected item. More options become available for
selection, as described below.
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
188 1601-0651
Generate ICD file: The menu option generates a default ICD file with the respective order code option and saves
the file to the path selected previously.
Read Device Settings: The menu option reads all the settings from the relay by TFTP and creates a file with
extension *.CID. The created *.CID file consists of two sections. A private section where all non IEC 61850 settings
are available, and a public section in which IEC 61850 related settings are implemented.
When creating a CID file using a 3rd party ICT/SCL tool, ensure the following:
● The order code in the CID file must match the device order code if writing the CID file directly into the relay.
The Desc value in communication settings of the CID file must match the relay’s order code.
● The maximum allowed services must be equal or below the specified limits as in ICD/CID.
● Configure Datasets only in LLN0 logical node.
● Creating new LD, LN, and communication-AP settings is not recommended.
OFFLINE SETTINGS FILE

The Generate ICD File menu option generates a default ICD file with the respective order code option and saves
the file to the path selected previously.
1601-0651 189
IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR DETAILS

The IEC61850 Configurator allows editing of all sections of the IEC 61850 CID and ICD file. No other operations
can be performed in the EnerVista D&I Setup software if the IEC61850 Configurator is open. Close the IEC 61850
session to perform other operations.
Note:
When the IEC 61850 configuration is saved while online, the DEVICE IN SERVICE state (Setpoints > Device > Installation)
switches to Not Ready for the duration of the upload. This ensures that all new settings are applied before the device is
operational.
The IEC61850 Configurator consists of five sections:

● ICD/CID
● Settings
● Reports
● GOOSE Reception
● GOOSE Transmission
5.6..1 REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE EDITOR
190 1601-0651
5.7 TRANSIENT RECORDER

The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the other relay data at the point
of trigger. By default, data is captured for all AC current and voltage inputs available on the relay as ordered.
Transient record is generated upon change of state of at least one of the assigned triggers: Trigger Source,
Trigger on Any Pickup, Trigger on Any Operate, Trigger on Alarm, or Trigger on Trip.
The number of cycles captured in a single transient record varies based on the number of records, sample rate, and
the number of selected channels. There is a fixed amount of data storage for the Transient Recorder: the more data
captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Transient Recorder
NUMBER OF RECORDS
Default: 5
The selection from the range defines the desired number of records.
SAMPLES PER CYCLE

Range: 8/c, 16/c, 32/c, 64/c, 128/c
Default: 32/c
This setpoint provides a selection of samples-per-cycle for representing the waveform. The waveform records
can be viewed using the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When Overwrite setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones, meaning the relay will always
keep the newest records as per the selected number of records. In Protected mode, the relay will keep the
number of records corresponding to the selected number of records, without saving further records that are
beyond the selected number of records.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of record. For example at 20%
selected trigger position, the length of each record will be split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger
data.
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Default: Off
The trigger source can be any digital input: an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, a contact input, a
contact output, a virtual input or output, or a remote input or output.
1601-0651 191
TRIGGER ON ANY PICKUP

Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selection of On enables triggering of the recorder upon pickup condition detected by any of the protection or
control elements.
TRIGGER ON ANY OPERATE

Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selection of On enables triggering of the recorder upon operate state of any of the enabled protection or control
elements.
TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selecting the On setting enables triggering of the recorder when any of the protection elements configured as a
Trip function operates, or the state of the operand assigned to operate the #1 Trip output relay changes to
High.
TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selecting On setting enables triggering of the recorder when any of the protection elements configured as
Alarm, or Latched Alarm function operates, or the state of the operand assigned to trigger the Alarm LED
changes to High.
DIGITAL INPUT 1 to 64
Default: Off
ANALOG INPUT 1 to 16
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic analog parameter
Default: Off
Note:
A consecutive transient record cannot be triggered until the first record has been completed.
192 1601-0651
5.8 DATA LOGGER

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a configured rate. All data is stored in non-
volatile memory, where the information is retained upon a relay control power loss.
The data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period of time, or with larger number of channels
for a shorter period of time. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use.
The selection of the rate for logging data also affects the duration of recorded data. The data logger has longer
duration for sampling rates at longer periods of time (i.e. 1 minute, 30 minutes, 1 hour), as compared to sampling
rates at short periods (i.e. per cycle, or per second).
The recorded data can be downloaded to EnerVista D&I Setup software and displayed with parameters on the
vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
Note:
If data is not available for the entire duration of pre-trigger, the trigger position will be based on available pre-trigger.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Data Logger
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Continuous, Triggered
Default: Continuous
This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to Continuous, the data logger
actively records any configured channels at the rate defined in the Data Logger Rate setting. The data logger is
idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Triggered, the data logger begins to record any
configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the trigger (FlexLogic operand). The data logger
ignores all subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is
full, capturing of data stops until it is cleared.
Clear Data Logger
Once the data logger is full, a Clear Data Logger command is required to clear the data logger record, before a
new record can be started. Performing the Clear Data Logger command also stops the current record and resets
the data logger to be ready for the next trigger. The Clear Data Logger command is located at Setpoints >
Records > Clear Records. The Data Logger Storage Capacity table below shows an example of the
dependency of the data logger storage capacity with respect to the selected number of channels, and the
selected rate (time interval) at which the logged values are taken. The Data Logger buffer space can be
monitored to produce an alarm when the logged data occupies 80% of the data logger storage space. Target
message, and operand Data Logger ALRM is generated at this time.
TRIGGER
Default: Off
This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can
be used as a trigger source. The Triggered setting only applies when the Data Logger Function is set to
“Triggered”.
1601-0651 193
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 50% steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setpoint defines the percentage of buffer space that is used for recording pre-trigger samples.
DATA LOG FULL ALARM (4.10 onwards)

Default: Enabled
This setpoint disables/enables the Data Logger Full event and target message.
RATE
Range: 1 cycle, 1 second, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24
hours
Default: 1 minute
This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value is recorded.
CHANNEL 1(16) SOURCE

Range: Off, Any FlexAnalog parameter
Default: Off
This setpoint selects the metering analog value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The
parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT
hardware installed, and the type and number of Analog Inputs hardware installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list.
CHANNEL 1(16) MODE

Default: Sample
Range: Sample, Min, Max, Mean
This setpoint defines the type of sample to be logged in the data logger record with respect to the selected rate,
i.e the time interval selected under the setpoint Rate.
While enabled the Data Logger executes every protection pass and each of the four modes —Sample, Max,
Min or Mean. The FlexAnalog values are updated at protection-pass rate:
In Sample mode the data logger records the FlexAnalog value updated in the first protection-pass from the time
interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Max mode the data logger records the maximum protection pass value of the selected FlexAnalog parameter
from all protection pass values from the time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Min mode the data logger records the minimum protection pass value of the selected FlexAnalog parameter
from all protection pass values from the time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Mean mode, the data logger records the average value among all the values at protection-pass rate, from the
time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
The mean (average) is calculated simply using the well known ratio between the sum of all the values and their
number over the time interval.
194 1601-0651
Figure 76: Data Logger Storage Capacity
1601-0651 195
5.9 FAULT REPORTS

The relay supports up to 15 fault reports. The trigger conditions and the analog quantities to be stored are entered
in this menu.
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for
prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault
trigger as long as the pre-fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the
fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the
pre-fault trigger drops out, the element resets and no record is created.
The user-programmable fault report contains a header with the following information:
● Relay model
● Device name
● Firmware revision
● Date and time of trigger
● Name of pre-fault trigger (FlexLogic operand)
● Name of Fault trigger (FlexLogic operand)
● Active setting group at the time of pre-fault trigger
● Active setting group at the time of fault trigger.
The fault report continues with the following information:
● All current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the fault trigger)
● Pre-fault values for all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger)
● Fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle after the fault trigger)
Each Fault Report created can be saved as a text file using the Enervista software. The file names are numbered
sequentially to show which file is older than the other.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a
virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. A Fault Rpt Trig event is automatically created
when the report is triggered.
If a number of protection elements, such as overcurrent elements, are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first
operation of any element causing the OR gate output to become high triggers the fault report. However, If other
elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still
high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the reset time of protection elements, there is very little
chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the fault report must capture a usable amount of
pre and post-fault data, it cannot be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. Each fault report is stored
as a file to a maximum capacity of fifteen files. A sixteenth trigger overwrites the oldest file.
The Enervista software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the
date and time of trigger, the fault type and the distance location of the fault.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Fault Report
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
196 1601-0651
PRE-FAULT TRIGGER
Default: Off
This setpoint specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand
stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as Pre-Fault Trigger is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.
FAULT TRIGGER
Default: Off
This setpoint specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the
data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of
the report. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal.
ANALOG CHANNELS 1 to 32
These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency,
temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32 analog channels can be configured.
1601-0651 197
5.10 EVENT DATA

The Event Data feature stores 64 FlexAnalog quantities each time an event occurs. The relay is able to capture a
maximum of 1024 records. The Event Data behavior matches that of the Event Recorder. This is a Platform feature
and a Basic option so it has no dependencies.
There is no enabling or disabling of the feature. It is always on.
When changes are made to the Event Data settings, the Event data is cleared and the Snapshot.txt file is deleted.
The Event Record remains as is and is not cleared.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Event Data
PARAMETER 1 to 64
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog Parameter
Default: Off
198 1601-0651
5.11 FLEX STATES

The Flex State feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states or any inputs
can be used for efficient monitoring.
The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the
states which are of interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Flex States
PARAMETER 1 (to 256)

Default: Off
1601-0651 199
5.12 FRONT PANEL

The relay provides an easy to use faceplate for menu navigation through five navigation pushbuttons and high
quality graphical display. Conveniently located on the panel is a group of seven pushbuttons for Up/Down value
selection, Enter, Home, Escape, Help, and Reset functions. The faceplate includes three programmable function
pushbuttons with LEDs.
The ten pushbutton membrane faceplate (available for 850 only for hardware versions A and B, and all models for
hardware version C) includes ten programmable function pushbuttons and twelve programmable LEDs.
Note:
The USB port on the Front Panel is intended for connection to a portable PC.
5.12.1 PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

Path: Setpoints > Device > Front panel >Programmable LEDs
LED “IN SERVICE”

Default: In-Service
This setpoint requires assigning of FlexLogic operand to turn on the LED “In Service” This LED indicates that
control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are OK, and that the device has
been programmed.
LED “TRIP”
Default: Any Trip
The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the TRIP LED, when triggered. This
indicator always latches, and a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
The LED can be also triggered by the operation of a protection, control, or monitoring element with its function
selected as Trip.
LED “ALARM”
Default: Any Alarm
The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the ALARM LED, when triggered.
The indicator is a self-reset indicator, unless it is initiated from a protection, control, or monitoring element whose
function is selected as Latched Alarm. Resetting the Latched Alarm LED is performed by initiating a Reset
command.
LED “PICKUP”
Default: Any Pickup
200 1601-0651
The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the PICKUP LED , when triggered.
The indicator is a self-rest indicator and will turn off if the condition evolves into a fault or the measured
parameter drops below the pickup level.
LED x NAME
Default: LED 5
The setpoint is used to select the LED name by choosing up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
LED x COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Orange
The setpoint selects the color of the LED. Three colors are available for selection: Red, Green, and Orange.
Note:
This setting is not available for LEDs 18 to 24.
LED x TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operands
Default: Testing On
This setpoint requires the assigning of a FlexLogic operand to trigger the selected LED upon operation.
LED x TYPE
Range: Self-reset, Latched
Default: Testing On
The setpoint defines the type of LED indication as either Self-Reset (the LED resets after the FlexLogic
operand drops out), or Latched (the LED stays latched upon dropping out of the FlexLogic operand).
5.12.1.1 LED ALLOCATION TABLES
Default LED setpoints for 3 Pushbutton Front Panels

Name Color Trigger Type
LED1 In Service Green In-Service Self-Reset
LED2 Trip Red Any Trip Latched
LED3 Alarm Orange Any Alarm Self-Reset
LED4 Pickup Green Any Pickup Self-Reset
LED5 TEST MODE Orange Testing ON Self-Reset
LED6 MESSAGE Orange Active Target Self-Reset
LED7 LOCAL MODE Orange Local Mode ON Self-Reset
LED8 W1 BKR OPEN Green BKR1 Opened (BKR1) Self-Reset
LED9 W2 BKR OPEN Green BKR2 Opened (BKR2) Self-Reset
1601-0651 201
LED10 845 for 3 W3 BKR OPEN Green BKR2 Opened (BKR2) Self-Reset
Winding XFMR
LED10 LED 10 Orange Off Self-Reset
LED11 DIFFERENTIAL Red Pcnt Diff Blocked Self-Reset
BLOCKED
LED12 XFMR OVERLOAD Orange Overload OP Self-Reset
LED12 LOAD-LIMIT REDUCED Orange Load Limit Reduced Self-Reset
LED14 XFMR DE-ENERGIZED Orange Xfmr De-Energized Self-Reset
Default LED setpoints for 10 Pushbutton Membrane Front Panel

Name Color Trigger Type
LED1 In Service Green In-Service Self-Reset
LED2 Trip Red Any Trip Latched
LED3 Alarm Orange Any Alarm Self-Reset
LED4 Pickup Green Any Pickup Self-Reset
LED5 TEST MODE Orange Testing ON Self-Reset
LED6 MESSAGE Orange Active Target Self-Reset
LED7 PHASE A FAULT Orange Ph TOC 1 OP A Self-Reset
LED8 PHASE B FAULT Green Ph TOC 1 OP B Self-Reset
LED9 PHASE C FAULT Red Ph TOC 1 OP C Self-Reset
LED10 GROUND FAULT Green GND TOC 1 OP Self-Reset
LED11 50P INST OC Green Ph IOC 1 OP Self-Reset
LED12 850 with AR AR Lockout Orange AR1 LOCKOUT Self-Reset

Function
LED12 850 without AR 27 Phase UV Orange AR1 LOCKOUT Self-Reset
Function
LED 13 Not available Not available Not available Not available
LED 14 Not available Not available Not available Not available
LED15 PB 1 Orange PB 1 On (Open) Self-Reset
LED16 PB 2 Orange PB 2 On (Close) Self-Reset
LED17 PB 3 Orange PB 3 On (Reclose Self-Reset

Enbld)
LED18 PB 4 Orange PB 4 On (GndTrip Self-Reset
Enbld)
LED19 PB 5 Orange PB 5 On (Remote Self-Reset
Enbld)
LED20 PB 6 Orange PB 6 On (Hot Line Tag) Self-Reset
LED21 PB 7 Orange PB 7 On (Demand Self-Reset

Reset)
202 1601-0651
LED22 PB 8 Orange PB 8 On (Alt Settings) Self-Reset
LED23 PB 9 Orange PB 9 On (Trig Osc) Self-Reset
LED24 PB 10 Orange PB 10 On (PB Block) Self-Reset
5.12.2 PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Note:
The 10 pushbutton panel is available only for the 850 for hardware versions A and B, and for all models from hardware
version C.
The user-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off)
information. Depending on the faceplate three to ten pushbuttons are available for programming.
The digital state of the pushbuttons can be entered only locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton).
Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking and settings groups changes. The user-
programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection.
Figure 77: 3 Pushbutton Front Panel
1601-0651 203
Figure 78: 10 Pushbutton Front Panel
Each pushbutton asserts its own on and off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific
actions. Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of
the corresponding pushbutton; ON or OFF. This can be changed by programming the LED Trigger setting in the
Programmable LED settings menu.
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset
mode is programmed.
LATCHED MODE
In Latched Mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton.
The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by a Reset command or after a user-specified time delay.
The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through loss of control power.
204 1601-0651
The pushbutton is Reset (deactivated) in Latched Mode by directly pressing the associated active front panel
pushbutton. It can also be programmed to Reset automatically through the PB 1 AUTORESET and PB 1
AUTORESET DELAY settings. These settings enable the auto-reset timer and specify the associated time delay.
The auto-reset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) switching device control applications, where the
command type (CLOSE/OPEN) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must Reset
automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.
SELF-RESET MODE
In Self-reset mode, a pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the Dropout time
specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting. The pushbutton is Reset (deactivated) in Self-reset mode
when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting expires.The pulse duration of the
pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to
properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion
of the operating signals.
The operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCK setting. If
locking is applied, the pushbutton ignores the commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. The locking
functions are not applied to the auto-reset feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as Target Messages. In latched mode, user-
defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON or
changing to OFF.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Programmable PBs > Pushbutton 1(X)
FUNCTION
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled the pushbutton is not active and the
corresponding FlexLogic operands (both ON and OFF) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset the control logic is
activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed.
When in Self-reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the ON corresponding
FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the
deactivation of the operand is delayed by the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting. The OFF operand is
asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between ON and
OFF on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning Set and Reset operands). When in
Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power
supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power-up of the relay.
ID TEXT
Default: Open (PB1), Close (PB2), F1 (PB3), Gnd Trip Enabled (PB4), SCADA Enabled (PB5), Hot Line Tag
(PB6), Demand Reset (PB7), Alt Settings (PB8), Target Reset (PB9), PB Block (PB10)
Default: Start (PB1), Stop (PB2), F1 (PB3), Gnd Trip Enabled (PB4), SCADA Enabled (PB5), Hot Line Tag
(PB6), Demand Reset (PB7), Alt Settings (PB8), Target Reset (PB9), PB Block (PB10)
1601-0651 205
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide the ID
information of the pushbutton.
ON TEXT
Default: PB1 On (or PB[X] On)
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the
pushbutton is in the ON position.
OFF TEXT
Default: PB1 Off (or PB[X] On)
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the
pushbutton is activated from the ON to the OFF position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This
message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be “OFF” upon its release. The length of the “OFF” message is configured with the
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
The message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long
as Pushbutton 1 On operand is asserted, but not longer than the time period specified by the FLASH MESSAGE
TIME setting. After the flash time has expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed.
The instantaneous Reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or if
any new target or message becomes active.
The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to Pushbutton 1 Off operand and will be displayed in conjunction
with PUSHBTN 1 ID only if the pushbutton element is in Latched mode.
HOLD PRESSED
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
The timer is Reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the
pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 60 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton
hold timer.
AUTORESET
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton Autoreset feature. The setting is applicable only if the
pushbutton is in Latched mode.
AUTORESET DELAY
Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay for automatic Reset of the pushbutton when in the Latched mode.
206 1601-0651
LOCK
Default: Off
This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel
pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
DROPOUT TIME
Default: 0.0 s
This setting applies only to Self-reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton “active” status after
the pushbutton has been released. The length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse
duration.
The setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
1601-0651 207
>A
i h#
^ lk h# === " ===
B? bbim " == ==
i B == ==
lkk
ij g === g ===
>A
^ blkb
i h == h# ==
B II B W #" == " ==
A@ H A@ H ?B imi == ==
L" abc) G G kkl B == ==
FE
) FE
) ji
g ==

g ==
"f ? D) ? D)
& > >
" = 8< = 8<
^ DC4 DC4
-

!& bca
L" )
f"&

Y "^
r -
qp &!
MNO o
n
Y
MNO MNO
Z[
87
)6
5 U
/;0
)6 STR
EX0 5 bca
S S. )
FE V. %
W 3 L"

)/ `$
4/ -
9/ Z[ B%
1230
78) /.
65 e9
8/7
)6 MNO
5 MNO
Y Z[ MNO
"
LK -

KKJ " !&d"
L - - B
""
`@ **+
4
@ ] @
4
] A )
^ -\
^ --
_
Z[ MNO MNO
B B W
B II - A@ A@
A@ H ( !', V
H
G
G '%&
sTX
FE
FE )
? )) /)4 $" ?
>
?
> D)< "
9/ /90
> D< /90 9/ / "#! V3. 0< <6
**+ = = 8 "%
= 8
<6 87 312
2 D4 A
F6 ;4
D4
C ;4
:
)6
5
0/
.
) Ws C V :
Q
P
Figure 79: Pushbuttons Logic Diagram
208 1601-0651
5.12.2.1 TEN PUSHBUTTON ALLOCATION TABLES
PB1 to PB3 Default Values (3 pushbutton Front Panels)

PB1 PB2 PB3
Function Self-Reset Self-Reset Self-Reset
ID Text Open Close F1
ON Text PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON
OFF Text PB1 OFF PB2 OFF PB3 OFF
LED Trigger PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON
Hold Pressed 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Autoreset Disabled Disabled Disabled
Autoreset Delay 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s
Lock Off Off Off
Dropout Time 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s
Events Enabled Enabled Enabled
PB1 to PB10 Default Values (10 Pushbutton Membrane Front Panel)

PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10
Function Self- Self- Latched Latched Latched Latched Self- Latched Self- Latched
Reset Reset Reset Reset
ID Text Open Close Reclose Ground Remote Hot Line Demand Alternate Trigger PB Lock
Enabled Trip Enabled Tag Reset Settings Transient
Enabled Recorder
ON Text PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON PB4 ON PB5 ON PB6 ON PB7 ON PB8 ON PB9 ON PB10 ON
OFF Text PB1 OFF PB2 OFF PB3 OFF PB4 OFF PB5 OFF PB6 OFF PB7 OFF PB8 OFF PB9 OFF PB10
OFF
LED PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON PB4 ON Local PB6 ON PB7 ON PB8 ON PB9 ON PB10 ON
Trigger Mode
OFF
Hold 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 3.0s
Pressed
Autorese Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
t
Autorese 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s
t Delay
Lock PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON Off
Dropout 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s
Time
Events Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
1601-0651 209
5.12.3 TAB PUSHBUTTONS

The Tab Pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. Twenty
(20) Tab Pushbuttons are available for programming.
The digital state of the Tab Pushbuttons can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or
through Modbus by specifying the correct COMMAND sequence. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and settings groups changes. The Tab Pushbuttons are under the control level of password
protection. Only one pushbutton can be pressed at a time. If multiple pushbuttons are pressed simultaneously, the
button pressed first takes the priority.
The Tab Pushbutton settings can be accessed from Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Tab Pushbuttons > Tab
PB1. The Tab Pushbutton control can be executed by navigating to Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons. By
default, the summary page is shown to quickly glance at the active tab pushbuttons. The individual pages can then
be accessed from the summary page. Each Tab Pushbutton asserts its own OFF and ON FlexLogic operands (for
example, TAB PB 1 ON and TAB PB 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and can be used to
program specific actions. Each pushbutton has an associated “LED” indicator. By default, this indicator displays the
present status of the corresponding pushbutton ON state.
The activation and deactivation of Tab Pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is
programmed.
SELF-RESET MODE: In Self-reset mode, a Tab Pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed (the pulse
duration) plus the Dropout time specified in the settings. The pushbutton is deactivated in Self-reset mode when the
dropout delay specified in the Dropout Time setting expires. The pulse duration of the pushbutton must be at least
100ms to operate the pushbutton.
LATCHED MODE: In Latched Mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by directly pressing the associated tab
pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by another press of the same button. The state
of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through the loss of control power.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Tab PBs > Tab PB1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Self-reset (up to 3.xx)
Default: Disabled (from 4.10)
This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the
corresponding FlexLogic operands (both ON and OFF) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset the control logic is
activated by the pulse issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed.
When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the Tab PB [X] ON
FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the
deactivation of the operand is delayed by the Dropout Time setting. The OFF operand is asserted when the
pushbutton element is deactivated.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between ON and
OFF on each button press. When in Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-
volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon
subsequent power-up of the relay. When the pushbutton operand is in the ON state, the operand appears on the
target message until the pushbutton is pressed again to change it to the OFF state.
210 1601-0651
ID TEXT
Default: Tab PB 1 (or Tab PB[X])
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide the ID
information of the pushbutton. This text is used to describe the pushbutton in the FlexLogic operands.
LINE 1 TEXT
Range: 2 lines of alphanumeric characters
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 1 of the button when in the normal view.
LINE 2 TEXT
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 2 of the button when in the normal view.
LINE 1 SHORT TEXT

Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 1 of the button when in the summary view. This is also the
text that appears on the tabs when operating the pushbuttons from the Single Line Diagram view.
LINE 2 SHORT TEXT

Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 2 of the button when in the summary view.
BUTTON COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: Black
This setting specifies the background color of the Tab Pushbutton. If the button is disabled, the button color by
default is shown as gray.
TEXT COLOR
Default: White
This setting specifies the text color of the Tab Pushbutton.
INDICATOR COLOR
Default: Yellow
1601-0651 211
This setting specifies the color of the “LED” indicator for the Tab Pushbutton.
INDICATOR TRIGGER
Range: TAB PB 1 ON, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: TAB PB 1 ON
This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand to trigger the Indicator to change color from the default color (white) to
the selected color.
HOLD PRESSED
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
The timer is Reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the
pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 100ms.
AUTORESET
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Tab Pushbutton Autoreset feature. The setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in
“Latched” mode.
AUTORESET DELAY
Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay for automatic Reset of the pushbutton when in the “Latched” mode.
LOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This
locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
DROPOUT TIME
Range: 0.0 s to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.0 s
This setting applies only to “Self-reset” mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton “active” status after
the pushbutton has been released. The length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse
duration.
The setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
EVENTS
212 1601-0651
Default: Enabled
5.12.4 ANNUNCIATOR
The graphical annunciator panel provides an emulation of a conventional physical annunciator panel with backlit
indicators each inscribed with a description of the alarm condition that lights the indicator. The annunciator has 36
user-configurable (programmable) indicators. The indicators can be arranged in pages of 3x3 or 2x2 grids. Each
indicator can have up to 3 lines of configurable text. When the indicators are not active (i.e. a configured
FlexOperand for the annunciator is not triggered), the background is black and the foreground text color is gray.
When the associated FlexOperand becomes active, the background and the foreground turns brighter in color per
the color configuration. When disabled, the indicators are grayed out with no text.
Layout
If the grid layout is selected to be 3x3, the annunciator has 4 pages. If the grid layout is 2x2, the annunciator has 9
pages. The numbering of the indicators is shown as follows.
Grid Layout 3x3 Indicator Numbering

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4
Grid Layout 2x2 Indicator Numbering

Page 1 Page 2 Page # Page 9
33 3
3 3
Navigation
The annunciator panel can be displayed in two ways. By default, the annunciator panel is programmed as one of
the homescreens. This means that when on the home page, pressing the home button multiple times rotates
through all the homescreens. Alternatively, the annunciator can be accessed by navigating to Status\Summary
\Annunciator\Page1. Individual annunciator pages can also be assigned as a homepage. If the auto navigation
setting is enabled in the setup, the screen automatically jumps from home to the annunciator page with the first
active alarm. Pages with active alarms will have a maroon flashing tab pushbutton label. If other pages have active
alarms, the >> button will show a flashing label.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Annunciator > Annunciator Setup
RESET ANNUNCIATOR
Range: Off, any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
1601-0651 213
This setting designates a FlexLogic operand that, when activated, acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows
in the graphical front panel. This setting is the same as that defined under Setpoints > Device > Resetting >
Reset Annunciator.
The Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) FlexLogic operand is activated by the two sources of RESET command,
operand source and manual source. Each individual source of a RESET ANNUNCIATOR command also
activates its individual operand Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) or Reset Annunctr OP (MNUL) to identify the source
of the command. Both of these operands generate an event in the event record when activated. The Reset
Annunciator setting selects the operand that activates the Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) operand. The RESET
pushbutton in the front panel or the reset command from the EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series Setup
software activates the Reset Annunctr OP (MNUL) operand.
PAGE LAYOUT
Range: 3x3, 2x2
Default: 3x3
This setting selects the grid layout of the annunciator pages. The default 3x3 grid layout provides 4 annunciator
pages and 2x2 provides 9 pages.
AUTO NAVIGATION
Default: Enabled
This setting when enabled, automatically navigates to the annunciator panel page from where the indication was
triggered. While in the annunciator panel, if no action is taken, the screen returns back to the home page after
the timeout setting.
FOCUSED NAVIGATION
Default: Disabled
When this setting is enabled at the same time as the AUTO NAVIGATION setting, the page that has the active
indicator will come into focus. The focus will change to the newest indicator as soon as that becomes active.
Target Messages and Default Screens both have a lower priority than the FOCUSED NAVIGATION setting of
the Annunciator Panel.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Annunciator > Indicator 1(36)
ALARM INPUT
Range: Off, any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input operand used to activate the corresponding indicator.
ALARM TYPE
Range: Off, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Off
This setting specifies the alarm type. Self-Reset alarms track the state of the corresponding input operand.
Latched alarms can be reset using Reset pushbutton or through Acknowledgment via graphical front panel.
214 1601-0651
The alarm type of each annunciator indicator may be configured as Off, Self-Reset, or Latched. The default
mode is Off. In this mode, the indicator is grayed out without any text. In self-reset mode, the indicator’s inactive
state is by default in black background with dark gray color text. When the associated operand becomes active
(i.e. the assigned FlexOperand is triggered), the configured background color and foreground text color appears.
In latched mode, the configured operand causes the background to flash when it becomes active. If the alarm is
then acknowledged or reset, the background stops flashing. If the operand becomes inactive, the indicator
returns to its default colors. The behavior of these modes conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard - A-4-5-6
(self-reset), and M-6 (latched).
Note:
If the Annunciator Alarm was initiated by another element that is of a Latched type (e.g. Trip Bus), you must navigate out of
the Annunciator and then reset the latched element. This action will reset the latched element, the Annunciator Alarm and
also the Trip LED if applicable.
State rma
Vsa F F
O
p

d R B
O Acwlg
N
State bnrma
Vsa
Figure 80: Self-Reset Mode
State: orma
Vsa : F F
Opd O N
State: arm
R B
R B
Ac wld g Vsa : FastF as
Ac wld g
AND
AND
Opd O
Op d O N
R B
Ac wld g
AND
Opd O N
State: bnorma
Vsa :
Figure 81: Latched Mode
When any annunciator page is displayed with an alarm condition, the navigation keys can be used to select an
indicator. Once selected, the alarm condition can be acknowledged by pressing the reset pushbutton or by pressing
the enter key. A confirmation message is displayed for acknowledging the alarm. Pressing the Reset or Enter key
again acknowledges the alarm and pressing the Escape button discards the message. When the alarms are active
under latched mode, a power loss retains the previous state of the alarm as the alarm states are stored in non-
volatile memory.
TEXT LINE 1 (2,3)

Range: 15 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: [blank]
1601-0651 215
These settings specify the displayed text on the corresponding line in the alarm indicator. Three lines can be
displayed with each line allowing up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
TEXT COLOR
Default: White
This setting specifies the color of the alarm indicator text.
BACK COLOR
Default: Red
This setting specifies the color of the alarm indicator background. When the indicator becomes active, the
background changes color from the default Black to the programmed alarm back color.
5.12.5 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the Front Panel Display
Properties setting.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display Properties
COLOR SCHEME
Range: Green (open), Red (open)
Default: Green (open)
This setting defines the color scheme for the breaker status. If it is programmed Green (open), the breaker open
status is shown in the color green on the single line diagram and on the device status.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME

Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response
to certain key presses during programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a
flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
SCREEN TIMEOUT
Default: 120 s
If no pushbutton has been pressed for certain period of time, the relay automatically reverts to its default screen.
If the Default Screens are Enabled, Default Screens will become active after the Screen Timeout expires. If the
Default Screens are Disabled, The Actuals\Summary page is displayed after the Screen Timeout expires.
DISPLAY INTENSITY
Range: 10%-100%
216 1601-0651
Default: 100%
The backlight can be reduced be make the screen easier to view under higher atmosphere lighting.
Note:
Only available on Membrane and 10 Pushbutton front panel
INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
Default: 300 s
When the Inactivity Timeout expires, the screen will dim to Inactivity Intensity.
If the Default Screens are Disabled, the Screen Saver images will become active when the Inactivity Timeout
expires. If the Defaults Screens are Enabled, the Default Screens will be displayed at the Inactivity Intensity
when the Inactivity Timeout expires.
If a new Target occurs and the Target Auto Navigation is enabled, the Target Screen will become active. If the
system is in an inactive state, the system will switch to an active state. The intensity will return to Display
Intensity. If targets are present, the Default Screens will still become operational after the Inactivity Timeout.
INACTIVITY INTENSITY
Range: 10% - 100%
Default: 50%
The inactivity intensity can be varied so that backlight is on at a low intensity instead of being fully shut off.
TARGET AUTO NAVIGATION

Default: Disabled
When the target auto navigation is set to Enabled, it will override the current menu page and go to the target
message page when a target is active.
The Active target Icon shown above, will be the only indication of active target messages.
LANGUAGE
Range: English, French, German, Polish, Russian, Ukrainian,
Default: English
This setting selects the language used to display the settings, metering, status, and targets. The range is
dependent on the order code of the relay.
1601-0651 217
5.12.5.1 SUPPORT FOR CYRILLIC LANGUAGES

The 8 Series of relays support the Russian and Ukrainian languages, but for this to work you also need to configure
your Windows system accordingly. You can do this by selecting the required language. Modify the settings in the
following locations:
● Control panel > Region > Adminstrative tab > Change System Locale > Language for non-Unicode
programs
● Control panel > Region > Language Preferences
For more information, refer to your Microsoft documentation.
5.12.6 SCRATCHPAD
You can enter up to ten lines of information under the message scratchpad screen. This information could be
installation notes, or any other information which may be useful, such as reminding operators to perform certain
tasks. You can enter these messages using the EnerVista D&I Setup software setup software or the front panel
keypad.
Messages can be displayed in the following ways:
● On the front panel, all ten scratchpad message lines are displayed under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front
Panel\Scratchpad
● On the front panel, this scratchpad screen can also be displayed as a default screen when the Scratchpad
option is selected under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Default Screen. The display disappears
after the message time-out period specified by the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Display Properties
\Message Timeout.
● On the front panel, this scratchpad screen can also be displayed as a FlexScreen when the relevant
FlexLogic operand is asserted. this can be set under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\FlexScreens
\FlexScreen [X] Operate, if Scratchpad is selected for the corresponding setpoint at the path: Setpoints
\Device\Front Panel\FlexScreens\FlexScreen [X].
Path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Scratchpad
Line 1(10)
Range: up to 26 alphanumeric characters
Default: Text 1(10)
This menu is used to enter user-defined text. 10 lines are available, and each line supports up to 26 characters.
This user-defined text can be entered from the front panel keypad or the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
5.12.7 DEFAULT SCREENS

The relay provides the convenience of configuring and displaying up to three default screens from a predefined list.
Each type of screen to display can be selected, and the display time programmed. The sequence of displaying the
screens starts after the time of inactivity programmed in the MESSAGE TIMEOUT setpoint, when no PB has been
pressed, and no target message is present. Pressing a pushbutton, or the presence of a target message inhibits the
sequential display of default screens. The screen displays resume only after the target messages are cleared, and
no PB pressing is recorded for 30 seconds. When configured the home screen is changed to the first screen
defined by this feature. Display timeouts also return to this first screen (i.e. default screen 1).
If the default screens feature is disabled and there are no home screens programmed, the home page will show the
Metering > Summary > Values screen after the message timeout inactivity period.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Default Screen
218 1601-0651
FUNCTION
Default: Enabled
This setpoint enables the feature. Displaying of the screen starts 30 s after setting the feature to “Enabled”,
providing no targets have been issued, nor a PB has been pressed.
DISPLAY TIME
Default: 10 s
The display time is the amount of time that each of the three screens are displayed within the display sequence.
DEFAULT SCREEN X
Range: varieties of screens for selection
Default: SLD (for Default Screen 1 only), Off (for others)
This setpoint enables the user to input the default screens. FW versions up to 3.xx offer 3 default screens. FW
versions 4.10 and onward offer 5 default screens.
DEFAULT SCREEN INTENSITY (not available from rev 4.10 onwards)

Default: 100%
The default screen intensity can be varied so that the backlight is at a low intensity instead of being fully shut off.
5.12.8 HOME SCREENS

The home screens allow the selection of a set of pages as home pages (max. 10). Multiple home pages are
configured and navigated to by pressing the home button repeatedly. Navigate through all available home screens
by repeatedly pressing the home button.
When returning to the home screen (either by pressing escape or directly pressing the Home button) through the
different menus, the last accessed home screen is shown. Subsequent presses of the Home button navigates to the
next programmed home screen on the list.
While accessing the home screens, the tab pushbutton navigation labels show the root menu – i.e. Targets, Status,
Metering, Setpoints, and Records. The exceptions are the Tab Pushbuttons screens which instead show
pushbuttons in the navigation labels.
If the default screens are enabled, the first default screen is shown after 30 seconds plus the inactivity period
defined in Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display Properties > Message Timeout. If the default screens
feature and screen saver are disabled, the screen defaults to the Values screen after the inactivity period.
When the home screens are programmed and the default screens feature is enabled but the screens are set to Off,
the last accessed home screen is shown as the home page.
By Default, the first home screen is configured to show the first single line diagram.
1601-0651 219
Note:
When on any single line diagram page, if an object is selected, the home button will not function. The selected object must
first be de-selected by pressing the escape button to be able to use the home button functionality again.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Home Screens
HOME SCREEN 1
Range: All available pages
Default: SLD1
HOME SCREEN 2
Default: Tab PB Summary
HOME SCREEN 3
Default: Annunciator Pg 1
HOME SCREEN 4
Default: Values
HOME SCREEN 5 to 10
Default: Off
5.12.9 FLEXSCREENS
The FlexScreens allow you to select a page to appear on the display based on the results of an OPERATE setting.
Up to five FlexScreens can be configured. When the OPERATE setting evaluates to a TRUE, the FlexScreen
configured will be displayed.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > FlexScreens
FLEXSCREEN 1
Default: Off
FLEXSCREEN 1 OPERATE
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 1.
220 1601-0651
FLEXSCREEN 2
Default: Off
Default: Off
FLEXSCREEN 3
Default: Off
Default: Off
FLEXSCREEN 4
Default: Off
Default: Off
FLEXSCREEN 5
Default: Off
Default: Off
1601-0651 221
5.13 RESETTING
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and target message on the display.
Depending on the application some auxiliary output relays can be programmed to latch after the triggering event is
cleared. Once set, the latching mechanism holds all the latched indicators, messages, and auxiliary output relays in
the set state, after the initiating condition has cleared, until a RESET command is received to return these latches
(except the FlexLogic latches) to the reset state.
The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset pushbutton, a remote device via a communication
channel, or any programmed FlexLogic operand. Executing the RESET command from either source creates a
general FlexLogic operand RESET OP. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual
operand RESET OP (PB), RESET (COMMS), and RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command.
RESET INPUT 1(2,3):

Default: Off
The setpoint selects an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands. The targets, LEDs, and latched output
relays reset upon assertion from any of the operands selected as Reset Inputs.
222 1601-0651
5.14 INSTALLATION
Path:Setpoints > Device > Installation
DEVICE NAME
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to the device.
DEVICE IN SERVICE
Default: Not Ready
Range: Not Ready, Ready
The relay is defaulted to the “Not Ready” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation
of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the “IN SERVICE” LED
becomes red. The relay in the “Not Ready” state blocks signaling of any output relay. These conditions remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the “Ready” state.
SERVICE COMMAND
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Range: Celsius, Fahrenheit
Default: Celsius
Selects engineering unit of temperature display.
LATCHED ALARM OPERATION

Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset (845, 850, 869, 889)
Default: Latched (859)
When set to Self-Reset while a protection element is set to Latched Alarm, only the Alarm LED will remain
latched. When set to Latched, both Alarm LED and element will remain latched.
REMOTE IO DETECT VALUE

Shows the letter type of the Remote RTD card Board ID installed (e.g. GGGG).
CURRENT CUTOFF
Range: 0.000 to 1.000 p.u. in steps of 0.001 p.u.
Default: 0.020 p.u.
VOLTAGE CUTOFF
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 in steps of 0.1 V
1601-0651 223
Default: 1.0 V
Note:
Lower the Voltage Cutoff and Current Cutoff levels with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements.
Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.020 pu” for current and “1.0 V” for voltage are
recommended.
OV/UV DPO RANGE

Range: 97–99% , 95-97%
Default: 97-99 %
This setpoint defines the drop-out range applicable for the voltage protection functions.
The enumerate value of ‘97-99%’ specifies that the dropout voltage level is achieved when the voltage level
drops below 2 % of the pickup value.
For ’95-97%’, the drop-out voltage level is specified when the voltage level drops below 4% of the pickup voltage
level.
For Undervoltage elements:
The ’97-99%’ value determines the drop-out condition of the pickup flag is given when the voltage level is higher
than 2% of the pickup voltage level.
On the other hand, the ’95-97%’ value establishes that the drop-out level of the pickup flag is given when the
voltage is higher than the 4% of the pickup voltage level.
The next table summarizes both conditions:
OV/UV DPO Range OV Functions UV Functions
(Dpo Level) (Dpo Level)
97-99% 2% [97-99% pickup] 102% [101-103% pickup]
95-97% 4% [95-97% pickup] 104% [103-105% pickup]
BKR 1 STATUS
Default: Enabled
Target Message for the breaker status is shown when the set to ‘Enabled’. When ‘Disabled’, all target messages
related to breaker status will be blocked.
BKR 2 STATUS
Default: Enabled
BKR 3 STATUS
Default: Enabled
224 1601-0651
5.15 SELF-TEST ERRORS

The relay performs self-diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to
ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating
either a minor or major problem. Minor errors indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection
and control functionality of the relay. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Caution:
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay does the following:

● Displays a detailed description of the error on the relay display as a target message
● Records the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder
● Flashes the ALARM LED
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● De-energize the relay assigned under setting Major Self-Test Relay if the relay is programmed for failsafe
operation or energized if programed for non-failsafe operation.
● De-energize all output relays
● Turn off the IN SERVICE LED
● Flash the TRIP LED
● Assert the Self-Test Trip OP FlexLogic operand
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder
When Alarm is selected as a function, upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● Flash the ALARM LED.
● Assert Self-Test Alarm OP FlexLogic operand.
● Display Major Self-test error as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Under both conditions, the targets cannot be cleared if the error is still active.
1601-0651 225
Figure 82: Minor Errors
Figure 83: Major Errors
226 1601-0651
Minor self-test errors

Message1
Order Code Error Hardware doesn't match order Every 1 second
code
CPU S/N Invalid CPU card doesn’t have valid Every 1 second
data to match the order code.
Slot “$” IO S/N Invalid2 IO card located in slot $ Every 1 second
doesn’t have valid data to
match the order code.
Comms S/N Invalid Comms card doesn’t have Every 1 second
code.
CPanel S/N Invalid Control Panel doesn’t have Every 1 second
code.
PSU S/N Invalid Power Supply Unit doesn’t Every 1 second
have valid data to match the
order code. If alert doesn’t self-reset then
contact factory. Otherwise
RTC Error The CPU cannot read the time Every 1 second
monitor re-occurrences as
from the real time clock
errors are detected and self-
Product Serial Invalid The product serial number Every 1 second reset
doesn’t match the product
type
Communication error between
CPU and Comms board
FLASH Error The permanent storage Every 1 second
memory has been corrupted
SPI Error Communication error between Every 1 second
CPU and LEDs, Keypad or
peripheral memory devices
Invalid MAC Address MAC address is not in the Every 1 second
product range
Calibration Error Unit has default calibration Boot-up and every 1 second
values
Clock Not Set Clock has the default time Every 1 second Set clock to current time
WiFi Default Settings SSID and Passphrase is the Every 1 second Set SSID and Passphrase
factory default
Link Error Primary3 Port 1 or Port 4 (depending on Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
order code) is not connected connected, check cable
the factory.
1601-0651 227

Message1
Link Error Secondary Port 5 is not connected Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
connected, check cable
the factory.
Traffic Error Primary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
on port 1 or port 4 malfunctioning devices
Traffic Error Secondary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
on port 5 malfunctioning devices
Ambient Temperature >80C The ambient temperature Every 1 second Inspect mounting enclosure
surrounding the product has for unexpected heat sources
exceeded 80C (i.e loose primary cables) and
remove accordingly
Event Rate High Abnormally high amounts of Every 1 second Ensure settings are not set
events have been generated close to nominal ratings.
so the relay has stopped Ensure FlexLogic equations
logging to prevent further do not have impractical timing
issues for status events
IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has Every 1 second Ensure IRIG-B cable is
been detected connected, check cable
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver
is functioning, and check input
signal level (it may be less
than specification). If none of
these apply, contact the
factory.
Version Mismatch CPU and Comms do not have Boot-up and Every 1 second Ensure that both the CPU and
the same revision on firmware Comms FW was uploaded
during the upgrade process
SelfTestFWUpdate The updating of the firmware Every 1 second Re-try uploading firmware. If
failed the upload doesn’t work a
second time contact factory
Remote CAN IO Mismatch RMIO card detection Every 1 second Check RRTD connections,
mismatch check if the RRTD
configuration is still valid,
Validate CANBUS IO.
1 Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures
2$ is the slot ID (i.e. F, G, H etc.)
3 To disable Link Error Primary target when not in use with SE order code, change IP address to 127.0.0.1
228 1601-0651
Major Self-test Error Latched Target Description of Frequency of Test What to do

Message Message Problem
Relay Not Ready No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
INSTALLATION setting whenever the settings and then set
indicates relay is not in PRODUCT SETUP the PRODUCT SETUP
a programmed state. INSTALLATION setting INSTALLATION setting
is altered. to Ready.
Major Self-Test (error Yes Unit hardware failure Every 1 second Contact the factory and
code) detected supply the failure code
as noted on the display.
Note:
When a total loss of power is present, the Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 8) is de-energized.
1601-0651 229
5.16 CLEAR RECORDS

The Clear Records command is accessible from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Path: Device > Clear Records
Records can be cleared by assigning On to the appropriate setting.
Note:
The Clear Records command is also available from Records> Clear Records, where the allowable settings also include
FlexLogic operands.
230 1601-0651
CHAPTER 6
SYSTEM SETPOINTS
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints
232 1601-0651

System menu hierarchy 234
Current Sensing 235
Voltage sensing 236
Power Sensing 238
Power System 239
Preset Values 241
Transformer 242
Breakers 284
Switches 287
FlexCurves 291
1601-0651 233
6.2 SYSTEM MENU HIERARCHY
Figure 84: Device Display Hierarchy
234 1601-0651
6.3 CURRENT SENSING

The names and the configuration of the current banks below apply only to the protection of either two-winding
transformers with voltage, or three-winding transformers.
Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > CT Bank 1-J1
CT BANK NAME
Range: Any combination of 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
PHASE CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 12000 A in steps of 1A (up to FW 3.xx)
Range: 1 A to 50000 A in steps of 1A (from FW 4.10)
Default : 500 A
Enter the phase CT primary current for current sensing bank J1.
GROUND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 12000 A
Range: 1 A to 50000 A in steps of 1A (from FW 4.10)
Default: 500 A
Enter the rated Ground CT primary current for the ground current input for the selected Current 1 bank.
Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > Current Bank 2-K1
The names and the configuration of the current banks below, apply only to orders for two-winding transformers
without voltage.
Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > CT Bank 1-K1
1601-0651 235
6.4 VOLTAGE SENSING

The Voltage Sensing menu provides the setup for all VTs (PTs) connected to the relay voltage terminals.
Path: Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing > Ph VT Bnk1-J2
PHASE VT BANK NAME

Default: Ph VT Bnk 1-J2
Enter the name of the phase voltage from bank J2.
PHASE VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta, Single
Default: Wye
Select the type of phase VT connection to match the VTs (PTs) connected to the relay.
PHASE VT SECONDARY
Range: 10.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 120.0 V
Select the output secondary voltage for phase VTs connected to the J2 bank.
PHASE VT RATIO
Range: 1.00 to 5000.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
Select the phase VT ratio to match the ratio of the VTs connected to the J2 bank.
AUX. VT NAME
Default: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
Enter the name of the auxiliary voltage from bank J2.
AUX. VT CONNECTION
Range: Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vn
Default: Van
Select the voltage type corresponding to the one applied to the Aux VT relay terminals from bank J2. Select Vn
(neutral voltage), if the neutral voltage is applied to the relay auxiliary VT.
AUX. VT SECONDARY
Range: 10.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 120.0 V
Select the output secondary voltage of the aux. VT connected to the aux. VT input from bank J2.
236 1601-0651
AUX. VT RATIO
Default: 1.00
Select the aux. VT ratio to match the ratio of the VT connected to the aux. VT input from bank J2.
Note:
The nominal PHASE VT SECONDARY and the AUX VT SECONDARY voltage settings are the voltages across the phase VT
terminals and the auxiliary VT terminals correspondingly when nominal voltage is applied.
Note:
For example, on a system of 13.8kV nominal primary voltage, and a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connection, the secondary
voltage would be 115V, i.e. (13800/14400)*120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to
neutral voltage which would be 115/√3 = 66.4 V.
Note:
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value
entered would be 120 V, i.e. 14400/120.
1601-0651 237
6.5 POWER SENSING

The power computation is performed using the voltage and current inputs. In cases when the connected VTs and
CTs have opposite polarity, the power sensing menu provides for inverting the power measurement.
Path:Setpoints > System > Power Sensing > Power 1 > Power (X)
PHASE CT&VT POLARITY

Range: Same, Inverse
Default: Same
When Inverse is selected, this setpoint inverts (multiplies phase currents by -1) the CT polarity for the phase
currents from CT bank, with respect to the phase voltages from the VT bank.
Note:
The setpoint for inversion of the power metering will be useful to avoid the physical inversion of the CT connections on the
relay. As the power metering will affect the power directional elements, the user must determine the correct forward and
reverse direction of the power, before setup.
RESET EVENT ENERGY

Default: Off
At the rising edge of the FlexLogic operand selected under this setpoint, all energy metering values (under
Metering > Energy 1(X) > Energy) are logged and reset to zero, and Reset Energy D/T is recorded and
displayed.
The logged values are displayed as the Last Event Pos(Neg) WattHours and Last Event Pos(Neg) VarHours
under Metering > Energy 1(X) > Energy Log.
An application example could be monitoring of the total energy accumulated at the end of an event or a shift
interval. An event/shift interval can be defined per the breaker status operand (open or closed) or operand
derived by the Time of Day Timer element. Time-based shift schedules can be set in the Time of Day Timer
element.
238 1601-0651
6.6 POWER SYSTEM

Path:Setpoints > System > Power System
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system
frequency cannot be measured from available AC signals. This may happen if the signals selected for frequency
tracking are not present, or a valid frequency is not detected. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the
frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting
for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
PHASE ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACB
Default: ABC
The selection of the PHASE ROTATION setting must match the power system phase rotation. The phase
sequence setting is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters. Note that this
setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the
relay labeled as a, b, and c, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
Default: Enabled
Frequency measurement is accomplished by measuring the time between zero crossings of the composite
signal of three-phase bus voltages, line voltage or three-phase currents. The signals are passed through a low
pass filter to prevent false zero crossings. Frequency tracking utilizes the measured frequency to set the
sampling rate for current and voltage which results in better accuracy for the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
algorithm for off-nominal frequencies.
The main frequency tracking source uses three-phase voltages. The frequency tracking is switched
automatically to the alternative reference source, i.e., three-phase currents signal, if the frequency detected from
the three-phase voltage inputs is declared invalid. The switching will not be performed if the frequency from the
alternative reference signal is detected invalid. Upon detecting valid frequency on the main source, the tracking
will be switched back to the main source. If a stable frequency signal is not available from any source, then the
tracking frequency defaults to the nominal system frequency.
Note:
In cases when the relay is ordered with phase voltage inputs, but voltages are not available on the relay (no PTs, or voltage
reads zero), the source for frequency tracking is the CT bank from the same card, as the voltage bank. For 845 relay orders
without VT inputs, the source for frequency tracking is K1 - the first CT bank from the card residing in K-slot. In this case
automatic changing of the frequency source is not permitted
VOLTAGE FREQ TRACKING SOURCE

Range: Ph VT Bnk1-J2, Ax VT Bnk1-J2
1601-0651 239
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2
240 1601-0651
6.7 PRESET VALUES

You can preset the following actual value accumulators. When the accumulator is preset with a new value, the relay
overwrites the previous actual value and continues the accumulation starting from the new value. The accumulated
value is displayed in Status or Metering.
Path: Setpoints > System > Preset Values
POS WATT HOURS

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
This value sets the Positive Watt Hours. The accumulated Positive Watt Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 POS WATTHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed value to the preset
value.
NEG WATT HOURS

This value sets the Negative Watt Hours. The accumulated Negative Watt Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 NEG WATTHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed value to the preset
value.
POS VAR HOURS

Range: 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
This value sets the Positive (negative) Var Hours. The accumulated Positive Var Hours are shown in METERING
> ENERGY 1 > PWR1 POS VARHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed metering value to
the preset value.
NEG VAR HOURS

Range: 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
This value sets the Negative Var Hours. The accumulated Negative Var Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 NEG VARHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed metering value to the
preset value.
1601-0651 241
6.8 TRANSFORMER
Percent differential protection is the main protection for power transformers with regards to detecting all types of
transformer internal fault. This protection is based on Kirchoff’s law, where the sum of all currents flowing in and out
of the protected equipment equals zero. However, when applying this law to the overall differential protection, one
must keep in mind that the direct summation of the measured currents per-phase, does not automatically result into
zero differential current. This is because:
1. The transformer voltage ratio defines different winding nominal currents
2. The winding CTs are not rated to the exact match of the winding nominal currents
3. Physically, the transformer windings are connected in Delta, Wye or Zig-Zag configuration, and they introduce
a phase shift.
4. The transformer voltage ratio defines different winding nominal currents
5. The winding CTs are not rated to the exact match of the winding nominal currents
6. Physically, the transformer windings are connected in Delta or Wye configuration, and they introduce a phase
shift.
For the correct performance of the overall percent differential protection, it is necessary to correct the magnitude
and phase relationships of the CT secondary currents for each winding, in order to obtain near zero differential
currents under normal transformer operating conditions. Traditionally, the phase shift between the currents from the
transformer windings has been corrected by connecting the CTs from the Wye winding in Delta connection, and the
CTs from the Delta winding in Wye connection. In the past, the magnitude correction has been accomplished using
interposing CTs, or tapped relay windings. This however is not required any more when installing the relay.
The relay simplifies the process by performing the magnitude and phase shift compensations automatically
(internally). Upon entering settings for the protected transformer and winding CT ratings, the relay automatically
calculates and applies the correct magnitude scaling to the winding currents as well as applying the correct phase
shift in order to prepare the currents for summation. To perform the correct currents compensation, all winding CTs
need to be connected in Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer).
Note:
When the Tap Changer detection feature is enabled on the relay, the algorithm automatically compensates the currents for the
differential computation based on the new voltage ratio corresponding to the detected tap.
6.8.1 GENERAL SETUP

Most of the setpoints from the transformer general setup are used for computation of the hottest-spot winding
temperature, aging factor, and accumulated loss of life.
Path: Setpoints > System > Transformer > Transformer Setup
REFERENCE WINDING
Range: Winding 1, Winding 2, Winding 3
Default: Winding 1
The reference winding (Wref) is the winding to which all other winding currents are scaled. That is, the per-unit
values of the differential current and the restraint current are based on the nominal of the CT of the reference
winding.
242 1601-0651
PHASE COMPENSATION
Range: Internal (software), External (with CTs)
Default: Internal (software)
Select the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay. If set to Internal (software), the transformer
magnitude and phase shift compensations are performed internally by the relay algorithm. If set to External (with
CTs), the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections. The relay still performs
magnitude compensation when “External (with CTs)” option is selected.
Note:
When the phase compensation type External (with CTs) is selected, the relay does not apply phase compensation internally
as per the entered winding angles from the transformer type selection. In this mode, the relay expects to measure already
phase compensated currents on its terminals. In this mode, the relay only performs magnitude compensation.
LOAD LOSS AT RATED LOAD

Range: 0.001 to 20000.000 kW in steps of 0.001 kW
Default: 100.000 kW
This setting is taken from the transformer nameplate. If it is not available from the nameplate, the setting value
can be computed as PR=In(W)2*R, where In(W) is the winding rated current and R is the three-phase series
resistance. The setting is used as input for the calculation of the hottest-spot winding temperature.
RATED WNDG TEMP RISE

Range: 55° C (oil), 65° C (oil), 80° C (dry), 115° C (dry), 150° C (dry)
Default: 65° C (oil)
This setting defines the winding temperature rise over 30°C ambient temperature. The setting is automatically
selected for the transformer type as shown in the following figure. The data reflects the data outlined in ANSI/
IEEE 57.91, ANSI/IEEE 57.92, and ANSI/IEEE 57.94 standards.
Rated winding temperature rise Power capacity Normal life expectancy at qH_R
Oil, 55° C £ 500 kVA 180,000 hours 95° C

Oil, 55° C £ 100 kVA 6.5x104 hours 95° C
Oil, 65° C £ 500 kVA 20 years 110° C
Oil, 65° C £ 100 kVA 6.5x104 hours 110° C
Oil, 65° C > 100MVA 6.5x104 hours 110° C
Dry, 80° C Any 20 years 140° C
Dry, 115° C Any 20 years 175°
Dry, 150° C Any 20 years 210° C
NO LOAD LOSS
Range: 0.001 to 20000.000 kW in steps of 0.001
Default: 125.000 kW
This setting is obtained from the transformer data and is used to calculate the aging acceleration factor.
1601-0651 243
TYPE OF COOLING
Range: OA, FA, Non-Directed FOA/FOW, Directed FOA/FOW, Sealed Self Cooled, Vented Self Cooled, Forced
Cooled
Default: OA
The setting defines the type of transformer cooling and is used to calculate the aging acceleration factor. The
values and their description for this setting are as follows:
OA: oil-air
FA: forced air
Non-directed FOA/FOW: non-directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
Directed FOA/FOW: directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
Sealed Self Cooled: as named
Vented Self Cooled: as named
Forced Cooled: as named
TOP OIL RISE OVER AMBIENT

Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
Default: 35°C
This setting is available from the transformer nameplate data.
XFMR THERMAL CAPACITY

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 kWh/°C in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00 kWh/°C
The setting is available from the transformer nameplate data. If not, refer to the following calculations.
For the OA and FA cooling types:
● C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs) + 0.04 (tank and fittings in lbs) +1.33 (gallons of oil), Wh/°C; or
● C = 0.0272 (core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.01814 (tank and fittings in kg) + 5.034 (L of oil), Wh/°C
For the Non-directed FOA/FOW or Directed FOA/FOW cooling types, the thermal capacity is given by:
● C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs.) + 0.06 (tank and fittings in lbs.) + 1.93 (gallons of oil), Wh/°C; or
● C =0.0272 (weight of core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.0272 (weight of tank and fittings in kg) + 7.305 (L of
oil), Wh/°C
For dry-type power transformers:
● C = 0.048 x (weight of copper winding); or
● C = 0.015 x (weight of core and copper windings from the nameplate); or
● C = 0.12 x (weight of aluminum windings); or
● C = 0.02 x (weight of core and aluminum coils from the nameplate)
WNDG THERMAL TIME CONSTANT

Range: 0.25 to 15.00 min in steps of 0.01
Default: 2.00 min
244 1601-0651
This setting is required for the insulation aging calculation. If this value is not available from the transformer data,
select “2 min.”
ENERGIZATION WINDING SOURCE

Range: None, CT Bank 1-J1, CT Bank 2-K1, CT Bank 2-K2
Default: None
Required for generating transient record or oscillography during an energization event of the transformer. This
setting enables you to capture current waveform through corresponding CT on the winding side where
energization happens on the transformer and compute/pick various parameters during an energization event.
Voltage bank J2 will be taken into consideration for generating voltage waveform based on the 845 order code.
YEAR OF MANUFACTURE
Range: 1950 to 2100
Default: 1950
This setting captures the manufacturing year of the transformer as present in the transformer nameplate data or
manufacturing records.
6.8.2 PHASE RELATIONSHIPS

Power transformers that are built in accordance with ANSI and IEC standards are required to identify winding
terminals and phase relationships among the windings of the transformer.
ANSI standard C.37.12.70 requires that the terminal labels include the characters 1, 2, 3 to represent the names of
the individual phases. The phase relationship among the windings must be shown as a phasor diagram on the
nameplate, with the winding terminals clearly labeled. This standard specifically states that the phase relationships
are established for a condition where the source phase sequence of 1-2-3 is connected to transformer windings
labeled 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
IEC standard 60076-1 (1993) states that the terminal markings of the three phases follow national practice. The
phase relationship among the windings is shown as a specified notation on the nameplate, and there may be a
phasor diagram. In this standard the arbitrary labeling of the windings is shown as I, II and III. This standard
specifically states that the phase relationships are established for a condition where a source phase sequence of I-
II-III is connected to transformer windings labeled I, II and III respectively.
6.8.3 MAGNITUDE COMPENSATION

The percent differential protection uses the phase-phase voltage and the CT primary setting of the Reference
Winding (wref) (selected by the setpoint Reference Winding under Transformer\General Setup), to perform
magnitude compensation for (bring to common base) the currents measured from the other windings.
To compute differential and restraint currents, the relay uses Winding 1 phase-phase voltage and the primary CT
rating from the Signal input used for Winding 1. The relay computes magnitude compensation factors for Winding 2
and Winding 3 currents as shown below:
● VW1, VW2, VW3: Phase-to-phase voltages (Setpoint) programmed for Winding 1, Winding 2, and Winding 3
● CTW1, CTW2, CTW3: Current transformer rated primary current (Setpoint) programmed in Current Sensing
menu and used as Signal Inputs to represent the currents from Winding 1, Winding 2, and Winding 3.
● Vmin: Minimum winding voltage
● ∆VTLC: Voltage difference between winding voltage at actual tap, and minimum voltage (Setpoint)
1601-0651 245
Case 1. The setpoint Tap Position Detection from the Tap Changer setup is set to Disabled, or the setpoint TC
Winding Currents are set to None
The setpoint Reference Winding allows you to select the winding reference. For example, for three winding
transformers, you can select as a reference Winding 1, Winding 2, or Winding 3. If you select a winding to be the
magnitude reference, the relay will directly calculate magnitude compensation factors for the other non-reference
windings based on the following formula:
Where CT[Wref], V[Wref] are the reference winding Phase-Phase Voltage (setpoint) and Phase CT Primary
(setpoint).
Note:
The equations above are used when the Tap Charger is not enabled (or the relay is ordered without a Tap Charger).
Note:
The magnitude compensation factor for the reference winding currents is equal to 1.
Case 2. The setpoint Tap Position Detection from the Tap Changer setup is set to Enabled, and CT bank is
selected for TC Winding Currents
The purpose of the tap changer, installed on one of the transformer windings, is to maintain transformer output
voltage to within a certain bandwidth. To do this, the tap changer either increases or decreases the turns of that
winding i.e., changes its phase-phase voltage, which in return leads to a different transformation ratio. When the
transformation ratio is changed, the nominal currents of the windings change as well, meaning that the computation
for CT mismatch based on the initially entered CT and ph-ph voltage per winding, will be different, than the actual
CT mismatch. This mismatch will appear as differential current.
To compensate for this differential current, the relay provides dynamic CT mismatch compensation based on
detection of the tap position.
The algorithm checks whether the Tap Changer function is enabled, and on which winding it is installed. To
determine the winding, the algorithm checks to see which winding has the same selection of Signal input as the one
selected for the tap changer.
If the Signal input selected for the OLTC (Onload Tap Changer) is the same as the one for the reference winding,
the magnitude compensation factors for each non-reference winding will be computed using the following equation.
If the CT bank input is not the same as the one of the reference winding (TC installed on non-reference winding),
the computation of the compensation factor for that non-reference winding is performed using the equation below.
246 1601-0651
For the other non-reference winding without the tap changer, such as in case of a 3 winding transformer, the
magnitude compensation factor is computed using the following equation.
Note:
The maximum allowed magnitude compensation factor (and hence the maximum allowed CT ratio mismatch) is 20.
6.8.4 PHASE COMPENSATION
Phase Compensation Reference: The overall percent differential protection from the relay uses either the Delta,
or the Zig-Zag winding (depending on the transformer setup) as a reference to perform phase shift compensation. If
the transformer has only Wye connected windings, the phase currents from the first Wye winding in the setup are
used as a reference.
1601-0651 247
The power system phase sequence must be set when describing the winding phase relationships, since these
relationships change, when the phase sequence changes. The example below shows why this happens, using a
transformer described in IEC nomenclature as Yd1.
Figure 85: Example Transformer
The Example Transformer figure shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a phase angle
in the delta winding lagging the respective wye winding by 30°. The winding currents are also identified. Note that
the total current out of the delta winding is described by an equation. Now assume that a source, with a sequence of
ABC, is connected to transformer terminals ABC, respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced
load are shown below.
Figure 86: Phasors for ABC Sequence
Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30°, which is in agreement with the transformer
nameplate.
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals A, C, B respectively. The
currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown in the next figure: Phasors for ACB Sequence.
248 1601-0651
Phasors for ACB sequence

Figure 87: Phasors for ACB Sequence
Note that the delta winding currents lead the wye winding currents by 30°, (which is a type Yd11 in IEC
nomenclature), which is in disagreement with the transformer nameplate. This is because the physical connections
and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed. The transformer
nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated phase sequence.
It is suggested that for the ACB sequence the phase relationship can be returned to that shown on the transformer
nameplate by connecting source phases A, B and C to transformer terminals A, C, and B respectively. This will
restore the nameplate phase shifts but will cause incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay, and is
therefore not recommended.
All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A, B and C terminals to the power
system phases A, B and C respectively. The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system
phase sequence of ABC, in accordance with the standards for power transformers. Users with a system phase
sequence of ACB must determine the transformer type for this sequence.
The following diagram shows the internal connections of the Y/d30 transformer from our example.
Figure 88: Wye/Delta (30° lag) Transformer
Under balanced conditions, the winding 2 phase currents lag the corresponding phase currents of winding 1 by 30°.
With CTs connected in a wye arrangement (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer), even after
magnitude compensation, the summation of the currents from both transformer windings will not result in zero
differential current, because they will NOT be 180° out-of-phase.
Traditionally, this problem was solved by connecting the CTs from the wye side of the transformer (winding 1) in a
delta. This compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the delta side (winding 2).
The relay performs the phase angle correction internally based on the setpoint “Angle With Respect to W1” from
the menu System > Transformer > Transformer Setup > see “Winding 2”, and the same setpoint from the menu
System > Transformer > Transformer Setup > see “Winding 3” for three-winding transformer protection.
1601-0651 249
Note:
The angle of Winding 1 is always 0°, and this setpoint is omitted from the Winding 1 setup menu.
The supports all standard two-, and three-winding transformer types, and a variety of non-standard applications,
where the selection of winding connection type and selected lagging angle with respect to Winding 1 are not
described in the table of standard transformer types.
Figure 89: Menu for transformer windings setup
As shown in the menu for transformer windings setup, the 30° lag of the Delta winding currents, will result in a 0°
phase shift applied to Delta currents (Delta –phase reference), and a 30° phase angle correction (phase shift)
applied to the winding 1 currents (Wye winding). These angle corrections are described in the table as Phase shift.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding
but not the other windings. Transformer windings that are grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero
sequence current flow in that winding, and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is
necessary.
250 1601-0651
The relay performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically, based on the settings
entered for the transformer. All CTs are connected Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). All
currents are phase and zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint
quantities.
The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0° applied to it. The phase
reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding with the lowest winding index, if one exists.
For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag windings, the first Wye winding is chosen.
The phase compensation angle φcomp is the angle by which a winding current is shifted with reference to the angle
of the reference winding, and is for each winding as follows
φcomp[w] = | φ[wf] – φ[w] | where Rotation = “ABC”
φcomp[w] = | φ[w] – φ[wf] | where Rotation = “ACB”
The following figure: Phase and Zero Sequence Compensation for Typical Values of φcomp, shows the phase shift
compensation equations of transformer winding currents, based on typical phase compensation angles φcomp, and
whether or not the zero sequence current is removed:
where:
IA[w] = uncompensated winding ‘w’ phase A current
IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding ‘w’ phase A current
1601-0651 251
COMP [ W] GRUNDI NG[ W] = NT I THI N ZNE GRUNDI NG[ W] = I THI N ZNE

Ap w A w --- -- ---
Bp w B w " & ) )
! $ # % . (('( ! $ # % , ('( * $ # % , (('( + $ # %
p w w " & ) )
+ $ # % . (('( + $ # % , ('( * $ # % , ('( ! $ # %

/01 3 2 4 : 777577 /0 3 2 4 9 7777577 /8 3 2 4 /01 3 2 4 : 775777 / 0 3 2 4 9 757777 /8 3 2 4
6 6 6 6
1 577
7 7 5
/; 3 2 4 : / ; 3 2 4 9 777 /0 3 2 4
77 7 7 1 5
/; 3 2 4 : /; 3 2 4 9 77 /0 3 2 4
7 7777 7 5
77
6 6 6 6
1 5 5
/8 3 2 4 : 77777 /8 3 2 4 9 777777 /; 3 2 4 1 5 5
/8 3 2 4 : 77777 / 8 3 2 4 9 777777 /; 3 2 4
6 6 6 6
1 & ) )
Ap w < w 0 $ # % . , (('( 8 $ # % > (('( 0 $ # % > (('( ; $ # %
Bp w < A w 1 & ) )
; $ # % . , (('( 0 $# % > (('( ; $ # % > (('( 8 $ # %
p w < B w 1 & ) )
8 $ # % . , (('( ; $ # % > (('( 0 $ # % > (('( 8 $ # %

?@F K J L ^ VVVQVV ?X K J L \ VVVVQVV ?Y K J L ?@F K J L ^ VVQVVV ? X K J L \ VQVVVV ?Y K J L
S S S S
F Q Q
?X K J L ^ VVVVV ?Y K J L \ VVVVVV ?@ K J L F Q Q
?X K J L ^ VVVVV ? Y K J L \ VVVVVV ?@ K J L
S S S S
F Q Q
?Y K J L ^ VVVVVV ? @ K J L \ VVVVV ?X K J L F Q Q
?Y K J L ^ VVVVV ?@ K J L \ VVVVV ?X K J L
S S S S

Ap w B w ?@F K J L ^ _VSV ?X K J L \ QVSV ?@ K J L \ QVVSV ? YK J L
Bp w w ?XF K J L ^ _VSV ?Y K J L \ QVSV ?@ K J L \ QVSV ?X K J L
p w A w ?YF K J L ^ _VSV ?@ K J L \ QVSV ?X K J L \ QVVSV ? YK J L

/@F 3 2 4 : 7775777 / X 3 2 4 9 757777 /@ 3 2 4 /@F 3 2 4 : 777757 /X 3 2 4 9 757777 /@ 3 2 4
6 6 6 6
F 5 5
/X 3 2 4 : 77777 /Y 3 2 4 9 777777 /X 3 2 4 F 5 5
/X 3 2 4 : 77777 / Y 3 2 4 9 777777 /X 3 2 4
6 6 6 6
F 5 5
/Y 3 2 4 : 77777 /@ 3 2 4 9 777777 /Y 3 2 4 F 5 5
/Y 3 2 4 : 77777 / @ 3 2 4 9 77777 /Y 3 2 4
6 6 6 6

Ap w < A w ?@F K J L ^ \ _VVSV ?@ K J L ` QVVSV ?X K J L ` QVVSV ?Y K J L
Bp w < B w ?XF K J L ^ \ _VVSV ?X K J L ` QVVSV ?@ K J L ` QVVSV ?Y K J L
p w < w ?YF K J L ^ \ _VVSV ?Y K J L ` QVVSV ?@ K J L ` QVVSV ?X K J L
Figure 90: Phase and Zero Sequence Compensation for Typical Values of φ comp
252 1601-0651
2 1 1- 1 1-
I Ap w = ------- IC w ------ IA w I Ap w = ------- I C w ------ IA w
1 1- 1 1-
I Bp w = ------- I A w ------ IB w I Bp w = ------- I A w ------ IB w
1 1- 1 1-
I Cp w = ------- IB w ------ IC w I Cp w = ------- I B w ------ IC w
2
!

$ (*** ,*** ,***
"# & % ' 0 "+ & % ' . "# & % ' . "/& % '
) ) )
$ (*** ,*** ,***
" / & % ' 0 "# & % ' . " + & % ' . " / & % '
) ) )
2 1 1- 1 1-
I +$ w = ------- I/ w ------ I# w I +$ w = ------- I / w ------ I# w
1 1- 1 1-
I#$ w = ------- I+ w ------ I/ w I#$ w = ------- I + w ------ I/ w
1 1- 1 1-
I/$ w = ------- I # w ------ I+ w I/$ w = ------- I# w ------ I+ w
3 ( , ,
" +$ & % ' 0 . *** " # & % ' 5 *** " + & % ' 5 *** " / & % '
4 ) ) )
$ (*** ,*** ,
4 " # & % ' 0 . " / & % ' 5 " + & % ' 5 *** " # & % '
) ) )
4 $ (*** ,*** ,***
"/ & % ' 0 . "+ &% ' 5 "# & % ' 5 "/ & % '
) ) )
33 < < < <

6 78 : 9 ; E ??????? 6 7 : 9 ; D ??????? 6@ : 9 ; 6 78 : 9 ; E ??????? 6 7 : 9 ; D ??????? 6@ : 9 ;
> > > >
8 <?
?????? <?
?????? 8 <?
?????? <?
??????
6@ : 9 ; E 6@ : 9 ; D 6 F : 9 ; 6@ : 9 ; E 6@ :9 ; D 6F : 9 ;
> > > >
8 < < 8 < <
6 F : 9 ; E ??????? 6F : 9 ; D ??????? 6 7 : 9 ; 6 F : 9 ; E ??????? 6 F : 9 ; D ??????? 6 7 : 9 ;
> > > >
Differential and Restraint Current Calculations

Two Winding Transformer
Differential currents are calculated as follows:
IdA = IAC[w1] + IAC[w2]
IdB = IBC[w1] + IBC[w2]
IdC = ICC[w1] + ICC[w2]

Restraint currents are calculated as follows:
IrA = max {|IAC[w1]| , |IAC[w2]|}
IrB = max {|IBC[w1]| , |IBC[w2]|}
IrC = max {|ICC[w1]| , |ICC[w2]|}

where IdA, IdB and IdCare the phase differential currents, and IrA, IrB, and IrC are the phase restraint currents.
Three-Winding Transformer
1601-0651 253
IdA = IAC[w1] + IAC[w2] + IAC[w3]
IdB = IBC[w1] + IBC[w2] + IBC[w3]
IdC = ICC[w1] + ICC[w2] + ICC[w3]

IrA = max {|IAC[w1]| , |IAC[w2]| , |IAC[w3]|}
IrB = max {|IBC[w1]| , |IBC[w2]| , |IBC[w3]|}
IrC = max {|ICC[w1]| , |ICC[w2]| , |ICC[w3]|}

EXAMPLE
Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data:
● Winding 1: CT Bank 1 – J1 = 500/5 CT ratio

● Winding 2: CT Bank 2 – K1 = 1500/5 CT ratio
● Transformer is 50% loaded
Magnitude Compensation
Based on 50% loading the winding currents are calculated as follows:
Winding 1 load current: Iload (W1) = 2.5MVA/(√3 * 13.8kV) = 104.5 Amps
Winding 2 load current: Iload (W2) = 2.5MVA/(√3 * 4.16kV) = 347 Amps
Since Winding 1 is always magnitude compensation reference, the currents from winding 1 , are scaled only to be
presented in times Winding 1 CT.
MW1 = 1 , - magnitude compensation factor for winding 1 - REFERENCE
Winding 1 currents = (MW1*Iload(W1))/CTW1 = 104.5/500 = 0.209 x CTW1
Magnitude compensation for winding 2 currents:
254 1601-0651
MW2 = (CTW2.VW2)/ (CTW1.VW1) = (1500*4.16)/(500*13.8) = 0.9043, -magnitude comp. factor for Winding 2
currents
Winding 2 currents = (MW2* Iload(W2))/CTW2 = (0.9043*347)/1500 = 0.209 x CTW2
To check that the measured currents from both windings will sum-up to zero after applying magnitude
compensation, one can perform the following simple calculations:
Phase Shift Compensation
From the transformer example, the phase reference winding is winding 2 (i.e.,wf = 2). The phase compensation
angle for each winding is then calculated as follows (Rotation = “ABC”):
φcomp[1] = -30°– 0° = -30° = 30° lag
φcomp[2] = -30° – (–30°) = 0°
The non-reference Wye winding will be rotated by -30° degrees to be in-phase and match the currents from the
Delta winding.
Per figure: Two-winding transformer connections for phase compensation angle of 30 lag, the relay will use the
following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations:
Winding 1 (Wye – grounded neutral):
IAp[w]= (1/√3)IA[w] - (1/√3)IC[w]
IBp[w]= (1/√3)IB[w] - (1/√3)IA[w]
ICp[w]= (1/√3)IC[w] - (1/√3)IB[w]

Winding 2 (Delta):
IAp[w] = IA[w]
IBp[w] = IB[w]
ICp[w]= IC[w]
The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows:
The differential and restraint currents would be as follows:

Differential currents:
IdA= 0 x CT
IdB= 0 x CT
IdC= 0 x CT
Restraint currents:
1601-0651 255
IrA= 0.209 x CT
IrB= 0.209 x CT
IrC= 0.209 x CT
6.8.5 MAGNITUDE, PHASE ANGLE, AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION

The complete magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation is as follows:
Winding 1 compensated currents:
IAC[w1] = M[w1] * IAP[w1]
IBC[w1] = M[w1] * IBP[w1]
ICC[w1] = M[w1] * ICP[w1]

where:
● IAC[w] , IBC[w], and ICC[w] = magnitude, phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents
● M[w1] = magnitude compensation factor for winding 1 (see previous sections)
● IAP[w] , IBP[w], and ICP[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents (see earlier)
● The magnitude compensation factor for the reference winding is 1.
6.8.6 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS
Two Winding Transformer

IdA = IAC[w1] + IAC[w2]
IdB = IBC[w1] + IBC[w2]
IdC = ICC[w1] + ICC[w2]
256 1601-0651
IrA = max {|IAC[w1]| , |IAC[w2]|}
IrB = max {|IBC[w1]| , |IBC[w2]|}
IrC = max {|ICC[w1]| , |ICC[w2]|}

where IdA, IdB and IdCare the phase differential currents, and IrA, IrB, and IrC are the phase restraint currents.
Three-Winding Transformer
IdA = IAC[w1] + IAC[w2] + IAC[w3]
IdB = IBC[w1] + IBC[w2] + IBC[w3]
IdC = ICC[w1] + ICC[w2] + ICC[w3]

IrA = max {|IAC[w1]| , |IAC[w2]| , |IAC[w3]|}
IrB = max {|IBC[w1]| , |IBC[w2]| , |IBC[w3]|}
IrC = max {|ICC[w1]| , |ICC[w2]| , |ICC[w3]|}
EXAMPLE
Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data:
● Winding 1: CT Bank 1 – J1 = 500/5 CT ratio

● Winding 2: CT Bank 2 – K1 = 1500/5 CT ratio
● Transformer is 50% loaded
Magnitude Compensation
Based on 50% loading the winding currents are calculated as follows:
1601-0651 257
Winding 1 load current: Iload (W1) = 2.5MVA/(√3 * 13.8kV) = 104.5 Amps

Winding 2 load current: Iload (W2) = 2.5MVA/(√3 * 4.16kV) = 347 Amps
Since Winding 1 is always magnitude compensation reference, the currents from winding 1 , are scaled only to be
presented in times Winding 1 CT.
MW1 = 1 , - magnitude compensation factor for winding 1 - REFERENCE
Winding 1 currents = (MW1*Iload(W1))/CTW1 = 104.5/500 = 0.209 x CTW1
Magnitude compensation for winding 2 currents:
MW2 = (CTW2.VW2)/ (CTW1.VW1) = (1500*4.16)/(500*13.8) = 0.9043, -magnitude comp. factor for Winding 2
currents
Winding 2 currents = (MW2* Iload(W2))/CTW2 = (0.9043*347)/1500 = 0.209 x CTW2
To check that the measured currents from both windings will sum-up to zero after applying magnitude
compensation, one can perform the following simple calculations:
Phase Shift Compensation
From the transformer example, the phase reference winding is winding 2 (i.e.,wf = 2). The phase compensation
angle for each winding is then calculated as follows (Rotation = “ABC”):
φcomp[1] = -30°– 0° = -30° = 30° lag
φcomp[2] = -30° – (–30°) = 0°
The non-reference Wye winding will be rotated by -30° degrees to be in-phase and match the currents from the
Delta winding.
Per figure: Two-winding transformer connections for phase compensation angle of 30 lag, the relay will use the
following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations:
Winding 1 (Wye – grounded neutral):
IAp[w]= (1/√3)IA[w] - (1/√3)IC[w]
IBp[w]= (1/√3)IB[w] - (1/√3)IA[w]
ICp[w]= (1/√3)IC[w] - (1/√3)IB[w]

Winding 2 (Delta):
IAp[w] = IA[w]
IBp[w] = IB[w]
ICp[w]= IC[w]
The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows:
258 1601-0651
The differential and restraint currents would be as follows:

Differential currents:
IdA= 0 x CT
IdB= 0 x CT
IdC= 0 x CT
Restraint currents:
IrA= 0.209 x CT
IrB= 0.209 x CT
IrC= 0.209 x CT
6.8.7 TRANSFORMER TYPES AND PHASE SHIFT COMPENSATION ANGLES

The figures below show standard two-winding and three-winding transformer types, and the phase compensation
angles which reference the phase reference winding used by the relay.
1601-0651 259
Figure 91: Two-winding transformer connections
260 1601-0651
1601-0651 261
Figure 92: Three-winding transformer connections
262 1601-0651
1601-0651 263
264 1601-0651
1601-0651 265
266 1601-0651
1601-0651 267
268 1601-0651
1601-0651 269
6.8.8 TRANSFORMER STATUS DETECTION

The relay can be set to detect the status of the protected transformer when energized or de-energized. The
detection of the transformer energized/de-energized status is set to produce operands, which can be used for
transformer monitoring applications, and to trigger an LED (operand set by the factory to trigger LED “Transformer
De-Energized”). The transformer status is detected based on measured voltage, or breaker status, which can be
supervised by a current above the programmed minimum level.
270 1601-0651
Detection by breaker status

When the ‘b’ auxiliary contacts from all switching devices (which can be used to energize the transformer) are
assigned to the ALL BREAKERS OPEN setpoints, closed contacts indicate de-energization. When Current
Supervision is enabled, any current exceeding the minimum energization current indicates energization.
Detection by voltage
When energization sensing by voltage is enabled, any voltage drops below the minimum energization voltage
indicates de-energization. However, if Current Supervision is enabled, any of the winding currents that exceed the
minimum energization current shows that the transformer is being energized.
Current Supervision
The Current Supervision is set to support the decision for the Transformer Energized or De-Energized status. If all
winding currents drop below the minimum transformer magnetizing current after transformer de-energization, this
will be added to the decision from the selected sensing method (Opened Breakers, or Voltage), and will indicate de-
energization. Any current exceeding the minimum energization current will indicate energization.
Path: Setpoints > System > Transformer > Xfmr Status Detection
SENSING BY BREAKERS OPEN

Default: Disabled
This method of sensing indicates that when all transformer breakers are detected open, the transformer must be
de-energized. For a more secure detection, the breakers open detection can be supervised by the detection of
the minimum current, when the Current Supervision setpoint is enabled.
ALL BREAKERS OPEN

Default: Off
Select the FlexLogic operand from the list representing to assert a flag when all transformer breakers are open.
This can be “52b” contacts from the transformer breakers wired in series before connected to the relay, or
another FlexLogic operand (Virtual Output) becoming high upon the open status of all breakers.
SENSING BY VOLTAGE
Range: Disabled, Ph VT Bank 1-J2, Ax VT Bank1-J2
Default: Disabled
Select Ph VT Bnk1-J2 to detect the transformer status if all three-phase VTs are connected to the phase VT
terminals on the relay. Select Ax VT Bnk1-J2 if only one voltage input is available from the system, and it is
connected to Vaux terminals of the voltage bank J2. In order for the relay to detect the transformer status
accurately, the VTs must be placed within the differential zone of protection between the Breaker and the
winding. If the VTs are placed outside the zone of protection, the transformer status will not be correct. Even
when the breaker is open, the relay can show the Transformer Energized status.
1601-0651 271
Note:
The transformer status detection will work even if only one voltage input is available from the power system. In such cases,
the voltage input must be connected to the appropriate phase voltage terminals on the relay. Since the other two voltages per
the logic diagram will be zero, the transformer de-energized status will be detected when the magnitude of the connected
single voltage input is below the minimum voltage setting.
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.85 x VT
Select the minimum voltage level required for the energized/de-energized transformer status. Note that during
faults the voltage tends to decrease. If the voltage stays below the minimum voltage for more than 50 ms, the
transformer will show the transformer de-energized status. This situation can be avoided if Current Supervision
is set to “Enabled”. In this case, even if all the voltages collapse below the minimum voltage level, the
transformer will still show energized, because during fault conditions at least one phase will measure substantial
current.
Note:
When Sensing by Voltage is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J1, the relay calculates delta voltages, and compares them against the
specified minimum voltage threshold given in times VT. If Wye is programmed for phase VT connection, the VT unit is
obtained by multiplying the programmed secondary voltage through the VT ratio and Ö3. If Delta is programmed for phase VT
connection, multiplication of Ö3 is not necessary.
Note:
When Sensing by Voltage is set to Ax VT Bnk1-J2, the minimum voltage threshold applies to the voltage measured at the
auxiliary voltage input from the J2 terminals..
CURRENT SUPERVISION
Default: Disabled
Current supervision can be used to add another element into one or another sensing mechanism for detecting
the Transformer Energized, or Transformer De-Energized status. When “Enabled” the relay scans all the winding
currents and compares the measurements against the programmed setpoint “Minimum Current” level.
MINIMUM CURRENT
Range: 0.020 to 0.500 x CT in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.050 x CT
Select the minimum current, below which the transformer is considered de-energized. Current supervision alone
cannot change the Transformer De-Energized status unless all transfer breakers are open or the voltage drops
below the Minimum Voltage level. Note that if no load is connected to a transformer which has been energized,
the current transformers from the closed breaker will detect only the transformer magnetizing current. In order to
have Transformer energized status supervised by current, the level of the minimum current must be below the
transformer magnetizing current.
When Enabled, a current level (< Minimum Current) alone does not change the Transformer De-Energized
status unless all transformer breakers are open or voltage drops below Minimum Voltage level. Moreover, when
272 1601-0651
Current Supervision is enabled, neither All Breakers Open nor a voltage less than the Minimum Voltage can
change the Transformer De-Energized status unless current falls below the Minimum Current level.
When Current Supervision is Disabled, transformer De-Energized status monitoring is based on the All Breakers
Open condition or voltage less than Minimum Voltage condition.
1601-0651 273
,+ ,+
*' *'
& 6=; &
:
E6 6=;
$%# $%#
7 E:6 rd
!" 6 !"
F
5
F .c3
U M- M- A9
^T] X X 004
\ 98
[
T
Z
TY
T
UV
U
QT
j
m
hi
ge
f
te
ND
OR
ND ND
ND ND
on xwvu
ND wx {z sq
nol vusq y p
k p
ND
,+
*'
&
=6
$%# E

!" :b
F _

_a
C
S M

M M M M M
< < < <
NOR M

S M
C
M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M
ND
< < < < < < < < <
M I I I
1 1 1 2 2 2
M W W W W W W W W W

1 1@ 1
@ @ )2
=6 =6 P =6 (J

?

?I =
?I L
P I
I G 27J
G

G
B 6E` B 1K
B _
S
=6
@
P S @ S
S
=6
@
=6 :_ J27
?I / I I I ?I ?I
> /21
1 1 1 2 2 2 P > L6 > K1 I I
L
C 5 M W C W W W W W W W W W 5 -?
5 HP M P
I
Figure 93: Transformer Status Detection Logic Diagram
274 1601-0651
6.8.9 THERMAL INPUTS

The relay can be set to monitor the hottest-spot winding temperature, the aging acceleration factor and the
transformer insulation life. In order for the relay to perform the correct calculations, you need to enter transformer
data and program RTD inputs for measuring ambient and top-oil temperatures. The following menu shows the
selections for ambient and top-oil temperatures.
Path: Setpoints > System > Transformer > Thermal Inputs
WINDING CURRENTS
Range: CT Bank1-J1, CT Bank 2 – K1, CT Bank 3 –K2
Select the bank representing the currents (loading) of the winding to which the thermal elements are applied.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Range: Monthly Average, RTD 1, RTD 2….RTD x
Default: Monthly Average
Select RTD input if the ambient temperature is to be measured directly. Select the Monthly Average setting
and enter an average temperature for every month of the year, if direct ambient temperature measurement is not
available.
Note:
The setpoints for average monthly temperatures will show on the screen only when the Monthly Average setting is selected.
In all other cases, these setpoints will be hidden.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AVG - Jan to Dec

Range: -60°C to 60°C (-76°F to 140°F) in steps of 1°C
Default: Jan= -20, Feb= -20, Mar= -10, Apr= 10, May= 20, Jun= 30, Jul= 30, Aug= 30, Sep= 20, Oct= 10, Nov=
10, Dec= -10
TOP-OIL TEMPERATURE
Range: Computed, RTD 1, RTD 2….RTD x
Default: Computed
Select RTD input for direct measurement of top-oil temperature. If such input is not available, select the setting
“Computed”.
Note:
Refer to SETPOINTS/RTD Temperature, on how to select RTD, to be used for measuring ambient and top-oil temperatures.
6.8.10 ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER

This section contains the settings to configure the tap position input. The relay offers tap position detection by
monitoring either a resistive input from the tap changer control circuitry, a dcmA analog input, or by Binary Coded
Decimal (BCD) inputs. Based on the detected tap, the relay dynamically corrects for CT ratio mismatch resulting
1601-0651 275
from the changes of the voltage ratio of the transformer. Thus, the percent differential function of the device can be
set for greater sensitivity.
Tap detection using Resistive Input

A typical tap position input layout is shown in the figure: Tap position input. Minimum tap position and minimum tap
voltage correspond to the TAP 1 label in the figure.
Figure 94: Tap position input
In this method of detection, the resistive output from the tap changer is connected to the Ohms input on the relay.
The maximum resistance supported by the Ohms input is 5.1kΩ. The user defines the minimum and maximum tap,
voltage increment per tap, and the Ohms per tap.
Tap detection using dcmA analog input

In this method, the user selects Analog Input 1 dedicated for detection of DC milliamp value corresponding to a tap
position. To detect the tap, the relay measures the dcmA current at the terminal of the Analog Input 1 and compares
it to the corresponding dcmA current computed for each tap.
Tap detection using BCD input

The Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) is another way of detecting tap position by using the combination of six bits each
driven by contact input. The user wires and selects the contact input per bit number. Each combination of six bits
corresponds to a certain tap position. Refer to the following table: All BCD combinations supported by the relay:
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Transformer > Tap Changer
TAP POSITION DETECTION

Default: Disabled
276 1601-0651
TC WINDING CURRENTS
Range: None, J1, K1, K2
Default: None
Enter the CT bank associated with the winding with tap changer. Enter 'None' if the transformer is not equipped
with a tap changer. Enter 'None' if automatic magnitude compensation based on tap position used for the
differential protection is not needed. The setting “None” can be selected in cases where either the transformer is
not equipped with Tap Changer, or it is equipped with Tap Changer, but it is not desired to automatically
compensate winding currents forming the differential current in the transformer differential protection, or in cases
where the differential protection is not used at all.
All transformer windings from 845 are associated with CT bank inputs. Depending on 845 ordering, the following
CT banks represent the winding currents:
1. 845 orders for two-winding transformers without voltage inputs:
○ K1 CT bank is used for Winding 1
2. 845 orders for two-winding transformers with voltage inputs:
○ J1 CT bank is used for Winding 1
3. 845 orders for three-winding transformers (voltage inputs always included):
○ J1 CT bank is used for Winding 1
Note:
If the Tap Changer setpoint TC Winding Currents is set to J1, K1, or K2, the computed tap position voltage will be used for
automatic magnitude mismatch compensation for the winding represented by the same CT bank currents. Otherwise, if the
setpoint TC Winding Currents is set to None, the mismatch magnitude computation is not automatically updated to include the
new transformation ratio. In such cases, the relay may display differential current, where this current will be higher for taps far
away from the tap representing the nominal winding voltage, and it will be lower for taps closer to the nominal voltage tap. It is
recommended to increase the minimum PKP setting of the Percent Differential characteristic to be above the maximum
differential current that can be seen at either Maximum tap, or Minimum tap.
TAP DETECTION INPUT

Range: BCD, Ohms In 1, Analog lp 1
Default: BCD
Select either BCD (Binary Coded Decimals), or Ohms In 1 or Analog Ip 1 input for detection of the tap positions.
The Ohms input provides maximum total resistance of up to 5.1 kΩ. For example, the maximum resistance
increment per tap for a 33-position tap changer should not exceed 151 Ω.If Analog In 1 is selected, the relay
measures DC mA current, and detects the tap position according to the selection for DCmA at Min Tap, and
DCmA at Max Tap setpoints.
1601-0651 277
Note:
If Analog Input 1 is selected as the tap detection input, then Analog Input 1 will not be available for use in any other
application. The Analog Input 1 is excluded from the list of analog inputs, and its range is forced to 0.000 – 20.000 mA. The
Tap changer monitors the measured µA. When the total number of taps per the tap changer setup is computed, the tap
position is detected based on minimum tap corresponding to the measured DCmA at MIN TAP, maximum tap corresponding
to the measured DCmA at MAX TAP, and the µA step obtained by dividing the total µA of DCmA at MIN TAP and DCmA at
MAX TAP by the total number of taps.
MIN TAP
Range: -19 to +35 in steps of 1
Default: -16
This setting defines the minimum tap from the tap changer. The relay uses the setting to signal when the
minimum tap is reached.
NEUTRAL TAP
Range: -17 to +37 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This setting defines the neutral tap position. The relay uses the setting to signal when the neutral tap is reached.
MAX TAP
Range: 0 to +39 in steps of 1
Default: +16
This setting defines the maximum tap from the tap changer. The 845 uses this setting to signal when the
maximum tap is reached.
MIN TAP VOLTAGE

Range: 0.01 to 20000.00 kV in steps of 0.01 kV
Default: 61.00 kV
Enter the voltage at the minimum position
VOLTAGE INCREMENT PER TAP

Range: 0.01 to 20.00 kV in steps of 0.01 kV
Default: 0.50 kV
Enter the voltage increment per tap change.
Ohms at MIN TAP

Range: 0 to 5100 Ohms in steps of 1 Ohm
Default: 33 Ohms
Enter the resistance in Ohms corresponding to the minimum tap. This setting is used only when Ohms input is
selected as “Tap Detection Input”.
278 1601-0651
Ohms at MAX TAP

Range: 0 to 5100 Ohms in steps of 1 Ohm
Default: 1089 Ohms
Enter the resistance in Ohms corresponding to the maximum tap. This setting is used only when Ohms input is
DCmA at MIN TAP

Range: 0.000 to 20.000 mA in steps of 0.001 mA
Default: 4.000 mA
Enter the DCmA current corresponding to the minimum tap. This setting is used only when Analog In 1 is
DCmA at MAX TAP

Range: 0.000 to 20.000 mA in steps of 0.001 mA
Default: 18.000 mA
Enter the DCmA current corresponding to the maximum tap. This setting is used only when Analog In 1 is
BCD BIT 1- 5 INPUT

Range: Off, Contact Input 1(X), Virtual Input 1(X), Remote Input 1(X)
Default: Off
The six BCD inputs require selection of contact inputs, virtual inputs, or remote inputs. The tap position is
detected by the state combination of high/low bits received from the tap changer mechanism.
BCD BIT 6 INPUT:

Range: Off, Contact Input 1(X), Virtual Input 1(X), Remote Input 1(X)
Default: Off
This input provides the configuration of the BCD Bit 6 input. The tap position provided by the transformer can be
either positive from 1 to 39, or positive and negative from -19 to 19.
BCD BIT 6 input provides the configuration of the positive BCD BIT 6 or the sign (-) of the BCD code.
The selection of BCD BIT 6 working mode is made according to the TAP MIN setting.
When the TAP MIN setpoint is configured with a negative value, the BCD BIT 6 will provide the sign(-) of the
BCD.
Hence, the maximum range for BCD tap detection of negative and positive taps goes from -19 to +19.
When, TAP MIN setting is positive the BCD BIT 6 INPUT provides the BCD 20 code. As a result, the full BCD
range goes from 1 to 39.
INVERSE TAP POSITIONS

Default: Disabled
1601-0651 279
When disabled, increasing the tap position increases turns and hence the winding voltage, used also for
automatic compensation of the currents mismatch, which otherwise could be seen as differential current upon
changing tap. This usually is the case when the OLTC(On-Load Tap Changer) is installed on the winding
connected to the load.
When enabled, increasing the tap position will decrease the ampere-turns of the winding. When the OLTC is
installed on the winding connected to the source, increasing the tap will have to decrease the turns, to maintain
constant voltage at the secondary winding connected to load. This usually is the case when the OLTC is installed
on the winding connected to the source.
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) inputs

To configure the BCD decoder inputs into an I/O card, you must program the BCD BIT x INPUT setpoints.
● With 4 BCD bits programmed, only 9 tap positions can be detected.
● Five BCD bits programmed can be used for detection of up to 19 tap positions.
● With all 6 BCD bits programmed, the relay can detect up to 39 tap positions.
The physical connection between the output BCD decoder and the I/O card (for five BCD bits programmed) is
shown in the next figure:
The selection of the suitable setting depends on the customer’s criteria. In both cases, when the BCD format is
chosen, the neutral tap position must be entered.
280 1601-0651
Figure 95: An example of BCD decoder connections to an IO_A card for up to 19 taps
All BCD combinations supported by the relay

MIN TAP BCD bit 6 BCD bit 5 BCD bit 4 BCD bit 3 BCD bit 2 BCD bit 1 TAP Position
Input Input Input Input Input Input
+Tap 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+Tap 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
+Tap 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
+Tap 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
+Tap 0 0 0 1 0 0 4
+Tap 0 0 0 1 0 1 5
+Tap 0 0 0 1 1 0 6
+Tap 0 0 0 1 1 1 7
+Tap 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
+Tap 0 0 1 0 0 1 9
1601-0651 281
+Tap 0 0 1 0 1 0 invalid
+Tap 0 1 0 0 0 0 10
+Tap 0 1 0 0 0 1 11
+Tap 0 1 0 0 1 0 12
+Tap 0 1 0 0 1 1 13
+Tap 0 1 0 1 0 0 14
+Tap 0 1 0 1 0 1 15
+Tap 0 1 0 1 1 0 16
+Tap 0 1 0 1 1 1 17
+Tap 0 1 1 0 0 0 18
+Tap 0 1 1 0 0 1 19
+Tap 1 0 0 0 0 0 20
+Tap 1 0 0 0 0 1 21
+Tap 1 0 0 0 1 0 22
+Tap 1 0 0 0 1 1 23
+Tap 1 0 0 1 0 0 24
+Tap 1 0 0 1 0 1 25
+Tap 1 0 0 1 1 0 26
+Tap 1 0 0 1 1 1 27
+Tap 1 0 1 0 0 0 28
+Tap 1 0 1 0 0 1 29
+Tap 1 1 0 0 0 0 30
+Tap 1 1 0 0 0 1 31
+Tap 1 1 0 0 1 0 32
282 1601-0651
+Tap 1 1 0 0 1 1 33
+Tap 1 1 0 1 0 0 34
+Tap 1 1 0 1 0 1 35
+Tap 1 1 0 1 1 0 36
+Tap 1 1 0 1 1 1 37
+Tap 1 1 1 0 0 0 38
+Tap 1 1 1 0 0 1 39
+Tap 1 1 1 1 1 1 Invalid
…. …. … … … … … …
-Tap 0 0 0 0 0 1 +1
-Tap 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-Tap 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
-Tap 1 0 0 0 0 1 -1
-Tap 1 0 0 0 1 0 -2
… … ... … … … … …
-Tap 1 1 1 0 0 1 -19
1601-0651 283
6.9 BREAKERS
The status of each winding breaker is detected by monitoring the state of either one, or two contact inputs. We
recommend you monitor the status of the breaker using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a, and 52b. However
using only one of them is also acceptable.
The breaker connection/disconnection to/from the power system is provided by monitoring the contact input BKR
CONNECTED. If the contact input is asserted, the breaker is considered to be connected to the primary system.
When the breaker is determined to be disconnected, the breaker state is shown to be neither open, nor closed. The
trolley is integrated with a circuit breaker (CB), which works as a Disconnect Switch. CB Trolley status based on the
contact input selected under the CONNECTED and BKR TROLLEY setpoints.
Path: Setpoints > System > Breakers
NAME
Default: BKRX
CONTACT INPUT 52a

Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the Breaker auxiliary contact 52a.
CONTACT INPUT 52b

Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the Breaker auxiliary contact 52b.
CONNECTED
Default: Off
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or disconnect switches switched-
on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches switched-off) from the system.
BKR TROLLEY
Default: Off
Select a contact input to show whether the Breaker Trolley is connected or disconnected from the system.
TRIP RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Any Output Relay
Default: Relay 1
284 1601-0651
This setting is typically available for two or more breaker applications. For single breaker applications, the setting
is hidden and trip relay selection is defaulted to Relay 1.Any output relay from the list of available output relays
can be programmed for breaker tripping action.
CLOSE RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay X
Default: Relay 2
This setting is typically available for two or more breaker applications. For single breaker applications, the setting
is hidden and close relay selection is defaulted to Relay 2.Any output relay from the list of available output relays
can be programmed for breaker closing action.
Breaker status depending on availability of contacts 52a and 52b

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Configured Configured
Open Closed
52a contact open 52b contact

Yes Yes 52a contact closed 52b contact open
closed
Yes No 52a contact open 52a contact closed
No Yes 52b contact closed 52b contact open
No No Breaker Not Configured Breaker Not Configured
Breaker status with both contacts 52a and 52b configured

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Off On BKR Opened
On Off BKR Closed
On On BKR Unknown State
Off Off BKR Unknown State
1601-0651 285
Figure 96: Breaker Connected/Disconnected (Racked-In/Racked-Out) Detection
^][ p SS^[
`cd 1 Fqsfdtu
C Aj aej jaj akk!

R
lj a ! e rjrj ane
o
S
5a A WY ZY[\ ]^_S
F a !=1, OO = 0 `cd 1 Or!
@
N
D
PB &IJK B6IL4I6 M&QTIJ
@
N
D WY ZY[\ ]^_S
C
R
`cd 1 e!
S
5b A
@
N
F a !=1, OO = 0 D
PB &IJK B6IL4I6 QPIUIJ
"#$%&'()* '+$-./2 WY ZY[\ ]^_S

@
N C
3B46 79. :;.;$<
D R `cd 1 !
"#$%&'()* '+$-./2
3B46 79> :;.;?:<
&IJK L&L6V
WY ZY[\ ]^_S
X
C EG mH
@ R `cd 1 f gh ijaj
N
D
8
Figure 97: Breaker State Detection logic diagram
286 1601-0651
6.10 SWITCHES
The Single Line Diagram (SLD) relays can be configured with up to 9 disconnect switches. The disconnect switch
detection is performed by monitoring the state/states of either one or preferably two contact inputs 89a and 89b.
Monitoring the status of the switch using both auxiliary contacts 89a, and 89b is recommended, however using only
one of them is also possible.When both contacts are programmed, the switch can be monitored for state
discrepancy, i.e. both auxiliary contacts OFF, or both auxiliary contacts ON during operation. Discrepancy Alarm
Delay can be programmed to reflect the transition of the switch during operation from Closed to Opened, and
Opened to Closed. If no auxiliary contact discrepancy is detected after the time delay expires, the switch will be in
one of its normal states, i.e. Opened or Closed. However, if contact inputs discrepancy is detected after the time
delay expires, the relay will issue a SW1(9) Discrepancy target message and illuminate the ALARM LED. The
switch discrepancy condition can be reset by the operand assigned under Reset Alarm setpoint, providing both
contact inputs 89a and 89b show normal states on the relay.
Path: Setpoints > System > Switches > Switch 1(9)
NAME
Range: 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: SW 1
Assign a user-defined name to the disconnect switch. This name is used in the SLD, flash messages related to
disconnect switch 1, and the event recorder.
CONTACT INPUT 89a

Default: Off
Select an operand (usually NO aux. contact wired to contact input in the relay) to reflect the status of the
Disconnect Switch auxiliary contact 89a.
CONTACT INPUT 89b

Default: Off
Select an operand (usually NC auxiliary contact wired to contact input in the relay) to reflect the status of the
Disconnect Switch auxiliary contact 89b.
ALARM DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
This setting specifies the required time interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 89a and 89b
auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, SW1(9) Discrepancy FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm and/or blocking purposes.
RESET ALARM
Default: Off
1601-0651 287
Select an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, which when asserted resets the Switch Discrepancy
state. Please note that resetting the discrepancy alarm will work only after no discrepancy condition exists
between the switch aux contacts 89a and 89b.
OPEN RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay 1, ..., Relay X
Default: Off
This setpoints selects an output relay from the list of available output relays that is used to open the Disconnect
Switch once an open command is issued either from the front panel or remotely. This output relay is controlled
from the Switch Control menu.
CLOSE RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay 1, ..., Relay X
Default: Off
This setpoint selects an output relay from the list of available output relays that is used to close the Disconnect
Switch upon issued close command from either front panel or remotely. This output relay is controlled from
Switch Control menu.
Note:
The selection of Output Relay for Open Relay Select and Close Relay Select has higher priority than other settings as follows:
If an Output Relay is first set to Operate"under a protection element for example, and then this same Output Relay is
selected under either Open Relay Select or Close Relay Select, this Output Relay is automatically reverted to Do Not
Operate and hidden from the menu of the protection element. Deselecting the Output Relay from Open Relay Select or
Close Relay Select unhides the output in the menu of the protection element showing the setting value Do Not Operate.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
This setting disables or enables the disconnect switch operation events.
TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Enabled
This setting disables or enables the disconnect switch operation Targets.
The logic for Switch configuration and the Open, and Close status is shown in the following tables.
Switch configuration with Open and Close status

Contact Input 89a Contact Input 89b
SwitchStatus
setpoint programming setpoint programming
Open Closed
89a contact open 89b contact

Yes Yes 89a contact closed 89b contact open
closed
288 1601-0651
Contact Input 89a Contact Input 89b

SwitchStatus
setpoint programming setpoint programming
Open Closed
Yes No 89a contact open 89a contact closed

No Yes 89b contact closed 89b contact open
No No Not Configured Not Configured
Switch status with both contacts 89a and 89b programmed
89a Contact Status 89b Contact Status Disconnect Switch Status
Off On SW[X] Opened

On Off SW[X] Closed
On On SW[X] Intermittent, SW[X] Discrepancy
Off Off SW[X] Intermittent, SW[X] Discrepancy
1601-0651 289
R

Q X
P
V opmn
jl
O T kh
N C ji
hg
L
M
BW
U
LK
BS
I
H
G&
GF
ED
&
R R R
J
Q Q Q
P P P
T
U U B C W
O O T O [
N BT N N CT
LM LM VT bcà` cf >? LM
^_ de W
L L ] LK
K BS K BS BS

X [
R U T C
C
T U
Q Z [ @A
P
WY C @ BT T
\ C

O
N
L >?
M >?
LK
BS
=>?
:;< :;< :;< :;<
>?
:;<
R

R

/. 8 Q /. 8 Q
P P
- 7$
,$ -7 -, $-7
+ 6 +$' 76
' -5
)*( 4 O * 95
)( 4 O
3 N N

&'% 2 LM &'% 32 LM
#$ 01 #$ 01
" LK " LK
! !

Figure 98: Disconnect Switch State Detection logic diagram
290 1601-0651
6.11 FLEXCURVES
The relay incorporates four programmable FlexCurves - FlexCurve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are
defined in the EnerVista D&I Setup software. User-defined curves can be used for Time Overcurrent protection in
the same way as IEEE, IAC, ANSI, and IEC curves. Each of the four FlexCurves has 120-point settings for entering
times to reset and operate, 40 points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the Pickup value) and 80 for operate (from 1.03
to 20 times the Pickup). This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data
points.
Path: Setpoints > System > FlexCurves
Note:
Use EnerVista D&I Setup software to select, design or modify any of the FlexCurves.
The following table for FlexCurves A, B, C, and D details the 120 points as well as the characteristic for each of
them, and a blank cell to write the time value when the operation (for I > Ipickup) or the reset (for I < Ipickup) is
required.
RESET TIME ms RESET TIME ms OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
ms ms ms ms
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
1601-0651 291
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0

0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The first two columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total,
correspond to the OPERATE curve. The reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98xPKP, and the operation
values are between 1.03 and 20xPKP.
The final curve is created by means of a linear interpolation from the defined points. This is a separate process for
the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program
included in EnerVista D&I Setup software, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus
making it easy to create.
Note:
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times lying between the user-entered points. Therefore,
special care must be taken when setting the points close to a Pickup multiple of 1; that is, 0.97*Ipickup and 0.98*Ipickup
should be set to a similar value as 1.03*Ipickup. Otherwise, the thermal model may incorrectly estimate the TCU% level
resulting in undesired behavior.
FLEXCURVE A, B, C, D CONFIGURATION WITH EnerVista D&I Setup software
292 1601-0651
EnerVista D&I Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best
approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a
specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves A, B, C, and
D are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the
pickup multiples start at zero (implying the “reset time”), operating time below Pickup, and operating time above
Pickup.
1601-0651 293
294 1601-0651
CHAPTER 7
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETPOINTS

Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints
296 1601-0651

Inputs 298
Outputs 303
1601-0651 297
7.2 INPUTS
Setpoints Device
System
Contact Inputs
Inputs
Data
VirtualCapture
Inputs
Outputs
Analog Inputs * Not for F/W 4.0 or later
Protection
Remote Inputs*
Monitoring * Remote Inputs is only available when

IEC 61850 is selected in the order code
Control
FlexLogic
Testing
894331A1
Figure 99: Inputs Display Hierarchy
7.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

The relay is equipped with a number of Contact Inputs, all of which are programmable apart from the ACCESS
switch input. These digital inputs have default names to match the functions of the inputs (differential, speed,
emergency restart, remote reset and spare).However, in addition to their default settings they can also be
programmed for use as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external
contact inputs. These Contact Inputs are dry input signals, which use an internal DC voltage source.
The Contact Inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to prevent false operation from
induced voltage. The debounce time is adjustable as per manufacturer specifications.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of one protection pass (1/8 cycle)
as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new Contact Input
state must be maintained for a user-configurable debounce time in order for the relay to validate the new contact
state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 3rd sample in a row validates the change of
state (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the new state will be declared and a FlexLogic
operand will be asserted at the time of a new protection pass. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that
validates the new state is used when logging the change of the Contact Input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 1 in
the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power
system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic
298 1601-0651
operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the debounce
(marked no. 2 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection
and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the Contact Inputs.
The FlexLogic operand response time to the Contact Input change is related to the debounce time setting plus up to
one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). For example, 8
protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact
debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 4.2 + 0.0 = 4.2 ms and 4.2 + 2.1 =
6.3 ms. The 4.2 ms is the minimum protection pass period that contains a debounce time, 3.0 ms.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the Contact Input event is time-stamped with 1 protection pass
accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 1 below). Therefore, the time
stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the Contact Input terminals that was not accidental as it was
subsequently validated using the debounce timer. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and
debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1 and 2 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no.
3 and 4 below) transitions.
Figure 100: Contact Input Debouncing Mechanism and Time-stamping Sample Timing
Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Contact Inputs

The Contact Inputs menu contains configuration settings for each Contact Input as well as voltage threshold for all
Contact Inputs.
NAME
Default: CI 1
1601-0651 299
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Contact Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes. The CI X ON (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to Contact Input X being closed, while CI X
OFF corresponds to Contact Input X being open. The default names of the contact inputs are matched to the
functions of the inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote reset and spare). However, in addition to
their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for
monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs
DEBOUNCE TIME
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 ms
Default: 10.0 ms
The Debounce Time defines the time required for the contact to overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this
time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per
manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
For example, to use Contact Input F1 as a status input from the breaker 52b contact, to seal-in the trip relay and
record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT 1 NAME: 52b
CONTACT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Enabled
Note:
The 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
7.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

The relay is equipped with 64 Virtual Inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from
the keypad or from communications protocols. This has the following advantages over Contact Inputs only:
● The number of logic inputs can be increased without introducing additional hardware.
● Logic functions can be invoked from a remote location over a single communication channel.
● The same logic function can be invoked both locally via contact input or front panel keypad, and/or remotely
via communications.
● Panel switches can be replaced entirely by virtual switches to save cost and wiring.
All Virtual Input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received.
Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
If this setting is disabled, the input is OFF (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If enabled, the
input operates as shown on the logic diagram below, and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to
received input signals and the applied settings.
300 1601-0651
NAME
Range: Up to 13 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: VI 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Virtual Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes.
TYPE
Range: Latched, Self-reset
Default: Latched
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is “Self-Reset,” when the
input signal transits from OFF to ON the output operand will be set to ON for only one evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations, then return to OFF. If set to “Latched,” the virtual input sets the state of the output operand
to the same state as the most recent received input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations
(i.e., a pulse of one protection pass). If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic
equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset time can perform this
function.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
S S
VT I T 1
FI T I :
D=0
E=1 A

ViL L 1 Lt I=1 T
!"#$%&'() *#+,./2
L- O
ViL L 1 Lt FF =0 A Dt L 3 V 1 I

S S
VT I T 1
T E: A
L

845679;<>?@B
-L
Figure 101: Virtual Inputs Scheme Logic
7.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS

Remote inputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices
supporting IEC 61850. Remote inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from
GOOSE messages originating in remote devices.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. The programming is performed by the three settings shown in the Virtual Inputs section.
Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Remote Inputs
1601-0651 301
NAME
Range: Up to 13 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: VI 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Remote Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
This setting enables event generation whenever Remote Input Status is updated.
302 1601-0651
7.3 OUTPUTS
Setpoints Device
System
Auxiliary Relay
Inputs selected for breaker Trip
Auxiliary Relay
Outputs Data Capture
Output Relays selected for breaker Close
Protection Virtual Outputs Critical Failure Relay #8
Analog Outputs
Monitoring
Control
FlexLogic
894366A1.CDR
Testing
Figure 102: Outputs Display Hierarchy
TRIP AND BREAKER CLOSE RELAYS

The operation of output relays selected for breaker Trip and breaker Close are breaker-controlled relays designed to
be controlled by the state of the breaker as monitored by a 52a contact, 52b contact, or both.
If the selection for the Type setpoint is "Pulsed", the Trip and Close relay operation follows the logic outlined below:
● The Trip and Close relays reset after breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command. When a
command is sent to one of these special relays, it remains in operation until the requested change of the
breaker state is confirmed and the initiating condition has Reset.
● If the command Resets without a change of breaker state, the output relay is Reset after a default interval of
2 seconds.
● If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts. 52a or 52b, is programmed to a logic input, the Trip Relay Resets
after a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input Resets. The Close Relay is Reset after 200 ms.
● The Seal-In Time setpoint is available only when the output relay is selected as "Pulsed". In all other cases
the Seal-In Time setpoint is hidden and deactivated. The default setting for the seal-in time is 100 ms.
If the Type selected is "Latched", the output relay is energized by any Trip or Open command and remains
energized upon element dropout. Latched auxiliary outputs can be reset with a reset command.If the type selected
is "Self-Reset", the output relay is energized when the corresponding element operates and it stays energized until
the element drops out.
52a Contact 52b Contact Relay Operation
1601-0651 303
Yes Yes The Trip Relay and Close Relay continue operating until the breaker is
detected opened or closed using both 52a and 52b contacts as per the
breaker detection logic.
Yes No The Trip Relay continues operating until 52a indicates an open breaker. The
Close Relay continues operating until 52a indicates a closed breaker.
No Yes The Trip Relay continues operating until 52b indicates an open breaker. The
Close Relay continues operating until 52b indicates a closed breaker.
No No Trip Relay operates upon a Trip command and stays “high” until the 100 ms
default time expires. The Close Relay operates upon a Close command and
Resets after the 200 ms time expires.
OUTPUT RELAY AVAILABILITY

The output relays can be used for many different purposes such as opening and closing breakers, contactors,
switches, control of primary equipment such as motor, transformer, generator, for blocking or supervision purposes,
for interlocking, etc. To avoid using the same output relay for two totally different actions, the 8series relays checks
the assignments of these output relays, and prevents their usage for some other actions. For this purpose, the
output relays that have been already assigned for some action, are hidden from the menus of other elements. For
example, if output relay 1 has been assigned under Trip Relay Select setpoint to trip breaker 1, this output relay will
be hidden from the list of outputs available to select in the menu for opening or closing a Switch, and vice versa.
The table below defines the dependency of output relay availability based on the first come-first serve principal.
Place selected Assigned/Non-assigned Output Relays Available/Hidden
Output Relays in: Setpoints > Protection > BKR [1-3] Trip Relay Select Available
Control > Monitoring Elements BKR [1-3] Close Relay Select Hidden
SW [1-9] Open Relay Select Hidden
SW [1-9] Close Relay Select Hidden
Other Auxiliary Relays Available
Output Relays in Control Elements with BKR [1-3] Trip Relay Select Hidden
Restoration Ability BKR [1-3] Close Relay Select Hidden
NOTE: The elements producing close
commands are directly linked to their
respective breakers for closing/restoring.
Setpoints > System > Switch [X] > Open BKR [1-3] Trip Relay Select Hidden
Relay Select BKR [1-3] Close Relay Select Hidden
Setpoints > System > Switch [X] > Close BKR [1-3] Trip Relay Select Hidden
Relay Select BKR [1-3] Close Relay Select Hidden
Setpoints > System > Breaker [X] > Trip BKR [1-3] Close Relay Select Hidden
Relay Select SW [1-9] Open Relay Select Hidden
304 1601-0651
Setpoints > System > Breaker [X] > Close BKR [1-3] Trip Relay Select Hidden
Relay Select SW [1-9] Open Relay Select Hidden
MAINTAINING AN UNINTERRUPTED PROCESS

The Output Relays are operational (can be closed/opened) while the is In-Service. If the relay goes into “Out-of-
Service” mode, the status of all previously energized output relays changes to de-energized. If an output relay was
used to maintain a running process, or to hold a motor contactor while energized, the process or the motor
contactor will be interrupted. To keep the process uninterrupted, the following connection scheme can be applied:
Figure 103: Maintaining an uninterrupted process upon a relay Major Error
If the output relay is energized during the In-Service relay condition, the NO contact will be closed, and the NC
contact will be open. The process is running. If the relay goes into “Out-of-Service” mode, the output relay will be
de-energized, and the process will still be running, as the NC contact will be closed. An external switch, or stop
pushbutton must be installed in series to the relay output contacts, so that one can stop the process if needed.
7.3.1 OUTPUT RELAYS

The relay is equipped with a number of electromechanical output relays specified at the time of ordering. The card A
I/O module from slot F, for example, provides five output relays.
The auxiliary relays, starting with Aux. Relay 1, can be energized from the menu of each protection or control
feature, or from their respective menus when assigning a FlexLogic operand (trigger) under the setpoint Aux Rly #
Operate.
You can use the auxiliary relays for different applications. You can set any output relay for either tripping or closing a
breaker. For each of the breakers, you can select a pair of auxiliary relays for tripping and closing. Depending on
how an auxiliary is assigned, the following output relay logic applies:
1. If the auxiliary output relay is programmed under the Breaker menu for breaker tripping, the operation of the
output follows the Trip logic diagram.
2. If the auxiliary output relay is programmed under the Breaker menu for breaker closing, the operation of the
output follows the Close logic diagram.
3. If the auxiliary output is not programmed for tripping or closing a breaker, the operation of the output follows
the Auxiliary Relay Generic logic from logic diagram.
1601-0651 305
The Trip and Close auxiliary relays follow the respective Trip and Close logic, meaning they will have fixed
operating characteristics as they depend on breaker feedback for resetting. The auxiliary relays selected for breaker
tripping are also available for selection from the menus of all protection elements. The auxiliary relays selected for
breaker closing are excluded from the list for selection from the menu of all elements. Refer to the Breaker setup
section on how to select an auxiliary relay for breaker trip and close.
7.3.1.1 RELAY SELECTED FOR BREAKER TRIP

Path:Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relays > Aux Relay 1
NAME
Default: Aux Relay 1
The setpoint is used to name the Trip relay by selecting up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
SEAL-IN TIME (displayed only if Type=Pulsed)

Default: 0.10 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the Reset time of Relay 1 “Trip” output, thus extending its pulse
width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the
52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK
Range: Disabled, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a Block to the Trip output relay. When the selected input is asserted, the Trip output relay is
blocked.
OPERATE
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint provides a selection of any operand from the list of FlexLogic or communications, which can be
used to energize the Trip output relay.
When set to On, the output relay is constantly asserted (On=1).
When set to Off and no FlexLogic operand is selected, the output relay operates as set in individual protection
elements.
Note:
Setting OPERATE to On supersedes individual protection function settings.
TYPE
Range: Pickup, Dropoff, Dwell, Pulse, Pickup/Dropoff, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Pickup
306 1601-0651
This setting defines the sequence type of the Trip output relay. The functionality is described in the Outputs
section.
OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized when the Trip condition signal is low and de-
energized when the same signal is high. A failsafe relay also changes state (if not already activated by an
operand driving this output relay) when control power is removed. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-
energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change state when control power is removed (if not
already activated by a protection element).
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
Note:
When the setpoint Function in the protection element menu is set to "Trip", the output relays selected under the Breaker menu
for breaker tripping need to be re-selected from the protection element menu. These output relays will not be operational even
if selected to operate from the protection element menu, if the function is set to "Alarm", "Latched Alarm", or “Configurable”.
1601-0651 307
308
7.3.1.2
Breaker Open
(from Breaker Detection)
At least one
contact programmed
For 859
This timer starts on the falling edge Operate Output

Trip when at least of a pulse, and issues a positive Relay 1 if selected under
Path:Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relay

pulse upon time expiry
one breaker Breaker or Contactor setup
contact configured
2 sec For 850, 869, and 889(single breaker)
OR
Figure 104: Relay Selected for Breaker Trip

AND
SETTING SETPOINT Operate Output
Relay ( Ready = 1) Relay 1 TRIP
BLOCK Dropoff Value
AND For 845, and 889(two breakers)
Off = 0 t
AND
Operate the selected
Upon dropout of the trip signal and no Aux Relay programmed
This timer starts on the falling edge of breaker open status detected, this timer for BKR trip
a pulse, and issues a positive pulse will start on the raising edge of a pulse
upon time expiry issued from either of the two timers, and TRIP
will produce positive pulse upon time
OR
expiry.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100 ms When breaker open status is detected,
and no trip is present, the output relay
AND
BKR 1 Manual Open

AND
SETTING will stay reset.

Relay ( Ready = 1)
OR
Relay ( Ready = 1)
OPERATE
FL Operand, Off = 0
TRIP
Trip without
OR
BKR 1 Local Open configured
breaker contact FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RELAY SELECTED FOR BREAKER CLOSE

AND
OR
Aux Relay
Relay X
( Ready
ON = 1)
BKR 1 Remotel Open RESET (command)
SETPOINT
Trip request
For 859 only
TYPE:
NOTE: Relay 1(Trip) is programmed by the
AND
UVR UV Trip OP
Dropoff
manufacturer for breaker tripping on 850,
Self-Reset
OR
869 and 889(single breaker option) relays.
For 850 only Latched
Additional output relays can be selected to
OPEN ( from Transfer Scheme) Pickup
OR
operate from the menu of each element.

Pickup/Dropoff
For 845 only
Dwell
Element operation with selection of Aux
Relay programmed for BKR tripping
Pulse SETPOINT
Pickup Value
For 850, 869, 859 and 889 only
Dropoff Value
TRIP ( from Any Element set to Trip) LED: TRIP
RUN
Timers
OR
selection under the menus of all elements providing such output relay selection.
869 Only: When Contactor is selected as a Switching
RESET (command) Device, all the inputs associated with Contactor are
AND
used by the Trip logic
892826C1.vsd
The output relays selected under the Breaker menu for breaker closing are excluded from the list of outputs for
1601-0651
Breaker Close
At least one
contact programmed
This timer starts on the falling edge

of a pulse, and issues a positive
pulse upon time expiry
Close when at least Timer

SETTING one contact configured
BLOCK AND 2 sec OR
SETPOINT
Off = 0
Dropoff Value
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND t
SETTING BKR 1 Manual Close
Relay ( Ready = 1)
Operate the selected
OPERATE Aux Relay programmed
This timer starts on the falling edge Upon dropout of the close signal and no
of a pulse, and issues a positive for
FL Operand, Off = 0 breaker close status detected, this timer
pulse upon time expiry will start on the raising edge of a pulse BKR or Contactor close
issued from either of the two timers, and OR
200 ms will produce positive pulse upon time
AND
BKR 1 Local Close CLOSE
expiry.
Relay ( Ready = 1) AND
OR
OR
BKR 1 Remotel Close Block Close
( from Transfer scheme)
For 859 only
Autorestart Close Attempt For 850 only FLEXLOGIC
OR CLOSE
OPERAND
OR
UVR Close
AuxRelay
Relay X ON
( Ready = 1)
For 850 only
AND RESET (command)
OR Close without NOTE: Relay 2
CLOSE (from Transfer Scheme) SETPOINT Trip Relay (Close) is set for
configured contact
TYPE: AND breaker close by
CLOSE (from UV restoration) Dropoff default for 850,
Self-Reset and 869 relays
CLOSE ( from UF restoration) Latched
Pickup
OR
CLOSE ( from UV Reactive Power restoration)
Pickup/Dropoff
Dwell
CLOSE (from Autoreclose) Pulse SETPOINT
AND
Pickup Value
AND
Close request Dropoff Value
RUN
Autoreclose In - Progress
Timers
Breaker Failure
892827C1.vsd
Figure 105: “Close” Selected for Breaker 1 logic diagram
7.3.1.3 AUXILIARY OUTPUT RELAYS

The relay is equipped with Auxiliary Output relays. The I/O cards, and the number of auxiliary output relays are
defined at the time of relay ordering. Auxiliary Relays can be energized directly from the menu of the protection or
control feature or from their respective menus by assigning a FlexLogic operand (trigger) under the setpoint AUX
RLY # OPERATE. Changing the state of any of the Auxiliary Relays will be inhibited if the relay is in Not Ready
mode.
NAME
Default: Aux Rly #
The setpoint is used to name the auxiliary output relay by selecting up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
DROPOFF VALUE (only for F/W 4.00 and later)

Range: 0 to 14400000 in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting is used to set the drop-off time delay for Dropoff, Pickup/Dropoff.
SEAL-IN TIME (displayed only if Type=Pulsed)

Default: 0.10 s
When Type = Pulsed is selected, the setpoint AUX RLY # SEAL-IN TIME is displayed in the menu for selection
of the time interval for which the output relay will remain Energized. The actual time, for which the output relay
stays energized, starts from the time of output first trigger, and ends when Output Seal-In Time expires. The
Seal-In time applies at the dropdown edge of the output relay. If during timing out of the Seal-In Time, another
1601-0651 309
pulse/pulses occur, the Seal-In Time will be reapplied to the last pulse, resulting in prolonged time for which the
output will stay energized before going to de-energized mode.
BLOCK
Range: Disabled, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Auxiliary output relay. When the selected input is asserted, the Aux relay is
blocked.
OPERATE
Default: Off
This setpoint provides a selection of any operand from the list of FlexLogic or communications, which can be
used to energize the auxiliary output relay.
When set to On, the output relay is constantly asserted (On=1).
When set to Off and no FlexLogic operand is selected, the output relay operates as set in individual protection
elements.
Note:
Setting OPERATE to On supersedes individual protection function settings.
TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Pulsed
Default: Pulsed
If Self-Reset is selected, the output relay is energized as long as the element is in operating mode, and
resets when the element drops out. If Latched is selected, the output relay stays energized upon element
dropout. The latched auxiliary outputs can be reset by issuing a reset command. For Pulse selection, see SEAL-
IN TIME (displayed only if Type = Pulsed).
OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized when the operand assigned to the OPERATE AUX
RLY # setting is low and de-energized when the same operand is high. A failsafe relay also changes state (if not
already activated by an operand driving this output relay) when control power is removed. Conversely, a non-
failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change state when control power is
removed from the(if not already activated by a protection element).
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
310 1601-0651
7.3.2
1601-0651
AND
RESET (Command)
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
assigned for use are set to OFF (Logic 0).

OR
SETPOINT
Figure 106: Auxiliary Relays generic logic

TYPE AND
Latched
Opearte Aux
Self- Reset
AND Output Relay
Dropoff AND
OR Relay
This setpoint is displayed only (Ready = 1)
upon Pulsed output type selection
SETPOINT
OPERATE SETPOINT
Off = 0 AND Dropoff Value
FLEXLOGIC
Operation (from Protection, OR t
OPERAND
Control, or Monitoring Elements) AuxRelay
Relay( Ready
X ON=
1)
SETTING
AND
Relay ( Ready = 1)
BLOCK
Off = 0
SETPOINT SETPOINT
TYPE: Pickup Value
Pickup Dropoff Value
Pickup/Dropoff RUN
Dwell
Pulse Timers

The relay is equipped with 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned for use via FlexLogic. Virtual outputs not
311
A name can be assigned to each virtual output. Any change of state to a virtual output can be logged as an event if
programmed to do so. Virtual outputs are resolved in each protection pass via the evaluation of FlexLogic
equations.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the
settings would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 NAME: Trip
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Enabled
Path: Setpoints > Outputs > Virtual Outputs > Virtual Outputs 1 (32)
NAME
Range: up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: VO 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a virtual output for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes.
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
7.3.3 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Depending on the order code, the relay supports one optional DC analog card. The Analog card has 4 analog inputs
and 7 analog outputs.There are three Analog Output channel scenarios for analog minimum and maximum output
range shown in the figure below. Type A characteristics apply when the minimum range is 0 and the maximum
range is a positive (+ve) value. Type B characteristics apply when the minimum and maximum ranges are definitely
positive (+ve) values. Type C characteristics apply when the minimum range is a negative (-ve) and the maximum
range is a positive (+ve) value. The following diagram illustrates these characteristics.
Figure 107: Analog Outputs Channel Characteristics
Path: Setpoints > Outputs > Analog Outputs > Analog Output 1(X)
312 1601-0651
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
RANGE
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA
Default: 0 to 1 mA
This setting provides the selection for the analog output range.
PARAMETER
Range: Off, any Flex Analog Parameter
Default: Off
This setting selects the measured parameter to control the Analog Output level.
MIN VALUE
Range: Populates per selection of the analog parameter
Default: 0
This setting defines the minimum value of the analog output quantity. It populates based on the selection of the
analog parameter.
MAX VALUE
Range: Populates per selection of the analog parameter
Default: 0
This setting defines the maximum value of the analog output quantity. It populates based on the selection of the
analog parameter.
Each channel can be programmed to represent a FlexAnalog parameter available in the respective relay. The range
and steps is the same as the range of the FlexAnalog.
PF SCALING TYPE
Range: Flat, Step
Default: Flat
The measured Power Factor values can be transferred to any of the available analogue outputs. There are two
options for scaling power factor: Flat and Step.
Note:
This setting is only available when Analog Output is selected as Power Factor.
1601-0651 313
Figure 108: Flat Scaling
Flat scaling is a simple ascending linear function. It covers all selected ranges. The above figure shows the graph
for the 4 to 20 mA output range in Flat Scaling. It covers the entire selected power factor range from the minimum
(-0.99) to the maximum setting (+1.00).
Figure 109: Step Scaling
314 1601-0651
Step scaling is a discontinuous descending linear function with one step-up point. The figure above shows the
related graph for the 4 to 20 mA output range in Step Scaling. It covers all the entire selected power factor range
from the minimum (-0.01) to the maximum setting (+0.00).
1601-0651 315
316 1601-0651
CHAPTER 8
PROTECTION
Chapter 8 - Protection
318 1601-0651

Protection 320
1601-0651 319
8.2 PROTECTION
The protection elements are organized in six (6) identical setpoint groups: Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 6.
Setpoints
Device Group 1 Percent Differential
System Group 2 Transformer
Inputs Group 3 Current
Outputs Group 4 Voltage
Protection Group 5 Power
Monitoring Group 6 Frequency
Control
Flexlogic
Testing
Figure 110: Protection Display Hierarchy
Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions, depending on the relay order code.
8.2.1 TRANSFORMER ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

The relay provides the following transformer protection elements:
● Percent Differential
● Transformer Overload
8.2.1.1 PERCENTDIFFERENTIAL
The relay provides a Percent Differential element per setpoint group. The setpoints from the protection menu define
a dual slope, dual breakpoint differential/restraint characteristic. The filtering and calculation of transformer
differential and restraint currents, and differential current 2nd and 5th harmonics are as shown in the following
figure.
320 1601-0651
Figure 111: Filtering and Calculation of differential and restraint currents
1601-0651 321
The relay continuously calculates per-phase differential and restraint currents, and compares the ratio between the
two values with a user-defined differential/restraint characteristic. The purpose of the characteristic is to define the
zone of differential protection operation and the zone of no operation. The differential characteristic provides
setpoints for sensitivity, dependability, and security for all types of faults, and is programmed by the user to reflect a
variety of transformer differential protection applications.
The differential current is calculated per-phase as a vector sum of the currents from all windings after magnitude
and angle compensation.

I I I I
1c 2 c 3 c
ulated as a maximum of the same int

The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated currents:

I m I1c , I 2c , I 3c )
Note:
Refer to the Transformer Setup chapter for the winding current magnitudes and phase shift compensation.
The following figure shows the differential/restraint characteristic of the main transformer percent differential
protection.
d
differential
Operate
Block
Slope 2
Slope 1
Pickup
Break 1
Break 2
restraining r
Figure 112: Differential/Restraint Characteristic for main transformer
The decision for operation or no operation is also influenced by detection of CT saturation, followed by a directional
check on the currents. The saturation flag (SAT) can only be initiated during an external fault, providing the
magnitude of any of the restraints is bigger than a threshold average using the Break1 and Break 2 setting
configured in the menu. While at the same time, the differential/restraint ratio is below a slope average calculated
based on Slope 1 and Slope 2 settings. The directional flag is not checked unless the SAT flag is initiated. Normally
during internal faults, the trajectory of the differential/restraint ratio does not cross the average calculated breakpoint
threshold, in which case the directional flag is not checked. The directional flag is checked during external faults
(SAT flag triggered), where due to saturation, the differential/restraint trajectory is able to enter the operating region.
Usually the angle between the currents during external fault and CT saturation remains larger than 90 degrees, in
which case the percent differential protection does not operate. However, while in the operating region, the
322 1601-0651
protection would operate, on evolving faults (external to internal fault), as the directional flag would be high (angle
less than 90 degrees).
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 (6) > Transformer > Percent Differential
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled
1601-0651 323
You enable the Percent Phase Differential function by selecting Trip or Configurable. The trip output relays
selected to trip each breaker will operate, if the Percent Differential protection operates and these trip outputs
are selected in the Percent Differential menu as Operate.
PICKUP
Default: 0.20 x CT
This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. Select this setting based on the
amount of differential current that might be seen under normal conditions. This differential current is a result of
the transformer magnetizing current, CT inaccuracies, and transformer ratio that would change by the
transformer on-load tap changer. When the tap changer feature is set properly, the relay compensates the
transformation ratio which impacts the differential protection automatically.
SLOPE 1
Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 25%
This setting is applicable for restraint currents (through currents) of zero to kneepoint 1, and defines the ratio of
differential/restraint currents, above which the element will operate. Set this slope to ensure sensitivity on
internal faults at normal transformer loading. The value of slope 1 must be above the maximum differential
currents which may be seen for through currents with magnitudes less than break 1 setting. The differential
currents can be caused by winding CT inaccuracies, the constant transformer magnetizing current, and the
leakage current from in-zone grounding transformers. Usually a margin of 2% to 5% is added to this setting.
BREAK 1
Range: 0.50 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.50 x CT
The setting defines the limit of linear operation of the magnitude reference CT, accounting for up to 80% residual
flux, which effectively reduces the capability of the CT by a factor of 5. BREAK 1 must be set below the current
that can cause CT saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism. Very often the BREAK 1
setting is based on the transformer winding 1 nominal current (100% transformer loading). In such cases, you
must check whether or not this setting complies with the above recommendation regarding the CT linear
performance. This breakpoint marks the end of slope 1, where no CT saturation is expected for restraining
(through) currents smaller than that breakpoint.
BREAK 2
Default: 4.00 x CT
BREAK 2 must be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate any of the transformer CTs due to an
AC component alone. The setting is expressed in times CT, where the CT rating is the magnitude reference CT
either user selected, or selected automatically.
SLOPE 2
Range: 1% to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 95%
324 1601-0651
This setting ensures stability during through fault conditions, resulting in CT saturation and spurious high
differential current. SLOPE 2 must be set high to cater for the worst case scenario, where only CTs from one
winding saturate, but the CTs from the other winding(s) do not saturate. In such cases the differential/restraint
ratio can go as high as 95% to 98%.
Note:
Avoid setting SLOPE 1 higher than SLOPE 2. It is not practical, even though the ranges for both slopes can allow it. SLOPE 1
is used for sensitivity of operation during internal fault in the range of 15% to 35%, and SLOPE 2 is usually set from 80% to
98%, to provide a secure area for the diff./restr. trajectory during external faults and CT saturation.
PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting defines the pickup time delay of the percent differential element.
INRUSH INHIBIT
Range: Disabled, 2nd Harm Block
Default: 2nd Harm Block
This setting enables or disables the inrush inhibit function. None of the settings for inrush inhibit are active, when
the function is disabled.
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL

Range: 1.0% to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 20.0%
This setting specifies the ratio of the 2nd harmonic differential current to the fundamental frequency differential
current for the selected mode of the 2nd harmonic inhibit. The percent differential protection will be blocked from
operation if the actual ratio of the differential 2nd harmonic current to the fundamental frequency differential
current is above this threshold.
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE

Range: Per Phase, Average, 2-out-of-3, 1-out-of-3
Default: Per Phase
This setting specifies the mode of blocking during transformer magnetizing (inrush) conditions.
If set to Per phase, the function performs inrush inhibit per each phase individually.
If set to Average, the relay calculates the average 2nd harmonic level and compares this level against the
setting for inrush inhibit level. Averaging of the 2nd harmonics follows an adaptive algorithm depending on per-
phase magnitude of the fundamental frequency differential current. If the differential current on any of the three
phases goes below the differential current cut-off level of 0.04 x CT, the 2nd harmonic current from that phase is
dropped (zeroed) from the equation for averaging, and the divider is decreased from 3 to 2. The same happens
if the magnitude of the differential current on one of two remaining phases during this same energization drops
below the cut-off level. In this case the 2nd harmonic on this phase will be dropped from summation, and the
divider will be decreased to 1.
1601-0651 325
If set to 2-out-of-3, the relay estimates the 2nd harmonic differential current per-phase, and blocks the
differential protection for all three phases, if the 2nd harmonic content from any two phases is higher than the
2nd harmonic value entered in the setpoint inrush inhibit level.
If set to 1-out-of-3, the relay estimates the 2nd harmonic differential current per-phase, and blocks the
differential protection for all three phases, if the 2nd harmonic content from any phase is higher than the 2nd
harmonic value entered in the setpoint inrush inhibit level. This method is also known as the cross-blocking
method.
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT
Range: Disabled, 5th Harmonic
Default: 5th Harmonic
This setting provides 5th harmonic differential protection blocking during an over excitation condition resulting
from an increased V/Hz ratio.
An overexcitation condition resulting from an increased V/Hz ratio poses a danger to the protected transformer.
A given transformer can tolerate an overfluxing condition for a limited time, as the danger is associated with
thermal processes in the core. Instantaneous tripping of the transformer from the differential protection is not
desirable.
The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting the differential function during overexcitation
conditions.
OVEREXCITATION LEVEL
Range: 1.0% to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 10.0%
This setting specifies the level of 5th harmonic during overexcitation (overfluxing) transformer conditions. When
the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified OVEREXCITATION LEVEL setting (5th harmonic ratio) the
differential element is blocked. The overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis.
BLOCK
Default: Off
RELAYS
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any, or all of the output relays can be selected to operate, upon percent differential operation.
The relay provides one instantaneous differential element per setpoint group.
The Instantaneous differential protection is not biased protection and operates similar to the instantaneous
overcurrent protection. Inputs to this protection are computed by the relay per-phase differential currents.
Operation occurs if any of the computed phase differential current is above the instantaneous differential pickup
326 1601-0651
setting. The instantaneous differential protection is usually set to operate during high fault currents, and if used,
its pickup must be set according to the following criteria:
The○PICKUP setting (xCT) must be selected higher than the maximum inrush current during transformer
energization.
The○PICKUP setting must be set higher than the differential current caused CT saturation during faults
outside the zone of protection.
The○PICKUP setting must be selected lower than the maximum fault current during internal faults.
INSTANTANEOUS DIFF FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
INST DIFF PICKUP

Default: 10.00 x CT
This setting defines the pickup level of the differential current required for operation.
INST DIFF BLOCK

Default: Off
INST DIFF OUTPUT RELAYS

The menu includes a list of available output relays to be set for operation or no operation upon protection
operation.
Note:
The output relays selected under the Breaker menu for breaker trip need to be reselected if the Percent Differential function is
set to “Trip”. These output relays will not be operational even if selected to operate if the Percent Differential function is set to
“Configurable”.
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
1601-0651 327

h
y] JRKNIN] i

y

Tz{|P

h
y] JRKNIN] i

y

Tz{|P
SETPOINTS
~``
B B xx
D
x ppnkl
&(' + ,
$
)Z' $
h FlexLogic Operands
i
(
dkvnkv aqrr c s
)Z' (
dkvnkv aqrr c t
%}# ('
dkvnkv aqrr c e
SETPOINT
SETPOINT B xx

B xx *

FlexLogic Operands
C#$ h
+ ,
i
dkvnkv aqrr c
h
C#$ i
SETPOINT:
!"
C#$
#$% &'(')%
% %) $' )'" $' )'
_àb cdefgc
h
h i
i
FlexLogic Operands
' ')
' ')
' ') *
' ')
SETPOINTS

x
&(' + , h
y] JRKNIN] i

$
h
SETPOINT y

i
)Z' $

%}# (' Tz{|P

B(%$'
~``
* 'C D
ppnkl
SETPOINT
* 'C

*
B(%$'
+ ,
DEF

h
Differential Currents i
;</ 3455 SETPOINT h

-./01 2 3455 678819: ;</ 3455=
</ A10:8= i

-./01 > 3455 678819: ;<? 3455= FlexLogic Operands SETPOINT:

h , !"
-./01 @ 3455 678819: ;<6 3455= ' ') B)
i #$% &'(')%

' ')
Restraint Currents
DEF % %) $' )'" $' )'
-./01 2 A10: 678819: ;</ A10:8=
-./01 > A10: 678819: ;<? A10:8= ;<? 3455

SETPOINT
<? A10:8=
-./01 @ A10: 678819: ;<6 A10:8=

FlexLogic Operands
h ,
' ') B) *
i

' ') *
DEF
FlexLogic Operands
SETPOINT
;<6 3455
' ')
<6 A10:8=

FlexLogic Operands ' ')

h ,
' ') B) ' ') *
i

' ') ' ')

h
,&
i
' ')
,&

SETPOINT
B *
&(' + ,
*(%C
SETPOINT h
i
' ') *(%C'
Differential 2nd Harmonic B *
B * G

DEF
HI JKLL MNO PIQR S TUVUT jkl mnop aqrr s

DEF
jkl mnop aqrr t
HW JKLL MNO PIQR S TUVUT
SETPOINT DEF
jkl mnop aqrr e
G HX JKLL MNO PIQR S TUVUT
*
&(' + , SETPOINT
Y)Z *(%C G [ * G
DEF
Differential 5th Harmonic HI JKLL \]^ PIQR S TUVUT
uvw mnop aqrr s
Y)Z
DEF
HW JKLL \]^ PIQR S TUVUT uvw mnop aqrr t

Y)Z
Y)Z DEF

uvw mnop aqrr e
HX JKLL \]^ PIQR S TUVUT
Figure 113: Percent and Instantaneous Differential Protection Logic Diagram
8.2.1.1.1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL EXAMPLE

The following setpoints define the differential/restraint characteristic:
Minimum Pickup
This setpoint is expressed in x CT of the reference winding. The minimum pickup defines the minimum differential
current required for operation. The pickup setting must be higher than the amount of differential current that is seen
328 1601-0651
under normal transformer loading conditions, and must be higher than the maximum differential current that is seen
during transformer tap changer operation, providing the tap changer automatic differential current compensation is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint TC Winding Currents from Tap Changer setup set to None. If this setpoint is set to a
current bank (J1, K1, K2) representing any of the transformer winding currents, the Minimum Pickup can be set to
be more sensitive but not below the differential current caused by CT errors during normal transformer loading.
For example, for a 20MVA, 25MVA, or 28MVA power transformer with a 138kV/4.16kV ratio, and class C current
transformers CT(w1) 200:5, and CT(w2) 3000:5, the CT errors and the minimum pickup setting is calculated as
follows:
Winding 1 (138kV) CT – reference. Magnitude factor: M(w1) = 1
Winding 2 (4.16kV) CT – non reference. Magnitude factor: M(w2) = 4.16 *3000/138*200 = 0.4521
Based on emergency MVA rating

Winding 1 rated current = 28MVA/(138kV*sqrt(3)) = 117 Amps
Winding 2 rated current = 28MVA/(4.16*sqrt(3)) = 3890 Amps
The accuracy of the Class C current transformer is defined in the IEEE standard C37.110 as not exceeding 10% for
symmetrical current magnitudes of up to 20 times the rating for a standard burden resistance:
117Amps *10% = 11.7 Amps = > 11.7/200 = 0.0585 xCT(w1)
3890 Amps *10% = 389 Amps = > 389/3000*M(w2) = 389/3000*0.4521 =0.0585 xCT(w1)
In the worst case, the errors from the two CTs as expressed in xCT(w1) as a reference can be summed as follows:
Minimum Pickup = 0.0585 + 0.0585 = 0.117 (0.2xCT setting for Pickup is sufficient)
Slope 1
This setting defines the desired differential/restraint ratio for detecting internal faults. The percent Slope 1 setting
must be above the differential/restraint ratio duringexternal faults with non-significant fault current magnitude, but
with long lasting DC component, which is able to cause CT saturation.
The Slope 1 setting can be calculated based on the restraint current during emergency loading of the transformer:
Restraint current Winding 1 = 117 Amps/200 = 0.585 xCT
Restraint current Winding 2 (scaled) = 3890/3000*0.4521 = 0.585 xCT
Differential current = CT error = 0.117 xCT
Slope 1 = (0.117/0.585)*100 = 20%
Adding 5% margin, produces a Slope 1 setting of 25%
Slope 2
The Slope 2 setting ensures stability during heavy through fault conditions, where CT saturation results in high
differential current. Slope 2 must be set high enough to cope with the worst case when the CTs from one winding
saturate but the CTs from the other winding do not saturate during external fault. In such case the ratio of the
differential to restraint current can be as high as 95 to 98%.
1601-0651 329
Break 1
Set this to reflect the through current (restraint current) expressed in times winding 1 CT (w1) below which CT
saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism is not expected. The latter may be as high as 80% of
the nominal flux, effectively reducing the CT capabilities by factor of 5.
Therefore, this setting must correspond to the end of the linear operation of the CT with the worst characteristic,
counting up to 80% remnant flux in the CT core. To calculate this setting, CTs knee-point voltage and CT secondary
burden are needed.
where:
● Rb (burden resistance) = 2 (Rlead + RCTsec + Rrelay)
● RCTsec = CT secondary resistance
● Rlead = conductor resistance
● Rrelay= relay resistance
● ICTsec is the CT secondary nominal current.
● Vsat is the CT knee-point voltage.
You calculate the Break 1 point using the above formula for each winding CT. Then the smallest per unit value (x
CT) is entered as a setting.
Break 2
The Break 2 setting defines the beginning of Slope 2. This is used to provide stability during heavy through fault
conditions, where CT saturation results in high differential current. You must set Break 2 to the through-fault
current, which causes the worst CT to saturate, with saturation-free time of at least half a power cycle.
To define the degree of CT saturation, the IEEE CT saturation tool can be used:
Let the CT 3000:5 on winding 2 be the worst one which would saturate first during external faults, and let the
maximum external fault current be 25kA, with an X/R ratio of 15.
The CT voltage kneepoint from the saturation characteristic is 300 V, with winding resistance of 0.5 Ohms, Burden
resistance of 2.19 Ohms, and Burden reactance of 0.01 Ohms.
Logging this data into the CT sat tool, produces the following CT saturation waveform:
330 1601-0651
Figure 114: Saturation waveform
The waveform shows that during this external fault with maximum fault current of 25 kA, the CT (3000:5) will
saturate severely, and produce only a ¼ of a cycle saturation free time. Break 2 must be set to a through fault
current so that the CT (3000:5) produces at least ½ cycle saturation free time. The solution is to change the fault
current to 15000 kA. The waveform now shows a bigger part of the first cycle before saturation.
1601-0651 331
Figure 115: Caption This diagrams looks the same. Where is the difference?
The fault current of 15000 Amps would then be translated as 15000/3000 = 5 times winding 2 CT.
Bringing this to the same scale with respect to winding 1 CT reference , i.e. multiplying by a magnitude of 0.4521,
the Break 2 setting would be:
Break 2 = 5 *0.4521 = 2.21 xCT (w1)
332 1601-0651
Figure 116: Examples of differential/restraint trajectory during external fault
8.2.1.2 TRANSFORMER OVERLOAD

The Transformer overload element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. Each winding load current is compared with the pickup setpoint to produce an alarm or trip
condition. Alternatively, the overload detection is available through the over-temperature alarm input. An external
transformer over temperature detector can be connected to this input.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Transformer > Overload
1601-0651 333
FUNCTION
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
PICKUP
Range: 50 to 300 % in steps of 1 %
Default: 208 %
This setting identifies the level of transformer overload, where the pickup delay starts timing. For a two winding
transformer, the setting is expressed as a percentage of the transformer base MVA rating, and is normally set at
or above the maximum rated MVA from the transformer nameplate. For a three winding transformer, the setting
is expressed as a percentage of the winding base MVA rating.
PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 seconds in steps of 1 s
Default: 10 seconds
OVERTEMP INPUT
Default: Off
Select Any FlexLogic operand that, when asserted, indicates the transformer cooling system has failed or an
over-temperature condition exists on the transformer.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAYS
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
334 1601-0651
1601-0651
SETPOINT
FUNCTION
Disabled
Trip
Latched Trip LED: TRIP
AND
Alarm FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
OR
Any Trip
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
SETPOINT PICKUP LED: PICKUP LED: ALARM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLOCK RUN
AND
OR
Any Alarm
Off = 0
S
AND
W1 load >= PICKUP

LATCH
SETPOINT
R Output Relay X
RUN
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINT Command
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ACTUAL VALUES W2 load >= PICKUP PICKUP DELAY: Overload OP
OR
W1 load
RUN tPKP
OR
W2 load 0
OR
W3 load
W3 load >= PICKUP
FlexLogic Operands
Overload PKP
SETPOINT FlexLogic Operands
Overtemp Input W1 Overload PKP
Operand X = 1, Off = 0 FlexLogic Operands
AND
W2 Overload PKP
FlexLogic operand status
FlexLogic Operands
W3 Overload PKP

335
336
8.2.2
protection elements:
SETPOINT
FUNCTION
Disabled
Trip
Latched Trip LED: TRIP
AND
Alarm FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
● Phase time overcurrent (Phase TOC)

OR
Any Trip
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
R
SETPOINT PICKUP LED: PICKUP LED: ALARM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLOCK RUN
AND
OR
● Phase instantaneous overcurrent Phase IOC

Any Alarm
Off = 0
Figure 117: Transformer Overload Logic Diagram

S
AND
W1 load >= PICKUP

LATCH
SETPOINT
R Output Relay X
RUN
CURRENT ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

SETPOINT Command
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ACTUAL VALUES W2 load >= PICKUP PICKUP DELAY: Overload OP
OR
W1 load
RUN tPKP
OR
W2 load 0
OR
W3 load
W3 load >= PICKUP
FlexLogic Operands
Overload PKP
SETPOINT FlexLogic Operands
Overtemp Input W1 Overload PKP
Operand X = 1, Off = 0 FlexLogic Operands
AND
W2 Overload PKP
FlexLogic operand status
FlexLogic Operands
W3 Overload PKP

As well as the transformer protection elements, the 845 transformer protection relay provides the following current
1601-0651
● Phase directional overcurrent (Phase Directional OC

● Neutral time overcurrent (Neutral TOC)
● Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (Neutral IOC)
● Neutral directional overcurrent (Neutral Directional OC)
● Ground time overcurrent (Ground TOC)
● Ground instantaneous overcurrent (Ground IOC)
● Ground directional overcurrent (Ground OC)
● Restricted ground fault
● Negative sequence time oververcurrent (Negative Sequence TOC)
● Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent (Negative Sequence IOC)
● Negative sequence directional overcurrent (Negative Sequence Dir. OC)
The relay has six setpoint groups. The programming of the time-current characteristics of these elements is
identical in all cases and is only covered in this section. The required curve is established by programming a Pickup
Current, Curve Shape, Curve Multiplier, and Reset Time. The Curve Shape can be either a standard shape or a
user-defined shape programmed with the FlexCurve feature. Accurate coordination may require changing the time
overcurrent characteristics of particular elements under different conditions.
8.2.2.1 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVES

The Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves used by the Time Overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC,
ANSI, I2t and I4t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes are adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve
characteristics. The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is
required.
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE ANSI IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse ANSI Extremely Inverse IEC Standard Inverse IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse ANSI Very Inverse IEC Very Inverse IAC Very Inverse I4t
IEEE Moderately IEC Extremely Inverse FlexCurves™ A, B, C
ANSI Normally Inverse IAC Inverse
Inverse and D
US Inverse ANSI Moderately UK Long Time Inverse
IAC Short Inverse Recloser Curve
Inverse
US Short Time Inverse Rectifier Definite Time
FR Short Time Inverse RI
Standard Inverse (1.3s)
BPN EDF
A time dial multiplier setting allows the selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier
= 1) with the curve shape setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly
proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are
10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to
all current levels above Pickup.
1601-0651 337
Time Overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable
indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a Time Overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100%
energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the
Pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two types of this resetting operation are available: DT and Inverse. The Inverse selection can be used where
the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays. The DT selection is intended for applications with other
relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero or some fixed time delay when the
current falls below the reset threshold or when inverse curve coordination is not available.
Note:
In IEEE, ANSI, IAC, I2T, I4T User Curves, multiplier setting TDM value is provided by the Time Dial setting
IEEE CURVES
The IEEE Time Overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve
classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formula:
Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● A, B, p = constants
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
● tr = characteristic constant
IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
US Inverse 5.95 0.180 2.000 5.95
US Short Time Inverse 0.16758 0.11858 0.02000 2.261
IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
338 1601-0651

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
US Inverse
0.5 2.470 1.082 0.462 0.288 0.214 0.175 0.152 0.137 0.127 0.120
1.0 4.940 2.163 0.924 0.577 0.428 0.350 0.304 0.274 0.254 0.240
2.0 9.880 4.327 1.848 1.153 0.856 0.700 0.608 0.549 0.509 0.480
4.0 19.760 8.653 3.695 2.307 1.712 1.400 1.216 1.098 1.018 0.960
6.0 29.640 12.980 5.543 3.460 2.568 2.100 1.824 1.647 1.526 1.441
8.0 39.520 17.307 7.390 4.613 3.423 2.800 2.432 2.196 2.035 1.921
10.0 49.400 21.633 9.238 5.767 4.279 3.500 3.040 2.744 2.544 2.401
US Short Time Inverse
0.5 10.350 6.062 3.831 3.040 2.621 2.356 2.171 2.032 1.924 1.837
1.0 20.700 12.123 7.662 6.079 5.241 4.712 4.341 4.065 3.849 3.674
2.0 41.400 24.247 15.324 12.159 10.483 9.423 8.683 8.130 7.698 7.349
4.0 82.800 48.493 30.648 24.317 20.966 18.847 17.365 16.259 15.395 14.698
6.0 124.200 72.740 45.972 36.476 31.448 28.270 26.048 24.389 23.093 22.046
8.0 165.600 96.987 61.296 48.635 41.931 37.694 34.730 32.519 30.791 29.395
10.0 207.001 121.233 76.620 60.793 52.414 47.117 43.413 40.648 38.489 36.744
1601-0651 339
ANSI CURVES
The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI C37.90 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The ANSI curves are derived from the following formulae:
Where:
● A to E = constants
ANSI INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

ANSI CURVE SHAPE A B C D E tr
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222 5.67
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 -0.2840 4.0505 3.88
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 -4.1899 9.1272 5.95
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 -0.0800 0.1271 1.08
ANSI CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.0 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.0 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.0 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.0 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.0 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.0 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
340 1601-0651

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
1.0 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.0 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.0 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.0 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.0 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.0 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE
0.5 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.0 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.0 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.0 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.0 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.0 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.0 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.0 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.0 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.0 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.0 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.0 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.0 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465
IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142.
These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formula for these curves is:
1601-0651 341
BPN EDF Curve Operate Equation
Where:
● K, E = constants
IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E tr
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve A (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve A (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Long Time Inverse 120 1 -
Rectifier 45900 5.6 -
Standard Inverse (1.3s) 0.0607 0.02 3.55
IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E L

BPN EDF 1000 2 0.655
Note:
When using Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, IEC Short Time Inverse, BPN EDF curves for the operate characteristic, DT
(Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic
342 1601-0651
IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT INVERSE
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518
Rectifier
0.05 264.241 48.313 4.896 0.976 0.280 0.101 0.042 0.020 0.010 0.006
0.10 528.482 96.626 9.792 1.952 0.559 0.201 0.085 0.040 0.021 0.012
0.20 1056.964 193.251 19.583 3.904 1.119 0.403 0.170 0.080 0.042 0.023
0.40 2113.928 386.502 39.167 7.808 2.237 0.806 0.340 0.161 0.083 0.046
1601-0651 343

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.60 3170.891 579.754 58.750 11.712 3.356 1.209 0.510 0.241 0.125 0.069
0.80 4227.855 773.005 78.334 15.615 4.474 1.612 0.680 0.322 0.166 0.092
1.00 5284.819 966.256 97.917 19.519 5.593 2.015 0.850 0.402 0.208 0.115
Standard Inverse (1.3s)
0.05 0.373 0.217 0.137 0.108 0.093 0.083 0.076 0.071 0.068 0.064
0.10 0.745 0.435 0.273 0.216 0.186 0.166 0.153 0.143 0.135 0.129
0.20 1.491 0.870 0.546 0.432 0.371 0.333 0.306 0.286 0.270 0.258
0.40 2.982 1.739 1.093 0.864 0.742 0.665 0.612 0.572 0.540 0.515
0.60 4.473 2.609 1.639 1.295 1.113 0.998 0.918 0.858 0.811 0.773
0.80 5.964 3.479 2.186 1.727 1.484 1.331 1.224 1.144 1.081 1.030
1.00 7.455 4.348 2.732 2.159 1.856 1.664 1.530 1.429 1.351 1.288
IAC CURVES
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formula:
Where:
● A to E = constants
GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E tr
IAC Extremely Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7965 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 -0.0010 0.0221 0.222
344 1601-0651
IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.618 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493
1601-0651 345
I2T CURVES
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formula:
Where:
I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.05 2.22 1.25 0.55 0.31 0.20 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 123.5 10.00
100.00 4444.44 2500.00 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
I4T CURVES
The curves for the I4t are derived from the formula:
Where:
346 1601-0651
I4T CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.05 0.9876 0.3125 0.0617 0.0198 0.0008 0.0038 0.0021 0.0012 0.0007 0.0005
0.10 1.9753 0.6250 0.1235 0.0391 0.0160 0.0077 0.0042 0.0024 0.0015 0.0010
1.00 19.753 6.250 1.235 0.391 0.160 0.077 0.042 0.024 0.015 0.010
10.00 197.531 62.500 12.346 3.906 1.600 0.772 0.416 0.244 0.152 0.100
100.00 1975.31 625.00 123.46 39.06 16.00 7.72 4.16 2.44 1.52 1.00
600.00 11851.9 3750.0 740.7 234.4 96.00 46.3 25.0 14.65 9.14 6.00
RI (RAPID INVERSE) CHARACTERISTIC

The RI operate curve is represented by the following equation
where:
● T is the operating time
● k(RI) is the Time Multiplier setting.
● I = input current,
Note:
When using RI for the Operate characteristic, DT (Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic.
RI CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)
MULTIPLIER CURRENT (I/Ipickup)

(k(RI)) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.1 0.550 0.452 0.384 0.357 0.343 0.334 0.328 0.323 0.320 0.317
0.2 1.101 0.905 0.768 0.714 0.685 0.667 0.655 0.646 0.639 0.634
0.4 2.202 1.810 1.536 1.429 1.371 1.335 1.310 1.292 1.279 1.268
0.6 3.303 2.715 2.305 2.143 2.056 2.002 1.965 1.939 1.918 1.902
0.8 4.404 3.620 3.073 2.857 2.742 2.670 2.620 2.585 2.558 2.536
1.0 5.505 4.525 3.841 3.571 3.427 3.337 3.276 3.231 3.197 3.171
1601-0651 347
IDG CURVE
The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed neutral/ground fault protection in the Swedish market. The IDG
curve is represented by the following equation:
T = 5.8 - 1.35 x loge (I/Ipickup)
where:
● T is the operating time
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting.
The IDG Is setting is set as a multiple of the Ground/Neutral overcurrent setting Ipickup for the IDG curve. It
determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
The IDG Time setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
Note:
When using IDG for the Operate characteristic, DT (Definite Time) with a value of zero is recommended to use for the Reset
characteristic.
348 1601-0651
Figure 118: IDG Characteristic
EPATR B CURVE
The EPATR B curve is commonly used for Sensitive Earth Fault protection. It is based on primary current settings,
employing a SEF CT ratio of 100:1 A. The EPATR_B curve has 3 separate segments defined in terms of the primary
current. It is defined as follows:
Segment Primary Current Range Based on 100A: Current/Time Characteristic
1A CT Ratio
1 ISEF = 0.5A to 6.0A t = 432 X TMS / ISEF0.655 sec
2 ISEF = 6.0A to 200A t = 800xTMS / ISEF sec
3 ISEF > 200A t = 4 x TMS sec
where TMS (time multiplier setting) is 0.025 - 1.2 in steps of 0.025.
Note:
When using EPATR B curve, DT (Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic.
1601-0651 349
Figure 119: EPATR B characteristic shown for TMS = 1.0
FLEXCURVES
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
T = TDM x [FlexCurveTime at (I/Ipickup)] when (I/Ipickup) ³ 1.00
TRESET = TDM x [FlexCurveTime at (I/Ipickup)] when (I/Ipickup) £ 0.98
Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds),
● TDM = Multiplier setting,
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting,
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is timed)
Note:
Flexcurve A/B/C/D is renamed as Def User Curve A/B/C/D
DEFINITE TIME CURVES

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The
base Definite Time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.05 to 600 makes this delay adjustable from
50 to 600000 milliseconds.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > Ipickup
350 1601-0651
Treset = TDM in seconds

Where:
Note:
Note: In Definite Time Curves, Multiplier setting value is provided by ‘Time Delay’ setting.
8.2.2.2 PERCENT OF LOAD-TO-TRIP

The Percent of Load-to-Trip is calculated from the phase with the highest current reading. It is the ratio of this
current to the lowest PICKUP setting among the phase time and the instantaneous overcurrent elements. If all of
these elements are disabled, the value displayed is 0.
8.2.2.3 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51P)

You can configure the TOC element as follows:
● Apply any of the IEEE, ANSI, IEC, and IAC standard inverse curves
● Apply any of the four FlexCurves
● Set it to definite time.
The selection of Time Dial Multiplier and minimum Pickup helps to fine tune the protection for accurate upstream/
downstream coordination and during certain conditions, such as manual closing and maintenance.
The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce Pickup and Trip flags per phase.
There is no intentional dead band when the current is above the Pickup level. However the Pickup accuracy is
guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 1.5% above the set pickup value. The time overcurrent (TOC)
Pickup flag is asserted, when the current on any phase is above the pickup value. The TOC Trip flag is asserted if
the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current.
The element drops from Pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup
value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for TOC operation is
defined only by the TDM setting. When in Definite Time mode, TDM sets the time to operate in seconds.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Phase TOC > Phase TOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Latched Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Dependent upon the order code
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.
1601-0651 351
INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor
This selection defines the method of processing of the current signal. It could be Root Mean Square (RMS) or
Fundamental Phasor Magnitude.
PICKUP
Default: 1.000 x CT
CURVE
Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier,SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C,
FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Mod Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is
appropriate, a FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more details on
their configurations and usage.
TDM
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Curve A/B/C, IEEE M/V/E Inverse, US
Inverse, US Short Time, ANSI E/V/N/M Inverse, IAC E/V/N/S Inverse, I2T and I4T curves. For example, if an
IEEE Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current is 5 times bigger than the PKP
level, the operation of the element will not occur before 2.59 s have elapsed after Pickup.
TMS
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), and BPN EDF curves.
K (RI)
Default: 1.00
This setting defines the Time multiplier constant to adjust the operate time of the Rapid Inverse (RI) curve.
This k(RI) setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as
Rapid Inverse.
352 1601-0651
TIME DELAY
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation. This Time Delay setting can be made visible from setting
management, only when the Curve setting is selected as Definite Time.
DT ADDER
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.The DT Adder setting will be
visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.
RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
Selection of a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time is provided using this setting.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Phase TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
Reset Time setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for
the selected inverse curve.
Note: When using IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, Rapid Inverse curves for the
Operate characteristic, Definite Time is used by default as Reset characteristic.
RESET TIME
Default: 0.000
This setting provides selection for dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
overcurrent condition.
This can be made visible from setting management when the Reset setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, and Rapid Inverse curves.
DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ph Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ph Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled
This setting determines the direction of Phase TOC element.
V DEP OC
Range: Disabled, VCO, VRO
Default: Disabled
V Dep OC (Voltage Dependent Overcurrent) replaces the legacy Voltage Restrained Overcurrent (VRO) function
by adding Voltage Controlled Overcurrent functionality to it. This setting can now select Disabled, VCO or VRO.
When enabled, this feature controls the Pickup value of each individual Phase Time Overcurrent element in a
fixed relationship with its corresponding phase input voltage.
1601-0651 353
An overcurrent protection scheme is co-ordinated throughout a system such that cascaded operation is
achieved. This means that if for some reason a downstream circuit breaker fails to trip for a fault condition, the
next upstream circuit breaker should trip.
If the current seen by a local device for a remote fault condition is below its overcurrent setting, a voltage
dependent element may be used to increase the sensitivity to such faults. As a reduction in system voltage will
occur during overcurrent conditions, this may be used to enhance the sensitivity of the overcurrent protection by
reducing the pick-up level.
If cold load pickup, autoreclosing, or manual close blocking features are controlling the protection, the Phase
TOC Voltage Restraint does not work, even when enabled.
In Voltage Controlled Operation (VCO) mode of operation, the under-voltage detector is used to produce a step
change in the current setting, when the voltage falls below the voltage setting V Dep OC V<1. The operating
characteristic of the current setting when voltage-controlled mode is selected is as follows:
Current
Setting
Current Pickup Setting
K x Current Pickup Setting
V Dep OC V1 Measured Voltage

Figure 120: VCO operation
Current
Setting
Current Pickup Setting
K x Current Pickup Setting
V Dep OC V2 V Dep OC V1 Measured Voltage

Figure 121: VRO operation
VT INPUT
Default: Ph VT Bank 1-J2
This setting provides the selection for the voltage input bank, when V Dep OC is enabled.
354 1601-0651
V Dep OC V1
Default: 0.72 x VT
This setting sets the voltage V1 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage becomes reduced.
This is on a per phase basis.
V Dep OC k
Default: 0.25
This setting determines the Overcurrent multiplier factor used to reduce the pick-up overcurrent setting.
V Dep OC V2
Default: 0.54 x VT
This setting sets the voltage V2 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage becomes reduced.
This is on a per phase basis.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 355
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP To operate Output Relay
AND
1(TRIP)
Configurable in 845 & 859
OR
S
AND
LATCH
R
LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINT
I>[X] FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
Disabled
AND
Trip S
Latched Trip LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS
OR
Alarm Command R Output Relay X

Latched Alarm I>[X] CURRENT SET: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Configurable FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I>[X] CURVE:
OR
PTOC I>[X] Trip
SETPOINTS
I>[X] DIRECTION: I>[X] TMS:
Non-Directional
I>[X] TIME DIAL:
Forward
AND
Reverse I>[X] k (RI):

FlexLogic Operands
AND
OR
I>[X] TIME DELAY:

Ph A Reverse (from Phase PTOC I>[X] Trip A
AND
Directional OC element)
I>[X] DT ADDER:
PTOC I>[X] Trip B
AND
Ph B Reverse (from Phase

Directional OC element) Same Logic as for Phase A I>[X] RESET CHAR:
PTOC I>[X] Trip C
I>[X] tRESET: PTOC I>[X] Trip

Ph C Reverse (from Phase Same Logic as for Phase A
AND
Directional OC element) RUN Ia > CURRENT SET
SETPOINTS
OR
I>[X] INHIBIT: SETPOINTS
Adjust PKP
Off=0 I>[X] Rly OP[1-11]
RUN Ib > CURRENT SET Do Not Operate, Operate
USED ONLY IN 845
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS Adjust PKP

SIGNAL
INPUT:
Phase Currents INPUT: RUN Ic > CURRENT SET LED: PICKUP
Phase A current (Ia)
Phase B current (Ib) CT Bank 1 J1 Phasor, RMS
Phase C current (Ic) OR
From Cold Load Pickup Adjust PKP FlexLogic Operands

TOC Pickup Raise
PTOC I>[X] Start
OR
From Autoreclose
TOC Pickup Raise SETPOINT
PTOC I>[X] Start A
From Manual Close Blocking I>[X] CURRENT SET :
AND
TOC Pickup Raise

I>[X] V Dep OC k PTOC I>[X] Start B
I>[X] V Dep OC V<1 PTOC I>[X] Start C

SETPOINT
I>[X] V DEP OC: I>[X] V Dep OC V<2
Disable RUN
VCO
VRO
Calculate VCO/VRO
Multiplier
Phase Voltages
Phase A Voltage (Va)
Phase B Voltage (Vb)
Phase C Voltage (Vc)

Figure 122: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
8.2.2.4 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50P)

The PIOC protection consists of three identical instantaneous overcurrent elements, one for each phase. All three
have identical characteristics. The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce
Pickup and Trip flags per phase. There is no intentional dead band when the current is above the Pickup level.
However the Pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 3% above the set pickup value.
The IOC Pickup flag is asserted, when the current of any phase is above the pickup value. The IOC Operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined in PH IOC PKP DELAY. The element drops from
Pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97-98% of the Pickup value before the time for
operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > Current > Phase IOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
356 1601-0651
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: CT Bank 1-J1 (dependent on order code)
INPUT
Default: Phasor (Up to firmware version 3.x)
Default: Phasor (RMS when VFD Function = enabled) (From firmware version 4)
PICKUP
Range (3.xx): 0.020 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ph Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ph Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled
PICKUP DELAY
Range (3.xx): 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Range (4.10): 0.000 to 28800.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Range (3.xx): 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Range (4.10): 0.000 to 28800.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
1601-0651 357
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
AND
1(TRIP)
OR
S
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
FUNCTION: R
LED: ALARM
AND
Disabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip
OR
Any Alarm
Latched Trip
AND
S
OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm LATCH SETPOINT
Configurable Command R Output Relay X
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS
OR
Phase IOC 1 OP
DIRECTION:
Disabled
SETPOINTS
Forward
AND
Reverse PICKUP:
AND
OR
RUN
SETPOINTS
AND
Ph A Reverse (from Phase

Directional OC element) Ia > PICKUP PICKUP DELAY:
DROPOUT DELAY:
Ph B Reverse (from Phase Same Logic as for Phase A
tPKP
AND
RUN tRST
Ph C Reverse (from Phase
Same Logic as for Phase A
Directional OC element) tPKP
OR
Ib > PICKUP
tRST
SETPOINTS tPKP
BLOCK tRST
AND
RUN FlexLogic Operands

Off = 0
Phase IOC 1 OP A
Ic > PICKUP
From Cold Load Pickup Phase IOC 1 OP B
OR
From Autoreclose Phase IOC 1 OP C

(per shot settings)
From Manual Close Blocking

LED: PICKUP
USED ONLY IN 850

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
OR
Phase Currents INPUT:

SIGNAL INPUT:
Phase A current (Ia)
FlexLogic Operands
Phase B current (Ib) Phasor, RMS
CT Bank 1 - J1
Phase IOC 1 PKP
Phase C current (Ic)
Phase IOC 1 PKP A
USED ONLY IN 845/889
Phase IOC 1 PKP B

Phase IOC 1 PKP C
Figure 123: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent logic diagram
8.2.2.5 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67P)

The Phase Directional Overcurrent protection elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase
current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase
overcurrent elements by sending directional bits to inputs of these elements.
358 1601-0651
The element is intended to send a directional signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current
is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle
between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature
connection. To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage,
a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature remembers the measurement of the polarizing voltage 3
cycles back and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage
has collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating
signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic
angle, ECA).
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
POLARIZING SIGNAL (Vpol)

PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL
ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A Angle of Ia Angle of Vbc × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vcb × (1ÐECA)
B Angle of Ib Angle of Vca × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vac × (1ÐECA)
C Angle of Ic Angle of Vab × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vba × (1ÐECA)
1601-0651 359
For 850D dual feeder applications, when the signal input is from CT Bank 1 – J1, VT Bank 1-J2 is used as the
polarizing voltage source. Similarly, when the signal input is from CT Bank 2 – K1, VT Bank 2 – K2 is used as the
polarizing voltage source.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > Current > Phase Dir OC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
ECA
Range: 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Default: 30°
The setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is
shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation.
POLARIZING V THRESHOLD
Range (3.xx): 0.050 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT (up to FW 3.xx)
Range (4.10): 0.015 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT (from FW 4.10)
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable.
The setting is based on VT accuracy.
REV WHEN V MEM EXP

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
The setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to “Yes” the
directional element output value is forced to Reverse when voltage memory expires; when set to “No” the
directional element is Forward when voltage memory expires.
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
360 1601-0651
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
Note:
The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element
needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to change the directional signal. Some protection elements such as Instantaneous
Overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the directional signal has changed. A coordination time of at least 10 ms
must therefore be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element.
If current reversal is a concern, a longer delay – in the order of 20 ms – is needed.
1601-0651 361
}
Jb } } }
Jb Jb Jb

Q% @ (
K S Q% Q% Q%
| K| S
K S K| S
y |
{M ! ] M ! ] ! ] M
Mz xX
x~ ^!
& { y x~ ^!
& M{ y
x~ ^!
& { y
! Mz ! Mz ! Mz
Y ! xX Y ! xX Y ! xX

HI
HI
EFG
-.8 75-
, /0
;: 645
0-.
9
231
0./
-,
?> =,<
@
% <
EFG
hei
b d
a
cb

a ghe
a fe
d
EFG
) l l
U
n n
%OS ^_ ^_ m m
^ ^ l l
DC Q & & k k
$B ^ ^Q _^ j j
$ \ Q `
# Q ^
& q q
A [
S@ QA+ + ^ w w
^ Q v v
)
X R] ^! #A l l
Q Q Q ps ps
us us
m m
ts ts
r r
q q
p p

X

o t
)@ n n
m m
l l
\O k k
j j
( X
@ %W
MLJ
#P %V
!O RQ V
N Q
$ ' JML (
%
#" U
! "#! *
$
K @ T
J

&%
) +# P#! R %QS Y
( O Q Z!
Figure 124: Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
362 1601-0651
8.2.2.6 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51N)

The relay computes the neutral current (In) using the following formula:
|In|=|Ia+Ib+Ic|
The settings of this function are applied to the neutral current to produce Trip or Pickup flags. The Neutral TOC
Pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the pickup value. The Neutral TOC Trip flag is asserted if
the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current.
The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup
value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Neutral TOC operation
is defined only by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral TOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor
PICKUP
Default: 0.200 x CT
CURVE
Range: Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse ,Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Mod Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is
appropriate, a FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more details on
their configurations and usage.
1601-0651 363
TDM
Default: 1.00
Inverse, US Short Time, ANSI E/V/N/M Inverse, IAC E/V/N/S Inverse, I2T and I4T curves.
TMS
Default: 1.000
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), BPN EDF and EPATR B curves.
K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 Step: 0.05
Default: 1.00
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when Curve setting is selected as Rapid
Inverse.
IDG Is
Default: 1.5
This setting is set as a multiple of the ground fault overcurrent setting for the IDG curve.
It determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as IDG.
IDG Time
Default: 1.20
This setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
Time Delay
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as DT
(Definite Time).
364 1601-0651
DT Adder
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.
This setting will be visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.
RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
This setting sets a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
When using Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IEC Short Inverse, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B curves the
reset is always definite time defined by the setpoint Reset Time.
Reset Time
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 s in stepos of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000s
This setting determines the Reset time for the Definite Time Reset characteristic.
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IDG, EPATR B and Rapid Inverse curves.
DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ntrl Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ntrl Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
1601-0651 365
366
8.2.2.7
formula:
Default: Self-reset
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
AND
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
OR
Trip
Latched Trip S
AND
Alarm
LATCH
OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETPOINTS Any Alarm
PICKUP: S
AND
LATCH SETPOINT
CURVE:
Command R Output Relay X
TDM:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET: Ntrl TOC 1 OP
OR
SETPOINTS DIRECTION:
BLOCK: RUN In > PICKUP
AND
Off = 0
Adjust PKP LED: PICKUP
Figure 125: Neutral Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
Calculated as a sum of SIGNAL
INPUT: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
phase currents INPUT:
Ntrl TOC 1 PKP
Neutral current (In) CT Bank 1 J1 Phasor, RMS
From Cold Load Pickup
From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
USED ONLY IN 850

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50N)

The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element computes the neutral current (In) using the following
1601-0651
|In| = |Ia + Ib + Ic|

The element responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the
phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the
positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the
operating quantity of the element as follows:
Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|) where K = 1/16 and |I_0| = 1/3 * |In|
For FW 4.10 and later, the actual value of operating quantity Iop is available as Neutral IOC Iop under Metering
\Neutral IOC.
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
currents resulting from:
● system unbalances under heavy load conditions
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors of during double-line and three-phase faults
● switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
Iop = 0.9375 * I_injected three-phase pure zero sequence injection: Iop = 3 * I_injected).
The settings of this function are applied to the neutral current to produce Pickup and Trip flags. The Neutral IOC
Pickup flag is asserted, when the neutral current is above the pickup value. The Neutral IOC Operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Neutral IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the
Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds, the Pickup and Operate flags are asserted at the same time. The
element drops from Pickup without operation if the neutral current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral IOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
PICKUP
Range (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (from FW 4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default (up to FW 3.xx): 1.00 x CT
Default (from FW 4.10): 0.20 x CT
DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ntrl Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ntrl Dir OCx REV)
1601-0651 367
Default: Disabled
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
368 1601-0651
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
AND
FUNCTION:
1(TRIP)
OR
Trip
S
AND
Latched Trip
LATCH
OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
AND
Configurable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
AND
S
LATCH SETPOINT
ACTUAL VALUE
SETPOINTS NEUTRAL IOC1 Iop FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PICKUP: Ntrl IOC1 OP
SETPOINTS
DIRECTION:
SETPOINTS PICKUP DELAY:
AND
RUN
BLOCK:
DROPOUT DELAY:
Off = 0 Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)
Iop > PICKUP tPKP

tRST
OR
From Autoreclose
(per shot settings) LED: PICKUP
From Manual Close Blocking FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Ntrl IOC1 PKP
USED ONLY IN 850
SETPOINTS
SIGNAL INPUT
Neutral IOC source
I_0 and I_1 CT Bank 1 - J1 Phasor
Figure 126: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
8.2.2.8 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67N)
Note:
For FW 4.10 onwards, V_X (or VX), is know as V_N (or VN)
The Neutral Directional Overcurrent protection element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications
shown by the operands Ntrl Dir OC FWD and Ntrl Dir OC REV, respectively. The output operands are asserted if the
magnitude of the operating current is above a Pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as
forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the neutral current calculated
from the phase currents. There are separate Pickup settings for the forward-looking and reverse-looking functions.
The element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance; a small user-programmable portion of the
positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero sequence current magnitude when forming the
operating quantity.
Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors of during double-line and three-phase faults
● switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
1601-0651 369
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase
injection: Iop = (1 – K) × Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 × Iinjected).
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 x CT, the
restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults
when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) for fault direction discrimination and may be configured to
use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX (known as VN for FW4.10 onwards)),
ground current (Ig), or both for polarizing. The following table defines the neutral directional overcurrent element.
Directional unit Overcurrent unit
Polarizing mode Direction Compared phasors
Voltage Forward -V_0 1_0 x 1ÐECA Iop = 3 x {|I_0| - K x |
I_1|}
Reverse -V_0 -1_0 x 1ÐECA
Current Forward Ig I_0
Reverse Ig -I_0 If |I_1| > 0.8 x CT
Dual Forward -V_0 or I_0 x 1ÐECA or
Iop = 3 x {|I_0|}
Ig I_0
if |I_1| £0.8 x CT
Reverse -V_0 or -I_0 x 1ÐECA or
Ig -I_0
Where:
● V_0 = 1/3 * (Vag + Vbg + Vcg) = zero sequence voltage
● I_0 = 1/3 * In = 1/3 * (Ia + Ib + Ic) = zero sequence current
● ECA = element characteristic angle
● In = neutral current
When POLARIZING VOLTAGE is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V0.
The following figure explains the use of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element by showing the voltage-
polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
● ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
● FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation
● REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation).
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power
system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is
designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in
faster directional discrimination bringing more security to element operation.
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and
should therefore be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as
compared to the forward-looking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows better protection
coordination.
The above bias should be taken into account when using the Neutral Directional Overcurrent element to
directionalize other protection elements.
370 1601-0651
Note:
For relays ordered without voltage inputs, the polarizing signal for the Neutral Directional OC element is the ground current
(Ig) from the bank selected as Signal Input in the element’s menu. In this case the setpoints POLARIZING MODE, and
POLARIZING VOLTAGE are not displayed.
-V
REV L F L

V G
(
REV F

R R
L L

E
E
-E
- L
VG L
VG
REV L F L

V
8 8
Figure 127: Neutral Directional Voltage-polarized Characteristics
Note:
For 850 Dual Feeder Applications: For Signal Input of CT Bank 1 – J1 >> VT Bank 1 -J2 is considered as Polarizing voltage
source. And, For CT Bank 2 – K1 >> VT Bank 2 – K2 is considered as Polarizing Voltage Source
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral Directional OC 1(X)
1601-0651 371
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides selection of the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in Setpoints
> System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.
POLARIZING MODE
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
Default: Voltage
This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
If Voltage
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization.
Select either the zero-sequence voltage V0, calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence
voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X. The calculated V0 can be used as polarizing voltage
only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing
voltage if the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as the open delta
connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V0) or auxiliary voltage (V_X), accordingly, must be
greater than 0.02 x VT to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither
forward nor reverse indication is given.
If Current
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the angle of the ground current measured on the
ground current input. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an
adequate source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 x CT to be validated as a
polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. For a
choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known
direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral
current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a
high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this
condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding
neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.
If Dual
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above.
A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting
(simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
POLARIZING VOLTAGE
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX (or VN for FW 4.10 onwards)
Default: Calculated V0
Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when Voltage or Dual polarizing mode is set. The
polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase
voltages (Calculated V0) or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage (Measured VX (or VN))
POLARIZING VOL SUPV

Range (3.xx): 0.005 to 0.100 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT
372 1601-0651
Range (4.10): 0.005 to 0.400 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT

Default: 0.020 x VT
The zero-sequence or auxiliary voltage must be greater than the polarizing supervision voltage configured in this
setting, to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse
indication is given.
POS SEQ RESTRAINT

Default: 0.063
This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set
higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.
FORWARD ECA
Range: –180° to 180° in steps of 1°
Default: 75°
This setting defines the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in “Voltage” polarizing mode.
“Current” polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the
forward direction shifted by 180°.
FORWARD LIMIT ANGLE

Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.
FORWARD PICKUP
Default: 0.050 x CT
This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique for the
Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.
REVERSE LIMIT ANGLE

Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.
REVERSE PICKUP
Default: 0.050 x CT
1601-0651 373
This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique for the
Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset

7+ (# (.,
!"#
* !".
RS TUVRWXY RSZ XT[

\SZ UYU]UTR^

55"#

_àbcdea_
$ !
'$ ! (# ) .216 'F
7(#
% - +(#, . 26 'F
fg hijk l m nl
%$*! +&, ) 7(#
opqr stuv wt xyz {|} xx~ 89:;<=> ?9:<@AB<;A9C
& #2#64

%& DE@@>C; ?9:<@AB<;A9C
$ *

$

., / / 0 RS TUVRWXY RSZ XT[
0 \SZ UYU]UTR^

1, 0
(. #23 4

7+(# (. , GHIJKLMINOPQ
Figure 128: Neutral Directional Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
374 1601-0651
8.2.2.9 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51G)

The settings of Ground Time Overcurrent protection element are applied to the ground input current to produce Trip
or Pickup flags. The Ground TOC Pickup flag is asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value. The
Ground TOC Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve
and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured current drops
below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the
time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Ground TOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in
The Signal Input setting is visible only in the 845 and 889. For other products, it is hidden.
INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor
PICKUP
Default: 0.200 x CT
CURVE
Range: Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse ,Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE, Moderately Inverse
TDM
Default: 1.00
1601-0651 375
TMS
Default: 1.000
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), BPN EDF and EPATR B curves.
K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 Step: 0.05
Default: 1.00
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when Curve setting is selected as Rapid
Inverse.
IDG Is
Default: 1.5
This setting is set as a multiple of the ground fault overcurrent setting for the IDG curve.
It determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
IDG TIME
Default: 1.20
This setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
TIME DELAY
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as DT
(Definite Time).
DT ADDER
Default: 0.00
This setting will be visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.
376 1601-0651
RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
This setting sets a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
When using Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IEC Short Inverse, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B curves the
reset is always definite time defined by the setpoint Reset Time.
RESET TIME
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 s in stepos of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000s
This setting determines the Reset time for the Definite Time Reset characteristic.
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IDG, EPATR B and Rapid Inverse curves.
DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled
BLOCK
Default: Off or PB 4 OFF (GND TRIP ENABLED), Dependent on order code
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 377
378
8.2.2.10
LED:
In 845 & 859, operate the selected Trip
TRIP
SETPOINT Output Relay
AND
FUNCTION: Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
OR
Disabled
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip
AND
LATCH Any Trip
Latched Trip
R LED:
Alarm
OR
ALARM
Latched Alarm
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable
OR
Any Alarm
SETPOINTS S
AND
PICKUP: LATCH SETPOINT

CURVE: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Direction (from Ground Directional FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TDM:
OC element)
Ground TOC1 OP
OR
Not Applicable in 869 and 859 RESET:

Bridge P14 only
BLOCK: RUN Ig > PICKUP
AND
Off = 0
LED: PICKUP
SETPOINTS Adjust PKP
Figure 129: Ground Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SIGNAL
INPUT: INPUT: Ground TOC1 PKP
From Ground CT
Ground current (Ig) CT Bank 1 J1 Phasor, RMS

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
USED ONLY IN 845

894121C1
GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50G)
above the pickup value. The Ground IOC Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time
defined by the Ground IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the The Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds. The
The settings of the Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element are applied to the measured Ground
current for producing Pickup and Trip flags. The Ground IOC Pickup flag is asserted when the Ground current is
1601-0651
Pickup and Operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the
Ground current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Ground IOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in
PICKUP
Range (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (from FW 4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default (up to FW 3.xx): 1.00 x CT
Default (from FW 4.10): 0.200 x CT
DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
1601-0651 379
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
LED: TRIP
AND
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION:
OR
Any Trip
Disabled
S
AND
Trip
LATCH
Latched Trip
R
OR
Alarm
LED: ALARM
AND
Latched Alarm
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable
OR
Any Alarm
AND
S
Direction (from Ground Directional LATCH SETPOINT
OC element) SETPOINTS
PICKUP: SETPOINTS RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
PICKUP DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Ground IOC1 OP
BLOCK:
AND
RUN DROPOUT DELAY:

Off = 0
Ig > PICKUP tPKP

tDPO
OR
From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
LED: PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
USED ONLY IN 850 Ground IOC1 PKP
SETPOINTS
From Ground CT SIGNAL INPUT:
Ground current (Ig) CT Bank 1 - J1

894119C1.vsdx
USED ONLY IN 845
Figure 130: Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
8.2.2.11 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67G)

The Ground Directional Overcurrent protection element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications
shown by the operands Gnd Dir OC FWD and Gnd Dir OC REV respectively. The output operands are asserted if
the magnitude of the operating current is above a Pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as
forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the ground current. There are
separate Pickup settings for the forward-looking and reverse-looking functions.
The directional unit uses the ground current (Ig) for fault direction discrimination, and can be polarizing, by either
Calculated V0 zero-sequence voltage, or Measured VN zero sequence voltage. The following tables define the
ground directional overcurrent element.
DIRECTIONAL UNIT
OVERCURRENT UNIT
POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
–V_0 Ig
Forward
-V_0 = 1/3(VN) Ig
Voltage GROUND CURRENT (Ig)
-V_0 – Ig
Reverse
-V_0 = 1/3(VN) – Ig
380 1601-0651
When POLARIZING VOLTAGE is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V0. The
following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element by showing the voltage-
polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
● ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
● FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
● REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation).
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power
system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is
designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in
faster directional discrimination bringing more security to element operation.
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and
should therefore be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as
compared to the forward-looking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows better protection
coordination.
The above bias should be taken into account when using the Ground Directional Overcurrent element to
directionalize other protection elements.
For Dual Feeder Applications, for Signal Input of CT Bank 1 – J1 >> VT Bank 1 -J2 is considered as Polarizing
voltage source. And, For CT Bank 2 – K1 >> VT Bank 2 – K2 is considered as Polarizing Voltage Source.
1601-0651 381
-V
REV L F L

V G
(
REV F

R R
L L

E
E
-E
- L
VG L
VG
REV L F L

V
8 8
Figure 131: Ground Directional Voltage-polarized Characteristics
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Ground Directional OC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
The signal Input setting is visible only in the 845 and 889. For other products, it is hidden.
382 1601-0651
POLARIZING MODE
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
Default: Voltage
This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
If Voltage
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization.
Select either the zero-sequence voltage V0, calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence
voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X. The calculated V0 can be used as polarizing voltage
only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing
voltage if the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as the open delta
connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be greater
than the voltage set under Polarizing Volt Supv to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the
polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
If Current
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the angle of the polarizing current measured on the
ground current input K1-CT (if available). The polarizing current must be greater than 0.05 x CT to be
validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is
given. For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure
that a known direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location.
If Dual
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A
given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous
forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
POLARIZING VOLTAGE
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX(VN)
Default: Calculated V0
Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual" polarizing mode is set. The
polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase
voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX")
POLARIZING VOL SUPV

Range (3.xx): 0.005 to 0.100 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT
Range (4.10): 0.005 to 0.400 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT
Default: 0.020 x VT
The zero-sequence (V0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be greater than the Polarizing supervision
voltage configured in this setting, to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid,
neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
FORWARD ECA
Range: –180° to 180° in steps of 1°
Default: 75°
This setting defines the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in "Voltage" polarizing mode.
"Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the
forward direction shifted by 180°.
1601-0651 383
FORWARD LIMIT ANGLE

Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.
FORWARD PICKUP
Default: 0.050 x CT
This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction.
REVERSE LIMIT ANGLE

Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.
REVERSE PICKUP
Default: 0.050 x CT
This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction.
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
384 1601-0651
C

F

>
>
K
?

C
>
>

J

B
H

?

#
I B

$
A
H
?
"

H
E
!

"

G !
>
G
>
<
<

/
.
&

9

#

8

$

&

(

1

3

3

&

1

"
+
6

+
6

"
* "

L
" )
.
"
$

!
)
&
( ) (
(

&
' +
,
%
'
-
*
&
&

(
&

%
5

#
&

!

Figure 132: Ground Directional Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
8.2.2.12 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT (87G)

Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides ground fault detection for low-magnitude ground fault currents
primarily for ground faults close to the neutral point of the wye connected transformer winding. An internal ground
fault on an impedance grounded wye winding produces a low magnitude ground fault current depending on the
position of the fault with respect to the winding neutral point.
The diagram below shows the dependence of the fault current on the fault distance from the neutral point.
1601-0651 385
Figure 133: Fault current with respect to distance from neutral
The resultant primary current can be negligible for ground winding faults within 35% of the distance from the neutral
point since the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the
primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns.
Application of Restricted Ground Fault protection extends the fault coverage towards the neutral point for low-
impedance grounded winding.
Figure 134: Restricted Ground Fault zone of protection
RGF protection in the 8-series range of relays uses a low impedance current differential scheme. The relay
calculates the magnitude of the ground differential current as an absolute value from the vector summation of the
computed residual current, and the measured ground current, and applies a restraining current defined as the
maximum measured line current (Imax) to produce a percent slope value. The slope setting allows determination of
the sensitivity of the element based on the class and quality of the CTs used. The figure below shows typical wiring
between the winding and ground CTs and the CT terminals, to assure correct performance of the protection.
386 1601-0651
Figure 135: Three CT wiring for the Restricted Ground Fault protection
RGF protection includes ground current supervision mechanism to provide more security during external non-
ground faults associated with CT saturation. This can cause spurious neutral currents, which may jeopardize the
security of the RGF 1 protection. Therefore, when the GROUND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is enabled, the
algorithm checks whether the ground current measured by the relay satisfies the selected GROUND CURRENT
SUPERV LEVEL, before making an operation decision. The ground current supervision is not active if the
GROUND CURRENT SUPERVISION is selected as Disabled. The RGF 1 protection works without the
supervision as well.
The settings of this function are applied to the ground and all three phase currents to produce pickup and trip flags.
The RGF 1 pickup flag is asserted, when the restrained ground differential current is above the PKP value. The
RGF 1 operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined in RGF 1 PKP DELAY. The
element drops from Pickup without operation, if the calculated restrained ground differential current drops below
97-98% of the Pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.The Restricted Ground Fault function can be
inhibited by a blocking input.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > RGF 1 (X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: CT Bank 1 -J1
1601-0651 387
PICKUP
Default: 0.300 x CT
This setting defines the minimum Pickup level of the ground differential current required for operation. The
Pickup value is expressed in times Phase CT (primary) rating.
SLOPE
Default: 50%
This setting defines the slope as the ratio between the ground differential current and the maximum line current
(ground restraining current) as a percentage. The RGF 1 element operates if the actual ground differential/
restraint ratio is greater than the slope and the ground differential current is greater than the RGF 1 Pickup
setting.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.100 s
The RGF 1 Pickup Time Delay setting defines the time required for the RGF 1 element to operate after it has
picked up. This time delay overrides the spurious ground differential current condition caused by CT saturation
due to external non-ground faults, or during transformer energization. Since RGF 1 protection is intended to
detect small ground fault currents, delayed clearance of such a fault is not a high concern. On the other hand
delayed RGF 1 operation due to a spurious ground differential current caused by an out-of-zone fault can be
used as a backup for downstream protections should they fail to clear the fault.
GND CURR SUPERV

Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the ground current supervision of the RGF 1 function. If set to Disabled, the
RGF 1 function works without ground current supervision. The ground current level is monitored if the setting is
set to Enabled.
GND CURR SUPERV LEVEL

Default: 0.300 x CT
This setting defines the level of measured ground current above which operation of the RGF 1 protection is
allowed. The setting is presented as a times ground CT (primary) rating. The measured ground current is
compared to the setting only if the GROUND CURRENT SUPERVISION is set to Enabled.
BLOCK
Default: Off
388 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
Example: Transformer : 5MVA, 13.8kV/4.16kV, D/Yg1 type
● Rg = 10 ohms
● Phase CTs: 800:5
● Ground CT: 300:5
● Ifgnd (max) = 4.16kV/(10 ohms *√3) = 240A - maximum ground fault current
To detect a ground fault on the Wye winding at 15% distance from the neutral point, the relay shall detect ground
differential current of:
● Igd = (15x240)/100 = 36 A/800 = 0.045 x CT – PKP setting for the RGF protection
The transformer loading is almost unaffected for ground faults close to the winding neutral, so that the winding rated
load can be used as a reference in defining the RGF 1 slope setting. The rated load for 4.16kV Wye winding is:
● Irated = 5MVA/(4.16kV*√3) = 693 A
Slope setting, % = (36 A/693A)*100 = 5.1%. Select 5% if the transformer is expected to run most of the time at full
load. If most of the time the transformer runs at lower than the nominal loads, the slope setting can be set to higher
value:
● @ 70% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 485 A)*100 = 7%
The ground current supervision feature and/or the RGF 1 Pickup time delay can be used if CT saturation due to
heavy external fault, is a concern.
1601-0651 389
390
8.2.2.13
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
AND
1(TRIP)
Configurable in 845
OR
AND
SETPOINT LATCH
FUNCTION: R
LED: ALARM
Disabled AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip
OR
Any Alarm
Latched Trip
Alarm S
OR
AND
Latched Alarm LATCH SETPOINT

Configurable Command R Output Relay X
|I2|=1/3*|Ia+Ib*(1∠240º)+Ic*(1∠120º)|
SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RGF 1 RGF 1 OP
OR
AND
BLOCK :
Off = 0
METERING
Currents
SETPOINTS
I0 RGF 1
SETPOINTS Ig PICKUP:
Igd RGF 1
SIGNAL INPUT:
SLOPE:
IA RUN SETPOINTS
Igd > RGF 1

Select highest value
Figure 136: Restricted Ground Fault Protection Logic Diagram

IB PICKUP DELAY: LED:
Imax = max (Ia,Ib,Ic) Imax = PICKUP
tPKP
CT Bank 1 - J1
AND
negative sequence current magnitude |I2| using the following formula:

IC 0 FlexLogic Operands
Igd >= I pickup RGF 1 PKP
Ig
Calculate 3Io
USED ONLY IN 845
Igd = |3Io + Ig|
SETPOINTS
RGF 1
GND CURR SUPERV:
OR
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1 FlexLogic Operands
RGF 1 GND CURR SUPERV
LEVEL: RGF 1 Superv ON
AND
Ig > I Level
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51_2)

The input for computing negative-sequence current is the fundamental phasor value. The relay computes the
The Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the system.
1601-0651
The settings of this function are applied to the calculated negative sequence current to produce Trip or Pickup flags.
The Negative Sequence TOC Pickup flag is asserted when the negative sequence current is above the pickup
value. The Negative Sequence TOC Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the
selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the
measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. When
Definite Time is selected, the time for Negative Sequence TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Negative Sequence TOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank name can be changed in
The Signal Input setting is visible only in the 845 and 889. For other products, it is hidden.
PICKUP
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of Negative Sequence TOC element.
CURVE
Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse, ANSI
Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC Very Inverse,
IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Moderately Inverse
TDM
Default: 1.00
TMS
Default: 1.000
1601-0651 391
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s) and BPN EDF curves.
K (RI)
Default: 1.00
This k(RI) setting can be made visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as Rapid
Inverse curve
TIME DELAY
Default: 1.000
This setting sets the Time delay for the Negative Sequence TOC element, when operate time is selected as
Definite Time (DT).
This Time Delay setting can be made visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as
Definite Time (DT).
DT Adder
Default: 0.00
The DT Adder setting will be visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under Curve setting.
RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
Selection of a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time is provided using this setting.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the element will reset after a time delay provided by Reset Time (IEC
tReset) setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for the
selected inverse curve.
When using IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, Rapid Inverse curves for the Operate
characteristic, Definite Time is used by default as Reset characteristic.
Reset Time [ANSI]

Default: 0.000s
This setting determines the Reset Time for the Definite Time (DT) characteristic.
This can be made visible from setting management when ‘Reset Char’ setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, and RI curves.
392 1601-0651
DIRECTION
Default: Disabled
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 393
394
8.2.2.14
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
AND
1(TRIP)
OR
Trip
Latched Trip SETPOINTS S
AND
Alarm PICKUP: LATCH
OR
Latched Alarm CURVE: R
LED: ALARM
Configurable TIME DIAL: AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TMS:
OR
Any Alarm
k(RI):
|I2|=1/3*|Ia+Ib*(1∠240º)+Ic*(1∠120 º)|
Direction (from Neg Seq S
TIME DELAY:
AND
LATCH
RESET
Command R SETPOINT
RESET TIME
RESET Output Relay X
SETPOINTS DIRECTION: Do Not Operate, Operate
BLOCK: RUN I_2 > PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
Off = 0 Neg Seq TOC1 OP
OR
USED ONLY ON
845 Adjust PKP
SETPOINTS LED: PICKUP

Calculated value
SIGNAL INPUT:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Negative sequence current (In_2) CT Bank 1 - J1 Phasor
Neg Seq TOC1 PKP
the negative sequence current magnitude |I2| using the following formula:
USED ONLY IN 845
From Autoreclose
Figure 137: Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

(per shot settings)
USED ONLY IN 850 894041C1.vsdx
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50_2)
system. The input for computing negative sequence current is the fundamental phasor value. The relay computes
The Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the
1601-0651
The element responds to the negative-sequence current and applies a positive sequence restraint for better
performance: a small portion (12.5%) of the positive sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative
sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity:
Iop = |I2| - K * |I_1|
where K = 1/8 and |I_1| = 1/3*|Ia+Ib*(1∠120º)+Ic*(1∠240 º)|
The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors during three-phase faults
● fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults.
The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase
injection: Iop = 0.2917 * I_injected; three-phase injection, opposite rotation: Iop = I_injected).
The settings of this function are applied to the calculated negative sequence current to produce Pickup and Trip
flags. The Negative Sequence IOC Pickup flag is asserted, when the negative sequence current is above the pickup
value. The Negative Sequence IOC Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the Negative Sequence IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds, the Pickup
and Operate flags are asserted at the same time. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the negative
sequence current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Negative Sequence IOC 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
PICKUP
Default: 1.000 x CT
DIRECTION
Range: Non-Directional, NegSeq Dir [1-4] FWD, NegSeq Dir [1-4]
Default: Non-Directional
PICKUP DELAY
1601-0651 395
Default: 0.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
396 1601-0651
8.2.3
1601-0651
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
AND
1(TRIP)
● Phase undervoltage (Phase UV)

OR
● Undervoltage curves (UV Curves)

Trip
Latched Trip S
AND
● Auxiliary undervoltage (Auxiliary UV)

Alarm
LATCH
OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
Direction (from Neg Seq
Directional OC element) SETPOINTS
S
AND
PICKUP: SETPOINTS LATCH SETPOINT

PICKUP DELAY: Command R Output Relay X
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

DIRECTION:
SETPOINTS
RUN DROPOUT DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BLOCK:
Neg Seq IOC 1 OP
OR
Off = 0 (|I_2| K * |I_1|)> PICKUP tPKP

tDPO
OR
From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
LED: PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
USED ONLY IN 850
Neg Seq IOC 1 PKP
SETPOINTS
Negative Sequence IOC source
SIGNAL INPUT:
Figure 138: Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent logic diagram

I_2 and I_1 CT Bank 1 - J1 Phasor

894042C1
The 845 transformer protection relay provides the following voltage protection elements:
397
● Phase overvoltage (Phase OV)

● Auxiliary overvoltage (Auxiliary OV)
● Neutral overvoltage (Neutral OV)
● Negative sequence overvoltage (Neg Seq OV)
● Volts per Herz
8.2.3.1 UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage
delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
T = D/(1 - V/Vpkp)
Where:
● T = Operating Time
● D = Undervoltage PICKUP TIME DELAY setpoint (for D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
● Vpkp = Undervoltage Pickup Level
The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects
the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage.
Note:
At 0% of Pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage PICKUP TIME DELAY setpoint.
Figure 139: Inverse Time Undervoltage Curves
If FlexCurves are selected, the operating time determined based on following equation:
T = FlexCurve (Vpkp / V)
398 1601-0651
Note:
FlexCurve reverses the ratio of voltages. The ratio of set pickup value to the measured voltage.
Example: For a Pickup set to 0.9 x VT, when the measured voltage is 0.82 x VT, the ratio would be 0.9/0.8 = 1.1,
therefore in the FlexCurve, the corresponding Trip time setting entry is at 1.1 x PKP (not at 0.82 x PKP). On the
other hand, when the measured voltage is 1 x VT, the ratio is 0.9/1 = 0.9, therefore, in the FlexCurve, the
corresponding Reset time entry is at 0.9 x PKP.
8.2.3.2 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (27P)

The Phase Undervoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained undervoltage conditions. This element may be used for permissive functions, initiation of the source
transfer schemes, and similar functions.
The Phase Undervoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a time delayed
element which can be configured with definite time, inverse time or FlexCurves. The Phase Undervoltage element
has programmable minimum operating threshold to prevent some undesired operation when voltage is not
available. The input voltages are the three phase to phase voltages from delta connected VTs (PTs) or three phase
to ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs).
The settings of this function are applied to each of the three voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per
voltage input. The UV Pickup flag is asserted, when the measured voltage on any of the three voltage inputs is
below the PKP value. The UV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup time
delay or for the time defined by the selected inverse curve / FlexCurve, and number of voltages required for
operation matches the number of voltages selected in the setting. The element drops from Pickup without operation
if the measured voltage rise above 102 to 103% of the Pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
The MINIMUM VOLTAGE setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0
allows a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
This element may be used to give a desired time delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (phase to
ground or phase to phase for wye VT connection, or phase to phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite time
element. For the inverse time setpoint, the undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Phase UV 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2 (order code dependent)
This setting provides the selection for the voltage signal input.
MODE
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Default: Phase to Ground
1601-0651 399
Note: F/W rev 4 default is Phase to Phase

This setting provides the selection of phase to ground and phase to phase voltages for a Wye VT connection
(phase to phase for delta connected VT connection).
Note:
Only Phase-to-Phase mode should be used when Delta/Single’ VT Connection Type and Pseudo Reference Phase-to-Phase
is programmed for the Phase VT Connection setting under System/Voltage Sensing.
PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Phase Undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 0.80 x VT with a 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04kV (or 92V secondary). If
the mode selection is phase to phase and the Setpoints/System Setup/Voltage Sensing/Phase VT Connection
selection is Wye, the previous example translates to the phase to phase voltage value of 11.04kV x 1.732 =
19.12kV.
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Default: 0.20 x VT
This setting sets the minimum operating voltage for the undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a PKP setting of 0.20 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 2.76kV (or 23V secondary).
If the Mode setting selection is Phase to Phase and the Setpoints/System Setup/Voltage Sensing/Phase VT
Connection selection is Wye, the previous example translates to a
Phase to Phase voltage value of 2.76kV x 1.732 = 4.78kV.
PHASES FOR OPERATION

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
This setting defines the number of voltages required for operation of the Phase UV protection function.
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Default: Definite Time
This setting provides the selection of definite time delay or time delay inverse undervoltage curves, or
FlexCurves. In the case of FlexCurves, the voltage ratio used is reversed. Refer to the equation and note
regarding FlexCurves in the previous section .
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
400 1601-0651
This setting provides definite time pickup delay. This setting can be made visible from setting management, only
when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as DT (Definite Time).
RESET TIME
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides selection for dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
undervoltage condition.
RESET MODE
Range: Definite Time, Dependent Time
This setting is based on IEC 60255-151 reset characteristics.
If Definite Time is selected, the percentage of elapsed time for the operate timer is memorized for the set reset
time. If the pickup condition returns before the reset timer has timed out, the operate time initializes from the
memorized value. Otherwise, the memorized value is reset to zero after the reset time times out.

Figure 140: Reset Mode Definite Time
If Dependent Time is selected, the operate timer start decrementing when the pickup condition resets. If the pickup
condition returns before the reset timer has timed out, the operate timer again start incrementing. Otherwise, the
relay returns to its reset state after the set reset time.

Figure 141: Reset Mode Dependent Time
Note:
This setting is hidden when Undervoltage Curve is configured to Definite Time. When Curve is programmed as Definite Time,
the Reset Mode is always Definite Time.
BLOCK
1601-0651 401
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
402 1601-0651
8.2.3.3
1601-0651
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP
FUNCTION: 8S: To operate Output Relay
AND
1(TRIP)
Trip OR
Latched Trip S
AND
LATCH
Alarm
OR
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
SETPOINTS
S
BLOCK : AND
LATCH SETPOINT
Off = 0
AND
859
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Phase UV1 OP
OR
Bypass Stopped Block SETPOINTS
Yes PICKUP or Starting Pickup*
OR
No
PICK-UP DELAY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TMS
AND
Motor Stopped
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

889 RESET TIME SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS RESET MODE PHASES FOR OPERATION:

SETPOINTS
RUN VA(VAB) < PICKUP
AND
SIGNAL INPUT: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
Figure 142: Phase Undervoltage Protection logic diagram

ANY ONE
initiation of the source transfer schemes and similar functions.

NAME( Ph VT Bnk1-J2
OPERATE: ANY TWO
OR
VA(VAB) MINIMUM FlexLogic Operands

RUN VB(VBC) < PICKUP
AND
ALL THREE }
VB(VBC) MINIMUM Phase UV1 OP A:
ANY ONE
SETPOINTS VC(VCA) MINIMUM RUN VC(VCA) < PICKUP ANY TWO { Phase UV1 OP B:
AND
PICK-UP:
OR
Phase-to-Ground Voltages
Wye connection MODE: ALL THREE } Phase UV1 OP C:
Phase A voltage (VA)

Phase B voltage (VB) * Starting Pickup is
applicable to 859 only
Phase C voltage (VC)
Phase-to-Phase Voltages
LED: PICKUP
Delta connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB)
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
MODE: Phase to Ground, Phase
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) to Phase (for wye connection) Phase UV1 PKP:
Phase to Phase (Delta VTs)
Calculated Phase-to-Phase Phase UV1 PKP A:
Voltages Wye connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) Phase UV1 PKP B:
{
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) Phase UV1 PKP C:
859
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting

The relay provides two identical Auxiliary Undervoltage (UV) elements per protection group, or a total of 12
elements. Each Auxiliary Undervoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system
components against sustained undervoltage conditions. This element may be used for permissive functions,
403
The Auxiliary Undervoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a time
delayed element which can be programmed with definite time, inverse time or FlexCurves. The Auxiliary
Undervoltage element has a programmable minimum operating threshold to prevent undesired operation when
voltage is not available. The input voltage is the auxiliary voltage.
The settings of this function are applied to auxiliary voltage input to produce Pickup and Trip flags. The Auxiliary UV
Pickup flag is asserted when the auxiliary input voltage is below the PKP value. The Auxiliary UV Trip flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup time delay or for the time defined by the
selected inverse curve/FlexCurve. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured voltage rises
above 102 to 103% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will
allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage, or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Auxiliary UV 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Auxiliary Undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT. For example, a Pickup setting of
0.80 x VT with a 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04kV (or 92V secondary).
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Default: 0.20 x VT
This setting sets the minimum operating voltage for the undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
This setting provides the selection of definite time delay or time delay inverse undervoltage curves. In the case of
FlexCurves, the voltage ratio is reversed.
404 1601-0651
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
If Inverse Time is selected as an Undervoltage Curve setpoint, the Pickup Delay value is loaded to variable D in
the curve formula.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
LED: TRIP
AND
Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
OR
S
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
SETPOINT R
FUNCTION: Set Dominant LED: ALARM
AND
Disabled FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Trip Any Alarm
Latched Trip
AND
S
OR
Alarm LATCH SETPOINT

Latched Alarm R Output Relay X
SETPOINTS Command
Configurable RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETPOINTS Aux UV 1(2) OP:

PICKUP DELAY:
AND
BLOCK :
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES:
Off = 0
AND
SETPOINTS RUN Vx > PICKUP LED: PICKUP
MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
SETPOINTS Aux UV 1(2) PKP:
Vx > MINIMUM
SIGNAL INPUT:
NAME( Ax VT Bnk1-J2
889
Auxiliary voltage (Vaux)
Figure 143: Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection logic diagram
8.2.3.4 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59P)

The relay provides two identical Phase Overvoltage (OV) elements per protection group, or a total of 12 elements.
Each Phase Overvoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained overvoltage conditions. The Phase Overvoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no
time delay or may be set as a definite time element. The input voltages are the three phase to phase voltages from
delta connected VTs or three phase to ground voltages from wye connected VTs.
1601-0651 405
The settings of this function are applied to each of the three voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per
voltage input. The OV Pickup flag is asserted when the voltage on any voltage input is above the PKP value. The
OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Pickup time delay and that
number of voltages required for operation is equal to the number defined by voltages required for the operation
setting. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the measured voltage drops below the configured
dropout level of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. The dropout level can be configured at
Setpoints > Device > Installation > OV/UV DPO Range.
Phase Overvoltage elements may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained overvoltage conditions. The Phase Overvoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no
time delay or may be set as a definite time element, Inverse Time, or with FlexCurve. The input voltages are the
three phase to phase voltages from delta connected VTs, or the three phase to ground voltages from wye
connected VTs.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the overvoltage pickup delay setpoint defines a family of curves
as shown below.
T = D / [(V/Vpickup)-1] when V > Vpickup
406 1601-0651
where:
● T = trip time in seconds
● D = Overvoltage Pickup Delay setpoint
● V = actual phase-phase voltage
● Vpickup = Overvoltage Pickup setpoint
Figure 144: Overvoltage curves

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Phase OV 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
1601-0651 407
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, dependent on order code
MODE
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Default: Phase to Ground
Note: F/W rev 4 default is Phase to Phase
This setting provides the selection of phase to ground and phase to phase voltages for a Wye VT connection
(phase to phase for delta connected VT connection).
Note:
Only Phase to Phase mode should be selected when Delta/Single VT Connection Type and Pseudo Reference Phase-to-
Phase is programmed for the Phase VT Connection setting under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing.
PICKUP
Default: 1.50 x VT
The setting sets the phase overvoltage pickup level to specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 1.10 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 15.18kV. If the mode selection is
phase to phase and Setpoints > System Setup > Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection selection is Wye,
the previous example translates to the phase to phase voltage value of 15.18kV x 1.732 = 26.29kV.

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
The setting defines the number of voltages required for operation of the Phase OV protection function.
CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
This setting provides selection of curves for overvoltage as definite time, inverse time overvoltage curves or
FlexCuves.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time pickup delay.
408 1601-0651
Note:
This Time Delay setting is visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as DT (Definite Time).
TMS
Range: 0.5 to 100.0 in steps of: 0.5
Default: 1.0
If the Inverse Time is selected as an Curve setpoint, the TMS value is loaded to variable “D” in the curve formula
Note: This TMS setting is visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as IDMT
or Inverse Time.
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 409
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP
8S: To operate Output Relay
AND
FUNCTION:
1(TRIP)
OR
Trip
S
AND
Latched Trip
LATCH
OR
Alarm
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM
AND
Configurable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
AND
S
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS Command R Output Relay X
SETPOINTS PICKUP: SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AND
BLOCK : PICKUP DELAY: Phase OV 1 OP
Off = 0 CURVE:
DROPOUT DELAY: SETPOINTS
RUN VA(VAB) > PICKUP
t PKP
889 only
t RST PHASES FOR OPERATION:
SETPOINTS RUN
t PKP
SIGNAL INPUT: VB(VBC) > PICKUP t RST ANY PHASE
RUN
OR
t PKP OPERATE: ANY TWO
NAME( Ph VT Bnk1-J2 THREE FlexLogic Operands
VC(VCA) > PICKUP t RST }
PHASE
Phase OV 1 OP A:
ANY PHASE
SETPOINTS ANY TWO { Phase OV 1 OP B:
OR
PICKUP:
THREE
Phase-to-Ground Voltages PHASE }
Wye connection MODE: Phase OV 1 OP C:
Phase A voltage (VA)
Phase B voltage (VB)
Phase C voltage (VC)
Phase-to-Phase Voltages
Delta connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) LED: PICKUP
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC) MODE: Phase to Ground, Phase
to Phase (for wye connection)
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) Phase to Phase (Delta
Calculated Phase-to-Phase connection) Phase OV 1 PKP:
Voltages Wye connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) Phase OV 1 OP A:
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) { Phase OV 1 OP B:
Phase OV 1 OP C:
Figure 145: Phase Overvoltage logic diagram
8.2.3.5 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59X)

The relay provides one Auxiliary Overvoltage (OV) element per protection group, or a total of 6 elements. Each
Auxiliary OV element is used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against sustained
overvoltage conditions. This element can be used for monitoring zero-sequence voltage (from an "open corner
delta" VT connection), permissive functions, the source transfer schemes, restoration and similar functions.
The Auxiliary OV element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or may be set as a definite
time element, Inverse Time, or with FlexCurves. The input voltage is the auxiliary voltage.
The settings of the Auxiliary OV Protection function are applied to the auxiliary voltage input to produce pickup and
trip flags. The Auxiliary OV pickup flag is asserted, when the voltage on auxiliary input is above the PKP value. The
Auxiliary OV trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by pickup time delay, Inverse
Time, or FlexCurves. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the measured voltage drops below
97-98% of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the overvoltage pickup delay setpoint defines a family of curves
as shown below.
T= D / [(V/Vpickup) - 1] when V > Vpickup
Where:
● T = trip time in seconds
● D = Overvoltage Pickup Delay setpoint
410 1601-0651
● V = actual phase-phase voltage

● Vpickup= Overvoltage Pickup setpoint
● The element reset rate is a linear reset time from the threshold of trip.
Figure 146: Overvoltage Curves

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Auxiliary OV
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
This setting provides the selection for the signal input.
PICKUP
Default: 1.50 x VT
This setting sets the auxiliary overvoltage pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 1.10 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 15.08kV (or 126.5V secondary).
CURVE
1601-0651 411

This setting provides the selection of curves for the overvoltage as definite time, inverse time overvoltage curves
or FlexCurves.
PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 - 6000.000s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 1.000s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time dropout delay of the operate signal if the Curve setting is selected as Definite
Time. An instantaneous reset is provided by dropout time delay setting of 0.000 s.If the selected Curve setting is
Inverse Time, the dropout delay value is used to linearly reset the element. If the Curve is selected as a
FlexCurve, the reset setpoints of the FlexCurve are used to reset the element.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
412 1601-0651
LED: TRIP
AND
OR
S
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
SETPOINT
R
FUNCTION: Set Dominant LED: ALARM
AND
OR
Trip Any Alarm
Latched Trip
AND
S
OR
Alarm
LATCH SETPOINT
Latched Alarm
Configurable RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
OR
Aux OV OP
AND
BLOCK : PICKUP:
Off = 0 LED: PICKUP
Overvoltage Curves:
RUN
Vx > PICKUP
889 Aux OV PKP
SETPOINTS
SIGNAL INPUT:
PICK-UP DELAY:
NAME( Ax VT Bnk1-J2
DROP-OUT DELAY:
t PKP
t RST
Auxiliary voltage
Auxiliary Voltage (Vx)
Figure 147: Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection logic diagram
8.2.3.6 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59N)

The relay provides one Neutral Overvoltage (Neutral OV, also called Neutral Displacement) element per protection
group.
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage conditions caused by a
ground fault or the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage
(3V0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered
under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Secondary is the base used when setting the Pickup
level. The Neutral Overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied
voltage (initialized from FlexCurves A, B, C or D) or can be used as a definite time element. The source voltage
assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT and phase VTs must be wye connected. VT errors and
normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element.
Note:
The same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral Displacement. When using the curve to
determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element, substitute the ratio of neutral voltage to Pickup level for the
current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the curve plot.
The relay provides Neutral Overvoltage protection with independent time delay characteristics. Each stage provides
a choice of operate characteristics, where you can select between:
● An IDMT characteristic
● A range of user-defined curves
● DT (Definite Time)
The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The Inverse Time characteristics is given by:
T = D / [(V/Vpkp) - 1]
1601-0651 413
where:
● D = neutral over voltage Pickup Time Delay setpoint (for D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
● Vpkp = neutral over voltage Pickup Level
If FlexCurves are selected, the same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral
Displacement. When using the curve to determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element,
substitute the ratio of neutral voltage to the pickup level for the current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the
curve plot.
T = FlexCurve(V/Vpkp)
Inverse Time neutral over voltage Curves for varying D

The Neutral Overvoltage feature should be applied with caution. It would normally be applied to give line-to-ground
fault coverage on high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems, which are isolated. This constraint stems from
the fact that a measurement of 3V0 cannot discriminate between a faulted circuit and an adjacent healthy circuit.
Use of a time delayed back-up or alarm mode allows other protections an opportunity to isolate the faulted element
first.
The settings of this function are applied to 3V0 calculated from the three phase-to-ground (wye connected VTs)
voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per 3V0 calculated voltage. The Neutral OV Pickup flag is asserted
when the calculated 3V0 voltage is above the PKP value. The Neutral OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays
picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the 3V0 voltage. The element
drops from Pickup without operation, if the calculated voltage drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the
time for operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Neutral OV 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
414 1601-0651
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, Dependent on order code
This setting provides the selection for the voltage bank input.
PICKUP
Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT (FW up to 3.xx)
Range: 0.02 to 4.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT (FW from 4.10 onwards)
Default: 0.30 x VT
CURVE
Range: Definite Time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D, Inverse time (from FW4.10)
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
The NEUTRAL OV 1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the NEUTRAL OV 1 CURVE setting is Definite
time.
If Inverse Time is selected as neutral OV Curve, the Pickup Delay value is loaded to variable D in the curve
formula.
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 415
416
8.2.3.7
or a total of 6 elements.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
AND
1(TRIP)
OR
Trip
Latched Trip S
AND
Alarm
LATCH
OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
S
AND
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS Command R Output Relay X
PICK-UP DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS DROP-OUT DELAY: Neutral OV 1 OP
OR
BLOCK : PICKUP:
CURVE:
Off = 0 RUN
AND
t PKP
Figure 148: Neutral Overvoltage Protection logic diagram

3_Vo > PICKUP
Van > 0.85 x VT t RST
OR
Vbn > 0.85 x VT
Vcn > 0.85 x VT

LED: PICKUP FlexLogic Operands
Neutral OV 1 PKP:
Phase Voltages
SETPOINTS
Phase A Voltage (Va) SIGNAL INPUT:
Phase B Voltage (Vb) 3_V0
Phase C Voltage (Vc)
Ph VT Bank 1-J2
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59_2)

USED ONLY IN 850
894050C1
The relay provides one Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Negative Sequence OV 1) element per protection group,
1601-0651
The Negative Sequence Overvoltage element can be used to detect an asymmetrical system voltage condition, loss
of one or two phases of the source, or reversed phase sequence of voltages. The element responds to the negative
sequence voltage (V2), calculated from the phase voltages. The Negative Sequence Overvoltage element may be
set as an instantaneous element with no time delay, or may be set as a definite time element.
The settings of this function are applied to the calculated Negative Sequence Voltage to produce Pickup and Trip
flags. The Negative Sequence OV Pickup flag is asserted when the Negative Sequence Voltage is above the PKP
value. The Negative Sequence OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup
time delay. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the calculated Negative Sequence Voltage drops
below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Neg Seq OV 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, dependent on order code
PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup level specified per times VT. For example, a Pickup
setting of 0.80 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04 kV (or 92 V secondary).
Note:
If the 3 phase VT is delta connected, the Negative Sequence Overvoltage pickup level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the
user setting, before being compared to the actual negative sequence voltage.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time pick-up delay. Instantaneous operation is selected by pick-up time delay
setting of 0.000 s.
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time drop-out delay. An instantaneous reset is provided by drop-out time delay
setting of 0.000 s
1601-0651 417
BLOCK
Default: OffOUTPUT RELAY X

EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
418 1601-0651
8.2.3.8
1601-0651
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
AND
1(TRIP)
VOLTS PER HERTZ (24)

OR
859: To operate the selected

S Breaker/Contactor Trip Relay
AND
LATCH
R
SETPOINT
LED: ALARM
AND
FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm
Disabled
Trip S
AND
Latched Trip LATCH SETPOINT

Alarm R Output Relay X
OR
Command
Latched Alarm RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Configurable FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS Neg Seq OV 1 OP:
OR
SETPOINTS PICK-UP DELAY:

SETPOINTS PICKUP:
DROP-OUT DELAY:
BLOCK: RUN
AND
t PKP
Off = 0 V_2 > PICKUP
t RST
LED: PICKUP FlexLogic Operands
Phase Voltages SETPOINTS Neg Seq OV 1 PKP:

Phase A Voltage (Va) Signal Input
Phase B Voltage (Vb)
Figure 149: Negative Sequence Overvoltage Protection logic diagram

Phase C Voltage (Vc) Ph VT Bank 1 J2
850 Only 894051C1vsdx
voltage on the relay terminals, the V/Hz value is automatically set to “0”. The V/Hz value is established as per
menu are used for V/Hz operation, then V/Hz is based on the selected Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing >
The volts-per-hertz (V/Hz) value is calculated using the maximum of the three-phase voltage inputs. If there is no
voltage and nominal frequency power system settings as follows: if the phase voltage inputs defined in the source
419
Ph VT Bnk1-J2 > Voltage 1 > Phase VT Secondary setting, and the Setpoint > System > Power System >
Nominal Frequency setting.
For example, if Phase VT Secondary and Nominal Frequency are set as 120 V and 60 Hz, respectively, these set
values define the base unit as 1 x (V/Hz).
The volts-per-hertz ratio after division of these nominal settings is 120/60 = 2.
Assume the PICKUP setpoint from the V/Hz element is set to 1.05 x (V/Hz). This will mean that in order for the
element to pick up, the actual volts-per-hertz ratio after division should be 2 *1.05 = 2.1.
The ratio of 2.1 can be achieved if for example the measured voltage is 126V and frequency is 60 Hz, or the voltage
is constant at 120 V and the frequency is 57.14 Hz, or any other combination of these two values, which after V/Hz
division equals 2.1.
To check back the PICKUP setting, we use the base (V/Hz) unit = 120/60 = 2, such that the PICKUP setting value is
2.1/2 = 1.05 x (V/Hz).
The element has a linear reset characteristic. The reset time can be programmed to match the cooling
characteristics of the protected equipment. The element will fully reset from the trip threshold in Reset Time
seconds. The V/Hz element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite
or Inverse timed element. The characteristics of the inverse curves are shown as follows.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Volts per Hertz 1(2)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent on the order code
This setting specifies the input voltage used to calculate the per-unit volts-per-Hertz (V/Hz). If three phase
voltages are used then set the AC Inputs to “Ph VT Bnk1-J2”. To use the V/Hz element with auxiliary voltage, set
AC Inputs to “Aux VT Bnk1-J2”.
VOLTAGE MODE
Range: Phase-ground, Phase-phase
Default: Phase-ground
If the Phase VT Connection is selected as “Wye”, then the VOLTAGE MODE setting further defines the
operating quantity and per-unit value for this element. If the VOLTAGE MODE is set as “Phase-phase”, then the
operating quantity for this element will be phase-to-phase nominal voltage. Likewise, if the VOLTAGE MODE is
set to “Phase-ground”, then the operating quantity for this element will be the phase-to-ground nominal voltage.
If the Phase VT Connection (set under Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing) is selected as “Delta”, then the
phase-to-phase nominal voltage is used to define the per-unit value, regardless of the Voltage Mode selection.
PICKUP
Range: 0.80 to 4.00 V/Hz in steps of 0.01
420 1601-0651
Default: 1.05 V/Hz

Enter the Volts per Hertz value (in V/Hz) above which the Volts per Hertz 1 element will pickup.
CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse A, Inverse B, Inverse C, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Definite Time: For the definite time curve, T(s) = TD multiplier. For example, setting the TD multiplier to 20
results in a time delay of 20 seconds to operate when above the Volts/Hz pickup setting. Instantaneous
operation can be obtained the same way by setting the TD multiplier to “0”.
Inverse Curve A: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve A shape is derived from the formula:

2 `

1

where:
● TDM= Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)
● V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu)
● F = frequency of voltage signal (pu)
1601-0651 421
● Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

The volts/hertz inverse A curves are shown below.
Figure 150: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve A
Inverse Curve B:The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve B shape is derived from the formula:
TDM V
T when Pickup
V F
Pickup 1

where:
where:
● TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)
422 1601-0651

The Volts/Hertz inverse B curves are shown below.
Figure 151: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve B
Inverse Curve C:The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve C shape is derived from the formula:
TDM V
T when Pickup
1/2 F
V
Pickup 1

where:
● TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)
1601-0651 423

The Volts/Hertz Inverse C curves are shown below.
Figure 152: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve C
TD MULTIPLIER
Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for the Time Dial Multiplier which modifies the operating times for the selected
inverse curve.
T RESET
Default: 1.00
Enter the time that the Volts per Hertz value must remain below the pickup level before the element resets.
424 1601-0651
BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Volts per Hertz can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 425
426
8.2.4
8.2.4.1
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POWER ELEMENTS
Trip SETPOINTS Any Trip
Latched Trip
Voltage Mode: LED: TRIP 869: To operate
OR
Alarm
Output Relay 1(TRIP)
AND
Latched Alarm Pickup:
Figure 153: Volts per Hertz logic diagram

Configurable
OR
DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)

Curve:
TD Multiplier: S
AND
LATC
Reset Time:
H
SETPOINT RUN R
AND
Block: LED:
ALARM
AND
Off=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm
SETPOINT
SIGNAL INPUT: S
AND
t LATC
Ph VT H SETPOINT
Phase Voltage Inputs from Ph VT
Bnk1-J2 Bnk1-J2 Command R Output Relay X
Actual Values RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
WYE Delta FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Van Vab Aux VT
Volts/Hz 1 OP
OR
Bnk1-J2
Vbn Vbc MAX V/Hz
V, F
Vcn Vca
J2-3VT Frequency
Auxiliary Voltage Inputs from Aux FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VT Bnk1-J2 Volts/Hz 1 PKP
Actual Values
Vx V, F
J2-Vx Frequency

The relay provides two identical Directional Power elements per protection group; a total of 12 elements.
1601-0651
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse power
(32REV) and low forward power (32FWD) applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-
generation. The relay measures the three-phase power from either a full set of wye-connected VTs or a full-set of
delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional
Power characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
Pcosq + Qsinq > MIN
Where:
● P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the metering convention
● Ɵ is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION) angles
● SMIN is the minimum operating power.
The element has two independent (as to the PICKUP and DELAY settings) stages for Alarm and Trip, and they can
be set separately to provide mixed power protection.
Figure 154: Directional Power characteristic
By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum
operating power, a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For
example, section (a) in the figure below shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low
forward power applications.
1601-0651 427
Figure 155: Sample applications of the Directional Power element
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Power > Directional Power 1(X)
428 1601-0651
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power 1, Power 2
Default: Power 1
This setting provides the selection for the power input. Depending on the order code selection, the
corresponding CT/VT inputs to calculate power are selected under Setpoints > System > Power Sensing.
RCA
Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Default: 180°
This setting specifies the Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) for the Directional Power function. Application of this
setting provides the following benefits:
It allows
○ the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower,
etc.).
Together
○ with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit
more sensitive settings.
It allows
○ for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye
connected power transformer and phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “0°,” reactive
overpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “90°,” active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “180°,”
and reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “270°”.
CALIBRATION
Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05°
Default: 0°
This setting allows the Relay Characteristic Angle to change in steps of 0.05°. This may be useful when a small
difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings.
The setting enables calibration of the Directional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and
CTs. The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings.
STAGE 1 SMIN
Range: -3.000 to 3.000 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001 x Rated Power
Default: 0.100 x Rated Power
The setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the stage 1 of
the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line; the negative
values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional power sample
1601-0651 429
applications figure for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating
characteristics.
The setting applies to three-phase power and the rated power is as follows:
Rated Power = 3 x VTSecondary (phase-neutral) x VTRatio x CTPrimary(Wye-connected VT), or Rated Power =
(3)1/2x VTSecondary (phase-phase) x VTRatio x CTPrimary (Delta-connected VT)
For example:
A setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW.
If 7.967 kV is a primary VT phase-neutral voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source rated power is
239 MVA, and, SMIN must be set at 4 MW/239 MVA =0.0167 x Rated ≈ 0.017 x Rated.
If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 x Rated.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops
below the cutoff level.
STAGE 1 DELAY
Default: 0.500 s
The setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
STAGE 2 SMIN
Range: -3.000 to 3.000 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001 x Rated Power
Default: 0.100 x Rated Power
The setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for stage 2 of the
element. The setting needs to be coordinated with the setting of stage 1.
STAGE 2 DELAY
Default: 20.000 s
The setting specifies a time delay for stage 2. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
430 1601-0651
1601-0651
TARGETS
Default: Enabled
Default: Self-reset
LED: TRIP
AND
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DIR POWER 1
OR
Any Trip
FUNCTION:
Disabled S
AND
LATCH
Trip
Latched Trip R
LED: ALARM
Alarm
OR
AND
Latched Alarm FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
Configurable
Figure 156: Directional Power logic diagram

S
AND
SETPOINTS LATCH SETPOINT
BLOCK: Command R Output Relay X
Off=0 RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SETPOINT DirPwr 1 OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
START BLOCK DELAY:
Motor Stopped tBLK SETPOINTS
0
DIR POWER 1
Applicable to 869 & 859
RCA:
SETPOINTS
DIR POWER 1
I1* > CURRENT CUTOFF CALIBRATION: DIR POWER 1
DIR POWER 1 STAGE 1 DELAY: OR
*In 850, I1 is positive-sequence current of the FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
current source selected to determine Power Current Cutoff is programmed under STAGE 1 SMIN: tPKP
configured under setting Signal Input. In 869, I1 is Path: Setpoints\Device\Installation DIR POWER 1 DirPwr 1 Stg1 OP
measured as J1 I_1. In 859, I1 is measured as I_1.
STAGE 2 SMIN: 100ms
Three-phase Power RUN DirPwr 1 Stg1 PKP
Real Power (P) DIRECTIONAL POWER
Reactive Power (Q) CHARACTERISTICS DirPwr 1 Stg2 PKP
SETPOINTS
DIR POWER 1
LED: PICKUP
STAGE 2 DELAY: DirPwr 1 PKP
OR
tPKP
DirPwr 1 Stg2 OP
100ms

431
8.2.5 FREQUENCY ELEMENTS
8.2.5.1 FREQUENCY PROTECTION COMMON SETUP

The relay provides a selection to detect between Normal and Hi-Speed Freq as input to detect underfrequency,
overfrequency and rate of change of frequency (ROCOF). Compared to the regular metered voltage frequency
value, the Hi-Speed Freq input has a faster response time, but is less accurate.
The Normal frequency estimation algorithm checks the time between two positive zero-crossing of the effective
frequency signal. It also provides an extra security condition before considering that the new incoming period would
be valid and available for the estimation of the frequency. The frequency is updated with the integration of the last
16 stored periods. When there is a large change in frequency between two consecutive periods, the estimation of
the frequency is updated with the integration of the last 4 valid periods.
The Hi-Speed Freq estimation algorithm is less restrictive and checks the time between two consecutive zero-
crossings in both directions of the effective frequency signal. Therefore, one measurement (raw frequency) would
be available every half cycle. The frequency is updated with the integration of the latest valid stored periods. The
number of periods used for the calculation is specified by the setting Semicycles Set. Another estimation of the
frequency is also provided after the integration of the latest valid stored periods but considering the setting
Semicycles Reset.
The Actual value Hi-Speed Freq is available under Path: Measurement > Hi-Speed Freq.
High-Speed Frequency
Default: Disabled
This setting enables measurement of Hi-Speed Freq. When enabled, all the frequency-based elements (UF, OF,
ROCOF) provide user-configurable selection between Normal and Hi-Speed Freq. The selection between
Normal and Hi-Speed Freq is specified by the setpoint Frequency Input. When disabled, all the frequency-
based elements (UF, OF, ROCOF) use Normal Frequency.
Freq Set # Semi-Cycles

Range: 5 to 16
Default: 5
Short Description:
The number of semi-cycles used for frequency estimation.
Freq Reset # Semi-Cycles

Range: 3 to 16
Default: 3
The number of semi-cycles used for frequency estimation to evaluate the reset conditions.
8.2.5.2 UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)

The relay can be used as the primary detecting relay in automatic load-shedding schemes based on
underfrequency. The need for such a relay arises if during a system disturbance, an area becomes electrically
isolated from the main system and suffers a generation deficiency due to the loss of either transmission or
generation facilities. If reserve generation is not available in the area, conditions of low system frequency occur
432 1601-0651
which can lead to a complete collapse. The relay provides four identical Underfrequency (UNDERFREQ) elements
per protection group, or a total of 24 elements, which can automatically disconnect sufficient load to restore an
acceptable balance between load and generation. The Underfrequency element can be set as an instantaneous
element with no time delay or as a definite time delayed element. The Underfrequency element has the
programmable minimum operating thresholds to prevent undesired operation during periods of light load or
unavailable voltage. The input voltages are the three phase-to-phase voltages from delta connected VTs (PTs),
three phase-to-ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs), or single phase auxiliary voltage. The input currents
are the three phase currents.
The Underfrequency Pickup flag is asserted when the measured frequency of the specified source is below the PKP
value and the voltage and current are above the MINIMUM levels. The Underfrequency Trip flag is asserted if the
element stays picked up for the time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element drops from Pickup without
operation if the measured frequency rises above 0.03Hz of the Pickup value and stays dropped-out for the defined
time delay before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum operating voltage setting selects the minimum voltage below which the element is blocked.
The minimum operating current setting selects the minimum current below which the element is blocked. Operation
during periods of light load are prevented.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Underfrequency 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
FREQUENCY INPUT
Range: Normal, High-Speed
Default: Normal
You can select Normal or High-speed frequency as an input. Compared to the regular metered voltage
frequency value, the high-speed frequency has the faster response but lesser accuracy. This setpoint is only
available when Hi-Speed Freq is enabled under the path: Setpoints\Protection\Frequency\Common Setup.
PICKUP
Range (normal frequency): 15.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Range (high-speed frequency): 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59 Hz
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
1601-0651 433
VT INPUT
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for Underfrequency element operation specified per times VT. The setpoint
prevents incorrect operation before energization of the source to the relay location, and during voltage dips.
Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and SIGNAL INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is used
as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since
the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.
Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection, the positive sequence voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such
condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-
phase voltage.
Note:
When the source input for tracking frequency differs from that used for Under Frequency function, due to frequency variations,
you may encounter notable voltage measurement errors as the frequency of input signal moves away from the tracking
frequency source input. For instance, when the setting `Frequency Input' is configured to auxiliary voltage (from the 4th VT),
while the tracking frequency comes from the main source's three-phase voltages, any difference between the frequency of the
auxiliary voltage (Vx) and the three-phase voltages (3VT) leads to a magnitude measurement error in Vx, caused by the
deviation of Vx frequency from the main frequency
CT INPUT (not for 889)

Default: CT Bank 1-J1 or CT Bank 1-K1, dependent on order code
MINIMUM CURRENT
Default: 0.200 x CT
The setting sets the minimum value of current required on any phase to allow the Underfrequency element to
operate. The setpoint is used to prevent underfrequency tripping during periods of light load, when this action
would have an insignificant effect on the system. A setting of zero is suspend current supervision.
BLOCK
Default: Off
434 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 435
436
8.2.5.3
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Any Trip
Trip
Latched Trip AND
1(TRIP)
Alarm Configurable in 845 & 859
OR
OR
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND START BLOCK DELAY: R
Motor Stopped tBLK LED: ALARM
0
AND
Applicable to 869 & 859 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm
OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
S
AND
LATCH SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS Underfreq 1 OP
OR
AND
BLOCK:
Off=0
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
UNDERFREQ1 UNDERFREQ1
CT INPUT PICKUP DELAY:
MINIMUM CURRENT:
Figure 157: Underfrequency Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS
Not Applicable to 869 & 859 UNDERFREQ1
RUN UNDERFREQ1 SETPOINTS
DROPOUT DELAY:
Positive-sequence I MINIMUM PICKUP:
OUTPUT RELAYS (3-7):
869: CT Bank 1 J1 RUN tPKP
AND
AND
Do Not Operate, Operate
AND
859: CT Bank
0<f PICKUP tDPO
OR
SETPOINTS LED: PICKUP

SETPOINTS
VT INPUT* Fast reset delay
UNDERFREQ1 SETPOINTS 60 ms
8S*: Ph VT Bnk 1 J2 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: 0
UNDERFREQ1
859: Ph VT Bnk
AND
RUN PICKUP: Underfreq 1 PKP

* except 859 Positive-sequence
RUN
AND
V MINIMUM
wye/delta 0 < f high-speed PICKUP

Composite FREQUENCY f
Vx (not appliable to 859) FREQUENCY f high-speed f reset > PICKUP
FREQUENCY f reset
SETPOINTS
Freq Set #Semicycles
SETPOINTS
Freq Reset #Semicycles
SETPOINTS
Frequency Input
Normal
The relay provides identical Overfrequency (OVERFREQ) elements per protection group.
High-speed

A significant overfrequency condition, likely caused by a breaker opening and disconnecting load from a particular
generation location, can be detected and used to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal. If this is not done,
1601-0651
the over speed can lead to a turbine trip, which would then subsequently require a turbine start up before restoring
the system. If the overfrequency turbine ramp down is successful, the system restoration can be much quicker. The
overfrequency monitoring feature of the relay can be used for this purpose at a generating location.
The Overfrequency feature is inhibited from operating unless the magnitude of the positive sequence or auxiliary
voltage rises above a threshold. When the supply source is energized, the overfrequency delay timer is allowed to
start timing only when the threshold is exceeded and the frequency is above the programmed Pickup level. In the
same way, when an overfrequency condition starts the overfrequency delay timer and the voltage falls below the
threshold before the timer has expired, the element resets without operating.
The Overfrequency element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay, or as a definite time
delayed element. The Overfrequency element has a fixed minimum operating threshold to prevent undesired
operation during periods of unavailable voltage. The input voltages are the three phase-to-phase voltages from
delta connected VTs (PTs), three phase-to-ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs), or single phase auxiliary
voltage.
The settings of this function are applied to each source to produce Pickup and Operate flags. The Overfrequency
Pickup flag is asserted when the measured frequency of the specified source is above the PKP value and the
voltage is above the threshold. The Overfrequency Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the
time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured frequency
decreases below 0.03 Hz of the Pickup value and stays dropped out for the defined time delay before the time for
operation is reached.
The minimum operating voltage is set as a threshold below which the element is blocked.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Overfrequency 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides selection of the frequency input.
FREQUENCY INPUT
Default: Normal
PICKUP
Range (normal frequency): 15.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Range (high-speed frequency): 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59 Hz
1601-0651 437
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for Overfrequency element operation specified per times VT.
Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and SIGNAL INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is used
as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since
the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.
Note:
phase voltage.
Note:
When the source input for tracking frequency differs from that used for Under Frequency function, due to frequency variations,
you may encounter notable voltage measurement errors as the frequency of input signal moves away from the tracking
frequency source input. For instance, when the setting `Frequency Input' is configured to auxiliary voltage (from the 4th VT),
while the tracking frequency comes from the main source's three-phase voltages, any difference between the frequency of the
auxiliary voltage (Vx) and the three-phase voltages (3VT) leads to a magnitude measurement error in Vx, caused by the
deviation of Vx frequency from the main frequency.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
438 1601-0651
1601-0651
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
SETPOINT
AND
1(TRIP)
FUNCTION: Configurable in 845 & 859
OR
Disabled
S
Trip
AND
LATCH
Latched Trip
R
Alarm
OR
LED: ALARM
Latched Alarm
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable
Figure 158: Overfrequency logic diagram

OR
Any Alarm
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND S
AND
START BLOCK DELAY:
Motor Stopped tBLK 0 LATCH SETPOINT
Applicable to 869 & 859 Command R Output Relay X
SETPOINTS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLOCK:
Overfreq1 OP
OR
Off=0
AND
Voltage Inputs
None
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
OVERFREQ1
SIGNAL INPUT*: OVERFREQ1 PICKUP DELAY:
MINIMUM OPERATING SETPOINTS
WYE DELTA VOLTAGE: OVERFREQ1
OVERFREQ1
VA VAB DROPOUT DELAY:
RUN PICKUP:
VB VBC Positive-sequence RUN tPKP
AND
V MINIMUM
AND
VC VCA tDPO
OR
f PICKUP
Composite
Vx* FREQUENCY f LED: PICKUP

FREQUENCY f high-speed
*Not applicable to 859 FREQUENCY f reset FAST RESET DELAY
SETPOINTS 60 ms FlexLogic Operands
SETPOINTS 0
OVERFREQ1 Overfreq1 PKP
AND
PICKUP:
Freq Set #Semicycles
RUN
AND
Freq Reset #Semicycles
f high-speed PICKUP
From: Setpoints\Protection\
Frequency\Common Setup
f reset < PICKUP
SETPOINTS
Frequency Input
Normal
High-speed
439
8.2.5.4 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)

There is one Frequency Rate of Change protection element which can respond to rate of change of frequency with
voltage, current and frequency supervision.
The Rate of Change element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a definite time
delayed element. The rate of change element has the programmable minimum operating voltage and current
thresholds to prevent undesired operation under specific system conditions.
The settings of this function are applied to each source to produce Pickup and Trip flags.
The Frequency Rate of Change Pickup flag is asserted when the calculated frequency rate of change of the
specified source is above the PKP value, the voltage and current are above the MINIMUM levels, and the frequency
is within a certain range. The Frequency Rate of Change Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the
time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element instantaneously drops from Pickup without operation, if the
frequency rate of change drops below 96% of the Pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum voltage and current thresholds select the minimum voltage and current below which the element is
blocked.
The minimum and maximum frequencies set the operating frequency range out of which the element is blocked.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Frequency Rate of Change 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable setting enables the element.
FREQUENCY INPUT
Default: Normal
TREND
Range: Decreasing, Increasing, Bi-directional
Default: Decreasing
The setting allows configuring of the element to respond to increasing or decreasing frequency, or to a frequency
change in either direction.
PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01 Hz/sec
Default: 0.50 Hz/sec
The setting specifies an intended Pickup threshold.
440 1601-0651
For applications monitoring a decreasing trend, set TREND to Decreasing and specify the Pickup threshold
accordingly. The operating condition is: -df/dt > PKP.
For applications monitoring an increasing trend, set TREND to Increasing and specify the pickup threshold
accordingly. The operating condition is: df/dt > PKP.
For applications monitoring rate of change of frequency in any direction, set TREND to “Bi-Directional” and
specify the Pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition can be either of the above two conditions.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 2.000 s
This setting provides a definite Pickup time delay. Instantaneous operation is selected by a Pickup time delay
setting of 0.000 s.
MINIMUM FREQUENCY
Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (3.x.x, normal speed with 4.xx)
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (4.xx high speed)
Default: 45.00 Hz
The setting defines the minimum frequency level required for operation of the element.
The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to
monitor an increasing trend but only if the frequency is already above certain level, this setting is set to the
required frequency level.
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (3.x.x, normal speed with 4.xx)
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (4.xx high speed)
Default: 65.00 Hz
The setting defines the maximum frequency level required for operation of the element.
The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to
monitor a decreasing trend but only if the frequency is already below a certain level (such as for load shedding),
this setting is set to the required frequency level.
VT INPUT
This setting provides selection of the frequency input.
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Default: 0.700 x VT
1601-0651 441
The setting defines the minimum voltage level required for operation of the element. The supervising function
responds to the positive-sequence voltage. Overvoltage supervision is used to prevent operation under specific
system conditions such as faults.
Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and FREQUENCY INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is
used as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting
since the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.
Note:
phase voltage.
CT INPUT
Default: CT Bank1-J1 or CT Bank1-K1, dependent on order code
This setting provides the current bank selection for the minimum current setting.
MINIMUM CURRENT
Default: 0.200 x CT
This setting defines the minimum current level required for operation of the element. The supervising function
responds to the positive-sequence current. Typical application includes load shedding. Set the Pickup threshold
to zero if no overcurrent supervision is required. The setting of zero suspends the current supervision.
BLOCK
Default: Off
The element will be blocked when the selected operand is asserted.
OUTPUT RELAYS
Each relay can be selected to become either energized or de-energized when operated, and to operate as latched,
self-resetting or pulsed.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the events of the function.
442 1601-0651
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When disabled, no target message is
issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message and its LED indication
follow the operate state of the element, and self-reset once the operate element condition clears. When set to
Latched, the target message will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET
command is received by the relay.
1601-0651 443
444
LED: TRIP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION: S
AND
LATCH
Disabled
R
Trip
LED: ALARM
Latched Trip
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Alarm
OR
OR
Any Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS
BLOCK:
Off=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS
AND
FreqRate1 OP
OR
FREQ RATE TREND:

Current Inputs SETPOINTS Decreasing
OR
SETPOINTS FREQ RATE Increasing
FREQ RATE MINIMUM CURRENT: Bi-directional

CT INPUT: RUN
OR
CT Bank 1 J1 Positive-sequence SETPOINTS
OR
I MINIMUM
Only 850 and 845 SETPOINTS
FREQ RATE
Voltage Inputs FREQ RATE PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY:
None FlexLogic Operands
RUN tPKP
AND
FreqRate1 Dwn OP
AND
SETPOINTS
-df/dt PICKUP 0
FREQ RATE SETPOINTS
VT INPUT: SETPOINTS
FREQ RATE SETPOINTS
869 Ph VT Bnk 1 J2 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: FREQ RATE
FREQ RATE PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY:
859 Ph VT RUN
AND RUN tPKP
Figure 159: Frequency Rate-of-Change Protection logic diagram

Positive-sequence
V MINIMUM FreqRate1 Up OP
wye/delta df/dt PICKUP 0
Composite SETPOINTS
FreqRate1 Up PKP
Vx FREQ RATE
MIN FREQUENCY:
FREQ RATE FreqRate1 Dwn PKP

Note: Aux Voltage (Vx) is not applicable to MAX FREQUENCY:
859 LED: PICKUP
RUN
FREQUENCY f
f > MIN & f < MAX
FreqRate1 PKP
OR
RATE OF CHANGE df/dt
1601-0651
CHAPTER 9
MONITORING
Chapter 9 - Monitoring
446 1601-0651

Monitoring Overview 448
Transformer monitoring 449
Breaker monitoring 462
Functions 476
Harmonic Detection 500
Transient Ground Fault Detection 503
Resistance Temperature Detector Functions 516
Loss of Communications 522
1601-0651 447
9.2 MONITORING OVERVIEW
E1/5-682 4./13869
S D TG./51: U:.5.63s

K#&*N)#Q$#
ye T1> ;G169./ 018:</.
I T/8> ;8/2<83 u-683-/869
O ;:-s. ;8/2<83 u-683-/869
Poo B#$+$# ?/.1@./ A/2869 ;<//.63
?/.1@./ E.1:3G
Moo
;<//.63
!"#$
%"&'()&* ,-w./ 0123-/
Coo
R.1: ,-w./
YZ[\]^_` abcb`c_]^
!"#$ 4.5167
Fo
WK K$Q!$#"#$
!"#$ R.1238J. ,-w./
,<:s.7 =<3><3s
V
)N !"#$
X)** )QQ* A>>1/.63 ,-w./
489831: ;-<63./s
L L L L L H
Figure 160: Monitoring Display Hierarchy
448 1601-0651
9.3 TRANSFORMER MONITORING
9.3.1 HARMONIC DERATING

The presence of harmonic currents in transformers increases the I2R losses, stray losses in the core, clamps and
structural parts, and eddy current losses in the windings. Of these losses, the eddy current losses are of most
concern since they tend to be proportional to the square of the load current and approximately proportional to the
square of frequency which, in turn can cause excessive winding loss and abnormal winding temperature rise in
transformers when harmonics are present.
The Harmonic Derating element makes use of the harmonic derating factor (HDF) computed by the Series 8 relay,
using the harmonic content of the current signals and the transformer data (refer to IEEE C57.110-2008 for the
computation method). Once the derating factor falls below a set value, the relay operates accordingly. The derating
factor is used to evaluate the load capability of the installed transformer under the non-sinusoidal load currents.
Once harmonics are present, the derating factor will decrease from the ideal value of one per unit, which means the
load capability is reduced due to harmonics.
The Load-Limit Reduced LED indicator is ON and an operand of ‘Load Limit Reduced’ is asserted if the HDF of any
winding is less than 0.96, regardless of whether the element is disabled or enabled.
Note:
The following three settings are used in this element:
● Setpoints > System > Transformer > Transformer Setup > Load Loss at Rated Load
● Setpoints > System > Transformer > Transformer Setup > Rated Wndg Temp Rise
● Setpoints > System > Transformer > Transformer Setup > Wndg Resistance (3-ph)
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Transformer > Harmonic Derating > W1(2,3) Harmonic Derating
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
MINIMUM OPER CURRENT

Default: 0.10 x CT
This setting sets the minimum value for all three-phase currents to allow the Harmonic Derating element to
operate.
PICKUP
Default: 0.90
PICKUP DELAY
1601-0651 449
Default: 10 s
LOAD LIMIT SUPV

Default: Enabled
This setting enables the Load Limit Supervision function
BLOCK
Range: Any flexoperand
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
450 1601-0651
Z )$!
XV
LV '$ QTM
bc JK; 11 %
:

a
Y I )1 )! *$.
L &4 )$! '! '$ %$
3
'$ EG@ $ )3
/R S )b ?>
<; '(! '(! (

1 C 97 H
2
H
2 !%
C W C
W
),
H )]$ !,
& U (C
U 3 {
P Z

zL
V
AND AND
P: yL 8
: X
L
L
,%! 4 0
( U4
(C 3
&Y
4

S
1 /R
1 5
) 65
1
1 ~ ~ ~
}0 }0 }0
¡ | | |
S F F F F
1 H_ H_ H_ H_
1 2 2 v x
3 W W W W
AND
* ' * ' * '

,C C ,C C ,C C
34 (' )*! F` (' *)! F` (' *)! F`
H! F,- H_ H! F- H_ H! F- H_
1 [ [ [ )$!# )! 2 )$!# ), v )$!# ), x
[ [ [ W^ ! W^ ! W^
S
[ 43 *.# '$ *.# '$ *.# '$
[ [ [ [ ! ! !
3 \ \ \
[ 3 & B
AND
/R
` ` ` qrp qrp qrp

kg &^ B^ ^ jo * * * jo * * * jo * * *
jts ), ), ), nh
ml
,C C, ,C nh
ml
,C C, ,C nh
ml
,C C, ,C
jki ''$. ''$ ''$ kj '(! '(! '(! kj '(! '(! '(! kj '(! '(! '(!
'(#! $"# hh . . H H H H H H
&% gf
&$ B ihh H
&$ B ihh H
&$ B ihh H
&$ B
S $%"# '!. S e $
$ gf $ $ gf $ $ gf $ $
+$ -O
! '(#! *) ,C =0O d +!1 +!1 +!1 e +! +! +! u +! +! +! w +! +! +!1
F & ! B
d 1 1 1 d 1 1 1 d 1 1
Figure 161: Harmonic Derating Logic diagram
1601-0651 451
9.3.2 THERMAL ELEMENTS

The thermal elements include Hottest-spot temperature, Aging Factor, and Loss of Life elements. The computation
of these elements follows the IEEE standards C57.91-2011 IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed
Transformers, and C57.96-2013 IEEE Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution Transformers. The computations are
based on transformer loading conditions, ambient temperature, and entered transformer data.
Refer to SETPOINTS > SYSTEM > TRANSFORMER > GENERAL and enter the transformer data used in the
computation of Hottest-Spot winding temperature, Aging Factor, and Transformer Loss of Life
Refer to SETPOINTS > SYSTEM > TRANSFORMER > WINDING 1(2,3) and enter the windings data used to
compute the transformer loading
452 1601-0651
1601-0651 453
The transformer winding settings are used for calculation of the winding nominal current, and the load loss at rated
load. The ratio of the actual load to the rated load K is used in the Hottest-spot temperature computation. If the load
loss at rated load is not available from the transformer’s test report, use the following formulae to calculate it.
PR=In(W)2*R
where
● In(W) is the winding rated current
● R is the three phase series resistance.
Refer to Setpoints > System > Transformer > Thermal Inputs menu, and select the inputs for Ambient
temperature and Top-Oil temperature. If no transducer is available to measure Ambient temperature, select the
Monthly Average”setting, and enter the approximate average temperature per month in the monthly calendar
menu. If Top-Oil temperature measurement is not available, select the setting Computed.
..\System\Transformer\Thermal Inputs ..\Setpoints\RTD Temperature\RTD 1

Setpoints Value Unit Setpoints Value Unit
Winding Currents CT Bank 1-J1 Function Disabled
Ambient Temperature Monthly Average Name RTD 1
January -20 °C Type 100 W Platinum
February -20 °C Trip Temperature 155 ºC
Trip Pickup Delay 2 s
March -20 °C
Trip Dropout Delay 0 s
April 7 °C
Trip Output Relay X Do Not Operate
May 15 °C Alarm Function Disabled
June 25 °C Alarm Temperature 130 ºC
July 30 °C Alarm Pickup Delay 2 s
August 30 °C Alarm Dropout Delay 0 s
September 20 °C Alarm Output Relay X Do Not Operate
October 17 °C Sensor Open None
November 14 °C Block Off
December 9 °C Events Enabled
Top-Oil Temperature Computed Targets Latched
<< Status Thermal Tap Chan RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 >>
Note:
To change the temperature unit, i.e. Fahrenheit, Celsius go to Setpoints > Device > Front Panel menu.
The inputs for Ambient Temperature and Top-Oil Temperature from Thermal Inputs menu include selection of RTDs.
The selected RTDs must be programmed, for the temperature to be measured on the relay and be included in the
calculation for hottest-spot winding temperature.
9.3.3 HOTTEST SPOT

The Hottest-Spot Temperature element provides the mechanism for detecting the hottest-spot winding temperatures
inside the transformer. It can be set to alarm or trip in cases where the hottest-spot temperature (as computed by
the relay) is above the PKP threshold for the specified time, this is considered an overheated transformer.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Transformer > Hottest-Spot Temperature
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
454 1601-0651
PICKUP
Range: 50 to 300 in steps of 1 degree (in degrees° F or °C)
Default: 140
Enter the hottest-spot temperature required for operation of the element. This setting must be defined based on
the maximum permissible hottest-spot temperature under emergency transformer loading conditions, and the
maximum ambient temperature.
PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 1 min
This setting is used to select a pickup time delay that is used to delay the operation of the protection.
OUTPUT RELAY 1 (X)

operation.
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the events function.
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
The selection of the Self-reset or Latched settings enables the target messages of the function.
1601-0651 455
LED: ALARM
AND
OR
AND
S
LATCH
Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
Function
OUTPUT RELAYS*
Disabled
OR
Alarm
OR
*excluding trip selected output

Latched Alarm relays
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
Configurable
Pickup Pickup Delay
AND
RUN FlexLogic Operands

SETPOINTS t pkp Hottest-Spot OP
Block
Off = 0
t°C > PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Hottest-Spot PKP
METERING
Hottest-Spot t°
894005C1
Figure 162: Hottest-Spot Logic diagram
9.3.4 AGING FACTOR

The Aging Factor element detects the aging of the transformer in per unit normal insulation aging. The element can
be set for an alarm or trip, whenever the actual aging factor (as computed by the relay) is bigger than the (defined
as acceptable) setting of the aging factor PKP for the specified time delay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Transformer > Aging Factor
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
PICKUP
Default: 2.0
Enter a setting for the aging factor, above which the element will operate. The setting must be above the
maximum permissible aging factor under emergency loading conditions, and maximum ambient temperature.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 10 min
This setting is used to select a pickup time delay that is used to delay the operation of the protection.
OUTPUT RELAY 1 (X)

456 1601-0651

operation.
BLOCK
Default: Off
The Neutral IOC is blocked when the selected operand is asserted.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the Events function.
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
LED: ALARM
AND
OR
AND
S
LATCH
Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET
SETPOINTS
Function
Disabled SETPOINTS
Alarm OUTPUT RELAYS*
OR
OR
Latched Alarm Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
Configurable
Pickup Pickup Delay *excluding trip selected output
relays
AND
RUN
SETPOINTS t pkp
Block FlexLogic Operands
Off = 0 Aging Factor OP
FAA > PKP
METERING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Aging Factor PKP
Aging Factor (FAA)
894006C1
Figure 163: Aging Factor Logic diagram
9.3.5 LOSS OF TRANSFORMER LIFE

The Loss of Life (LOL) element provides a mechanism for detecting the accumulated total consumed transformer
life. It can be set to issue an alarm or trip, when the actual accumulated transformer loss of life is higher than what
is specified by the user loss of life pickup setpoint. For brand new installed transformers, the setting for XFMR
INITIAL LOSS is 0, and for already installed transformers, the user must estimate the consumed transformer life in
hours, being in service.
1601-0651 457
Path: Setpoints > Grouped Elements > Setting Group 1(8) > Transformer > Loss of Xfmr Life
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
INITIAL XFMR LOL

Range: 1 to 500000 hours in steps of 1 hr
Default: 0 hours
Enter a setting for the consumed transformer life in hours. When the LOL element is enabled, the loss of life
computed by the relay is added to the initial loss of life in hours.
PICKUP
Range: 0 to 500000 hours in steps of 1 hr
Default: 200000 hours
Enter the expected life, in hours, required for operation of the element. This setting must be above the total
transformer life set as a reference based on nominal loading conditions, and 30º C ambient temperature, as
outlined in the IEEE standards.
BLOCK
Default: Off
The Neutral IOC is blocked when the selected operand is asserted.
OUTPUT RELAY 1(X)

operation.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the Events function.
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
458 1601-0651
LED: ALARM
AND
OR
AND
S
LATCH
Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET
SETPOINTS
Function
Disabled SETPOINTS
Alarm OUTPUT RELAYS*
OR
OR
Latched Alarm Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
Configurable
Pickup *excluding trip selected output
relays
AND
RUN
SETPOINTS
Block FlexLogic Operands
Off = 0 Xfmr Loss Life OP
LOL > PKP
METERING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Xfmr Loss Life PKP
Xfmr Life Lost
894007C1
Figure 164: Loss of Life Logic diagram
9.3.6 TAP CHANGER FAILURE

The Tap Changer Failure element compares the actual tap changer position with the maximum and minimum set
values. The element picks up when the measured tap position actual value exceeds by one tap step the value
programmed for maximum tap, or when it is lower by one tap step than the value programmed for minimum tap.
The minimum and maximum taps are set in Max Tap and Min Tap setpoints respectively under Setpoints > System
> Transformer > On-load Tap Changer. If this condition persists for the time selected as a Delay setpoint, the
element will operate.
Note:
The Tap Changer Failure element will not be able to detect tap failure , if the Min Tap and Max Tap setpoints Input from the
Tap Changer setup menu are set to the minimum and maximum available values from the range. This applies to any of the
three methods used for tap position detection – BCD, DCmA, and Ohms. To be able to successfully detect Tap changer
failure, the selected Ohms or DCmA at Tap Min must be bigger than the smallest measured Ohms or DCmA values by a value
corresponding to at least one tap step, and the selected Ohms or DCmA values must be smaller than the highest Ohm or
DCmA measured value by a value corresponding to at least one tap step
If the Tap position is used for compensation of the differential current due to the new transformation ratio and the
tap position is detected below the Minimum, or above the Maximum tap , the relay may show small differential
current. If the percent differential protection is set to a very sensitive pickup level, this differential current may cause
operation. To avoid such undesired operation, it is wise to de-sensitize the protection until the tap position is
detected back in the range between the minimum and maximum tap. For this reason either operand TC at Min Tap,
or TC at Max Tap from the Tap changer Setup, or The Tap Changer Fail PKP can be used for setpoint group
change, where the Percent differential protection can be enabled with less sensitive settings.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Transformer > Tap Changer Failure
1601-0651 459
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
DELAY
Default: 5.00 s
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAYS
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
460 1601-0651
AND
LED: ALARM
SETPOINT
OR
FUNCTION
Disabled
AND
S
Alarm
OR
LATCH
Latched Alarm
R
Configurable System/Transformer/Onload LED: PICKUP
Tap Changer Set
Max Tap Position Command Dominant
RUN RESET
TC Position > Max Tap

Position SETPOINT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT OUTPUT RELAYS
AND DELAY
BLOCK
OR
System/Transformer/Onload
Off = 0 tPKP
Tap Changer
OR
0
Min Tap Position
ACTUAL VALUE
RUN
Metering/Transformer/ FlexLogic Operands
Tap Changer Position TC Position < Min Tap
Position Tap Ch Fail OP
TC Position
FlexLogic Operands
RUN
Tap Ch Fail PKP
Tap Step > 1, or
Invalid BCD
FlexLogic Operands
AND
Invalid: Tap Jump
894004A1
Figure 165: Tap Changer Failure logic diagram
1601-0651 461
9.4 BREAKER MONITORING
9.4.1 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING

The first and second Form A relay outputs on slot F include a circuit to monitor the DC voltage across the output
contact when it is open. To do that, an external jumper is wired between the terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 OPT/V
for the Trip coil monitoring, or/and FA_2 COM and FA_2 OPT/V for the Close coil monitoring.
The monitor contains a level detector whose output is set to logic 1 (ON) when the voltage is above 20 volts. The
voltage monitor is used to check the health of the overall trip and closing circuit.
The two figures below show the two different connections of the breaker trip and close coils to the relay’s trip and
close output relays for either no voltage monitoring and for voltage monitoring of the circuits.
Output relay 1 (TRIP) Output relay 2 (CLOSE)
FA_1 FA_2
NO NO
FA_1 FA_2
COM COM
V V

FA_1
OPT/V
FA_2
OPT/V

Trip Close
Coil Coil

Figure 166: Coil Circuits without Monitoring
Output relay 1 (TRIP) Output relay 2 (CLOSE)
FA_1 FA_2
NO
NO

FA_1 FA_2
COM COM
V V

FA_1
OPT/V
FA_2
OPT/V

Trip Close
Coil Coil

Figure 167: Coil Circuits with Monitoring
To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 COM to connect the Trip coil, and
provide a jumper between terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 OPT/V voltage monitor).
Some applications require monitoring of the Trip coil or/and Close coil continuously, regardless of the breaker
position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor across the auxiliary contacts. With
462 1601-0651
such connections, the trickle current is maintained by the resistor. For these applications the setting for the Bypass
Breaker Status should be enabled.
D +
O 1 (T ) !"#!" $%&'* , .0$234
F_1 HIK,
O Er a L QR<S>;8G
Jr HIK, UWX@S>
F_1
NO M
V
F_1 HIK,
O T/V 30P
678 YZ@8[[
$ >S[?[<:>
9:;<89<
5a Ba
r r =>?@
c ac A:?G
r 678 YZ@8[[

C 9:;<89< $ >S[?[<:>
D -
]^ `
defgef hijkl m nôdpqs ¡¢£¤ ¥ ¦§¨©ª
m ¹º»¥
^d zy{ ¼ ÁÂ±ÃÄ°²Å
m ¹º»¥ ÆÇÈÉÃÄ
d ½
\
m ¹º»¥
d\ ¾¿À
«¬ ÊËÉ²ÌÌ
®¯°±²®± ÄÃÌÍÌ±¯Ä
tuv {
h zx
wxyz{wz ³´µ¶·
³µ¸´
|}~
|~}
«¬ ÊËÉ²ÌÌ
®¯°±²®± ÄÃÌÍÌ±¯Ä
]^ b

Figure 168: Trip and Close Coil Circuit with Continuous Monitoring
The value of the resistor is shown in the following table:

Power Supply (V DC) Resistance (Ohms) Power (Watts)
24 1000 2
48 10000 2
110 25000 5
125 25000 5
220 50000 5
1601-0651 463
Warning:
The Trip and Close Contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the relay is
energized.
Path:Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Trip Circuit Monitoring
TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORING
FUNCTION:
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
PICKUP DELAY:
Default: 10.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY:
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides selection for reset time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the overcurrent
condition.
TRIP RELAY SELECT:

Default: Relay 1
Range: Off, Relay X
Any output relay from the list of available output relays can be programmed for breaker tripping coil monitoring.
Note:
It is recommended to select the same Trip Relay set under the "Breaker: Trip Relay Select" option.
BYPASS BREAKER STATE:

Default: Disabled
Set the Bypass Breaker State to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary
contact for continuous Trip circuit monitoring. The circuits are monitored regardless of breaker position.
BLOCK:
Default: Off
464 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS:
Default: Enabled
TARGETS:
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 465
466
FUNCTION:
CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING

LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINT
OR
TCM
FUNCTION: S
AND
Disabled
LATCH # 1
Alarm Command Set-Dominant
Latched Alarm
OR
RESET R
Configurable
Figure 169: Trip Circuit Monitoring Diagram

SETPOINT
TCM
BLOCK :
Off = 0 SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7

Setpoints\Monitoring\Breaker\
Breaker 1 Monitor\Trip Circuit
Monitoring
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Configurable

SETPOINT
TCM FlexLogic Operand
Trip Relay Select = Relay 1
PICK-UP DELAY:
Trip Coil 1 BKR1 OP
OR
TCM
DROP-OUT DELAY:
t PKP
AND
t RST
OUTPUT RLY #1 MONITORING
VOLTAGE < THRESHOLD
SETPOINT
TCM
BYPASS BKR STATE: FlexLogic Operand
Disabled = 0
Trip Coil 1 BKR1 PKP
Path:Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Close Circuit Monitoring

OR
FlexLogic Operand
BKR1 Closed
AND
OUTPUT RLY #1 TRIP
OPERATE
894080C2
1601-0651
Default: Disabled
PICKUP DELAY:
Default: 10.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY:
Default: 0.000 s
CLOSE RELAY SELECT:

Default: Relay 2
Range: Off, Relay X
Any output relay from the list of available output relays can be programmed for breaker coil closing monitoring.
Note:
We recommend selecting the same Trip Relay set under the Breaker: Close Relay Select option.
BYPASS BREAKER STATE:

Default: Disabled
Set the Bypass Breaker State to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary
contact for continuous Close circuit monitoring. The circuits are monitored regardless of breaker position.
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK:
Default: Off
EVENTS:
Default: Enabled
TARGETS:
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 467
894079C2
LED: ALARM
FlexLogic Operand
FlexLogic Operand
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7
Close Coil 1 BKR1 PKP

SETPOINTS
Close Coil 1 BKR1 OP

OR
Set-Dominant
LATCH # 1
R
S
AND AND OR
Command
RESET
t RST
SETPOINT
DROP-OUT DELAY:
PICK-UP DELAY:
t PKP
CCM
CCM
AND
OR
OUTPUT RLY #2 MONITORING
VOLTAGE < THRESHOLD
OR AND
Breaker 1 Monitor\Close Circuit
Setpoints\Monitoring\Breaker\
Close Relay Select = Relay #2
FlexLogic Operand
Monitoring\
CLOSE OPERATE
OUTPUT RLY #2
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
BYPASS BKR STATE:

Latched Alarm
BKR1 Opened
Configurable
Disabled = 0
FUNCTION:
BLOCK :
Disabled
Off = 0
Alarm
CCM
CCM
CCM
Figure 170: Close Circuit Monitoring Diagram
9.4.2 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

The relay provides one Breaker Arcing Current element. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear
on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as
an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed
threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand and set an
alarm. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
468 1601-0651
The same output operands that are selected to operate the Trip output relay that is used to trip the breaker
indicating a tripping sequence has begun, are used to initiate this feature. A time delay is introduced between
initiation and starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the breaker before the contacts
have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary relays and the breaker
mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between the change-of-state of the operand (from 0
to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current
continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
Figure 171: Breaker Arcing Current Measurement
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker > BKR 1 Monitor > BKR 1 Arcing Current
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
INITIATION
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand, digital input, virtual input or remote input that initiates the Breaker
Arcing Current scheme, typically the Trip signals from internal protection functions.
DELAY
Default: 0.030 s
The setpoint provides a delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is initiated and the time the
breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
ALARM LEVEL
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-c in steps of 1 kA2-c
Default: 1000 kA2-c
The setpoint specifies the threshold value (kA2-cycle) above which the output operand is set.
1601-0651 469
OUTPUT RELAYS X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
470 1601-0651
9.4.3
1601-0651
wear and contact wear.
BREAKER HEALTH
LED: Alarm
AND
SETPOINTS
OR
BKR 1 ARCING S
FUNCTION:
AND
Disabled LATCH # 1
Command Set-Dominant
Alarm
RESET R
Latched Alarm SETPOINTS
OR
AND
Configurable BKR 1 ARCING
DELAY:
Figure 172: Breaker Arcing Current logic diagram

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS tdelay 100ms
OR
BKR 1 ARCING 0 0 OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7
BLOCK:
OR
Off = 0
AND
RECORDS FlexLogic Operands
SETPOINTS BKR 1 ARCING BKR 1 Arc OP
BKR 1 ARCING CURRENTS
INITIATION: Add to accumulator
Off = 0
Total I² cycle
SETPOINTS
RUN
CT Bank current IA BKR 1 ARCING
IA²t Integrate IA² cycle
ALARM LEVEL:
CT Bank current IB RUN
CT Bank current IC IB²t Integrate IB² cycle Select highest value kA² cyc > Alarm Level
RUN
COMMAND
IC²t Integrate IC² cycle
CLEAR BKR 1 ARCING
CURRENT:
YES = 1
NO = 0 Set all to 0
892743C1.vsdx
The relay provides breaker health information by monitoring and analyzing the operation count, arcing energy of
breaking current, arcing time, tripping time, closing time and spring charging time if applicable. The breaker health
471
status depends on many factors, such as permissible operation number, magnitude of breaking current, mechanical
The operation count is able to give direct information by comparing it with the permissible operation number. The
longer tripping time and closing time can provide an approximate estimation of trip/close coils and mechanical wear.
The increasing spring charging time may imply developing problems in motor and spring mechanisms. Meanwhile,
the increase in arcing energy of the breaking current may reflect the possibility of contact wear. Longer arcing time
may suggest the loss of dielectric strength in the arc chamber. If the arcing energy or any of the time intervals is
above the related Pickup levels for the use-defined times, the Alarm Led is lit.
The scheme is equipped with three incomplete sequence timers for Trip/Close time, arc time and spring charge time
respectively. So it automatically resets the related time interval after the programmed delay.
A breaker operation function is also included, where breaker operation failure is caused by either of the following
conditions:
● The breaker does not respond to a Trip command within the programmed breaker operation delay time.
● The breaker does not respond to a Close command within the programmed time.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Breaker Health
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
MODE
Range: Detection, Monitoring
Default: Detection
The Breaker Health has two running modes: detection and monitoring. Since the monitored time intervals differ
for different breaker types and manufacturers, the detection mode can be used to help set the Pickup settings
based on the historical true values. The operation count, arcing energy of the breaking current, arcing time,
tripping time, closing time and spring charging time are measured and displayed in Records > Breaker Health,
but the element does not pick up when in detection mode. Monitoring mode is the normal mod e, wherein
measurements are analyzed and the element may pick up accordingly.
PRESET TRIP COUNTER

Default: 0
This setting pre-sets the actual operation number when the relay is starting in service or the record is cleared.
TRIP TRIGGER
Default: Off
This setting assigns the trip initiation signal.
CLOSE TRIGGER
Default: Off
This setting assigns the close initiation signal.
472 1601-0651
SPRING CHARGE STATUS

Default: Off
The setting selects the signal to show the status of Spring Charge. Normally, the contact input connected to the
auxiliary contact of the limit switch can be used.
TRIP TIME PICKUP

Default: 0.050 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Trip time. The Trip time interval is initiated by the Trip Trigger signal and
stopped by the Open Status signal.
CLOSE TIME PICKUP

Default: 0.050 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Close time. The Close time interval is initiated by the Close Trigger signal
and stopped by the Close Status signal.
INCOMPLETE TRP/CLS TIME

Default: 0.100 s
The setting declares a breaker operation failure condition if the breaker does not respond within this time delay.
The setting should be greater than the Trip time PKP value and Close time PKP value.
ARC TIME PICKUP

Default: 0.100 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Arc time. The Arc time is initiated by the Open Status signal and stopped
when the current samples in one cycle are less than 0.02 CT. Then the Arc time is equal to the calculated time
interval minus one cycle.
INCOMPLETE ARC TIME

Default: 0.300 s
The setting declares an Arc time failure condition if there are currents flowing through the breaker after this time
delay. This setting should be greater than the Arc time PKP value.
SPRING CHARGE TIME PICKUP

Default: 15.000 s
This setting sets the Pickup level of the Spring Charge time. The Spring Charge time is measured from the pulse
duration of the Spring Charge Status.
1601-0651 473
INCOMPLETE CHARGE TIME

Default: 45.000 s
The setting declares a Charge time failure condition if the spring charging process is not finished after this time
delay. The setting should be greater than the Charge time PKP value.
ARC ENERGY PICKUP

Range: 1 to 100000 kA2-c in steps of 1 kA2-c
Default: 1000 kA2-c
The setting sets the Pickup level of the arc energy. The arc energy value is calculated in the Breaker Arcing
Current element.
Note:
The arc energy is calculated by the breaker arcing current element. If the breaker arcing current element is disabled, the arc
energy is not calculated and this setting should not be used. The arc energy used here is the individual value for each trip and
not the accumulated value recorded in the Breaker Arcing Current element.
ALARM COUNTER
Default: 5
The setting sets the alarm counter level. One counter is used to accumulate the Pickup data from all monitoring
quantities. If the counter value is above the alarm counter level, the LED is lit and one operand is asserted.
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
474 1601-0651
LED: ALARM
AND
OR
AND
S
LATCH
Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
FUNCTION: FlexLogic Operands
Disabled SETPOINTS BKR1 Hlth PKP
Alarm
OR BKR HEALTH
IN ALARM COUNTER:
Latched Alarm
OR
RUN SETPOINTS
Configurable
Counter Real Counter Alarm OUTPUT RELAYS (3-7):
SETPOINTS Command Do Not Operate, Operate
BLOCK: CLEAR RESET

AND
Off=0
AND
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
MODE:
OR
Detection
Monitoring
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH BKR HEALTH
AND
TRIP TRIGER: TRIP TIME PICKUP:

Off=0 RUN
BKR1 Hlth Trip PKP
t_trip PKP
FlexLogic Operand START SETPOINTS

t_trip
BKR1 Opened STOP BKR HEALTH
OR
ARC TIME PICKUP:
START RUN
Current Inputs START t_arc_A BKR1 Arc PKP A
STOP (t_arc_A-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
Phase A Current (ia) ia < 0.02 xCT for one cyc
RUN
START BKR1 Arc PKP B
START t_arc_B (t_arc_B-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
STOP
Phase B Current (ib) ib < 0.02 xCT for one cyc RUN
BKR1 Arc PKP C
START (t_arc_C-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
START t_arc_C
STOP
Phase C Current (ic) ic < 0.02 xCT for one cyc
SETPOINTS
AND
BKR HEALTH
OR
INCOMPLETE ARC TIME:

AND
RUN
t_IAT
AND
t_IAT
OR
OR
BKR1 Arc Fail
AND
t_IAT
AND
Command
AND
OR
RESET
AND
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
OR
INCOMPLETE TRP/CLS TIME:

AND
RUN
OR
BKR1 Hlth OP Fail

t_ITCT
OR
OR
SETPOINTS
AND
BKR HEALTH
AND
CLOSE TRIGER:
Off=0 SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
CLOSE TIME PICKUP:
RUN
FlexLogic Operands START BKR1 Hlth Cls PKP
t_close t_close PKP
BKR1 Closed STOP
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
BKR HEALTH CHARGE TIME PICKUP:
SPRING CHARGE STATUS: RUN
BKR1 Hlth Chg PKP
Off=0 t_charge t_charge PKP
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
INCOMPLETE CHARGE TIME:
RUN
t_ICT
BKR1 Charge Fail
SETPOINTS
OR
BKR HEALTH
ARC ENERGY PICKUP:
Arc Energy Inputs RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP A
IA2t cycle IA2t PKP
RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP B
IB2t cycle IB2t PKP
RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP C
IC2t cycle IC2t PKP

Figure 173: Breaker Health and Operation logic diagram
1601-0651 475
9.5 FUNCTIONS
9.5.1 POWER FACTOR (55)

It is generally desirable for a system operator to maintain the Power Factor as close to unity as possible to minimize
both costs and voltage excursions. Since the Power Factor is variable on common non-dedicated circuits, it is
advantageous to compensate for low (lagging) Power Factor values by connecting a capacitor bank to the circuit
when required. The relay allows two stages of capacitance switching for Power Factor compensation.
The relay calculates the average Power Factor in the three phases as follows:
Average Power
Factor = Total 3-Phase Real Power / Total 3-Phase Apparent Power
Figure 174: Capacitor bank switching
When the measured Power Factor becomes more lagging or leading (depending on the user setting) than the
Switch-In level, the relay operates a user-selected output contact. This output can be used to control a switching
device which connects capacitance to the circuit, or to signal an alarm to the system operator. After entering this
state, when the Power Factor becomes less lagging or leading than the Power Factor Switch-Out level for a time
greater than the set delay, the relay resets the output contact to the non-operated state.
For delta-connected VTs, the Power Factor feature is inhibited from operating unless all three voltages are above a
threshold and one or more currents are above 0.002 x CT. Power Factor element delay timers are only allowed to
time when the voltage threshold is exceeded on all phases and the Power Factor remains outside of the region
between the programmed Switch-In and Switch-Out levels. In the same way, when a Power Factor condition starts
the Power Factor delay timer, if all three phase voltages fall below the threshold before the timer has timed-out, the
element resets without operating. A loss of voltage during any state returns the Power Factor element(s) to the
Reset state.
476 1601-0651
For wye-connected VTs, the power factor value is calculated from the valid phase(s) with a voltage that is above a
user-selected threshold and a current that is above 0.002 x CT. Power Factor element delay timers are only allowed
to time when the supervision conditions are met and the Power Factor remains outside of the region between the
programmed Switch-In and Switch-Out levels. In the same way, when a Power Factor condition starts the Power
Factor delay timer, if one or more valid phases no longer satisfy the supervision conditions, the power factor will be
re-calculated based on the still valid phase(s). If the element is continuously asserted with the new power factor
value, the timer will continue timing, otherwise, the element will reset without operating.
The following figure illustrates the conventions established, where the negative value means the lead power factor,
and the positive value means the lag power factor.
Figure 175: Conventions for Power Factor
For example, the applications of Switch-In and Switch-Out levels are shown in the figures below.
1601-0651 477
478 1601-0651
Figure 176: Switch in and switch out levels
The settings of this function produces Switch-In, Switch-Out and Operate flags. The Power Factor Switch-In flag is
asserted when the absolute value of the calculated Power Factor is below the Switch-In value, and supervision
1601-0651 479
conditions are satisfied. The Power Factor Operate flag in the Switch-In level is asserted if the element stays
switched-in for the time defined by the time delay. After the element drops from Switch-In, the Power Factor Switch-
Out flag is asserted when the Power Factor passes the Switch-Out value. The Power Factor Operate flag in the
Switch-Out level is asserted if the element stays switched out for the time defined by the time delay.
The minimum operating voltage is set as a threshold below which the element is reset.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Power Factor 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Power 1
This setting provides the selection for the power input. (850-D only)
SWITCH-IN
Range: -0.01 to -0.99, 1, 0.99 to 0.01 (for 8 Series EnerVista D&I Setup software Setup software: 0.01 Lead,
0.02 Lead, …, 0.98 Lead, 0.99 Lead, 1, 0.99 Lag, 0.98 Lag, …, 0.02 Lag, 0.01 Lag)
Default: 0.08 Lag
The setting sets the Power Factor Switch-In level. The negative value is used to denote the lead power factor,
and the positive value is used for the lag power factor.
SWITCH-OUT
Range: -0.01 to -0.99, 1, 0.99 to 0.01 (for 8 Series EnerVista D&I Setup software Setup software: 0.01 Lead,
0.02 Lead, …, 0.98 Lead, 0.99 Lead, 1, 0.99 Lag, 0.98 Lag, …, 0.02 Lag, 0.01 Lag)
Default: 1.00
The setting sets the Power Factor Switch-Out level. The negative value is used to denote the lead power factor,
and the positive value is used for the lag power factor.
Note:
SWITCH-IN and SWITCH-OUT are mutually exclusive settings. See the application examples above which show no common
zone in which both SWITCH-IN and SWITCH-OUT are asserted.
DELAY
Default: 50.000 s
The setting provides the definite Switch-In and Switch-Out time delay. Instantaneous operation is selected by the
time delay setting of 0.000 s.
MINIMUM VOLTAGE
480 1601-0651
Default: 0.30 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for Power Factor element operation specified per times VT.
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 481
482
9.5.2
DEMAND
AND
894059C1
LED: ALARM
OR
S SETPOINTS
AND LATCH
OUTPUT RELAYS (3-7):
OR
Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET
Figure 177: Power Factor logic diagram

SETPOINT
POWER FACTOR 1
FUNCTION:
FlexLogic Operands
Disabled
PF 1 Switch-In OP
OR
Alarm
OR
Latched Alarm
Configurable
Power Factor of Three Phases
(delta-connected VTs)
AND
SETPOINT Power Factor of Valid Phase(s)

BLOCK: (wye-connected VTs)
OR
S
AND
Off=0
AND
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS LATCH
Voltage Inputs POWER FACTOR 1
SETPOINT POWER FACTOR 1 Set-Dominant
- delta connected SWITCH-IN:
POWER FACTOR 1 DELAY: R
None RUN
MINIMUM VOLTAGE: tDLY
VAB
RUN
SETPOINT |PF| < |SWITCH-IN|, both PF 0
VBC
VAB MINIMUM and SWITCH-IN are lag or lead
VCA Signal Input
VBC MINIMUM SETPOINTS
AND
SETPOINTS FlexLogic Operands
Current Inputs VCA MINIMUM POWER FACTOR 1 POWER FACTOR 1 PF 1 Switch-Out OP
OR
AND
Phase A Current (IA) IA > 0.002 xCT SWITCH-OUT: DELAY:
OR
Phase B Current (IB) IB > 0.002 xCT RUN tDLY
OR
AND
Power 1
Phase C Current (IC) (System Setup \ Power IC > 0.002 xCT FlexLogic Operands
PF passing SWITCH-OUT 0
Sensing)
Voltage Inputs VA MINIMUM PF 1 Switch-In
AND
- wye connected VB MINIMUM
VA VC MINIMUM LED: PICKUP
OR
AND
VB
OR
VC FlexLogic Operands
850 Only
PF 1 Switch-Out
AND
S
OR
LATCH
Reset-
Dominant
R
OR
894059C1
allow emulation of some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques for statistical or control purposes.
1601-0651
Current Demand is measured on each phase, and on three phases for real, reactive, and apparent power. Setpoints
Note:
The relay is not approved as, or intended to be, a revenue metering instrument. If used in a peak load control system, the
user must consider the accuracy rating and method of measurement employed, and the source VTs and CTs, in comparison
with the electrical utility revenue metering system.
The relay can be set to calculate Demand by any of three methods; Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
Demand.
Thermal Exponential
This selection emulates the action of an analog peak recording Thermal Demand meter. The relay measures the
quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes
the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the Thermal Demand
equivalent based on:
d(t) = D(1 - e-kt)

Where:
● d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
● D = input quantity (constant)
● k = 2.3/thermal 90% response time.
Figure 178: Thermal Demand Characteristic (15 min response)

The 90% thermal response time characteristic defaults to 15 minutes. A setpoint establishes the time to reach 90%
of a steady-state value, just as with the response time of an analog instrument. A steady-state value applied for
twice the response time will indicate 99% of the value.
Block Interval
This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed Demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12 am). The 1440 minutes per
day is divided into the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of Demand
becomes available at the end of each time interval.
Rolling Demand
This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed Demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every
minute and indicates the Demand over the time interval just proceeding the time of update.
1601-0651 483
9.5.2.1 CURRENT DEMAND

The Current Demand for each phase is calculated individually, and the Demand for each phase is monitored by
comparison with a single Current Demand Pickup value. If the Current Demand Pickup is equaled or exceeded by
any phase, the relay can cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Current Demand 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Configurable
SIGNAL INPUT
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The bank names can be changed in: Setpoints >
System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.
MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Dmd
Default: Blk Interval
This setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME

Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
This setpoint sets the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the actual value to
approximately match the response of the relay to analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if
MEASUREMENT TYPE is Exponential.
TIME INTERVAL
Range (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 20 min
Default (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): 15 min
This setpoint sets the time period over which the current demand calculation is to be performed. The setpoint is
visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.
PICKUP
Range: 10 to 10000 A in steps of 1 A
Range (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): 0 to 65000 A
Default: 5000 A
This setpoint sets the Current Demand Pickup level.
484 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
TARGETS
Default: Disabled
LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINTS
OR
AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH
Alarm Set-Dominant
OR
Command R
Latched Alarm
RESET
Configurable
SETPOINTS
AND
BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
OR
SETPOINTS
FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE:
Current Dmd1 PKP
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE To be included in Bridge

TIME:
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
TIME INTERVAL: PICKUP:
Current Inputs SIGNAL INPUT:
RUN
Calculate Phase A CURRENT
Phase A Current (IA) IA Demand PICKUP
DEMAND
RUN
OR
Calculate Phase B CURRENT

Phase B Current (IB) CT Bank 1 - J1 IB Demand PICKUP
DEMAND
RUN
Calculate Phase C CURRENT
Phase C Current (IC) IC Demand PICKUP
DEMAND FlexLogic Operands
Current Dmd1 PKP A
USED ONLY IN 845 AND
850 Current Dmd1 PKP B
894060C1.vsdx Current Dmd1 PKP C
Figure 179: Current Demand logic diagram
9.5.2.2 REAL POWER DEMAND

The Real Power Demand is monitored by comparing it to a Pickup value. If the Real Power Demand Pickup is ever
equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Real Power Demand 1(X)
1601-0651 485
FUNCTION
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x, (Dependent on order code)
Default: Power 1
MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Demand
This setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

Default: 15 min
This setpoint sets the time required for steady-state Real Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
TIME INTERVAL
Default: 20 min
This setpoint sets the time period over which the Real Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.
PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kW in steps of 0.1 kW
Default: 5000.0 kW
This setting sets the Real Power Demand Pickup level. The absolute value of real power demand is used for the
Pickup comparison.
RESET DEMAND
Default: Off
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum real power demand from the current
value to zero. These values are reset to zero at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero, calculation
of minimum and maximum real power demand values continues until the next rising edge of the reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn’t reset the current value of the demand used by the Real Power Demand
function.
486 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAYS X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
TARGETS
Default: Disabled
LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINTS
OR
REAL PWR DEMAND
AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH
Alarm Set-Dominant
OR
Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable
SETPOINTS
AND
BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
OR

SETPOINTS
REAL PWR DEMAND FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: RealPwr Dmd PKP
REAL PWR DEMAND
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE
TIME: SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
REAL PWR DEMAND REAL PWR DEMAND
SIGNAL INPUT:
Real Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL: REAL POWER PICKUP:
RUN
Three-Phase Calculate:
Power 1 Real Demand |P Demand| PICKUP
Real Power (P)
Min Real Demand
Max Real Demand
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Real Demand
to 0
ACTUAL VALUES
SETPOINTS Pwr 1 Real Dmd
Pwr 1 Min Real Dmd
RESET DEMAND:
Pwr 1 Max Real Dmd
Off=0
Rising Edge
Figure 180: Real Power Demand logic diagram
9.5.2.3 REACTIVE POWER

he Reactive Power Demand is monitored by comparing to a Pickup value. If the Reactive Power Demand Pickup is
ever equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
1601-0651 487
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Reactive Power Demand 1(X)
FUNCTION
SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x (Dependent on order code)
Default: Power 1
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Power 1
MEASUREMENT TYPE
The setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

Default: 15 min
The setpoint sets the time required for a steady state Reactive Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
TIME INTERVAL
Default: 20 min
The setpoint sets the time period over which the Reactive Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kvar in steps of 0.1 kvar.
Default: 5000.0 kvar
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the accumulated reactive power demand from its current value to
zero. The accumulated value resets at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero, the reactive power
demand element continues calculating the demand until the next rising edge of the reset operand.
RESET DEMAND
Default: Off
488 1601-0651
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum reactive power demand from its current
value to zero. The minimum and maximum values reset at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero,
calculation of minimum and maximum reactive power demand values continues until the next rising edge of the
reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn't reset the current value of the demand used by the Reactive Power Demand
function.
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
TARGETS
Default: Disabled
1601-0651 489
LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINTS
OR
REACTIVE PWR DMD
AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH
Alarm Set-Dominant
OR
Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable
SETPOINTS AND
BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
OR
SETPOINTS
REACTIVE PWR DMD FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: ReactvPwr Dmd PKP
REACTIVE PWR DMD
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE SETPOINTS
TIME:
SETPOINTS REACTIVE PWR DMD
SIGNAL INPUT: REACTIVE PWR DMD REACTIVE POWER PICKUP:
Reactive Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL:
Calculate: RUN
Three-Phase
Power 1 Reactive Demand |Q Demand| PICKUP
Reactive Power (Q)
Min Reactive Demand
Max Reactive Demand
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Reactive ACTUAL VALUES
Demand to 0
Pwr 1 Reactive Dmd
Pwr 1 Min Reactive Dmd
SETPOINTS
Pwr 1 Max Reactive Dmd
RESET DEMAND:
Off=0
Rising Edge
Figure 181: Reactive Power Demand logic diagram
9.5.2.4 APPARENT POWER DEMAND

The Apparent Power Demand is monitored by comparing to a Pickup value. If the Apparent Power Demand Pickup
is ever equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Apparent Power Demand 1(X)
FUNCTION
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Power 1
MEASUREMENT TYPE
The setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.
490 1601-0651

Default: 15 min
The setpoint sets the time required for a steady state Apparent Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
TIME INTERVAL
Default: 20 min
The setpoint sets the time period over which the Apparent Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kVA in steps of 0.1 kVA
Default: 5000.0 kVA
The setting sets the Apparent Power Demand Pickup level.
RESET DEMAND
Default: Off
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum apparent power demand from its
current value to zero. The minimum and maximum values reset at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset
to zero, calculation of minimum and maximum apparent power demand values continues until the next rising
edge of the reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn't reset the current value of the demand used by the Apparent Power
Demand function.
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Disabled
TARGETS
1601-0651 491
Default: Disabled
LED: ALARM
AND
SETPOINTS
OR
APPARENT PWR DMD
AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH
Alarm Set-Dominant
OR
Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable
SETPOINTS
AND
BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
OR
SETPOINTS
APPARENT PWR DMD FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: ApprntPwr Dmd PKP
APPARENT PWR DMD
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE SETPOINTS
TIME:
SETPOINTS APPARENT PWR DMD
SIGNAL INPUT: APPARENT PWR DMD APPARENT POWER PICKUP:
Apparent Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL:
Calculate: RUN
Three-Phase Power 1 Apparent Demand S Demand PICKUP
Apparent Power (S)
Min Apparent Demand
Max Apparent Demand ACTUAL VALUES
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Apparent Pwr 1 Apparent Dmd
Demand to 0 Pwr 1 Min Apparent Dmd
Pwr 1 Max Apparent Dmd
SETPOINTS
RESET DEMAND:
Off=0
Rising Edge
Figure 182: Apparent Power Demand logic diagram
9.5.3 PULSED OUTPUTS

The relay provides a Pulse Output element for four energy measurements. The Pulse Output element can operate
auxiliary relays after an adjustable energy increment for the quantities of positive and negative MWh (Megawatt
hours) and positive and negative MVARh (Mega Volt Amp Reactive hours).
Pulses occur at the end of each programmed energy increment. Upon power-up of the relay, the Pulse Output
function, if enabled, continues from where it was at the time of loss of control power. For example, if control power is
removed when the positive Watt hours stored at last pulse was 24.000 MWh, when control power is re-applied a
pulse occurs at 34.000 MWh if the energy increment is set at 10.000 MWh.
1. The Auxiliary Output relay(s) used for this element must be set to Self-Resetting. The pulses consist of a
one second on-time and a one second off-time. This feature is programmed such that no more than one
pulse per two seconds is required.
2. The relay is not a revenue class meter and cannot be used for billing purposes.
3. Energy quantities are displayed in MWh and MVarh, with resolutions of 1 kWh and 1 kVarh respectively.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Pulsed Outputs
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
492 1601-0651
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: Power 1
This setting provides the power element selection for the CT and VT bank identification.
POS WHS PULSE INCREMENT

Default: 10.000 MWh
The setpoint specifies the positive Watthours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.
POS WHS PULSE RELAY X

NEG WHS PULSE INCREMENT

Default: 10.000 MWh
The setpoint specifies the negative Watthours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.
NEG WHS PULSE RELAY X

POS VARHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MVARh in steps of 0.001 MVARh
Default: 10.000 MVARh
The setpoint specifies the positive VARhours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.
POS VARHS PULSE RELAY X

NEG VARHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MVARh in steps of 0.001 MVARh
Default: 10.000 MVARh
The setpoint specifies the positive VARhours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.
1601-0651 493
NEG VARHS PULSE RELAY X

EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-Reset
494 1601-0651

$ $ $ $
) ) ) )
# # # #

4 4 4 4
+ + + +
" " " "
3 3 3 3

! ! ! !
2 2 2 2
[ [ [ [

1 1 1 1

\ \ \ \

0 0 0 0

'

'
/ / / /

) ) ) )

'
. . . ' .
,

,

+ + + +
,
%
,

% w
- - - -
'
[ [ [ [
'

*

t

) ) ) )

& & & &
% % ( % % ^
o

( ^

] ]
' '

& & & &

& &
5 % 5 5 % 5 m
c c
b b
c c
b b

1 1
. .

? ?
% %
? ?
> >
/ /
= =
> >
= =
< <
* *
/ /
< <
9 9
- -
9 9
* *
E E
/ /
G G
8 8
( ( ^ ^
P P
7 7
Z Z Z Z
7 7

- - - -
1 1
. .

- - - -
1 1 1 % 1 %
` `
? ?
@ @
> >
= =
? ?
>
>
< <
> >
>
>
D
D
= = 9 9
C
C
D
D

C
C
1 B
< < B
E E
B
B
?
? .
.
9 9
G G

1
?
?
1
P P
A
A
8 8
.

A
%
A
9
9
7 7

7 7
9
9
E
E

1
; ;
; ;
8 G
G
8
X
_ _
: :

P
P
7 -
7
9 9
X
9 9
Y Y Y Y
7
7 /
/
A
E E

( ^
( ^ A
I
8 8
G G
- - - -
7 7
1 1
Z Z
P P

7 7
- - - -
% %
g

&
6
1 %
K K
W W W W
J J
T T T T
U U U U
E E
9
9 9
Q Q Q Q
9 9
F F
E
V V V E V E
K K
I I
U U U U
G
8 8 G G

J J
Q Q Q Q
F F
8 P
P P
7 7
E E
8 P
T T T T
7 7
S S S S
F F
F F F F
F F
R R R R
P P
P P
I I
N N
N N
Q Q Q Q
P P
N N
F F
O O
O O

O O
G G
H N H a N a

M M
J J
G G G G
'
F F F F F F

L L

5
E A E I E A E I
Figure 183: Pulsed Outputs logic diagram
1601-0651 495
9.5.4 DIGITAL COUNTERS

The relay provides sixteen identical Digital Counters. A Digital Counter counts the number of state transitions from
logic 0 to logic 1.
The Digital Counters are numbered from 1 to 16. The counters are used to count operations such as the Pickups of
an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or the pulses from a watt-
hour meter.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Digital Counters > Digital Counter 1 (16)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
NAME
Range: Any 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Counter 1
UNITS
Range: Any 5 alphanumeric characters
Default: Units
Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure with respect to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label
will appear in the metering corresponding Actual Values Status under Records > Digital Counters.
PRE-SET
Range: -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Default: 0
The setpoint sets the count to a required pre-set value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a
substitute relay is installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the Counter is running.
COMPARE
Range: -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Default: 0
The setpoint sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the
set value.
UP
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the Counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2147483647, the counter rolls over to -2147483648 and shows
the alarm ‘Digital Counter 1 at Limit’.
496 1601-0651
DOWN
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the Counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2147483647, the counter rolls over to -2147483648 and shows
the alarm ‘Digital Counter 1 at Limit’.
SET TO PRE-SET
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the counter to the pre-set value. The counter is set at
pre-set value in the following situations:
When
○ the Counter is enabled and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand has value 1 (when the Counter is
enabled and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand has value 0, the Counter will be set to 0).
When
○ the Counter is running and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand changes the state from 0 to 1
(Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set changing from 1 to 0 while the Counter is running has no effect on the
count).
When
○ a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the Counter and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand
has the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the Counter and Digital Counter 1 Set to
Pre-Set operand has the value 0, the Counter will be set to 0).
RESET
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count, either 0 or the pre-set value depending on the
state of the Counter 1 Set to Pre-set operand.
FREEZE/RESET
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for freezing (capturing) the accumulating count value into a separate
register with the associated date and time of the operation while resetting the count to either 0 or the pre-set
value depending on the state of the Counter 1 Set to Pre-set operand.
FREEZE/COUNT
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for freezing (capturing) the accumulating count value into a separate
register with the associated date and time of the operation while continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and frozen (captured) value with the associated date/time stamp are available as STATUS values. If
control power is interrupted, during the power-down operation, the accumulated and frozen (captured) values
are saved into non-volatile memory.
1601-0651 497
HI OUTPUT RELAY X
EQL OUTPUT RELAY X

LO OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
Note:
The counter accumulated value can be reset to zero either by asserting an operand programmed under Reset from the
counter menu, executing the clear Digital Counters command under the Records/Clear menu, or by setting the function of the
counter to “Disabled”.
498 1601-0651
0 0 0 [
J
IH 2 )*( J
IH 2 )*( J
IH 2 )*( )*( ZY
X
G 1 ' G 1 ' G 1 ' ' V
& & & & W
,F 30 ,F 30 ,F 30 > - V
2 %$ E 2 %$ + > 2 %$ %$ U
T

1
#"
+

1
#"
!

1
#"
!
#" S
R
E 0 ! 0 0 ! Q
/ / /
4 4 4
/ / /

? ?
,4 ,4 ,4 P -

- - - O ,
K
N

D 9 C M -
,
L
,4 K ,
- ,

-
6
56 , E .,
-, . , :

4 , 6 ,
, 56
- ,
, - 4 6

, 6 6
;<= ;<=
;<= AB AB

65 6

4
8 : @? @?
:9 : : :9 :9 :9
9 > 9 9 6
4
7 6
Figure 184: Digital Counter logic diagram
1601-0651 499
9.6 HARMONIC DETECTION
The Harmonic detection 1(6) element monitors the selected 2nd to 5th harmonic or Total Harmonics Distortion
(THD), which is present in the phase currents. The relay provides six identical Harmonic Detection elements.
In a distribution network, harmonic detection can be used to monitor spurious harmonics from inverter based
distributed energy resources, and take control actions such as islanding DERs or turning on harmonic filters. During
transformer energization or motor starts, the inrush current present in phase currents can impact some sensitive
elements, such as negative sequence overcurrent. Therefore, the ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental
magnitude per phase is monitored, while exceeding the settable pickup level, an operand is asserted, which can be
used to block such sensitive elements.
During startup or shutdown of generator connected transformers, or following a load rejection, the transformer can
experience an excessive ratio of volts to hertz, that is, become overexcited. Similarly, the ratio of the fifth harmonic
to the fundamental magnitude can be monitored to detect the overexcitation condition.
Note:
The harmonics monitored in this element is calculated from the phase currents, unlike the second or fifth harmonic differential
current used in the transformer differential element.
Note:
The harmonics are updated every protection pass. The THD is updated every three cycles, which is not recommended as a
blocking signal.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Harmonic Detection > Harmonic Detection 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: CT Bank 1–J1
HARMONIC
Range: 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, THD
Default: 2nd
This setting selects the specified harmonic or THD to be monitored. The harmonic or THD is expressed in
percent relative to the fundamental magnitude.
PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 20.0%
500 1601-0651
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.000 s

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three, Average
Default: Any One
This setting defines the phases required for operation, and the detail is explained below:
ANY
○ ONE: At least one phase picked up.
ANY
○ TWO: Two or more phases picked up.
ANY
○ THREE: All three phases picked up.
AVERAGE:
○ The average of three-phase harmonics or THDs picked up.
If set to Average, the relay calculates the average level of the selected harmonic and compares this level
against the pickup setting. Averaging of the selected harmonic follows an adaptive algorithm depending on the
fundamental current magnitude per-phase. If the fundamental magnitude on any of the three phases goes below
the current cut-off level, the selected harmonic current from that phase is dropped (zeroed) from the equation for
averaging, and the divider is decreased from 3 to 2. The same happens if the magnitude of the fundamental
magnitude on one of remaining two phases drops below the cut-off level. In this case the selected harmonic on
this phase is dropped from summation, and the divider is decreased to 1.
MIN OPER CURRENT

Default: 0.10 x CT
This setting sets the minimum value of current required to allow the Harmonic Detection element to operate.
If PHASES FROM OPERATION is set to Average, the average of three-phase currents is used for supervision.
A similar adaptive average algorithm is applied to calculate the average of operation current magnitude.
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 501
D DEF

SETPOINT
, no pDqr Dstuvw
-
G
! HIJK8
"#$ ,
%&' ! "#$ - ($$)! G=>L
<M;NO9O>
()*+# 23C3 P
SETPOINT

SETPOINT
SETPOINT SETPOINT
SETPOINT . 23 "4C SQTR
000 .32 ./"C3C 2 ,
SETPOINT 223 . . .32" - ( (% U #% V U #%
. 2 2 "4 3 "% % ()
.' " +## )% Q"R " 1 000 /0" 1 . . U' U&X ! +UY SETPOINT
.' +## )% Q R 1 000 2 . . 3 "4 FlexLogic Operands

IZ[ J\@] J^M M: ;M:=
.' +## )% Q R 1 000 /0 1 . . _`9a=a _Nbc=d e_f %565
W* 1 000 89:; <=> ? @A
"W #* +## )% QW*R 2 IHH J8Pgg] Ihh >`:== 7
/0 1 . . _`9a=a _Nbc=d e_f
SETPOINT
2 IigPIjg] Ik=:9l= k9he=
/"20 _Nbc=d e_m FlexLogic Operands
/0W* 1 . .
.' " /0 Q/0"R 89:; <=> ? ABA
.' /0 Q/0 R 89:; <=>? ABA I
.' /0 Q/0 R
89:; <=>? ABA x
"W #* /0 Q/0W*R
yz{||}~} 89:; <=>? ABA K
Figure 185: Harmonic Detection logic diagram
502 1601-0651
9.7 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION

Some distribution systems run completely insulated from earth. Such systems are called unearthed systems. The
advantage of an unearthed system is that a single phase to earth fault does not cause an earth fault current to flow.
This means the whole system remains operational and the supply is not interrupted. The system must be designed
to withstand high transient and steady state over voltages, however, and so its use is generally restricted to low and
medium voltage distribution systems.
When there is an earth fault in an unearthed 3-phase system, the voltage of the faulted phase is reduced to the
earth potential. This causes the phase voltage in the other two phases to increase, which causes a significant
charging current between the phase-to-earth capacitances. This can cause arcing at the fault location. Many
systems use a Petersen coil to compensate for this, thus eliminating the arcing problem. Such systems are called
compensated networks. The network is earthed with an inductive reactor, where its reactance is made nominally
equal to the total system capacitance to earth. Under this condition, a single-phase earth fault does not result in any
steady state earth fault current.
The introduction of a Petersen coil introduces major difficulties when it comes to determining the direction of the
fault. This is because the faulted line current is the sum of the inductive current introduced by the Petersen coil and
the capacitive current of the line, which are in anti-phase with each other. If they are equal in magnitude, the current
in the faulted line is zero. If the inductive current is larger than capacitance current, the direction of the faulted line
current will appear to be in the same direction as that of the healthy line.
Standard directionalizing techniques used by conventional feeder protection devices are not adequate for this
scenario, therefore, we need a different method for determining the direction of the fault. Two commonly used
methods are the First Half Wave method and the Residual Active Power method.
First Half Wave Method

The initial transient wave, generated at the fault point travels towards the bus along the faulted line, until it reaches
the healthy line. For forward faults the high frequency fault voltage and current components are in opposite
directions during the first half wave, whereas for reverse faults, they are in phase. This fact can be used to
determine the fault direction. This method, however, is subject to the following disadvantages:
● The time duration of the characteristic is very short, in most cases not more than 3ms. Because of this, it
requires a high sampling frequency (3000Hz or even higher)
● It requires an analogue high pass filter, necessitating special hardware
● It is affected by the fault inception angle. For example, when the fault inception angle is 0°, there are no initial
travelling waves.
Residual Active Power Method

Residual Active power, which is sometimes used to detect the instance of a fault can also in some cases be used
for detecting the fault direction. Although the capacitive currents can be compensated by an inductive current
generated by a Petersen coil, the active (instantaneous) current can never be compensated for and this is still
opposite to that of the healthy line. This fact can also be used to directionalise the fault.
1601-0651 503
For a forward directional fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of Petersen’s coil, which is
negative. For a reverse fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of the transmission line, which is
positive. This method, however, is subject to the following disadvantages:
● The zero-sequence active power will be very small in magnitude for a reverse directional fault. Its value
depends on the power loss of transmission line.
● The zero-sequence active power may be too small in magnitude to be detected for a forward directional fault.
Its value depends on the power loss of Petersen coil.
● High resolution CTs are required
Due to the low magnitude of measured values, reliability is compromised. This product does not use the above
techniques for directionalisation. This product uses an innovative patented technique called Transient Reactive
Power method to determine the fault direction of an earth fault in a compensated network.
Transient Ground Fault Detection (TGFD) in this device comprises three modules:
● Transient Ground Fault Detection module (TGF)
● Fault Type Detector (FTD)
● Direction Detector (DD)
Note:
Note: TGF is implemented for 50Hz only.
TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTOR

To establish if there is an earth fault on the system somewhere is straightforward. A simple residual overvoltage
comparison can determine this. Therefore, a TGF[X]> Start signal is produced by comparing the neutral voltage with
a threshold voltage set by VN Threshold. The difficulty comes with establishing the type of fault and its direction.
FAULT TYPE DETECTOR

The FTD uses a Fundamental analysis (FA) technique to establish whether the fault is an intermittent fault or a
steady state faults. For Transient Earth Fault Detection, the detector counts the Residual Voltage bursts within a
specified time window. With some clever signal processing the detector module creates pulses by comparing the
bursts with a settable threshold, then counts these pulses. If the number of pulses equals or exceeds the number
specified by the FTD> Fault Count setting, within the time window specified by the FTD> Time Window, the fault is
deemed to be intermittent and the TGF[X]> Intermit Operand is asserted. If there are fewer pulses than this number,
this indicates either a disturbance or a permanent fault. To establish which, we need to look at the RMS value of the
residual voltage.
If there are fewer pulses than specified and the RMS value does not drop below setting within the specified time
window, the fault is deemed to be permanent. In this case the TGF[X]> Steady Operand is asserted. If there are
fewer pulses than specified and the RMS value does drop below setting, this indicates that a disturbance has been
detected but it is not a fault. In this case, the TGF[X]> Steady Operand is not asserted.
The inputs to this module are:
● The residual voltage
● FTD> VN (defines the threshold which converts the residual voltage burst into a pulse
● FTD> Time Window (defines the time window - default is 2 seconds)
● FTD> Fault Count (defines the fault count)
The FTD outputs two signals to indicate whether the fault is steady state or intermittent.
504 1601-0651
DIRECTION DETECTOR
The Direction Detector (DD) uses a patented technique based on Transient Reactive Power (TRP) to establish the
direction of the fault. Unlike traditional methods, this TRP method does not require high resolution CTs or special
analogue filtering hardware and is therefore cheaper to implement.
It can be shown that the residual voltage and residual current components can be reliably used as discriminative
criteria between a faulty and healthy feeder at 220Hz.
The admittance response of a healthy distributed feeder is shown below using a Pi model:
Figure 186: Healthy line response
In the above figure, the phase response of the admittance is consistent at 90o up to frequency f1 (approximately
3000Hz). For a compensated faulty feeder, the admittance response is shown below using a Pi model.
Figure 187: Faulty line response
We can observe that the phase angle (and thus, the reactive power flow) changes from 90° to -90° at frequencies
higher than f2. Based on the above, we have clear direction discrimination between a healthy and faulted feeder at
any frequency between f2 and f1 approximately.
Note:
The resonant frequency in the above system is 70Hz. For a perfectly compensated system, this will be 50Hz.
IED’s use an anti-aliasing band pass filter with cut-off frequency of 150Hz. Furthermore, at 220Hz the post-filter
magnitude is approximately 0.5pu, and at 330Hz, it is less than 0.2pu. To avoid any integer harmonics, and to avoid
severely attenuated quantities due to the filter, we have chosen 220Hz as the most suitable frequency for direction
determination.
1601-0651 505
In the forward direction, the residual voltage leads the residual current by 90°, and in the reverse direction the
residual voltage lags the residual current by 90°. These criteria can be used to directionalise the fault.
The residual voltage (Vres) after passing through the bandpass filter tuned to 220 Hz, has 90° added to its phase.
The residual current (Ires) is also passed through a 220 Hz bandpass filter, but no phase shift is applied.
After residual voltage and current signals pass through the band pass filter, VN becomes VN’ due to 90º shift:

Figure 188: VN phase shift
As a healthy line is capacitive and a faulty line is inductive:

● If VN’ and IN are in opposite direction it means feeder is faulty (forward) so transient reactive power is
negative.
● If VN’ and IN are in same direction it means feeder is healthy (reverse) so transient reactive power is positive.
Dynamic thresholds
The Transient P and transient Q are calculated during fault conditions to help determine the the fault direction.
The transient active power measurement is computed at nominal frequency. ( P. trans)
The transient reactive power measurement is computed at 220 Hz. (Q trans)
The maximum Values of the Transient P and Q are stored during the fault’s detection and are used for the
calculation of the dynamic thresholds.
After that, at every protection pass the dynamic thresholds are updated as:
● Q negative threshold = -Dir>Qf Pickup + 0.1 * QtransMax
● P negative threshold = -Dir>Qf Pickup + 0.1 * PtransMax
● P positive threshold = Dir>Qr Pickup + 0.1 * PtransMax
The P/Q threshold discriminates between the use of P transient and Q transient in the TGF algorithm. When the
active power is higher than this threshold while the Q transient value are kept below it, the algorithm uses the P
transient as the operate input, otherwise the Q transient value is used instead.
The next figure illustrates the Reactive and active power selection:
506 1601-0651
.
&'

(#
4@94?
;:>
>=
<;
7:
897
65
43
120
!"# + /
+
,- - ,- ) !* -
) !*
,+ @9?4 ,+
2B
9A
>=
;<7
$%"# 9:78
65
43
21
0/
Figure 189: Reactive and active power selection
The following default settings are recommended for majority of applications:
● FTD>VN 8.000 V
● Dir>Qf Pickup 50.0 KW
● Dir>Qr Pickup 21.0 KW
It is important to note that all settings for the TGFD function, including those at 220Hz, can be set based on 50Hz
nominal secondary values. This is because the gain of the 220Hz transient filter is 1.
The inputs to this module are:
● The residual voltage
● The residual current
● FTD>VN (defines the threshold for the TEFD detection ).
● P/Q Threshold (defines the threshold for the selection between P or Q in fault’s detection)
The TEFD outputs two signals to indicate a forward and a reverse fault.
The Direction Detector should be disabled in the case of solid grounded system and ground directional overcurrent
element is enabled. In such case, the directionality will be determined by the ground directional element. Therefore,
TGFD only should be enabled the FTD (Fault Type detector) to detect an intermittent fault or a transient fault.
The following Operands are also available:
Inhibit: used to inhibit the TEF function and reset all associated DDBs
Reset TEF: can be configured as a user-defined manual reset alarms.
1601-0651 507
9.7.1 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION SETTINGS
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable setting enables the TEFD function.
When Alarm is selected and the TGFD operates, the LED ALARM will flash, and will self-reset, when the
operating conditions are cleared.
When Latched Alarm is selected and the TGFD operates, the LED ALARM will flash during the TGFD operating
condition, and will be alight steadily, after the conditions are cleared. The LED ALARM can be cleared by issuing
a reset command. The Output Relay #1 Trip will not operate if Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.
The Output relay #1 Trip can be configured to operate using the TEFD output operands and the FlexLogic.
The output relay #1 Trip will operate only when Trip function is selected, and the TEFD operates. The LED
ALARM will not turn on, if the TEFD operates when set to function Trip.
When Configurable is selected, neither the trip output, nor the ALARM LED will turn on automatically. They
need be configured using their own menus, and FlexLogic operands.
VT INPUT
Range: Ph VT Bnk1-J2, Ph VT Bnk2-K1
This setting provides selection of the voltage signal input.
CT INPUT
Range: CT Bank1-J1, CT Bank2-K1
This setting provides selection of the current signal input.
VN THRESHOLD
Range: 0.02 to 0.40 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.05 x VT
This setting sets the voltage pickup level specified per times VT.
FAULT DIRECTION DETECTION:
DIRECTIONAL STATUS
Range: Disabled, Direction Detector, Ground OC Dir
Default: Direction Detector
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the TEF element.
DIRECTIONAL MODE
Range: Standard, Advanced
508 1601-0651
Default: Standard
This setting determines which setting will be used for direction element
PQ THRESHOLD
Range: 5.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 KW
Default: 30.0 KW
This setting defines the PQ shift threshold in secondary primary values. Although the unit for this setting has
been expressed as KW; it summarizes the use of KW for active power P and KVar for reactive power Q.
When the reactive power is very small, but the Active power is larger than threshold, the Active Power is used to
detect the fault direction
DIR>QF PICKUP
Default: 50.0 KW
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of the P and Q transition in primary values to detect a forward direction
fault.
DIR>QR PICKUP
Default: 21.0 KW
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of the P and Q transitions in primary valuers to detect a reverse direction
fault.
GROUND OC START [ANSI]

Range: GND IOC [X] PKP, GND TOC [X] PKP
Default: GND IOC 1 PKP
The Direction Detector should be disabled and the directionality will be determined by Earth Fault 1 Measured.
Note:
[X]: Total No of Ground IOC elements and No of Ground TOC Elements, respectively
FAULT TYPE DETECTION
FTD> STATUS
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the fault type detection in TEF element.
FTD> VN [ANSI]
Range: 0.02 to 0.40 in steps of 0.01 x VT
1601-0651 509
Default: 0.04 x VT
This setting sets the pick-up threshold for the resides voltage of the fault type detection element.
FTD> TIME WINDOW [ANSI]

Default: 2.000 s
This setting sets the time window for the fault type detector.
FTD> FAULT COUNT

Default: 3
This setting sets the failure number during the time window.
RESET TIME
Range: 30 s to 12000 s in steps of 30 s
Default: 60 s
This setting sets the reset timer.
RESET TGF[X]
Default: Off
This setting resets the Transient Ground Fault Detection element.
BLOCK
Default: Off
The TGFD element will be blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.
OUTPUT RELAYS
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
510 1601-0651
9.7.2 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION LOGIC

789 @7A<7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
." (& /010'2&3

! 789 :;< 9=<

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
" ! " (& )*(

! #$ " (& +,-
" ! #$ (& )*(
% & ' (& +,-
789:;< <>?
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

45 45" +06
789;B7><C;7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

789 @7>A:D
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Figure 190: Simplified TGFD scheme
Figure 191:
1601-0651 511
INTERNAL VALUES

INTERNAL VALUES

#/!$)
45 /&0( 12,3
!" #!$$ %&'()*
++, -.
INTERNAL VALUES
7 I F*!$
65 898:; INTERNAL VALUES

<=> $?@ A I F*!$ !H
!" #!$$ %&'()*
++, -. BCDCE
INTERNAL VALUES
7 # F*!$
898:; INTERNAL VALUES

<=> $?@ A # F*!$ !H
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
F;%G (!*( BCDCE
JKLMNOL OPOQR KQSNOTNUS5 KMVV

W NUXOVYTRTZO
[\]^ XV_ ^` abc
[\ XV _ d` abc
Figure 192: Scheme of the calculation of P Trans, Q Trans and U RMS inc
512 1601-0651
SETTING
,-./ 01234

d! & ' FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
% 5 6$ #
() *+

!"# $
SETTING
abc
dOO C
<> <A.@3 01234
SETTING !7% i j elhlnmop
SETTING
BC
<=> 0?43@?-./
<> DE- 01234
!"# !7%
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
8' 8 $ '9:
% ': #
% GC
8: 8 ; '9:
jmpgqr s impgqr klmlnmop

INTERNAL VALUES SETTING
' > DE- 01234
D14 H >I <1JKAE : W
: D14 H >4 <1JKAE F ' INTERNAL STATUS
C
: "U !7% 6CC % : Z
XCC
' "U : ; LMN $:O 'P Q R CS6 T : "UV
: $ MN $: 'P Q R CS6 T : "UV

< DE- 01234 : !Y
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
% C
6CC : ![
XCC
SETTING
> DE- 01234
D14 H >I <1JKAE : W
D14 H >4 <1JKAE F ' INTERNAL STATUS
C
!7% 6CC % ' Z
XCC
' ; LMN $:O 'P Q R CS6 T ' "UV
' $ MN $: 'P Q R CS6 T ' "UV

< DE- 01234
: !Y
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
% C
6CC ' ![
XCC
\2].. < > efghh ij klmlnmop

^<> 01234
!7%
: "U ; XSC S _CC INTERNAL STATUS
% %'`%: ![
' "U ; FSC S GC
Figure 193: TGFD Start, PQ Detector, Small PQ Selector and dynamic Q trans & P trans
1601-0651 513
INTERNAL STATUS
JRS NTQMOITPU NMIMOIPQ

VPWGHM
INTERNAL STATUS

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

INTERNAL STATUS Reset Dominant

INTERNAL STATUS

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

INTERNAL STATUS

Reset Dominant
SETTING
!843B#82+$0 "#$#%&
5

/
SETTING

C
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

XYZY[ \]^_

SETTING
àbcd e^_Y fg SETTING
!)*+ COUNTER !)$%0# 12%+#34
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
! "#$#%& ( / / 6 7 , - / '
' , - , . / .
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
' SETTING
A
!) 893 :8+;2<
,= >
?5@

Reset Dominant
DE DFGHI JKLM NMIMOIPQ
Figure 194: TRP Direction detector Module and FA Fault Type Detector scheme
514 1601-0651
-
+, ./0 1.123
SETTING

Reset Dominant

- *
+,

Reset Dominant
+LM
-
+, ./0 4256

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Reset Dominant
*
- NH?ODA? NPAHPA
+, 2?CDQ R F4256J

Reset Dominant
SETTING
!"#$%& '"%"() FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
* *K
*

*+

*
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING *
7 ) " 2?@?A BCDE
8 9
FAG HDE? IJ
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
-
SETTING
7 ) " :;

< = >
Figure 195: Alarm & Trip outputs signals and Reset scheme
1601-0651 515
9.8 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
9.8.1 RTD TEMPERATURE

The Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) wiring diagram is shown below:
RTD
1
8
Figure 196: RTD Wiring diagram
Note:
To enhance the accuracy of the RTD, ensure all 3 cables are of the same length and gauge. In addition, the Compensation
and Return wires must be connected on the RTD side and not on the relay side.
RTD Inputs
The relay has two methods of supporting RTD inputs.
● I/O cards installed in the relay can supply up to 13 RTDs.
● An optional CANBUS-based Remote Input/Output module (RMIO unit) can also be installed, which can
monitor up to 12 additional RTDs (referred to as RRTDs). The RMIO unit supports 6, 9, or 12 RRTDs.
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any
of the RTD types in common use.
Depending on the order code (Advanced Monitoring option selected), the relay is supplied with one combo card
consisting of one RTD input, one Ohms input, four DCmA inputs and seven DCmA outputs. Additionally, the relay
can be furnished with up to two optional RTD cards, each of them having 6 RTD input channels. Only slots B and C
can accept the optional RTD cards.
Note:
If only one RTD card is ordered at the time the relay is ordered, this RTD card is always shown in slot B. The order code
selection does not allow for an RTD card in slot C, if no RTD card is ordered in slot B.
516 1601-0651
Note:
An I/O card L ordered in Slot G will contain an additional RTD input on the card. It will be the highest RTD number shown (i.e.
if 1 additional RTD card is used, then the low voltage I/O (LVIO )RTD will be RTD #7).
An alphanumeric name is assigned to each channel; this name is included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter.
Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel. The conversion chart is shown in the
following table.
RTD Temperature vs. Resistance

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 Ω PT (IEC 120 Ω NI 100 Ω NI 10 Ω CU
60751)
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.40 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.08 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.90 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.71 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.51 200.64 167.20 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120 248 146.07 219.29 182.75 13.67
130 266 149.83 228.96 190.80 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.33 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.05 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.77 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.48 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.17 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.86 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.53 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.19 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.84 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.47 353.14 294.28 18.34
1601-0651 517
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)

°C °F 100 Ω PT (IEC 120 Ω NI 100 Ω NI 10 Ω CU
60751)
250 482 194.10 366.53 305.44 18.73
Note:
RTD type copper (Cu) is only available when order code option ‘S’ is chosen for Slot B or C.
RTD Protection
The relay can monitor up to 12 RTDs and 12 RRTDs, each of which can be configured to have a trip temperature
and an alarm temperature. The RTD Temperature protection menu will be seen on the relay upon availability of RTD
input/inputs. The RRTD Temperature protection setpoints can be seen only if the relay has the RMIO module
installed and validated. The minimum RTD Temperature requirement is to set the setpoint TYPE. The default value
for TYPE, for each RTD is 100 Ω Platinum. The protection RTD Trip, and RTD Alarm from the menu are
optional. They respond to directly measured RTD temperature. The Alarm temperature is set slightly above the
normal measured temperature for the transformer top-oil, bottom-oil, or LTC oil. The Trip temperature is normally
set at the maximum permissible oil temperatures defined as dangerous for the transformer and the transformer
insulation.
This element also monitors the RTD broken connection and blocks the RTD trip and alarm functions if the RTD
connection is detected as Open or Shorted and generates RTD Open and RTD Shorted FlexLogic operands. An
RTD is detected as Open when the RTD connection is either open or the temperature is greater than 250°C. An
RTD is detected as Shorted when the RTD connection is either shorted or the temperature is equal to less than
-40°C.
Note:
The RTD input is active regardless of whether or not, the RTD Trip, or/and RTD Alarm functions are enabled.
Path:Setpoints > RTD Temperature > RTD 1[X]

Path:Setpoints > RRTD Temperature > RRTD 1[X]
TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled
If a trip is not required from the RTD, select Configurable. This enables the RTD without producing a trip.
NAME
Default: RTD 1
TYPE
Range: 100 Ω Platinum, 100 Ω Nickel, 120 Ω Nickel
Default: 100 Ω Platinum
518 1601-0651
Selects the type of the RTD used.
APPLICATION
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other
Default: None
The setting allows each individual RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is useful for some
applications, which require group measurement. Selecting None means that the RTD operates individually and
is not part of any RTD group. Common groups are provided for needs at rotating machines applications such as
Ambient or Bearing.
VOTING
Range: Off, RTD 1, RTD 2….RTD 12
Default: Off
This setting selects the RTD that must also exceed this RTD’s Trip Temperature for a trip to occur. Selecting the
same RTD to which the element is related to, has the same effect as selecting “Off”.
TRIP TEMPERATURE
Range: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C (33°F to 482°F in steps of 2°F)
Default: 155°C (311°F)
TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Default: 2 s
TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1s
Default: 0 s
TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
ALARM TEMPERATURE
Range: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C (33°F to 482°F in steps of 2°F)
Default: 130°C (266°F)
ALARM PICKUP DELAY

1601-0651 519
Default: 2 s
ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Default: 0 s
ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched

hijklmnj 0!
6 & "7 -="> 3?6 '!! 37#
\g^T 345 # !$ ! ! N0
hijklmnj "! "7
!P Q 0! ! 898 * C¤¥)> $D &#
dX]T STUVUWXYZT[ ! :;< +
,
S\e f \T]^T_XW`_T
abYcT_WVbY FG HGIJ KLM

3" B CD'6
/0 0! 3" B CD6E6
/0 6 & "7
345
/0 "! "7
R Q/0 0!
!898 !:;<
'!! 37 N
" 5! '!O '!

-="> /0
! *
+,
"#$ -=" >
1 6 & 1
2 o 2
* p *
+ 1 q +
, 2 o ,
p A
q 1
2 -/@
3=A= 3
% & 00$
Srd
'() S x stuva
FG HGIJ KLM

3" B /0 '6
3" B /0 6E6
*
+ Srd
,

S £[wuva
/0 '!! 37 N

" 5! '!O'!
/0 !
"#$ FG HGIJ KLM
/0 1 h 3" B '
2
-! .$ /0 k k 3" B A.!$
\T]^T_XW`_T eVU^yXgz
{aTyUVÙ| }X~_TY~TVW LJ ¡LG ¢LG¡
3" B 0!

Figure 197: RTD Protection logic diagram
520 1601-0651
9.8.2 RTD TROUBLE

When set to Alarm or Latched Alarm, this element monitors all the RTDs that are either programmed as Alarm or
Trip or Configurable and generates an alarm if any of the RTDs are detected as Open or Shorted. Upon detection of
an RTD Open or Shorted condition, the element also asserts the RTD Trouble PKP and RTD Trouble OP and
operates the assigned output relay. Both RTDs and RRTDs can be monitored using this element.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > RTD Trouble
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
B!C
D
E
F

$
!"# %
$ D
E
% F
I
'GH
&'! Z (3 &BIB' &

[ [
[[ [[ G
&'! 5 (3
89:
&'!Z I *+ ,+-. /01
[ [
[[ [[
&'! ' # )2)
&'! 5 I $
% ;<=>? @ A>?=>?
&'! ' # ()
JKLM NOP QRST OUMVUKWXYKU
&&'! Z (3
[ [
[ [
[ [
&&'! 5 (3 (3 &4 5
&&'! Z I ! 6 (37 (3

[ [
[ [
[ [
&&'! 5 I
JKLM NNOP QRST OUMVUKWXYKU
Figure 198: RTD Trouble logic diagram
1601-0651 521
9.9 LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS

This section covers the functionality of the Loss of Communications element.
The relay monitors activity on an interface via the configured protocol for this interface. The communications status
is set for each protocol.
If communication is lost, the enabled interface will issue a Loss of Comms event and operate a combination of
output relays/states.
Note:
The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is used to
declare the Modbus ‘Loss of Communication’ state. The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT must be set to a value other than 0
for the Loss of Communication”monitoring to work properly.
Note:
MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT is set under: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Loss of Comms
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
INTERFACE
Range: Serial, Serial + Ethernet, Ethernet, All
Default: Serial
Only the protocols associated with the selected interface are shown in this screen as options. For example, if
“Ethernet” is selected, select the Ethernet protocols to monitor. The Ethernet protocols selection is defined as
EthernetProtocolBitmask bitmasks.
MODBUS
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 2 s
OUTPUT RELAY X
522 1601-0651
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Latched
>?@A :5;<
+
, ./01230 .43/43 5062789:5;<=
-

E F%
+
G( #HI*J ,
-
FK(L >?@ R>R5S A
B
MI#K C
#"'N*J MI#K
+ C D
&(m$K#HI* ,
- Z
\]^_`
T03
@VWX2X3
UVWW2XY
5?T?:

+
,
-
FO F PMQ!
!"#"$
O% O GPMQ
%&#'"()* cd edf ghijkfil ghijkfi
|}~} ~
O
>?@A <;Uab<
nopqorstu rvpwxyz{
OO

Figure 199: Loss of Communications logic diagram
1601-0651 523
524 1601-0651
CHAPTER 10
CONTROL
Chapter 10 - Control
526 1601-0651

Control Overview 528
Setpoint Group 529
Local Control Mode (Breaker and Switches) 532
Breaker Control 542
Switch Control (89) 546
Virtual Input Control 549
Trip Bus 550
Breaker Failure (50BF) 553
Arc Flash Protection 560
VT Fuse Failure (VTFF) 563
Digital Elements 566
1601-0651 527
10.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW
S D
y e %&'()*+' ,-).(
I W)XYZ [)+'-)Z \)]&

!

"#"$
O
J^NQ

"#"$
Po o
fghbt
_àtbcd
ijgtajd
Mo o T
67 89:;<
Co o ! H$
B/ 01232435
Fo RN H$ Q
U JK#NQ"NQN!
VT H H$
L=>=? @ L=>=? A L=>=? E L=>=? G
Figure 200: Control Display Hierarchy
528 1601-0651
10.3 SETPOINT GROUP

The relay provides six setpoint groups. All setpoints contained under the protection setpoints are reproduced in six
groups, identified as Setpoint Groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. These multiple setpoints provide the capability for both
automatic and manual switching to protection settings for different operating situations. Automatic (adaptive)
protection setpoint adjustment is available to change settings when the power system configuration is altered.
Automatic group selection can be initiated from the autoreclose, SETPOINT GROUPS and by use of a SET
GROUP x ACTIVE setpoint input. The group selection can be initiated by this input from any FlexLogic operands,
inputs, pushbuttons or communications.
Group 1 is the default for the Active Group and is used unless another group is requested to become active. The
active group can be selected with the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP setpoint, by SET ACTIVE x GROUP input or
inputs from autoreclose, SETPOINT GROUPS. If there is a conflict in the selection of the active group, between a
setpoint, inputs and inputs from functions, the higher numbered group is made active. For example, if the inputs for
Group 2, 4, and 6 are all asserted the relay uses Group 6. If the logic input for Group 6 then becomes de-asserted,
the relay uses Group 4. Some application conditions require that the relay does not change from the present active
group. This prevention of a setpoint group change can be applied by setting Change Inhibit inputs (1 to 16). If
needed, typically this change inhibit is done when any of the overcurrent (phase, neutral, ground, or negative
sequence), overvoltage, bus or line undervoltage, or underfrequency elements are picked-up.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Setpoint Groups
ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP

Range: 1,2,3,4,5,6
Default: 1
The ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP setting is used for manual selection of the Active Setpoint Group.
SET GROUP 2 (3,4,5,6) ACTIVE

Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates change of the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP.
SET GROUP 2 (3,4,5,6) ACTIVE

Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates change of the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP.
Note:
SET GROUP 2 defaults to PB 8 ON (ALT SETTING) for some order codes.
GROUP CHANGE INHIBIT 1 (UP TO 16)

Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that inhibits change of the active setpoint group.
1601-0651 529
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
530 1601-0651
! ! ! ! ! !
p
o
$ $ $ $ $ $ mn
l
"# "# "# "# "# "# k
j
1 2 3 4 5 6 j
i

h
g
F . F . F . F . F . F . e

T
EH
=
>T
@
I I
H >
=E K
T =
B ?
@ J
T
=
?
>
%&D %&D %&D %&D %&D =
T
'( '( '( '( '( '(
%&D
%&D '(
%&D '(
%&D %&D %&D %&D %&D %&D
%&D '(
%&D '(
%&D '(
'(
'( '( '( '( '(
'(
...
a b
` 7 7 c
_7 7^ ^ ^ 7^ d7
^ ^
61
1 2 3

< < < <
C C

C

C

1 $ $ $ $ $ 8; S

G 8; XY 0: " " " "
#" #" #" #" #" 0: 2 3 4 5 6 X 2 3 4 5 6 9: 2 3 4 5 6 C OO C OO C OO C OO
2 3 4 5 6 98 NV NV NV NV NV ,W0 NV NV NV NV NV , Y9 NV NV NV NV NV # # # ... #

07/ UP UP UP UP UP :
W: UP UP UP UP UP \-, :0 PU PU PU PU PU
[ ] M M M M M
S S

-, MR MR MR MR MR 09 MR MR MR MR MR [0 R R R R R

+ QP QP QP QP QP + QP QP QP QP QP
7 PQN PQN PQN PQN PQN
O O O O O f)* NM NM NM NM NM )*f NM NM NM NM NM Z ML ML ML ML ML
A

L L

L L

L

L L

L L

L

Figure 201: Setpoint Groups logic diagram
1601-0651 531
10.4 LOCAL CONTROL MODE (BREAKER AND SWITCHES)

When the setpoint LOCAL MODE is enabled, Open and Close control of breakers and switches is performed using
relay pushbuttons (PBs), or contact inputs from PBs installed in close proximity to the relay (such as on the relay
panel, or in the relay cubicle).
The addition of contact inputs an other FlexLogic operands for closing and opening the breaker, or switch while in
local mode provides the flexibility to use PBs mounted near the relay.
Note:
Note that one pair of PBs is used for breaker control, and another pair of PBs is used for switch control.
If contact inputs or other FlexLogic operands are used while the Select Before Operate (SBO) mechanism is
enabled, the breaker or the switch shall first be selected using the relay PBs, and then opened or closed using the
designated relay panel or cubicle PBs. (The SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is only available for relays
supporting a single breaker.) If the SBO mechanism is disabled while the relay supports configurable single line
diagrams (SLDs), only the breaker PBs either on the relay front panel or mounted nearby will work. The menu
setpoints for local switch Open and Close are hidden and deactivated.
If the relay does not support configurable SLD, the setpoints for local switch Open and Close are omitted from the
menu.
While in Local Mode, the letters LM are displayed on the relay display banner. In addition, an LED can be
programmed to turn ON when the relay is set to Local Mode. By default the relay comes with one LED programmed
to show Local Mode.
In Local Mode, control for the breakers and disconnect switches can be accessed from the relay front panel (PBs
programmed for Open and Close) or by contact inputs for Open and Close from PBs installed near the relay. Hard
coded SLD PBs are designated for Tag, Block and Bypass Block for each component upon selection. In this mode,
the LOCAL OPEN and LOCAL CLOSE setpoints for Breaker Control or Switch Control (see the respective logic)
are active.
Remote Mode
When Remote Mode is enabled, the switches are controlled (open/close) from any assigned FlexLogic operand,
contact input, virtual input, virtual output, remote input, or via communication. The Control Mode menu is designed
to switch the control for both breakers and switches to either Remote Mode (LOCAL MODE setpoint set to Off, or
the selected Local Mode input de-asserted), or Local Mode (LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted).
Breaker Mode defaults

The default value is Local.
Navigation
The 8 Series front panel provides navigation pushbuttons (PBs) which highlight the component (breaker or
disconnect switch) from the single line diagram. The navigation PBs (Up/Down or Up/Down/Left/Right depending on
relay front panel model), are used to browse through the Single Line Drawing (SLD) components. These PBs are
used for SLD navigation only. The navigation starts with highlighting the first breaker, and then goes through all
other components in sequence, until the last one (breaker or switch). Only the breakers and switches included in
the SLD from the display will be browsed (navigated).
532 1601-0651
Select Before Operate

Once the breaker or the switch is highlighted in the SLD using the navigation PBs, the component must be selected
before open or close action is performed. The selection of the component is performed by pressing “ENTER” key
from the front panel. A flash message BKR # Selected, or Sw # Selected appears on the screen to denote the
selection. Once selected, the text from the first three tabs from the display corresponding to the PBs 1, 2, and 3
changes to Tag, Block, and Bypass. At this stage, the selected breaker or switch can be Opened or Closed using
the programmed PBs, and Tagged/Blocked/Bypassed using the SLD PBs.
For PBs supporting one breaker only, the Local Control Mode menu includes the setpoint SELECT BEFORE
OPERATE, which can be set to either Enabled or Disabled. When it is set to Disabled, tagging, blocking and block
bypassing commands are disabled from both Local and Remote control. In this mode the breaker can be controlled
directly by the programmed Open and Close PBs. The local control for the disconnect switches is suspended. In
this mode they can only be controlled remotely, i.e. using pre-programmed contact inputs, virtual inputs, comms, or
any selected FlexLogic operand for closing and opening commands. The remote block and block bypass flags are
also suspended. With SELECT BEFORE OPERATE set to Disabled the relay behaves similar to some other legacy
relays, where when in Local mode the breaker is directly controlled by pressing the Open and Close PBs without
additional confirmation, and when in Remote mode the breaker is directly controlled by executing the remote open
and close commands from the configured setpoints.
When the SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is set to Enabled, the navigation, the breaker or switch selection,
as well as the blocking, bypassing and tagging are operational when in Local mode. When switched to Remote
mode, the remote blocking and bypassing will also be operational.
Note:
The selected component from SLD will be deselected if either the time programmed in setpoint Bkr/Sw Select Timeout
expires, or the ESCAPE pushbutton is pressed. The HOME button will not de-select the selected object. To navigate to home
page, the component must be first de-selected on the SLD page.
The programmed PBs for breaker or switch Open and Close can be used only in local mode when an active object
is selected in the SLD. The selected device can be opened or closed provided it is not blocked or tagged. If no
operation is detected, the selection is removed, and the selected PB must be pressed again to enable the selection.
The local mode breaker selection and operation is only active if the user has proper level security access.
1601-0651 533
G HI&JGIK

}~}
Y TUXW
&' ( '
@
?
}}
G HIoqIMK )*+,-./+

012345 467689 :;<6=>9
!"#$%

[\]^\_àb _c]defg)

LM N h
LM O h
LM P h
[\]^\_àb _c]defg LM N

QRSTU VRWX YZ
LM O

LM P

opqIr q( ' s ' h F(' '
tu v (' s (w sxyh h yhh
i N
( z o y'h u' h 'F(' '{{h
sw ( '|y hyx txz
i O

A D
B i P E
C
i j

otx Gy'(uy' i k

i l

i m

i n

[\]^\_àb _c]defg)
F(
i N h
i O h
i P h
i j h
i k h
i l h
i m h
i n h

Figure 202: Navigation and SLD component selection
PB Block (Hard coded SLD Pushbutton)

Blocking of a breaker or switch can be used for inhibiting the close or open operation while in Local Mode. The
selected breaker or disconnect switch can be blocked. If block was not applied to the selected component, pressing
the Block PB will block either the Open or Close command depending on the existing state. When the block is
active, the letter B appears in the SLD next to the controlled component
IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU

IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU

"#$%&#'( )'* #D EFF
+%,#-($'$
<= >=?@ABC
./012134 IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU
789:;
/54 06/2 #D E"

G
H
IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU
E V$'W
Figure 203: SLD Pushbutton Block logic diagram
534 1601-0651
PB Bypass (Hard coded SLD Pushbutton)

Blocking of the command can be bypassed using the SLD pushbutton Bypass. When pressed, the previously
applied block is bypassed. For example if the block was applied when the Breaker/Switch was opened, pressing the
PB Bypass will allow closing command. If the bypass is active for the selected breaker or switch, the letters By
appear next to the symbol in the SLD.
LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

[
LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

EF%)) !G HII
!" #$!%& '%(
) # *!+&"%"
:; <;=:>??

;@ABCD
,-./0/12 LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX
567 589 -32 .4-0 EF%)) !G H

J
K
LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX
H Y"%Z
Figure 204: SLD Pushbutton Bypass Block logic diagram
PB Tag (Hard coded SLD pushbutton)

Lockout/Tagout is a practice and procedure to safeguard employees from unexpected energization or startup of
machinery and equipment, or hazardous energy during service or maintenance activities. If a breaker or disconnect
switch is tagged, the open and close controls are inhibited.
Both remote and local control commands are blocked if the tagged operand BKR# Tag ON, or SW# Tag ON is
active for the selected particular breaker or switch respectively. The breaker or switch is tagged by pressing the
SLD pushbutton Tag. If the selected switching device is tagged, a letter T appears under its symbol. Tagging can be
achieved in local mode using the front panel control from the configurable SLD screens. The Pushbutton Tag logic
diagram shows the tagging logic diagram for a switch. The logic applies to one breaker or switch at the time in the
single line diagram.
1601-0651 535
U2V846;V
MWXXY X
@ AB Z [
012314567 4829:;< 012314567 4829:;<
>P QRS =B MN ?OO
=T QRS =B

012314567 4829:;<
'( )*+,- MN ?
$%& !
"! #
./
012314567 4829:;<
=>? @ AB CDEFDDGHIJKL
Figure 205: Pushbutton Tag logic diagram
Note:
The pushbuttons, Tag, Block and Bypass Block are used for both breakers and switches when selected in the SLD. Only one
component at the time can be selected in the SLD.
Note:
Tagging, blocking, or bypassing block can be performed in Local Mode, and only when the component (breaker or switch) is
selected in the SLD. The applied action of tagging, blocking or bypassing block is retained for this component after it’s been
deselected. To change the status of the applied action, the component need be reselected.
Note:
The Local Mode control allows programming of separate pair of PBs for Open and Close commands to breakers and for Open
and Close commands to switches. If desired, one pair of pushbuttons can be programmed for Open and Close commands to
both breakers and switches.
536 1601-0651
Shows on display banner
SETPOINT LM
Local Mode FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Off = 0 Local Mode ON
SETTING Local Mode OFF
AND
Select Before Operate
Disabled = 0, Enabled = 1
from Bkr/Sw selection logic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SBO Enabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Selected
AND
AND
SETPOINT
Breaker Local Open
Off=0, Pushbutton # ON =1
869
PB Local Stop
PB BKR Local Open FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Local Open

from Breaker Control logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Rem Blk Open
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN command
To Selected BKR1 Trip
BKR1 Rem Blk Open By Setpoints/System/Breakers/
BKR1:
Output
Relay ( Ready = 1)
from Breaker status detection logic
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR 1: Trip Relay Select
AND
BKR1 Opened
from Tagging logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Tag ON
from Local Block logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Block ON
From Local Bypass Block logic

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Bypass Block ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Loc Blk Open

SETPOINT
Breaker Local Close FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
Off=0, Pushbutton # ON =1 BKR1 Loc Blk Open By
PB BKR Local Close

AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Local Close
PB Local Start To Selected BKR 1 Close

869 Setpoints/System/Breakers/ Output
BKR1:
from Breaker Control logic
OR
BKR 1: Close Relay Select
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Rem Blk Close

AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Rem Blk Cls By
from Breaker status detection logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Closed
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Loc Blk Close
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BKR1 Loc Blk Cls By
850, 845, 889

* The logic shows the local breaker
From BKR1 Control menu
control for Breaker 1 with the setpoint
Select Before Operate present in the
SETPOINT/CONTROL/BKR 1 CONTROL/CLOSE
SYNC SUPVN BKR1 menu only when the relay is ordered to
support more than one breaker.
From Close Synchrocheck Supervision for
Breaker 1 selected in BKR1 Control menu
The programmed value Bypass, Sync 1 Cls Perm, or Sync 2 Cls Perm for the setpoint Close
Sync Spvn BKR1 from BKR1 Control menu applies
894200C1
Figure 206: Local Control for breakers
1601-0651 537
¡¢£¤ ¥£¦§
J
o"
4 o"
o"

$ Ç#"o
¬_\ ´µ_¶h² dàè[°\g a\¯°e

¨
©
ª
""I"o
J
I !"#
4 (II#
¾ ¿ÀÁÂÃ Äux|t s}Æ ¨

©
ª !"#
¬_\ h²°[e³ ¹\g[_\a a\¯°e

H"n $% !"#
¨
© !"# 'no
ª

º»¼½
H"n $% !"# $&
e\bgf
¬_\ h²°[e³ d[b[]d f`[è[°\g a\¯°e ¨ [\ \][^][
© _àbc
ª
JKLMNOPLQRJSQLKTR dàè[`f [\
I !"#"o JKLMNOPLQRNPLkNlR JUOLVWKQRJXYZ
=>?@A B =>@CA D EF \^`g hij
JUOLVW NPLkNlR
¬_\ ®b¯¯°g¯ a\¯°e JXYZ ;< G !"# H"& ""I
)* + ,-./ ).0123/
5« 5 676
4 89:
¬_\ ·\eba á\eµ a\¯°e

$%
¸_\ ·\eba ć^bdd á\eµ a\¯°e ¨

©
ª

$&!(( $%

¨
©
ª $% !"#

¨
©
ª $% !"# $&
J
I '("
4 (II# '("
¨
¾ ¿ÀÁÂÃ Äux|t ÅtuysÆ ©
ª

'(" 'no
¬_\ h²°[e³ ¹\g[_\a a\¯°e
¨ [\ \][^][

©
ª _àbc
H"n $% '(" JKLMNOPLQRJSQLKTR dàè[`f [\
¨ JKLMNOPLQRNPLkNlR JUOLVWKQRJXYZ
© =>?@A B =>@CA D EF ea\d` hij
ª JUOLVW NPLkNlR
JXYZ ;< G '(" H"&
H"n $% '( $& ""I
)* + m1,). ).01 23/
5 676
4 89:
¬_\ ±°de\ggè[ h²°[e³ d[b[]d f`[è[°\g a\¯°e
¨
©
'("o ª

¨
©
ª $% '("

¨
©
ª $% '( $&

p qrs tuvwx yruzy {rs tux|t xu}{~ut u~ wyxu}}sx{ zw{xr

zrs} stsx{ su~s s~|{s ys{ uw}{ wy ys{ {u }|ts
qrs tux|t yzw{xr xu}{~ut wy }u{ ||wt|ts zrs} wy ys{ {u
wy|ts
Figure 207: Local Control for Switches
Path: Setpoints > Control > Local Control Mode

For this path the HMI menus vary depending on the order code and the number of breakers selected.
538 1601-0651
Note:
For relays supporting single breaker control, the SW Local Open and SW Local Close setpoints appear in the menu only if the
relay is ordered with Advanced SLD; and the SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is enabled. In all other cases, these
setpoints are hidden and inactive.
SELECT BEFORE OPERATE

Default: Disabled (in most cases, but dependent on order code)
This setpoint is included in the Local Control Mode menu only if the 8 Series relay supports one breaker. This
setpoint is omitted for relays supporting more than one breaker.
When the Select Before Operate (SBO) is disabled, and Local Mode is set, the breaker control can be performed
directly by pressing the corresponding front panel pushbuttons (or those mounted in close proximity to the relay).
No component selection or additional confirmation is needed. The same applies when the breaker control is in
Remote mode.
Note:
When SBO is disabled, all local and remote flags such as blocking, bypassing, and tagging are reset.
Setting the SBO to Enabled enables the navigation and the selection of a component from the SLD, so that the
pushbuttons Open or Close from the front panel (or those mounted in close proximity to the relay) can be used in
Local Mode only after the component is selected. All flags such as blocking, bypassing and tagging can be
initiated during this mode. Blocking and bypassing can also be initiated remotely, when in Remote Mode.
LOCAL MODE
Default: Pushbutton 5 Off
The LOCAL MODE setting places the relay in Local Mode. The relay is in Remote mode, if not forced into Local
mode by this setpoint (i.e. LOCAL MODE is disabled, or the selected input de-asserted). When in Local Mode,
both Breakers and Disconnect switches can be controlled using the faceplate pushbuttons and SLD
pushbuttons.
BKR /SW SELECT TIMEOUT

Default: 5 min
This setting specifies the available time for open/close commands, after a breaker or a disconnect switch has
been selected in the single line diagram.
BKR (CONTACTOR) LOCAL OPEN

Default: Pushbutton 1
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker (contactor) open command can be initiated by
the configured pushbutton.
1601-0651 539
MANUAL CONTROL
Default: Off
Manual Control mode allows flexibility to use the open and close operation of the switch via front panel
pushbutton even during the Remote mode of operation.
BKR LOCAL OPEN

Default: Off
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker open command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton.
BKR (CONTACTOR) LOCAL CLOSE

Default: Pushbutton 1 ON
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker (contactor) close command can be initiated by
the selected faceplate pushbutton.
BKR LOCAL CLOSE

Default: Pushbutton 1 ON (845, 850, 889)
Default: Pushbutton 2 ON (859, 869)
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker close command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton.
Note:
hen you close a selected breaker locally using a relay pushbutton, Synchrocheck supervision is used, as defined by the
setting value configured for the setpoint Close Sync Spvn BKR[X] from the BKR[X] Control menu. For example, if you
select the value Sync 1 Cls Perm in the Close Sync Spvn BKR1 setpoint, initiation of the BKR Local Close command will
not close BKR1 unless the Synchrocheck 1 permits closing by producing a Sync 1 Cls Perm signal
SW LOCAL OPEN
Default: Pushbutton 1 ON
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The switch open command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton. The setpoint appears in the Local Control Mode menu only when advanced SLD is
selected when ordering the relay.
SW LOCAL CLOSE
Default: Dependent on order code
540 1601-0651
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The switch close command can be initiated by the
programmed faceplate pushbutton. The setpoint appears in the Local Control Mode menu only when advanced
SLD is selected when ordering the relay.
TAGGING
Default: Enabled
When enabled, tagging control is enabled and the TAG key is displayed on the front panel interface. When a
breaker or a switch is tagged both the local and remote control of the device is inhibited.
Note:
Tagging is applied only from the TAG key and is mostly used for maintenance purposes, and in general when either the open
or close control must be inhibited. The tagging cannot be bypassed and can only be disabled (untagged) by pressing the TAG
key again.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 541
10.5 BREAKER CONTROL

While the Local breaker control is generic as the same front panel pushbuttons are used for control of each selected
breaker from the SLD, the remote breaker control requires programming of setpoints for each individual breaker.
When the relay is in Remote mode (Local Mode set to Off, or the assigned operand de-asserted), the setpoint
REMOTE BLOCK OPEN and REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE from the breaker menu can be used. These setpoints can
be used to provide Interlocking to the breaker control by assigning appropriate operands. The control for each
breaker can be programmed to have Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close inputs. These
inputs can be programmed if temporary permission for open or close is required.
The remote breaker open and close controls, as well as the blocking and bypassing the block commands are
executed as per the programmed setpoints form the Breaker Control menu.
Note:
The breaker flags Remote Block Open, Remote Block Close, Bypass Rem Blk Open and Bypass Rem Blk Close are
inhibited, when the setpoint SELECT BEFORE OPERATE residing under Local Control Mode menu is disabled. The breaker
remote open and close commands are operational.
Note:
The relay provides control of up to three breakers, depending on the order code. An additional remote breaker status is
available for HMI status only.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Control > BKR1(X)
REMOTE OPEN
Default: Off
The setting specifies the input which, when asserted, initiates a Trip command to output relay selected to open
the recloser. When the selected input is asserted, the Trip contact is energized and stays energized until the
input drops off, the breaker opens, and the selected Trip seal-in time expires. This setpoint provides the flexibility
to operate the Trip output relay by selecting an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, contact inputs,
virtual inputs, or remote inputs. For example the operand Trip Bus 1 Op can be selected to activate this output
according to the Trip conditions configured under the Trip Bus 1 menu.
REMOTE CLOSE
Default: Off
The setting specifies the input which, when asserted, initiates a Close command to the output relay selected to
close the breaker. This setpoint provides flexibility to operate the output relay by selecting an operand from the
list of FlexLogic operands.
REMOTE BLOCK OPEN

Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the breaker from opening/tripping.
542 1601-0651
REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE

Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the breaker from closing.
BYPASS REM BLK OPEN

Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block open
signal. Open command is permitted for the breaker.
BYPASS REM BLK CLOSE

Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block close
signal. Close command is permitted for the breaker.
CLOSE SYNC SPVN BKR

Range: Bypass, Sync 1 Cls Perm
Default: order code dependent (e.g. Bypass or Sync 1Cls Perm)
This setpoint selects whether or not the closing of the breaker is supervised by the synchrocheck function. For
this purpose the Synchrocheck element must be enabled.
Note:
If the supervision is not bypassed and Close is applied for an application where the breaker is located on radial feeders, or the
line is powered by one source only, the DEAD SOURCE PERM setpoint from the Synchrocheck menu shall not be disabled.
BAY LEVEL 61850 AUTHORITY

Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates the Bay level authority status. The operand status is modeled in the IEC
61850 server using the respective breaker's CSWI Loc data object and the operand status is applied to the
control authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. It is an Edge driven function.
STATION LEVEL 61850 AUTHORITY

Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled in the
IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker's CSWI Loc data object and the operand status is applied to the
control authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. It is an Edge driven function.
1601-0651 543

012

!"

012
012

&' ()*+, -."' 012
# $% 34
&56) &-7 -89:6;97

/ ()*+, 012
-."' # $% &56) /9-9 -89:6;97
34
012
012

012 34
&56) 6 -89:6;97
*<==)>-)?"
Figure 208: IEC 61850 Control Authority Settings Logic Diagram
Note:
If applicable, we strongly recommended connecting the relay voltage inputs to three-phase VTs and an Aux VT installed
across a breaker on the same side of the transformer winding. With this condition in place, select the Synchrocheck Close
Permission only for that breaker. Do not select the Synchrocheck Close Permission for the breakers on the other transformer
windings.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
544 1601-0651
()*+ d*4/)*5 *23 5*6.0

!" #$ %
'
t
u
!" #$ %
H
!" #$ %

K '
!" #$ %
()*+ e*0<5 d*4/)*5 *23 5*6.0
¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7 7
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
!" #$ %

!" #$ % LMNOPQMRSTRMLUS ]* ,3530/32
7 t VWLXYLWRSVZ#[\ ^_` a ]).b
u =>?@A B =>@CA D EF
8c/bc/

G HIJ K7
!" #$ % 89:;
0*++<42
'
!" #$ %

¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7 7 sI

I ©& ª ª7« ¬ t
u

!" #$ %

!" #$ %

()*+ e*0<5 d*4/)*5 *23 5*6.0 ¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
!" #$ %
I ©& ªsª7« ¬ !" #$ %
&
7 &

!" #$ %
7 & t
()*+ ,-./01 u
23/30/.*4
& 5*6.0 LMNOPQMRSTRMLUS
VWLXYLWRSVZ#[\
!" #$ %
G & ]* ,3530/32
&' ^_` a d5*f3
de8,: K7
¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7 0*++<42 8c/bc/
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
!" #$ %
I ©& ª ª7« ¬
t 7 & sI
u

&

&

!" #$ %

&
!" #$ %
&
vwxyz y{|v}~xv}zv
y| ~
t
g u
K & sI h
i
¤®¯¦°±®ª'I
K & sI
Bjklm nAopqklpq>pr EF
Figure 209: Breaker Control logic diagram
1601-0651 545
10.6 SWITCH CONTROL (89)

The disconnect switch control provides local and remote opening and closing of the switches. The local control
(Open, Close, Tag, Block, Bypass Block) is performed from the relay front panel pushbuttons when Local Mode is
active, and the switch is selected from the displayed single line diagram. The remote switch open and close
controls, as well as the blocking and bypassing the block commands are executed as per the programmed setpoints
form the Switch Control menu. While the Local switch control is generic and the same front panel pushbuttons are
used for every selected component from the SLD, the remote switch control requires programming of setpoints per
each individual switch. These settings are defined in the menu of each individual switch control. When the relay is in
Remote mode (Local Mode set to Off, or the assigned operand de-asserted), the setpoint Remote Block Open and
Remote Block Close from the Switch Control menus can be used. These setpoints can be used to provide
Interlocking to the switch control by assigning appropriate operands. The control for each disconnect switch can be
programmed to have Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close inputs. These inputs can be
programmed if temporary permission for open or close is required.
Note:
The switch Remote Block Open, Remote Block Close, Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close
flags are inhibited, when the setpoint Select Before Operate residing under Local Control Mode menu is disabled. The
remote open and close commands are still operational.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Switch Control > SW 1(X) Control
REMOTE OPEN
Default: Off
This setting specifies an input which when asserted initiates the open command to the switch. This setpoint is
active only when the operand assigned for Local Mode is de-asserted, or Local Mode is set to “Off”.
REMOTE CLOSE
Default: Off
This setting specifies an input which when asserted initiates the close command to the switch. This setpoint is
active only when the operand assigned for Local Mode is de-asserted, or Local Mode is set to “Off”.
OPEN SEAL-IN
Default: 0.000 s
This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open commands due to an operator initiated manual or remote open
command to the disconnect switch.
CLOSE SEAL-IN
Default: 0.000 s
546 1601-0651
This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open commands due to an operator initiated manual or remote close
command to the disconnect switch.
Note:
To maintain the close/open command for a certain time, do so by either using the seal-in timers Open Seal-In and Close Seal-
In, or the setpoint "Seal-in" from the output relays, or FlexLogic.
REMOTE BLOCK OPEN

Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the disconnect switch from opening.
REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE

Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the disconnect switch from closing.
BYPASS REM BLK OPEN

Default: Off
This setting specifies the selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the block to the disconnect open
control. The Open command is permitted.
BYPASS REM BLK CLOSE

Default: Off
This setting specifies the selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the block to the disconnect close
control. The Close command is permitted.
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
1601-0651 547
RS T U
*+,+-. /01
736 89 !:
w
x
*+,+-. /01
L6y !:
RS T U
*+,+-. /01
2! )69
*+,+-. /01
73 24 !()

%
&
*+,+-. /01 '
*+,+-. /01
73 24 !() 25

!()
*+,+-. /01

!() 9
*+,+-. /01
!()9
qrq

Ss
S
% abcdefbghigbajh t
&
!() ' keblmaghnop
VWXYZ [ VWY\Z ] ^_ r u v
!"" # $ ;<==>?@
` !() 65 3
AB C DEFG AFHIJKG DP
L MNM
$ HGO
%
234 !() &
'
!"" # $
%
&
'
%
25(6 24 !() &
'
!"" # $
*+,+-. /01
24 !()
*+,+-. /01
T U 24 !() 25
*+,+-. /01
73 24

%
&
'
*+,+-. /01 *+,+-. /01
73 24 25

*+,+-. /01
*+,+-. /01
9
9
qrq
TR
Ss
% S
& abcdefbghigbajh
t
' keblmaghnop
VWXYZ [ VWY\Z ] ^_ t uv
!"" # $ ;<==>?@
` 65 3
AB C QIDAF AFHIJKG DP
L MNM
%
234 & $ HGO
'
!"" # $
%
&
'
%
25(6 24 &
'
!"" # $
*+,+-. /01
24
*+,+-. /01
24 25
¡¢£¤
z {|} ~ | |} } } ~ ~ {|}
} ~ ~} }| |
~ } } } ~
Figure 210: Switch Control logic diagram
548 1601-0651
10.7 VIRTUAL INPUT CONTROL

Path: Setpoints > Control > Virtual Input Control
FORCE VIRTUAL INPUT 1 (64)

Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The states of up to 64 Virtual Inputs are changed here. The current or selected status of the Virtual Input is also
shown here. The status is a state OFF (logic 0) or ON (logic 1). If the corresponding Virtual Input selected under
Setpoints/Inputs/Virtual Inputs is set to Latched, the ON command initiated from this menu stays on and the
status of this Virtual Input is also on until the OFF command is received. If the Virtual Input type is Self-Reset,
the command and status of this Virtual Input reverts to OFF after one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations.
1601-0651 549
10.8 TRIP BUS
Note:
Output Relays configured for Recloser operation are under the Trip Close Logic. Setpoints under Trip Bus are not applicable
to the output relays set under Trip Close Logic.
The relay provides six identical Trip Bus elements. The Trip Bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection,
control elements, inputs without using FlexLogic and assigning them in a simple and effective manner. Each Trip
Bus can be assigned to trip, alarm or the other logic actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-
in delay are available.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Trip Bus 1(X)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
INPUT 1 to 16
Default: Off
These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the Trip Bus.
LATCHING
Default: Disabled
The setting enables or disables latching of the Trip Bus output. This is typically used when lockout is required or
user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
RESET
Default: Off
The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
550 1601-0651
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
Note:
The Any Trip operand must not be programmed as an input for the Trip Bus function.
1601-0651 551
552
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
AND
1(TRIP)
OR
Trip
Figure 211: Trip Bus logic diagram

S
Latched Trip AND
LATCH
Alarm
OR
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
SETPOINTS
S
AND
TRIP BUS 1
BLOCK : LATCH SETPOINT
Off = 0 R Output Relay X
AND
Command
SETPOINTS RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS TRIP BUS 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY:
NON VOLATILE Trip Bus 1 OP
OR
INPUT 1: S TRIP BUS 1

Off = 0 DROPOUT DELAY:
LATCH tPKP
SETPOINTS tDPO
TRIP BUS 1 SET-
DOMINANT
INPUT 2: R
LED:
Off = 0
PICKUP
OR
...
FlexLogic Operands
... Trip Bus 1 PKP
SETPOINTS
TRIP BUS 1
INPUT 16:
Off = 0
SETPOINTS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING:
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
OR
TRIP BUS 1
RESET:
Disabled = 0

1601-0651
10.9 BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

The Breaker Failure element determines that a breaker signaled to Trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time.
The Breaker Failure scheme must trip all breakers that can supply current to the faulted zone. Operation of a
breaker Failure element causes clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial Trip. Because
Breaker Failure can result in tripping a large number of breakers and this can affect system safety and stability, a
very high level of security is required.
The Breaker Failure function monitors phase and neutral currents and/or status of the breaker while the protection
trip or external initiation command exists. If Breaker Failure is declared, the function operates the selected output
relays, forces the autoreclose scheme to lockout and raises FlexLogic operands.
The operation of a Breaker Failure element consists of three stages: initiation, determination of a Breaker Failure
condition, and outputs.
Initiation of a Breaker Failure

The protection signals initially sent to the breaker or external initiation (FlexLogic operand that initiates Breaker
Failure) initiates the Breaker Failure scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can
reset before the breaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset
when the fault is cleared. If required, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the
initiating operand to initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer than any breaker failure time, with the output operand
selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
When the scheme is initiated, it sends a Trip signal after a pick-up delay, to the breaker initially signaled to Trip (this
feature is usually described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that can result from a
declaration of a failed breaker.
Determination of a Breaker Failure condition

The schemes determine a Breaker Failure condition supervised by one of the following:
● Current supervision only
● Breaker status only
● Both (current and breaker status)
Each type of supervision is equipped with a time delay, after which a failed breaker is declared and Trip signals are
sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delays are associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3.
Timer 1 logic is supervised by current level only. If fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is
issued. The continued presence of current indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit. This logic
detects a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current.
Timer 2 logic is supervised by both current supervision and breaker status. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated
by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued.
Timer 3 logic is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact only. There is no current level check in this logic as it is
intended to detect low magnitude faults. External logic may be created to include control switch contact used to
indicate that the breaker is in out-of-service mode, disabling this logic when the breaker is out-of-service for
maintenance.
Timer 1 and 2 logic provide two levels of current supervision - high-set and low-set - that allow the supervision level
to change (for example: from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted
circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion). The high-set detector is enabled after the timeout of timer 1 or 2,
along with a timer low-set delay that enables the low-set detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between
high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for
1601-0651 553
currents at small multiples of the Pickup value. The overcurrent detectors are required to operate after the Breaker
Failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors.
Outputs
The outputs from the schemes are:
● Re-trip of the protected breaker
● FlexLogic operand that reports on the operation of the portion of the scheme where high-set or low-set
current supervision is used
● FlexLogic operand that reports on the operation of the portion of the scheme where 52b status supervision is
used only
● FlexLogic operand that initiates tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The Breaker Failure output can be
sealed-in for an adjustable period
● Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared.
10.9.1 BREAKER FAILURE SETUP

Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Failure > BF1(X) > BF1(X) Setup
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Retrip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Range (from FW 4.10): Disabled, Retrip, Latched Retrip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
When a Retrip function is selected and Breaker Failure is initiated (with re-trip current supervision), the output
relay Trip operates but the alarm LED does not turn on.
SIGNAL INPUT
USE SEAL-IN
Range: Yes, No
Default: Yes
If set to Yes, the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision
pickup level.
PH RETRIP SUPERV PICKUP

Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current Retrip level, which when exceeded after Breaker Failure initiation, will
re-trip its own breaker. The setting is set to detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected circuit.
NTRL RETRIP SUPERV PICKUP

554 1601-0651
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setpoint specifies the neutral current Retrip level, which when exceeded after Breaker Failure initiation, will
Retrip its own breaker. The setting detects the lowest expected fault current on the protected circuit. Neutral
Retrip current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.
RETRIP PICKUP DELAY

Default: 0.033 s
This setting specifies a pickup delay for the re-trip command. This delay should be set longer than the possible
spurious contact input activation duration due to transients or temporary dc grounds by taking the contact input
de-bounce time into account. This will avoid re-trip operation for such transients.
SUPERVISION
Range: Current, 52b & Current, 52b
Default: Current
The setpoint specifies the type of supervision of the Breaker Failure element. There are three options: current
only, breaker status only, or both.
BREAKER CLOSED
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand (auxiliary switch contact) to indicate that the circuit breaker is closed.
T1 PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 1 logic which is supervised with current supervision only. The timer is set
to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin intended to overcome the relay
measurement and timing errors as well as relay processing time and current supervision reset time. In a
microprocessor relay this time is not significant. The current magnitude ramps-down to zero in ¾ of a power
cycle after the current is interrupted.
Note:
In bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longer
than the normal interrupting time.
T2 PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 2 logic which is supervised with current supervision and breaker status
(52b indication). The timer is set to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin
intended to overcome the relay measurement and timing errors, relay processing time, current supervision reset
time, and the time required for the breaker auxiliary contact to open.
1601-0651 555
T3 PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 3 logic which is supervised with breaker status only (52b indication). The
timer is set to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin intended to overcome the
relay timing errors, and the time required for the breaker auxiliary contact to open.
PHASE HIGHSET PICKUP

Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit.
NEUTRAL HIGHSET PICKUP

Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the neutral current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit. Neutral current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.
LOWSET DELAY
Default: 0.000 s
The setting provides the lowest current supervision Pickup. The setting is used in applications where a change in
supervision current level is required (for example: breakers with opening resistors).
The lowest delay (interval between high-set and low-set) is the expected breaker opening time.
PHASE LOWSET PICKUP

Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit where significant change in current level is expected (for example: breakers with
opening resistors).
NEUTRAL LOWSET PICKUP

Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the neutral current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit where significant change in current level is expected (for example: breakers with
opening resistors). Neutral current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.
DROPOUT DELAY
556 1601-0651
Default: 0.100 s
The setting is used to set the period of time for which the Breaker Fail output is sealed-in. This timer must be
coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the Breaker Failure element
sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer Trip
signal on for longer than the reclaim time.
BLOCK
Default: Off
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
10.9.2 INITIATE
Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Failure 1(X) > BF1(X) Initiate
EXTERNAL INITIATE
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates the Breaker Failure scheme; typically the trip signals
from external devices.
Note:
The trip signals from internal protection functions may be used with the help of FlexLogic, but for easier setting the Breaker
Failure function is provided with a BF1 INITIATE submenu.
INITIATE IN1(15)
Default: Ph TOC 1 OP
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates the Breaker Failure scheme; typically the trip signals
from internal protection functions.
1601-0651 557
Note:
The default setting includes the following protection functions:
● Ph TOC 1 OP
● Ph TOC 2 OP
● Ph IOC 1 OP
● Ph IOC 2 OP
● Ntrl TOC 1 OP
● Ntrl TOC 2 OP
● Ntrl IOC 1 OP
● Ntrl IOC 2 OP
● GND TOC 1 OP
● GND IOC 1 OP
558 1601-0651
1601-0651
LED:
AND
ALARM
OR
S
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
LATCH # 1
AND
BF 1 OUTPUT RELAYS
Command Set-
FUNCTION: Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
Disabled RESET R
FlexLogic Operands
Alarm
OR
BF1 OP
Latched Alarm
Re-trip
OR
Latched Re-trip
Configurable
SETPOINTS
BF1
AND
BLOCK :
Figure 212: Breaker Failure logic diagram

Off = 0 LED: TRIP
SETPOINTS
AND
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS BF1 PH RETRIP BF1 FlexLogic Operand
OR
SUPERV PICKUP: RETRIP PKP DELAY:
OR
AND
BF1 INITIATE: BF1 Retrip
tPKP
OR
BF1 NTRL RETRIP SUPERV

AND
EXTERNAL INITIATE 0 S
PICKUP:
LATCH # 1
AND
INITIATE IN1 RUN

OR Command Set-
IA > PICKUP Dominant
... RESET R
RUN
INITIATE IN15
IB > PICKUP
SETPOINTS
OR
RUN
AND
SETPOINTS
BF1 Setpoints/System/Breakers/
BF1 IC > PICKUP
PHASE HIGHSET PICKUP: BKR1: 845 & 889 &
USE SEAL-IN: RUN 859 only
IN > PICKUP BF1
YES = 1 BKR 1: Trip Relay Select
NTRL HIGHSET PICKUP:
NO = 0 RUN
IA > PICKUP
RUN
IB > PICKUP
OR
RUN
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS IC > PICKUP
IA SIGNAL INPUT:
RUN
IB BF1 FlexLogic Operands
T1 PICKUP DELAY: IN > PICKUP
IC CT Bank 1 - J1 BF1 Highset OP
t1PKP SETPOINTS BF1
IN
AND
0 PHASE LOWSET PICKUP: BF1 Lowset OP
BF1
USED ONLY IN 845 & 889 LOWSET DELAY: BF1
SETPOINTS NTRL LOWSET PICKUP:
tLOW
SETPOINTS RUN
OR
BF1 0
BF1 SETPOINTS
T2 PICKUP DELAY: IA > PICKUP
SUPERVISION: BF1
t2PKP RUN
DROPOUT DELAY:
AND
Current 0
IB > PICKUP
52b& Current 0
OR
OR
RUN TDPO
52b
IC > PICKUP
RUN
SETPOINTS
IN > PICKUP
BF1
SETPOINT T3 PICKUP DELAY: FlexLogic Operands
BF1 t3PKP
BF1 52b Superv OP
AND
BREAKER CLOSED: 0
Off = 0
894067C1.vsdx
559
10.10 ARC FLASH PROTECTION

The Arc Flash Protection module supports fast and secure protection against an arc flash event for a safe working
environment.
Arc Flash protection uses four light detection fiber sensors and a dedicated high-speed instantaneous overcurrent
element with secure Finite Response Filtering. Light from the light sensor AND logic with high-speed overcurrent
ensures fast and secure operation. Further enhancement includes continuous monitoring of individual light sensors
with self-test trouble indication. Four Arc Flash elements with self-test from the individual light sensors can be used
to design flexible Arc Flash protection schemes for different configurations depending upon the physical locations of
the sensors. Each individual element can also provide a higher level of redundancy/reliability of the system.
In case any issues with the sensors are detected (i.e. failure of a self-test), the corresponding light sensor trouble
operand (Light Sensor # Trouble) is asserted. Very fast detection of the Arc flash light event is also possible using
Light as the only detection parameter for alarm purposes. In addition, customized logic can be designed using
individual AF1 Light # PKP and Arc Flash 1 S# OP operands from different light sensors in the FlexLogic engine.
Path:Setpoints > Control > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable setting enables the HS Phase/Ground IOC function.
SIGNAL INPUT
Default: CT Bank 1 - J1
This setting provides the selections for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
HS PHASE PKP
Default: 2.000 x CT
HS GROUND PKP
Default: 1.000 x CT
Note:
The value of HS Gnd PICKUP can be set to a very high value, when only the HS Phs element needs to be applied for Arc
Flash detection.
560 1601-0651
Note:
The HS Ground PKP setting is not available if the order code is selected to have just one sensitive ground current input on the
J1-Bank (4-0B in the order code).
LIGHT SENSOR 1(4)

Default: Disabled
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
This setting enables or disables the events of the Arc Flash function.
TARGETS
Default: Latched
1601-0651 561
LED: TRIP
AND
OR
CONFIGURABLE IN 845
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
R
Set Dominant LED: ALARM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Any Alarm
AND
SETPOINT S
FUNCTION: LATCH SETPOINT
Disabled Command R Output Relay X
Trip RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
Latched Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Arc Flash 1 OP
OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable FlexLogic Operands
AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP A
SETPOINTS AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP B
HS Phase PKP: AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP C

AND
RUN AF 1 HS GND IOC PKP

Iahs > PICKUP
Ibhs > PICKUP
OR
SETPOINTS Ichs > PICKUP
BLOCK
Off = 0
SETPOINTS
FlexLogic Operands
HS Ground PKP
Arc Flash 1 S1 OP
SETPOINTS HS Phase Currents RUN
Arc Flash 1 S2 OP
SIGNAL INPUT: HS Phase A current (Iahs) Ighs > PICKUP
HS Phase B current (Ibhs) Arc Flash 1 S3 OP
CT Bank 1 - J1 HS Phase C current (Ichs) Arc Flash 1 S4 OP

HS Ground current (Ighs) RUN Reset Delay
Light Sensor 1 Input > Factory PKP 0 ms
AND
Level * Auto Calibration Level for
USED ONLY IN 845 & 889
Sensor 1 20 ms
RUN
AND
Level * Auto Calibration Level for
20 ms
OR
Sensor 2
Light Sensor Input
RUN
Light Sensor 1 Light Sensor 3 Input > Factory PKP 0 ms
AND
FlexLogic Operands
Level * Auto Calibration Level for 20 ms
Light Sensor 2
Sensor 3 AF 1 Light 1 PKP
Light Sensor 3
RUN 0 ms AF 1 Light 2 PKP
AND
Light Sensor 4
Level * Auto Calibration Level for AF 1 Light 3 PKP
Sensor 4
AF 1 Light 4 PKP
Input form Self Test

Logic
(If Self test Pulse received FlexAnalog
within specified interval = 1 AF 1 HS Phase Current A (Iahs)
(Yes))
AF 1 HS Phase Current B (Ibhs)
AF 1 HS Phase Current C (Ichs)
AF 1 HS Ground Current (Ighs)
SETPOINTS
AND
Light Sensor 1 Enabled = 1

FlexLogic Operands
Light Sensor 1 Trouble
SETPOINTS
AND

Light Sensor 2 Enabled =1

SETPOINTS
AND
FlexLogic Operands
OR
SETPOINTS Light Sensor Trouble

AND
Programmable LED:

TROUBLE
Figure 213: Arc Flash logic diagram
562 1601-0651
10.11 VT FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)

The VT Fuse Failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for
a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via
the BLOCK input) are voltage restrained overcurrent, directional current, power functions. This loss can be caused
by a blown primary voltage transformer fuse (or fuses), or by voltage transformer secondary circuit protection fuse
failure.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
1. Class A: loss of one or two phases
2. Class B: loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of a Class A failure is a significant level of
negative sequence voltage, whereas an indication of a Class B failure is the presence of positive sequence current
and an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be
present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure
declarations during these events is provided.
Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it is sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears. An additional
condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized: positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The settings of this function are applied to three-phase voltage input (supervised with positive, negative and zero
sequence current components) to produce an Operate flag.
This function also provides detection of the VT neutral wire open condition using the third harmonic content in the
3V0 (i.e. Va+Vb+Vc) signal. Under neutral wire open condition, 3V0 contains small fundamental content under
balance load condition but contains significant 3rd harmonic contents regardless of the load condition (balance or
imbalance).
10.11.1 VT FUSE FAILURE SETTINGS

Path: Setpoints > Control > VT Fuse Failure 1 (2)
FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
CT INPUT
Default: CT Bnk1-J1
TIME DELAY
Default: 0.1 s
This setting can be used to avoid fuse failure detection in the case of sudden loss of voltage when the current is
zero (breaker remains in open condition) and the transient negative sequence voltage appears. This setting
should be used where the VT is on the Bus side, in which case the relay may detect voltage loss when the
breaker is open.
1601-0651 563
Operate Delay:
Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 Sec
This setting determines the operate time-delay upon detection of a VTS condition.
VT Ntrl Wire Det

Default: Disabled
This setting enables and disables the VT neutral wire open detection function. When the VT is connected in
Delta, do not enable this function because there is no neutral wire for Delta connected VT.
VT Ntrl Wire PKP

Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1 %
Default: 10.0 %
This setting specifies the pickup level of 3rd harmonic of 3V0 signal for the VT neutral wire open detection logic
to pick up. % is calculated based on the Phase VT Secondary
OUTPUT RELAY X
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
564 1601-0651
LED: ALARM / LATCHED
AND
ALARM
OR
SETPOINT
AND
SLATCH #
FUNCTION: 1
Disabled
Set-
Alarm Dominant
OR
Latched Alarm
RESET R
AND
Configurable
Command
OR
SLATCH #
2 FAU
AND
LT
Reset-
Dominant
SETPOINT SETPOINTS
AND
COMPARATORS OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7
VT INPUT SETPOINT
RUN
OR
Ph VT Bnk1 J2 V_2 Time Delay FUSE
OR
V_2 > 0.10 p.u. SLATCH #
TD FAILU
OR
Only for 850 and 889 RUN RE 3
AND
V_1 0 FlexLogic Operands
V_1 < 0.05 p.u.
AND
Reset- VT Fuse Fail 1 OP
RUN Dominant
I_1 > 0.075 p.u.
R
RUN TIMER
V_1 < 0.80 p.u.
2 cyc
RUN AND 20 cyc SETPOINT
I_1 < 0.05 p.u.
Operate Delay FlexLogic Operands
RUN TD
0 VT Fuse Fail 1 Slow OP
I_1 |I _1| |I_1'| > 0.04 p.u.
AND
SETPOINT
RUN
CT INPUT I_2 |I _2| |I_2'| > 0.04 p.u.
OR
CT Bnk1 J1 RUN
I_0 |I _0| |I_0'| > 0.04 p.u.
AND
Not available for 869 & 859 Where I is 2 cycles old VT Fuse 1 V Loss
LED: ALARM / LATCHED
AND
ALARM
AND
SETPOINT
NTRL WIRE OPEN DETECTION
AND
OR
Enabled
AND
SLATCH #
OR
SETPOINT Set-
SETPOINT
Ntrl Wire Open PKP Level Dominant
AND
VT INPUT Timer
RUN
5 cyc RESET R
Ph VT Bnk1 J2 3V_0 (3rd Harm) 3V_0 (3rd Harm) > setting 0 Command
Only for 850 and 889

AND
TIMER OR
FlexLogic Operands
0
20 cyc
OR
VT Fuse 1 Ntrl Open
892734C1
Figure 214: VT Fuse Failure logic diagram
1601-0651 565
10.12 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

The 8Series has 64 identical digital elements available. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and
present a target message and enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include:
● a name to be referenced in any target message
● a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand
● a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand
Digital elements run once per power system cycle. As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block
signal with a duration less than one power system cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to
one power system cycle later than the pickup and reset delay settings indicate. Therefore, do no use digital
elements:
● with transient signals, such as communications commands.
● where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
Example : Trip circuit integrity monitoring

In many applications it is desirable to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity such that problems can be detected
before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected
across the trip output contact detects a low level of current (Contact output voltage is not zero), well below the
operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current falls below the
monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact, which is open
when the breaker is open. To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include
the breaker position.
Assume that output 1 is a trip contact. Using the output settings, this output is given an ID name; for example, Cont
Op 1. Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input 1 to monitor breaker status (Block when
contact input 1 is OFF).
Using the contact input settings, this input is given a name, for example, CI 1, and is set On when the breaker is
closed. The function is blocked when breaker is open, i.e. CI 1 is Off. The settings to use digital element 1 to
monitor the breaker trip circuit are shown below:
SETTING PARAMETER
Function Enabled
Name Bkr Trip Cct Out
Input Cont Op 1
Pickup Delay 0.200 s
Dropout Delay 0.100 s
Relays Relay : Disabled
Block CI 1 Off
Target Self-Reset
Events Enabled
566 1601-0651
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Default: Disabled
NAME
Range : 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Digital Elem1
Assign a user-defined name to the Digital Element. This Name is used In Flexlogic operands, Target messages,
a blocking input from any selected flexlogic operands, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output
operands.
INPUT
Range : Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
PICKUP DELAY
Default: 0.000
Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup
delay is not required, set to "0.000," To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of
the breaker.
DROPOUT DELAY
Default: 0.000
Sets the dropout time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0.000.”
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
EVENTS
Default: Enabled
1601-0651 567
TARGETS
Default: Self-reset
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP
AND
Latched Trip
To Trip Output Relay
OR
Alarm
OR
Latched Alarm
Configurable
S
AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
SETPOINT SETPOINT R
PICKUP DELAY
LED: ALARM
AND
AND
BLOCK NAME
DROPOUT DELAY
Off=0 RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
OR
tRST Any Alarm
INPUT = 1
AND
SETPOINT S
INPUT LATCH SETPOINT
Any FlexLogic Operand
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
DIG ELEM 1 OP
892794C1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

DIG ELEM 1 PKP
Figure 215: Digital Elements logic
568 1601-0651
CHAPTER 11
FLEXLOGIC
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic
570 1601-0651

This chapter describes the FlexLogic and Testing setpoints. FlexLogic setpoints provide access to the variable logic
used with the relay. Testing setpoints include simulated current and voltage inputs, and test operations for LEDs,
input contacts, and output relays.
This product manual does not contain a list of FlexLogic operands. A full list is available on the GE website.
FlexLogic 572
1601-0651 571
11.2 FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals
through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all
variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs, which then uses
FlexLogic to produce analog and digital outputs.
The major sub-systems of a generic 8 Series relay involved in this process are shown as follows.
Note:
For information on the Logic Designer and Logic Monitor menu items, refer to the Help menu.

!
"#$%
&% $%
'() )#
>?@<A=
*)# )(#+
1234526 789:;<=
MN
,)# ()- JKL

.-/0)+
O
P #+

BCDCE F BCDCE G BCDCE H BCDCE I

Figure 216: FlexLogic Display Hierarchy
572 1601-0651
The states of all digital signals are represented by flags (FlexLogic operands). A digital 1 is represented by a Set
flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control
feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate an output relay. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally
or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. In a simple scheme where a contact input is used to
block an element is desired, this selection is made within the menu of the element. This applies to other features
that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.
When more complex logic than the one presented above is required, the FlexLogic tool should be used. For
example, if it is desired to block the operation of a Phase Time Overcurrent element by the closed state of a contact
input, and the operated state of a Phase Undervoltage element, the two input states need be programmed in a
FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two inputs to produce a virtual output which then must be programmed
within the menu of the Phase Time Overcurrent as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can be created only by
FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks,
blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the
requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through
the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to
hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows customization of the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands.
The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and
latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands
to be assigned, as inputs to specified operators, to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered
register called a ‘Virtual Output’. Virtual Outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the
equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1
or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the
combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1
(=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times during every power
system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types
of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of
the different types of operands are listed in the table below.
FlexLogic Operands
A complete list of FlexLogic operands are available on the GE website.
The following operands can be re-named if required
● Breakers in the breaker control feature
● ID (identification) of contact inputs
● ID of virtual inputs
● ID of virtual outputs.
● If the default name or ID of any of these operands are changed, the assigned name appears in the relay list
of operands.
1601-0651 573
FlexLogic Operators
TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an
equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an
equation list.
End END The first END encountered
signifies the last entry in the list
of processed FlexLogic™
parameters.
One-shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a A ‘one shot’ refers to a single
positive going edge. input gate that generates a pulse
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a response to an edge on the
negative going edge. input. The output from a ‘one
shot’ is True (positive) for only
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both one pass through the FlexLogic
the positive and negative going equation. There is a maximum of
edges. 64 ‘one shots’.
Logic gate NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous
parameter.
OR(2)↓ OR(16) 2 input OR gate↓ 16 input OR Operates on the 2 previous
gate parameters.↓Operates on the 16
previous parameters.
AND(2)↓ AND(16) 2 input AND gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
AND gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
16 previous parameters.
NOR(2)↓ NOR(16) 2 input NOR gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
NOR gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
NAND(2)↓ NAND(16) 2 input NAND gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
NAND gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous
parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset- The parameter preceding
dominant LATCH(S,R) is the reset input.
The parameter preceding the
reset input is the set input.
Timer TIMER 1↓ TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer The timer is started by the
1 settings.↓ Timer set with preceding parameter. The output
FlexLogic™ timer 32 settings. of the timer is TIMER #.
Assign virtual output = Virt Op 1↓ = Virt Op 32 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ The virtual output is set by the
operand to virtual output 1.↓ preceding parameter
Assigns previous FlexLogic™
operand to virtual output 96.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the
FlexLogic operators table.
574 1601-0651
FlexLogic Gate Characteristics

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’
FLEXLOGIC RULES
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
● Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
● Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a Virtual Output if it is to
be used as an input to two or more operators.
● Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
● A timer operator (for example, TIMER 1) or Virtual Output assignment may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.
FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
● Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
● FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.
● When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value
is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for
example, it is suggested to power the unit down then back up.
11.2.1 TIMERS
Path: Setpoints > FlexLogic > Timers
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE
Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes
Default: Milliseconds
The setpoint is used to select the time measuring unit.
TIMER 1 MODE
Range: Pickup, Dropoff, Dwell, Pulse, Pickup/Dropoff,
Default: Pickup
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY

1601-0651 575
Default: 0 s
The setpoint sets the time delay to Pickup. If a Pickup delay is not required, set this function to “0”.
This setting is used to set the time delay for Pickup, Dwell, Pulse and Pickup/Dropoff.
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY

Default: 0 s
The setpoint sets the time delay to Dropout. If a Dropout delay is not required, set this function to “0”.
This setting is used to set the drop-off time delay for Dropoff, Pickup/Dropoff.
11.2.2 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

The purpose of a Non-volatile Latch is to provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and does not reset
when the relay reboots after being powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or
permanently blocking relay functions such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch.
Operation of the element is summarized in the following table:
LATCH 1 TYPE LATCH 1 SET LATCH 1 RESET LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF
Reset Dominant On Off On Off
Off Off Previous State Previous State
On On Off On
Off
Set Dominant On Off On Off
On
Off Off Previous State Previous State
Off On Off On
Path: Settings > FlexLogic > Non-volatile Latches > Latch 1(16)
NV LATCH 1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The setpoint enables or disables the Non-volatile Latch function.
NV LATCH 1 TYPE
Range: Reset-Dominant, Set-Dominant
Default: Reset-Dominant
The setting characterizes NV LATCH 1 to be set- or reset-dominant.
NV LATCH 1 SET
Default: Off
If asserted, this specified FlexLogic operand sets NV LATCH 1.
576 1601-0651
LATCH 1 RESET
Default: Off
If asserted, this specified FlexLogic operand resets NV LATCH 1.
11.2.3 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION

Path: Setpoints > FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation
The FlexLogic Equation screen is one of two options available to configure FlexLogic. The other option is Logic
Designer.
Three time stamp variables: Logic Design Last Saved, Logic Design Last Compiled and FlexLogic Editor Last
Saved, have been included in this screen.
Look at the time stamps to easily see which of the options: FlexLogic Editor or Logic Designer is currently being
used.
There are 1024 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 1024 (i.e. FlexLogic Entry X – where X ranges from
1 to 1024) with default END entry settings. If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated
state flag is never set to 1.
Figure 217: FlexLogic Equation Editor Screen
The FlexLogic entries are defined as follows.

Graphical Viewer: Clicking on the View button enables the FlexLogic equation to be presented in graphical format
(Read-only). Refer to the Viewing FlexLogic Graphics section for more details.
1601-0651 577
Logic Design Last Saved, Logic Design Last Compiled, and FlexLogic Editor Last Saved: Each of these three
read-only variables holds the time stamp that represents the time that the operation (of the respective variable) was
performed.
● When no Logic (New file creation) is present these timestamps are set to default text representations.
● Time stamps are displayed in the format ‘Mon DD YYYY HH:MM:SS’ [Jun 22 1981 14:20:00]
● Each time a ‘Save’ operation is performed in the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ screen, the ‘FlexLogic Editor
Last Saved’ entry gets updated.
● Based on the values present at each launch of the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ screen, internal validation
prompts the relevant messages. These prompts must be followed to ensure that the ‘FlexLogic’ configuration
is synchronized with the ‘Logic Designer’. These three variables are shown in color in the FlexLogic Equation
Editor based on timestamps. Color is used to indicate the change (non-synchronization if any) of FlexLogic
between the FlexLogic Editor and Logic Designer Screens.
File Conversion and Handling of Time Stamps: When File Conversion is applied the three time stamps are
processed (either carry forwarded, defaulted, updated with latest PC time) based on the Source and Destination
File versions and Order code supported.
The following cases depict the nature of the three time stamps after a file conversion.
Source Version Target Version Is FlexLogic Change Time Stamps [LDLs, LDLc, FELs]**
Detected?
>= 160 >= 160 YES [ 0^ , 0 , PCTime**]
>= 160 >=160 NO *Existing time stamps are copied to the
converted file
< 160 >= 160 YES [ 0 , 0 , PCTime]
< 160 (& > 120***) >= 160 NO [PCTime, PCTime, PCTime,]
** LDLs – Logic Designer Last Saved, LDLc– Logic Designer Last Compiled and FELs – FlexLogic
Editor Last Saved
** PCTime The time that the file conversion took place
^0 Indicates the time stamps are being defaulted
*** There is no support for Logic Designer [Graphical Editor] below version 130
* For each specific case, the source files for Logic Designer (Graphical) content will also get
copied “as is” to the destination folder. This enables the user to retain old content “as is”.
In a typical scenario where both the FlexLogic Designer and FlexLogic Editor are used for configuring FlexLogic, the
updated time stamps appear as shown in the following figure.
578 1601-0651
Logic Designer: This entry can be used to initiate the launch of the Logic Designer screen. Once chosen, the
existing FlexLogic Equation Editor screen is set to Read-only and then the Logic Designer screen launch is initiated.
If the user wants to re-visit the FlexLogic Editor Screen, any existing read-only screen has to be closed first. Then,
the screen has to be re-opened. The FlexLogic Editor screen is now editable, again.
In order to maintain synchronization of FlexLogic, the following update rules are defined.
For example, when a user tries to open the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ of a particular device or file.
● If the Logic Designer screen is open and in Edit mode, a message prompts to save any changes. The
FlexLogic Equation Editor is not launched.
● If the Logic Designer is open and in saved mode (no edits to save or compile), the Logic Designer screen is
closed and then the FlexLogic Equation Editor launch is initiated.
11.2.4 VIEWING FLEXLOGIC GRAPHICS

To verify that the FlexLogic equation(s) and its selected parameters produce the desired logic, the expression can
be viewed by converting the derived equation into a graphic diagram. It is strongly recommended and helpful to
view an equation as a graphic diagram before it is saved to the relay in order to troubleshoot any possible error in
the equation.
To View the FlexLogic Graphic
Click on the View button at the top of the Type column in the FlexLogic Equation screen, see previous figure.
Provided the equation is entered correctly, this generates a graphical representation of the expression previously
entered. If any operator inputs are missing or any FlexLogic rules have been violated, the EnerVista D&I Setup
software displays a message box indicating any problems in the equation when the view feature is attempted.
The expression is also listed to the left of the diagram to demonstrate how the diagram was created. The End
statement is added as parameter 5 (End of list).
1601-0651 579
Figure 218: FlexLogic Graphic Example
11.2.5 FLEXELEMENTS
There are 8 identical FlexElements. A FlexElement is a universal comparator, that can be used to monitor any
analog actual value measured or calculated by the relay, or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the
same type. Depending on how the FlexElement is programmed, the effective operating signal could be either a
signed signal or an absolute value.
You can configure the element to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined
period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a
threshold chosen.
580 1601-0651
When configuring a FlexElement, keep in mind the following limitations:

1. The analog inputs for any FlexElement must be from the same quantity.
○ current and current (in any combination, phase-symmetrical, phase-phase, kA-A, differential, restraint,
etc.)
○ voltage and voltage (as above)
○ active power and active power (Watts and Watts)
○ reactive power and reactive power (Vars and Vars)
○ apparent power and apparent power (VA and VA)
○ angle and angle (any, no matter what signal, for example angle of voltage and angle of current are a
valid pair)
○ % and % (any, for example THD and harmonic content is a valid pair)
○ V/Hz and V/Hz
○ °C and °C
○ I2t and I2t
○ FlexElement actual and FlexElement actual
2. For all the other combinations, the element displays 0.000 or N/A and will not assert any output operand.
3. The analog value associated with one FlexElement can be used as an input to another FlexElement
“Cascading”.

" #"$%&
#'
!
"%$ ( #'
'@D E
'%

") "
FG)
$ ' *N&%&&
HH E
%$ *$ ( #
+,-
") " 'G$N
%$ *$ ( #
" !+.-
% '%" 'G$N
$/,0 10 234356 5789:
= IJKJ
" ; +<- ! "
> ILJM
$/,0 10
! ")"
96B93 C93B

! ? &@A
Figure 219: FlexElement logic diagram
11.2.5.1 FLEXELEMENT SETTINGS

Path:Setpoints > FlexLogic > FlexElements > FlexElement 1
FUNCTION
1601-0651 581
Default: Disabled
NAME
Default: FlexEl 1
INPUT 1 (+)
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog signal
Default: Off
This setting specifies the first input (non-inverted) to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting
is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
INPUT 2 (-)
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog signal
Default: Off
This setting specifies the second input (inverted) to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting
is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a
differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm.
A warning message is displayed and the element does not operate if the two input signals are of different types,
for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal.
PICKUP
Range: -30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu
Default: 1.000
This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element.
If the Over direction is set, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the Pickup value.
If the Under direction is set, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the Pickup value.
The HYSTERISIS setting controls the element drop out.
Notice that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative when facilitating applications
such as reverse power alarms.
The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog values measured or computed by the relay. The
PICKUP setting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units:
Definitions of the Base Unit for the FLEXELEMENT

Measured or calculated analog value related Base Unit
to:
Voltage VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the Input 1(+) and input
2(-) inputs
582 1601-0651
Measured or calculated analog value related Base Unit

to:
Current IBASE= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the Input 1(+) and input 2(-)
inputs
Power PBASE= maximum value of VBASE * IBASE for the Input 1(+) and input 2(-)
inputs
Power Factor PFBASE= 1.00
Phase Angle DegBASE= 360 deg
Harmonic Content HBASE = 100% of nominal
THD THDBASE= 100%
Frequency fBASE= nominal frequency as entered under the SYSTEM SETUP menu
Volt/Hz BASE = 1.00
dcmA BASE = DCMA INPUT MAX (setting under the DCMA menu). If two DCMA
signals are used by the FlexElement, the maximum of the above setting
among the two elements is used as the base.
RTDs BASE = 100.00°C
I2t (arcing Amps) BASE = 2000 kA2*cycle
Differential and Restraint currents (Percent IBASE= CT primary from the CT bank selected for Winding 1 (the same base
Differential) as the one for 87T element)
Differential and Restraint currents (RGF) IBASE= CT primary from the CT bank selected for the RGF element (the same
base as the one for RGF element)
Winding Hottest-Spot BASE = 100°C
Loss of Transformer Life LOLBASE= 180000 hours
Daily Rate Loss of Life DRLOLBASE= 1000 hours
Aging Factor AAFBASE= 1.00
Harmonic Derating HDFBASE= 1.00
Xfmr Overload OLBASE= 100%
Tap Position TCBASE= 1
HYSTERESIS
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 3.0%
This setting defines the pickup – drop out relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as
a percentage of the pickup value as shown above in the Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis setpoints figure.
RATE OF CHANGE TIME UNIT (dt)

Range: millisecond, second, minute
Default: milliseconds
This setting specifies the time base dt when programming the FlexElement as a rate of change element.
The setting is applicable only if the Input Comparison Mode is set to Delta.
1601-0651 583
RATE OF CHANGE TIME

Default: 40
This setting specifies the duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation.
The setting is applicable only if the Input Comparison Mode is set to Delta.
11.2.5.2 FLEXELEMENTS - EXAMPLES
T13.8 kV power system:

● Phase VT Connection: Wye
● Phase VT Secondary: 66.4 V
● Phase VT Ratio: 120:1 (phase to neutral primary voltage = 120*66.4 = 7968 V)
● Aux VT Connection: Vab
● Aux VT Secondary: 115 V
● Aux VT Ratio: 120:1 (phase-phase primary voltage = 13800V)
● Phase CTs Primary: 2000 A
● Ground CT Primary: 500 A
● Frequency: 60Hz
Detecting voltage difference:

The voltage difference between calculated phase-phase voltage derived from Wye connected phase VTs, and the
directly measured phase-phase voltage from auxiliary VT can be monitored by programming a FlexElement.
FlexElement settings:
● Input 1(+): J2 Vab RMS
● Input 2 (-): J2 Vaux RMS (input from VT connected between phases A and B)
● Operating Mode: Absolute
● Input Comparison Mode: Level
● Direction: Over
The analog input J2 Vab is phase-phase voltage computed by the relay based on three-phase Wye voltages. As per
the Phase VT setup, the primary RMS nominal voltage for J2 Vab input is 66.4 V *120 = 7.968kV.
The analog input J2 Vaux is directly measured phase-phase voltage and its primary RMS nominal voltage is 115V
*120 = 13.8kV
VBASE = max (7.968kV, 13.8kV) = 13.8kV.
If we want to detect 2% voltage difference (2% @13.8kV = 276V) between the computed phase to phase Vab
voltage, and the measured Vaux voltage from a VT connected between phases A and B, the pickup per-unit setting
for the FlexElement can be set as follows:
Pickup = 276V/13800V = 0.02 pu
If the voltage difference between the selected inputs becomes bigger than 276 Volts, the FlexElement will pickup,
and operate, which can be used to energize contact, or initiate alarm, or trip.
584 1601-0651
Detecting current difference between Neutral and Ground currents:

In a balanced system, the computed neutral and the measured ground currents is 0 Amps. However, during ground
faults their values are not zero. More specifically if the phase and ground CTs are located on the same transformer
winding, such that the ground CT is installed on the grounded neutral of the winding, their values supposed to be
the same during external fault, and would be different during internal fault. The FlexElement can be used for
detecting the differential signal between these quantities. For example the following condition can be made:
IBASE = max (2000A, 500A) = 2000A
● Input 1(+): J1
● Input 2 (-): J1 Ig
● Direction: Over
● Pickup = 200A/2000A: 0.1 pu
When no CT saturation conditions exist, if the difference between the neutral current and the ground current
becomes more than 200 Amps primary, this can be treated as an indication of an internal ground fault, which should
be cleared. With IBASE = max (2000A, 500A) = 2000A, the pickup can be set as follows: Pickup = 200A/2000A = 0.1
pu
Detecting Low 3-ph Apparent Power:

VBASE = 7.968kV
IBASE = 1000 A
PBASE = VBASE *IBASE = 7968 V *2000A = 15.936MVA
The FlexElement can be set to detect under-power conditions and produce alarm, or trip if the apparent power is
less than 500kVA. In this case the pickup setting for the FlexElement can be computed as follows:
Pickup = 0.5MVA / 15.936 MVA = 0.0313 pu
● Input 1(+): Pwr1 Apparent
● Input 2(-): Off
● Direction: Under
● Pickup: 0.0313 pu
Power Factor Cap Bank Switch-In Example

PFBASE = 1.00
FlexElement can be programmed to switch-in cap bank, if for example the measured 3Ph Power Factor has
negative value(lag), and drops below the pickup of -0.7 pu. Programming the Hysteresis setpoint to the desired
percentage can define the PF value at which the cap bank can be switched off. For example, if the cap bank is
required to be switched off at PF value of -0.9, than the percent hysteresis is computed as:
% hysteresis = ((abs(-0.9)-abs(-0.7))/ PFBASE)*100 = 20%
1601-0651 585
Note:
The minimum pickup should not be less than 0.01 pu, as the measurement resolution for the Power Factor is 0.01.
● Input 1(+): Pwr1 PF

● Input 2(-): Off
● Operating Mode: Signed
● Direction: Under
● Pickup: -0.700 pu
● Hysteresis: 20.0 %
Detecting high THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)

THDBASE = 100%
A FlexElement can be programmed to detect excessive amount of harmonics in the system, and Alarm, Trip, or
switch-in/out an equipment to suppress the high amount of harmonics. The Total Harmonic Distortion is an
estimation of how the AC signals are distorted and as shown above, it can be used as an input for the FlexElement.
For example if an operation from a FlexElement is desired when the THD for the phase A voltage exceeds 20%,
then having a base of 100%, the pickup setting should be set to 0.200 pu.
● Input 1(+): J2 Phase A THD
● Input 2(-): Off
● Direction: Over
Note:
The harmonics and THD values are measured as percentage of the fundamental signal, and have resolution of 0.01%.
However for the minimum pickup setting of 0.001 pu, this would mean percentage step of 0.1%.
Simple V/Hz ratio detection for protected equipment

V/HzBASE = 1.00High V/Hz ratios in the power system are harmful for the insulation of the protected equipment –
transformer, generator, or elsewhere in the power system. If not detected, it can lead to excessive heat and
degradation of the insulation which will damage the equipment. A FlexElement can be used for simple detection of
V/Hz values, and to issue an Alarm, or Trip, if detected above Pickup setting. Since the base unit for V/Hz = 1.00,
programming of the pickup setpoint is straight forward for the desired FlexElement operation. For the example given
here, a value of 1.200 pu has been selected.
● Input 1(+): Volts Per Hertz 1Input 2(-): OffOperating Mode: AbsoluteInput Comparison Mode: LevelDirection:
OverPickup: 1.200 puHysteresis: 8.3%
Now, if the FlexElement is needed to drop down when the V/Hz ratio becomes equal to 1.1, the hysteresis can be
calculated as:1.2pu-1.1pu = 0.1 puHysteresis = (0.1*100)/1.2 = 8.3%
586 1601-0651
High Breaker Arcing current detection

High breaker arcing current can be detected by using a FlexElement during the opening of a breaker. One or more
FlexElements can be configured for detecting levels of maximum arcing current during the tripping of a particular
breaker, and give an indication for the health of the breaker.
The base unit for the breaker arcing current is programmed in the relay as: BASE = 2000 kA2*cycle
● Input 1(+): Total Arcing Current
● Input 2(-): Off
● Direction: Over
● Hysteresis: 0.0%
To configure the pickup setpoint for a total arcing current of 5000kA2/cycle, the per-unit pickup value can be
calculated as follows:
Pickup = 5000kA2 *cycle/2000 kA2*cycle = 2.500 pu
1601-0651 587
588 1601-0651
CHAPTER 12
TESTING
Chapter 12 - Testing
590 1601-0651

Testing display hierarchy 592
Simulation 593
Test LEDs 597
Contact Inputs 598
Output Relays 599
1601-0651 591
12.2 TESTING DISPLAY HIERARCHY

!""
#""!$ 23
256578
%"!"&
9: ;<=:

'&()"$
>78? @83:
7:
4$
A3 BC:
*+,+- . *+,+- / *+,+- 0 *+,+- 1
Figure 220: Testing Display Hierarchy
Path:Setpoints > Testing

● General
● Simulation
● Test LEDs
● Contact Inputs
● Output Relays
The relay can simulate current and voltage inputs when the Simulation feature is enabled. Other test operations are
also possible such as LED lamp test of each color, contact input states and testing of output relays.
592 1601-0651
12.3 SIMULATION
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation
● Setup
● Pre-Fault
● Fault
● Post-Fault
The Simulation feature is provided for testing the functionality of the relay in response to programmed conditions,
without the need of external AC voltage and current inputs. First time users will find this to be a valuable training
tool. System parameters such as currents, voltages and phase angles are entered as setpoints. When placed in
simulation mode, the relay suspends reading actual AC inputs, generates samples to represent the programmed
phasors, and loads these samples into the memory to be processed by the relay. Normal (pre-fault), fault and post-
fault conditions can be simulated to exercise a variety of relay features. There are three sets of input parameters
used during simulation, each provides a particular state of the system as follows.
Note:
Simulation mode current input should be set at more than three times the CT rating. All Simulation setpoints revert to default
values at power-up.
Note:
Testing of Arc Flash functionality is not possible with the Simulation feature.
12.3.1 SIMULATION SETUP

Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Setup
● Simulation State
● Pre-Fault to Fault Trigger
● Post-Fault to Pre-Fault Trigger
● Force Relays
● Force LEDs
SIMULATION STATE
Range: Disabled, Prefault State, Fault State, Postfault State
Default: Disabled
Disable this setpoint if actual system inputs are to be monitored. If set to any other value, the relay is in test
mode and actual system parameters are not monitored, including Current, Voltage, and Contact Inputs. The
system parameters simulated by the relay will be those in the section below that correspond to the set value of
this setpoint. For example, if set to Fault, the system parameters will be set to those defined by the FAULT
setpoint values.
PRE-FAULT TO FAULT TRIGGER

Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
1601-0651 593
POST-FAULT TO PRE-FAULT TRIGGER

Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
FORCE RELAYS
Default: Disabled
When in test mode, and FORCE RELAYS is enabled, relay states can be forced from the Setpoints > Testing >
Output Relays menu, which overrides the normal operation of the output contacts. When in test mode, and
FORCE RELAYS is disabled, the relay states maintain their normal operation. Forcing of output relay states is
not performed when the Simulation State is disabled.
FORCE LEDS
Default: Disabled
When in test mode, and FORCE LEDS is enabled, LED states and colors can be forced from the Setpoints >
Testing > Test LEDs menu, this will override the normal operation of the LEDs. When in test mode, and FORCE
LEDS is disabled, the LED states and colors will maintain their normal operation. Forcing of LEDs is not
performed when the SIMULATION STATE is disabled.
12.3.2 SIMULATION PRE-FAULT

This state is intended to simulate the normal operating condition of a system by replacing the normal input
parameters with programmed pre-fault values. For proper simulation, values entered here must be below the
minimum trip setting of any protection feature.
Voltage magnitudes and angles are entered as Wye values only. The voltage setpoints are not available if the
corresponding VT Bank PHASE VT CONNECTION setpoint is Delta. Voltages are set in secondary VT units.
The CT and VT Bank availability is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Pre-Fault
J2 Prefault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Range: 0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V
J2 Prefault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°
J1(K1,K2) Prefault Phase la(lb,lc):

Default: 0.000 x CT
Phase current magnitudes are entered as a multiple of the corresponding CT Bank PHASE CT PRIMARY
setpoint.
594 1601-0651
J1(K1,K2) Prefault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT
The ground current magnitude setpoint range is dependent on the ground CT type as defined in the Order Code
options. For Ground CT, the magnitude is entered as a multiple of the corresponding CT Bank GROUND CT
PRIMARY setpoint.
J1(K1,K2) Prefault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Default: 0.0°
12.3.3 SIMULATION FAULT

The Fault state is intended to simulate the faulted operating condition of a system by replacing the normal input
parameters with programmed fault values.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Fault
J2 Fault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Default: 0.00 V
J2 Fault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Default: 0.0°
J1(K1,K2) Fault Phase la(lb,lc):

Default: 0.000 x CT
J1(K1,K2) Fault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT
J1(K1,K2) Fault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Default: 0.0°
1601-0651 595
12.3.4 SIMULATION POST-FAULT

The Post-fault state is intended to simulate a system that has tripped by replacing the normal input parameters with
programmed post-fault values.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Post-Fault
J2 Postfault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Default: 0.00 V
J2 Postfault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Default: 0.0°
J1(K1,K2) Postfault Phase la(lb,lc):

Default: 0.000 x CT
J1(K1,K2) Postfault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT For Sensitive Ground CT: 0.000 to 4.600 x
CT in steps of 0.001 x CT For CBCT: 0.000 to 15.000 A in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000 x CT
J1(K1,K2) Postfault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Default: 0.0°
596 1601-0651
12.4 TEST LEDS

The Test LEDs setting is used to program the state and color of each LED when in test mode and FORCE LEDS is
enabled.
Note:
Test LEDs setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Test LEDs
LED 1 (17)
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Off
LED 1 (24)
Range for 1(14): Off, Red, Green, Orange
Range for 15(24): Off, Orange
Default: Off
1601-0651 597
12.5 CONTACT INPUTS

This section is used to program the state of each contact input when enabled in test mode. The number of Contact
Inputs available is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Note:
Contact Inputs setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Contact Inputs
CI 1(X):
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The item name displays the user configurable name for the contact input.
598 1601-0651
12.6 OUTPUT RELAYS

This section is used to program the state of each output relay when FORCE RELAYS is enabled.
Select Off to force the output relay to the de-energized state, or select On to force the output relay to the
energized state.
The number of Output Relays available is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Note:
Output Relays setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Output Relays
OUTPUT RELAY 1(X)

Range: Off, On
Default: Off
1601-0651 599
600 1601-0651
CHAPTER 13
STATUS
Chapter 13 - Status
602 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status

Summary 604
Breaker status 607
Information 608
Communications status 611
Other status settings 616
1601-0651 603
Chapter 13 - Status
13.2 SUMMARY
Configurable Single Line Diagram (SLD)
The status of each SLD screen is displayed under Status > Summary > Configurable SLDs > SLD1(X).
Figure 221: Sample SLD
Once in the SLD screen, by default no breaker/switch is highlighted or selected. Pressing the Up/Dn (or Up/Dn/Left/
Right) navigation keys highlights BKR1 and navigates through BKR1, 2, 3, etc. and then through Switch1, 2, 3, etc.
If the Up/Dn/Left/Right keys are used, the selection moves to the closest available breaker/switch from the currently
highlighted object. To select the breaker/switch, press the enter key. Upon pressing the Enter key, the tab labels
change to the programmable tab pushbutton labels and a flash message for the breaker selected appears (Flash
Message: BKR1 Selected). Pressing Escape de-selects the breaker/switch and the tab pushbutton labels.
Annunciator
The graphical annunciator panel emulates a physical annunciator panel. Indicators on the graphical panel are
backlit and have a description of the alarm condition that lights each indicator. The annunciator panel status window
shows the alarms that are active.
To reset an active alarm, first highlight the active alarm using the navigation keys, then press the reset button to
reset the highlighted alarm. If no indicator is selected, all alarms on the page are reset by pushing the reset button.
604 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Ho e\HMI\Annunciaor\Pae1
Sttg S
G C k
tv Fl
Bk
C l Fl
tv
. . 2 . 3 . 4 >>
Figure 222: Physical and Graphical Annunciator Panels
Tab pushbuttons
Navigation
There are two ways to navigate to the Tab Pushbutton control pages:
● Relay Home Screens
● Path: Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons (from relay) Home Screens
By default, the Tab Pushbuttons summary page is programmed as one of the Home Screens. Press the home
button repeatedly to cycle through the programmed Home Screens.
Note:
Tab pushbuttons can only be controlled physically through the front panel of the relay. Their operation is not available from the
setup software.
Path: Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons

The initial view of the Tab Pushbutton controls is the Summary page, which shows the status of all 20 pushbuttons.
To operate the pushbuttons, navigate to the individual pages where the tab pushbuttons can be used to activate
them.
1601-0651 605
Chapter 13 - Status
Figure 223: Tab pushbutton summary (left) and detailed view (right)
Only the tab pushbuttons that are not set to Disabled are shown in color; labels for the tab pushbuttons are shown
for both active and disabled pushbuttons if labels have been configured. (Configure tab pushbuttons from Device >
Front Panel > Tab PBs > Tab PB1(X).)
When the actual button is pressed, the button on the screen is highlighted in blue and the PB [X] PRESS operand
becomes active. Although a disabled pushbutton can be pressed, no action is taken and its operands are not
activated. Pressing ESCAPE returns the screen to Tab Pushbutton summary page. The Short Text for each Tab
Pushbutton is used on the Summary Page.
Pressing >> shows the next set of tab pushbuttons. For example, when in the page with pushbuttons 1 to 4,
pressing >> will navigate to the screen with pushbuttons 5 to 8. Press >> to cycle through all five pushbutton
screens. To go from page 2 to page 1, press >> 4 times to cycle through and navigate to page 1 with pushbuttons 1
to 4. Alternatively, escape to the overall summary screen and navigate to any desired page of pushbuttons.
606 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
13.3 BREAKER STATUS

The status of the breaker/breakers is displayed individually. If the selected trip output relay is Form A-type, the
status of the breaker Trip and Close circuitry is also displayed here. The screen also includes the total accumulated
arcing current information for the breaker.
Path:Status > Breaker > Breaker X Status
STATE
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, Disconnected, State Unknown
The Unknown state is displayed upon discrepancy of the 52a and 52b contacts for more than 30 milliseconds.
BKR TROLLEY STATE

Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, State Unknown
TRIP COIL
Range: Not Set, Fail, OK
The Trip Coil state is displayed when Form -A output relays are used, and Trip Coil monitoring is enabled.
CLOSE COIL
Range: Not Set, Fail, OK
The Close coil state is displayed when Form -A output relays are used, and Close Coil monitoring is enabled.
TOTAL ARCING CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01
The measure of arcing current from all three phases during breaker trips. Refer to the Breaker Arcing Current
element description (under Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker) for more details.
1601-0651 607
Chapter 13 - Status
13.4 INFORMATION
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info
The Information pages display fixed device information. the pages are divided into three sections: Main CPU,
Comms CPU, and Hardware Versions.
Main CPU
The Information related to the Main CPU is displayed here.
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Main CPU
● Order Code: The installed Order Code
● Product Serial #: The relay serial number
● Hardware Revision: The hardware revision of the relay
● Firmware Version: The firmware version of the Main CPU
● Firmware Date: The Main CPU firmware build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Firmware Time: The Main CPU firmware build time
● Boot 1/2 Version: The boot 1/2 code version of the Main CPU
● Boot 1/2 Date: The Main CPU boot 1/2 code build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Boot 1/2 Time: The Main CPU boot 1/2 code build time
● MAC Address 1: The MAC address for copper Ethernet port 1
● Remote CANBUS RMIO: The commissioned value of the CANBUS IO is displayed here. If the relay has
never been commissioned then the value is None, i.e. default = None and Range = 6 alphanumeric
characters.
● NUM of RMIO RTDs: The number of remote RTDs detected
Comms CPU
The Information related to the Comms CPU is displayed here.
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Comms CPU
● Comms CPU FW Version: The firmware version of the Comms CPU
● Comms CPU Firmware Date:The Comms CPU firmware build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Comms CPU Firmware Time: The Comms CPU firmware build time
● Boot Version: The boot code version of the Comms CPU
● Boot Date: The Comms CPU boot code build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Boot Time: The Comms CPU boot code build time
● MAC Address 1: The MAC address for Ethernet port 4
● MAC Address 2: The MAC address for Ethernet port 5
Hardware versions
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Hardware Versions
The Information related to the relay hardware is displayed here.
608 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Figure 224: Information for Hordware Versions
● FPGA Firmware Version: The firmware version of the FPGA

● IO F CPLD: The version of the CPLD in IO slot F
● IO G CPLD: The version of the CPLD in IO slot G
● AN J CPLD: The version of the CPLD in analog slot J
● AN K CPLD: The version of the CPLD in analog slot K
● Display CPLD: The version of the CPLD of the display
Environment
The Information related to Environmental is displayed here.
Note:
The Temperature Display setpoint can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit under Setpoints > Device > Installation.
Path: Status > Information > Environment

● Instantaneous Temperature: The most recent temperature measurement taken by the EAM.
● Firmware Version: The software version of the EAM module found in the relay.
● Last Poll Date/ Time: The date and time on which the last measurements were recorded in the format
MM/DD/YY and HH/MM/SS.
● Average Humidity: The average of all the humidity measurements taken over time (last 1 hr) by the EAM.
● Maximum Humidity: The maximum humidity measurement taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Minimum Humidity: The minimum humidity measurement taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Average Ambient Temp: The average of all the instantaneous temperature measurements taken over time
(last 1 hr) by the EAM.
● Maximum Ambient Temp: The maximum temperature taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Minimum Ambient Temp: The minimum temperature taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Humidity (e.g. <30%): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the humidity measured by the EAM stayed
in the range specified.
1601-0651 609
Chapter 13 - Status
● Temp (e.g. <=-20°C): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the temperature measured by the EAM
stayed in the range specified.
● Temp and Humidity (e.g. >40°C and <55%): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the temperature
and humidity measured by the EAM stayed in the ranges specified.
● Surge Count: The number of surge (>500 V/1.2/50 µS) events that have occurred since the EAM started
recording data.
The Information related to settings changes and settings file history is displayed here.
Settings Audit
Path: Status > Information > Settings Audit
● Last Setting Change: The date and time of the last setting change.
● File Modified:
● File Received:
● File Origin:
● File Name:
610 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
13.5 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS
13.5.1 GOOSE
The relay supports 16 GOOSE transmissions and 64 GOOSE receptions each with 64 items per transmission or
reception. Non-structured GOOSE is supported. Each item within the GOOSE message can be a digital or analog
value. Messages are launched within one scan of a digital point status change or an analog exceeding its
deadband.
The server supports a subset of the server features described in part 7.2 of the IEC61850 standard.
Goose Messaging
The details are shown in the table below:
Service Launch Support for Programmable # of Tx # of Rx Test Bit Number of items in Number of remote
Speed* time to live Support each transmission inputs per relay
or reception
Configurabl Within 2 ms Time to live programmable 16 64 Y 64 Data Items per 32
e GOOSE (1 CPU from 1000 to 60000 ms Data Set
scan)*
* Launch speed is measured by comparing the time stamp in SOE of digital remote output status change to the time
stamp of message seen on the network by a computer who’s clock is synchronized by an IRIG-B card to the same
IRIG-B source as the relay.
13.5.2 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS SETTINGS
REMOTE INPUTS
Path:Status > Communications > Remote Inputs
The present state of the 32 remote inputs are shown here. The state displayed is the remote point unless the
remote device has been established to be Offline in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for
the remote input.
GGIO1 INDICATIONS
Path:Status > Communications > GGIO1 Indications
The present state of the 32 GGIO1 Indications are shown here. There are up to 32 GGIO indications that can be
used to map any FlexLogic operand into the IED 61850 information model. Default value is “Off”.
GOOSE STATUS
Path: Status > Communications > GOOSE Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
This setting indicates GOOSE communications are being received. A GOOSE STATUS of “ON” indicates
successful receipt of the last GOOSE packet. A GOOSE STATUS of “OFF” indicates the communications link
has failed, with the speed this setting changes determined by the Update Time setting configured under GOOSE
Transmission.
1601-0651 611
Chapter 13 - Status
GOOSE HEADER
Path:Status > Communications > GOOSE HDR Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
This setting validates the GOOSE packet structure. A GOOSE HEADER STATUS of “ON” indicates that the
structure of the last GOOSE packet was valid.
GOOSE ANALOG
Path:Status > Communications > GOOSE Analog AV
FLOAT 1 to 24
Range:
Default: 0.0
SINT32 1 to 8
Range:
Default: 0
IEC 61850 STATUS

Path:Status > Communications > IEC 61850 Status
COMMS NOT VALIDATED OK
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
COMMS NOT VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
COMMS VALIDATED OK
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
COMMS VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN NOT VALIDATED OK
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
MAIN NOT VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN VALIDATED OK
612 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
NOT RUNNING.ERROR CID
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
RUNNING.DEFAULT CID
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
RUNNING.SAVING CID TO FLASH
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
CID HANDLING DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
NUMBER OF CONNECTED CLIENTS
Default: 0
CLIENT 1(8) IP ADDRESS
Range: 0, 0XFFFFFFFF
Default: 0
ACTIVITY STATUS
The communication state for each enabled communication type is shown by its value. The main CPU and Comms
software sets/resets the active bits for all enabled communication types. The communication state bits are not
latched.
Path:Status > Communications > Activity Status
SERIAL MODBUS
Range: NONE, ACTIVE
Default: NONE
ETHERNET MODBUS
Range: NONE, ACTIVE
Default: NONE
1601-0651 613
Chapter 13 - Status
Note:
The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is used to
declare the Modbus ‘Loss of Communication’ state. The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT must be set to a value other than 0
for the Serial Modbus and Ethernet Modbus Activity Status to work properly.
Note:
MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT is set under:Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol
CONNECTIONS
Path:Status > Communications > Connections
MMS TCP - Maximum
Default: 0
MMS TCP - Remaining
Default: 0
Modbus TCP - Maximum
Default: 0
Modbus TCP - Remaining
Default: 0
DNP TCP - Maximum
Default: 0
DNP TCP - Remaining
Default: 0
IEC - 104 - Maximum
Default: 0
IEC - 104 - Remaining
Default: 0
OPC - UA - Maximum
614 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Default: 0
OPC - UA - Remaining
Default: 0
SFTP - Maximum
Default: 0
SFTP - Remaining
Default: 0
1601-0651 615
Chapter 13 - Status
13.6 OTHER STATUS SETTINGS

Switches
Path: Status > Switches
SWITCH 1(X)
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, Intermittent, Discrepancy
Default: Not Configured
Last Trip Data

There is no Enabling/Disabling of this feature. It is always ON.
Path: Status > Last Trip Data
CAUSE
Default: No trip to Date
EVENT
Default: 0
DATE
Range: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
Default: 01/01/08 00:00:00
PARAMETER 1 to 64
Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Arc Flash
Path: Status > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1
The status value shows the state of the given Flex operand related to Arc Flash protection.
Light 1(4) PKP
Range: ON, OFF
HS Phase IOC PKP A/B/C
Range: ON, OFF
HS Ground IOC PKP
Range: ON, OFF
Arc Flash OP
Range: ON, OFF
616 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Contact Inputs
Path: Status > Contact Inputs
The status of the Contact Inputs is shown here (see device menu via the menu path). The Off/On display indicates
the logic state of the Contact Input.
Output Relays
Path: Status > Output Relays
The status of all output relays is shown here, see above. In the Parameter column, the value indicates the label on
the output terminal. The Value column indicates the present ON or OFF state of the output relay.
Virtual Inputs
Path: Status > Virtual Inputs 1(X)
The state of all virtual inputs is shown here, see next figure. The value for each Virtual Input is shown on the control
panel graphically as a toggle switch in either the On (|) state or the Off (O) state.
Figure 225: Status of Virtual Inputs, HMI
Figure 226: Status of Virtual Inputs, EnerVista D&I Setup software
Virtual Outputs
Path: Status > Virtual Outputs
1601-0651 617
Chapter 13 - Status
The state of all virtual outputs is shown here, see next figure. The value for each Virtual Output is shown on the
control panel graphically as a toggle switch in either the On (|) state or the Off (O) state.
Figure 227: Status of Virtual Outputs, HMI
Figure 228: Status of Virtual Outputs, EnerVista D&I Setup software
Flex State
Path: Status > Flex States
There are 256 Flex state bits available. The status value indicates the state of the given Flex state bit.
Device Status
The general status of system components is displayed here.
Path: Status > Device Status
RUNNING, SAVING CID to FLASH
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
CID HANDLING DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
SELF-TEST FAULT
618 1601-0651
Chapter 13 - Status
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
MAINTENANCE
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
IN SERVICE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
PICKUP STATE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
BREAKER X CONNECTED
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
BREAKER X CLOSED
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
BREAKER X TRIPPED
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
ALARM
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
TRIP
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
ACTIVE GROUP
Range: SP Group 1-6 Active
Default: SP Group 1 Active
Clock Status
Path: Status > Clock
SYSTEM CLOCK
Range: MMM DD YY HH:MM:SS
RTC SYNC SOURCE
Range: None, Port 4 PTP Clock, Port 5 PTP Clock, IRIG-B, SNTP Server 1, SNTP Server 2
1601-0651 619
Chapter 13 - Status
The RTC SYNC SOURCE actual value is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at present.
PTP Status
The present values of the PTP protocol are displayed here.
Path:Status > PTP
Grandmaster ID is the grandmaster Identity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When
the relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmaster Identity code is specified by
PTP to be globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple
grandmaster-capable clocks.
RTC Accuracy is the estimated maximum time difference at present in the Real Time Clock (RTC), considering the
quality information imbedded in the received time signal, how long the relay has had to lock to the time source, and
in the case of time signal interruptions, the length of the interruption. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the
magnitude of the estimated difference is one second or more, or that the difference cannot be estimated.
Port 4 (5) PTP State is the present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
● DISABLED: If the port’s function setting is Disabled
● NO SIGNAL: If enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected
● CALIBRATING: If an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established
● SYNCH’D (NO PDELAY): If the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational
● SYNCHRONIZED: If the port is synchronized
HMI Display
The HMI Display menu option opens a virtual HMI Display window within the EnerVista D&I Setup software. The
virtual HMI display provides front panel access to the relay with clickable buttons and realtime display of the front
panel, including navigation and viewing relay settings, screens, and LEDs.
Path:Status > HMI Display
Note:
The HMI Display functionality is not available with the Advanced Cybersecurity option
620 1601-0651
CHAPTER 14
METERING
Chapter 14 - Metering
622 1601-0651

This chapter provides some information about the device maintenance.
Metering Overview 624
Metering Summary 628
Transformer metering 630
Impedance/admittance 634
Currents 635
Neutral IOC 637
Voltages 638
Frequency 641
Harmonics 643
Synchrocheck 646
Percent Differential Current 647
Power functions 648
Energy 652
Demand 655
Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure 657
Arc Flash 658
Resistance Temperature Detectors 659
Analog Inputs 660
FlexElements 661
1601-0651 623
14.2 METERING OVERVIEW

All phasors calculated by 8 Series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating
phasors, that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-
selected as the phase A voltage. If there is no voltage input, the phase A current is used for angle reference. The
phase angle of the reference signal always display zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this
signal. If the preselected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angles are always presented as negative values in the lagging direction as illustrated in the following.
Figure 229: Phase Angle Measurement 8 Series Convention
The relay measures all RMS (root mean square) currents and voltages, frequency, and all auxiliary analog inputs.
Other values like neutral current, phasor symmetrical components, power factor, power (real, reactive, apparent),
are derived. A majority of these quantities are recalculated every protection pass and perform protection and
monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are updated approximately three (3) times a second for
readability. All phasors and symmetrical components are referenced to the A-N voltage phasor for wye-connected
VTs; to the A-B voltage phasor for delta-connected VTs; or to the phase A current phasor when no voltage signals
are present.
624 1601-0651
Figure 230: An example of the Metering menu (not representative of all models)
Figure 231: An example of the Metering Summary submenu
All the measured values can be viewed on the front panel display or monitored by remote devices through the
communication system. An example of the HMI display showing actual currents is shown here.
1601-0651 625
Figure 232: An example of HMI display showing actual currents
The measured values can also be displayed in the PC (EnerVista D&I Setup software). An example follows.
Figure 233: Current Metering Screen
626 1601-0651
The complete list of actual values available in the Metering menu is covered in the following sections.
1601-0651 627
14.3 METERING SUMMARY

Path: Metering > Summary
The Metering Summary menu consists of three display screens, including a graphical presentation of key phasor
quantities as shown below:
628 1601-0651
Figure 234: Metering summary screens
1601-0651 629
14.4 TRANSFORMER METERING

Path: Metering > Summary
The Metering Summary menu consists of three display screens, including a graphical presentation of key phasor
quantities as shown below:
630 1601-0651
Figure 235: Metering summary screens
1601-0651 631
14.4.1 WINDINGS
The harmonic derating factor for each of the windings shows the effect of non-sinusoidal load currents on the power
transformer’s rated full load current. The actual values messages display the harmonic derating factor for windings
1 through 3.
The relay displays winding load parameters as follows:
Path: Metering > Transformer > Windings
Winding 1 load (W1 Load (% of rated))

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
Winding 1 average phase current (W1 Average Ph Current)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
Winding 1 harmonic derating factor (W1 Harm Derate Factor

Range: 0.00 to 1.00

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
Winding 2 harmonic derating factor (W2 Harm Derate Factor)

Range: 0.00 to 1.00

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
Winding 3 harmonic derating factor (W3 Harm Derate Factor)

Range: 0.00 to 1.00
For a two winding transformer the winding load and winding average phase current are calculated as:
W(1/2) Load (% of rated) = √3 x Iavg(1/2) x Vrated (1/2) x 100% / Srated
Where:
Iavg○ = (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3 is the actual average phase current (W(1/2) Average Ph Current) for the corresponding
winding.
Ia ,○Ib , Ic are magnitudes of the corresponding actual phase currents of the winding.
Vrated
○ is the rated phase to phase nameplate voltage for the corresponding winding.
632 1601-0651
Srated
○ is the rated nameplate apparent power for the transformer.
For a three winding transformer the winding load and winding average phase current are calculated as:
W(1/2/3) Load (% of rated) = √3 x Iavg(1/2/3) x Vrated (1/2/3) x 100% / SWrated(1/2/3)
Where:
Iavg○ = (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3 is the actual average phase current (W(1/2/3) Average Ph Current) for the
corresponding winding.
Ia ,○Ib , Ic are magnitudes of the corresponding actual phase currents of the winding.
Vrated
○ is the rated phase to phase nameplate voltage for the corresponding winding.
Srated
○ is the rated nameplate apparent power for the transformer.
14.4.2 THERMAL ELEMENTS

Path: Metering > Transformer > Thermal Elements
The calculation of all Thermal Elements actual values starts at the time the relay is first powered up. Therefore, the
Daily Rate Loss of Life starts accumulating in the next 24 hour period. All records can be cleared either from the
relay’s keypad, or from the EnerVista D&I Setup software using the Clear Loss of Life command from the menu
Records/Clear Records.
14.4.3 TAP CHANGER

Path: Metering > Transformer > Tap Changer
Tap Position
Range: -19 to 39 in steps of 1, Invalid, Not Set
Ohms In 1
Range: 0 to 5100 ohms in steps of 1
Winding Voltage
Range: 0.00 to 1200000.00 kV in steps of 0.01
Delta V Above Min Tap V

Range: 0.00 to 1200000.00 kV in steps of 0.01
Invalid Tap Detection

An Invalid tap position is displayed under one of the following conditions:
● The measured analog input value is one tap step lower than the analog value corresponding to minimum tap.
● The measured analog input value is one tap step higher than the analog value corresponding to maximum
tap.
● The detected BCD combination corresponds to a tap which is either below the minimum, or above the
maximum tap programmed in Tap Changer setup menu.
● Sudden change from valid BCD combination corresponding to a valid tap position to another valid BCD
combination corresponding to a non-sequential tap position.
1601-0651 633
14.5 IMPEDANCE/ADMITTANCE
634 1601-0651
14.6 CURRENTS
Note:
The number of Currents supported is order code dependent.
The CT bank names shown are set in the CT Bank Name setpoints under Setpoints > System > Current Sensing
> CT Bank X.
Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code
Path: Metering > CT Bank 1-J1 (CT Bank 2-K1) (CT Bank 3-K2) (CT Bank 4-JK)
Phase A/B/C (Ia/Ib/Ic) 0.000 A

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Ground (Ig)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Sensitive Ground (Isg)

Range: 0.000 to 1200.000 A
Neutral (In)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase A/B/C (Ia/Ib/Ic RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Ground (Ig RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Sensitive Ground (Isg RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 1200.000 A
Neutral (In RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase A/B/C Angle (Ia/Ib/Ic Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Ground Angle (Ig Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
1601-0651 635
Sensitive Ground Angle (Isg Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Neutral Angle (In Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Average (I AVG)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Zero Sequence (I_0)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Positive Sequence (I_1)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Negative Sequence (I_2)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Zero Sequence (I_0 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Positive Sequence Angle (I_1 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Negative Sequence Angle (I_2 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Ground Differential (Igd)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Ground Differential Angle (Igd Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Load (I%) (not applicable to all models)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Note:
Percent of load-to-trip is calculated from the phase with the highest current reading. This metered value is the ratio between
the highest phase current injected for the current bank, and the lowest pickup setting among all Phase Timed and
Instantaneous overcurrent elements. If all these elements are disabled, the value displayed is 0.
Note:
For example, if the lowest pickup is 0.5 xCT, and the highest injected phase current is 1 xCT, the displayed value for load-to-
trip is 200%.
636 1601-0651
14.7 NEUTRAL IOC

Path: Metering > Neutral IOC
Neutral IOC1(X) Iop

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Default: 0 A
This value represents the operating quantity of the Neutral IOC element. For more details, see Neutral
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection.
1601-0651 637
14.8 VOLTAGES
Note:
The number of Voltages supported is order code dependent.
Note:
The VT bank names shown are set in the Phase VT Bank Name setpoints under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing >
VT.
Note:
Path: Metering > VT Bank > Ph VT Bnk1-J2 (Ph VT Bnk2-K2)
Phase A (Van)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase B (Vbn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase C (Vcn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase to Phase AB (Vab)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase to Phase BC (Vbc)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase to Phase CA (Vca)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Neutral (Vn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase A (Van RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase B (Vbn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase C (Vcn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
638 1601-0651
Phase to Phase AB (Vab RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase to Phase BC (Vbc RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase to Phase CA (Vca RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Neutral (Vn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Phase A Angle (Van Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Phase B Angle (Vbn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Phase C Angle (Vcn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Phase to Phase AB Angle (Vab Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Phase to Phase BC Angle (Vbc Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Phase to Phase CA Angle (Vca Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Neutral Angle (Vn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Average Phase to Phase (V AVG L-L)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Average Phase (V AVG L-N)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Zero Sequence (V0)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Positive Sequence (V1)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
1601-0651 639
Negative Sequence (V2)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Zero Sequence Angle (V0 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Positive Sequence Angle (V1 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Negative Sequence Angle (V2 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Path: Metering > Aux VT Bank > Ax VT Bnk1-J2 (Ax VT Bnk2-K2)
Auxilary Voltage (Vaux)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Auxilary Voltage RMS (Vaux RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Auxilary Voltage Angle (Vaux Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
640 1601-0651
14.9 FREQUENCY
Note:
Path: Metering > Frequency 1 - J
Frequency (Current Input J1-CT)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
CT Frequency
Range: 20 to 100 Hz
CT Frequency Rate of Change

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
Frequency Rate of Change (Current Input J1-CT)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
Frequency (Phase Voltage Input J2-3VT)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
3 VT Frequency
Range: 20 to 100 Hz
3 VT Frequency Rate of Change

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input J2-3VT)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
Frequency (Auxiliary Voltage Input J2-Vx)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Frequency Rate of Change (Auxiliary Voltage Input J2-Vx)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
Frequency (Phase Voltage Input LEA1)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input LEA1)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
1601-0651 641
Frequency (Phase Voltage Input LEA2)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input LEA2)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s
14.9.1 HIGH-SPEED FREQUENCY

Path: Metering > Hi-speed Freq
The high speed frequency and high speed rate of change monitored in the High-Speed Underfrequency element
are displayed here only if the High Speed Frequency is Enabled under the Common Setup section.
● High Speed Frequency
● High Speed ROCOF
Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
HIGH-SPEED FREQ MAG

Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps 0.01 Hz
Default: 60.00 Hz
HIGH-SPEED ROCOF
Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/sec in steps 0.01 Hz/sec
4TH HIGH-SPEED FREQ MAG

Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps 0.01 Hz
Default: 60.00 Hz
4TH HIGH-SPEED ROCOF

Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/sec in steps 0.01 Hz/sec
14.9.2 VOLTS PER HERTZ

Path: Metering > Volts per Hertz
VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 (2)

Range: 0.00 to 4.00 V/Hz in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V/Hz
642 1601-0651
14.10 HARMONICS
Note:
The number of Harmonics supported is dependent on the model and the order code.
All values relate to phase currents measured on the input cards (J1, etc.).
Path: Metering > Harmonics 1 - J1
Phase A/B/C Total Harmonic Distortion (Phase A/B/C THD)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Phase A/B/C Second Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 2)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Phase A/B/C Third Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 3)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
...
Phase A/B/C Twenty Fifth Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 25)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
14.10.1 HARMONIC MAGNITUDE

Path: Metering > Harmonic I Magnitude
J1 Phase A 2nd Harm Mag

J1 Phase B 2nd Harm Mag

J1 Phase C 2nd Harm Mag

J1 Phase A 5th Harm Mag

J1 Phase B 5th Harm Mag

J1 Phase C 5th Harm Mag

1601-0651 643
K1 Phase A 2nd Harm Mag

K1 Phase B 2nd Harm Mag

K1 Phase C 2nd Harm Mag

K1 Phase A 5th Harm Mag

K1 Phase B 5th Harm Mag

K1 Phase C 5th Harm Mag

K2 Phase A 2nd Harm Mag

K2 Phase B 2nd Harm Mag

K2 Phase C 2nd Harm Mag

K2 Phase A 5th Harm Mag

K2 Phase B 5th Harm Mag

K2 Phase C 5th Harm Mag

14.10.2 HARMONIC DETECTION

The second, third, fourth, and fifth harmonics per phase are shown here. The harmonics values are presented in
percent relative to the fundamental magnitude.
It should be noted that the similar harmonic ratios and THD values are also displayed under the general metering
menus, Harmonics 1 - J1 Current, Harmonics 3 - K1 Current, or Harmonics 4 – K2 Current, where all values
are calculated every three cycles. The THD values used in the Harmonic Detection element are the same to the
general metering, so they are not shown here again. The harmonic ratios in the Harmonic Detection element are
calculated and updated every protection pass.
644 1601-0651
Path: Metering > Harmonic Detection
HD Ph A/B/C 2nd Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%
HD Ph A/B/C 3rd Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%
HD Ph A/B/C 4th Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%
HD Ph A/B/C 5th Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%
1601-0651 645
14.11 SYNCHROCHECK
Path: Metering > Synchrocheck
Bus Voltage Magnitude (Bus Volts Magnitude)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Bus Voltage Angle (Bus Volts Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Bus Voltage Frequency (Bus Volts Frequency)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Line Voltage Magnitude (Line Volts Magnitude)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Line Voltage Angle (Line Volts Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Line Voltage Frequency (Line Volts Frequency)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Voltage Difference (Volts Difference)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V
Voltage Angle Difference (Angle Difference)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Voltage Frequency Difference (Frequency Difference)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
646 1601-0651
14.12 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

Path: Metering > Transformer > Percent Differential
la Differential (Ia Diff)

lb Differential (Ib Diff)

lc Differential (Ic Diff)

la Restraint (Ia Restr)

lb Restraint (Ib Restr)

lc Restraint (Ic Restr)

la Differential 2nd Harmonic (Ia Diff 2nd Harm)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
lb Differential 2nd Harmonic (Ib Diff 2nd Harm)

lc Differential 2nd Harmonic (Ic Diff 2nd Harm)

la Differential 5th Harmonic (Ia Diff 5th Harm)

lb Differential 5th Harmonic (Ib Diff 5th Harm)

Ic Differential 5th Harmonic (Ic Diff 5th Harm)

Note:
The values for differential and restraint currents are displayed in per times CT. The CT primary, from the CT Bank assigned as
Signal Input for Winding 1, is the reference CT (base CT) used for estimating the differential and restraint currents. The
winding reference is explained in the Transformer Setup section.
1601-0651 647
14.13 POWER FUNCTIONS
14.13.1 POWER
The following figure illustrates the convention used for measuring power and energy in the 8 Series devices.
Note:
Power 1 is calculated using 3-phase J1 Currents & 3-phase J2 Voltages.
648 1601-0651

!""

2
456 9:
_* ` a*''( 05 ;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
"* ` a*''(
ab ` c OP
476 K; 9;
d%""! 08 07
;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
+,-./0.- 0.1
486 K:
3 [\]^ efhg
#!$%&'( )*'*'( WXYZ
!""
2
456 9:

_* ` a*''( BC D EFGH BC D EGJ
"* ` i'( 05 07
ab ` c 476 K; 9;
QR
d%""! ;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
08
+,-./0.- 0.1 486 LM
[\]^ WXYZ
)*'*'( efjg
#!$%&'( )*'*'(
3 [\]^
456 9:
;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
07 08
_* ` a*''(
"* ` i'( 476 K; 9;
ab ` c ST
05 ;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
d%""! 486
+,-./0.- 0.1 K:
2 WXYZ
!"" efkg
)*'*'(
[\]^
9:
456
08 ;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
_* ` a*''( UV
"* ` i'( 476 LB NB
ab ` c 05
07
d%""! BC D EGJ BC D EFGH
486
+,-./0.- 0.1 K:
2 WXYZ
eflg
!"" mnopqrsptuvw
Figure 236: Flow direction of signed values for watts and VARs
Path: Metering > Power 1(X)
1601-0651 649
Real Total (Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Reactive Total (Reactive)

Range: - 214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar
Apparent Total (Apparent)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA
Phase A Real (Ph A Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Phase B Real (Ph B Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Phase C Real (Ph C Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Phase A Reactive (Ph A Reactive)

Phase B Reactive (Ph B Reactive)

Phase C Reactive (Ph C Reactive)

Phase A Apparent (Ph A Apparent)

Phase B Apparent (Ph B Apparent)

Phase C Apparent (Ph C Apparent)

Power Factor Total (PF)

Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead
Phase A Power Factor (Ph A PF)

Phase B Power Factor (Ph B PF)

650 1601-0651
Phase C Power Factor (Ph C PF)

14.13.2 POWER FACTOR

Path: Metering > Power Factor
The power factor value input to the power factor element(s) is displayed here. Note that the value may not be equal
to the power factor value displayed under Metering > Power 1 since the supervision conditions are applied in the
element.
POWER FACTOR 1(X)

Range: -0.99 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00
14.13.3 DIRECTIONAL POWER

Path: Metering > Directional Power
The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here. The display may
be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA
and CALIBRATION settings.
Directional Power 1
Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Default: 0.0 kW
...
Directional Power X
Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Default: 0.0 kW
1601-0651 651
14.14 ENERGY
14.14.1 ENERGY (X)
Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code.
Path: Metering > Energy > Energy 1(X)
Reset Energy D/T

Range: MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Positive Watt Hours (Pos WattHours)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh
Pos WattHours Cost

Default: 0.00 $ to 42949672.95 $
Negative Watt Hours (Neg WattHours)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh
Neg WattHours Cost

Default: 0.00 $ to 42949672.95 $
Positive Var Hours (Pos VarHours)

Range: 0.000 Mvarh to 4294967.295 Mvarh
Negative Var Hours (Neg VarHours)

14.14.2 ENERGY LOG

Path: Metering > Energy 1 > Energy Log
Pwr1 Last Event Pos WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This is the logged value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval. The shift
interval refers to the time between the last two reset commands, where the reset command refers to the rising
edge of the FlexLogic operand set under setpoint Reset Event Energy (Power Systems > Power Sensing). An
application example is the monitoring of the total energy accumulated at the end of an event or a shift interval.
An event/shift interval can be defined by the breaker status operand (open or closed).
652 1601-0651
Pwr1 Last Event Neg WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the logged value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.
Pwr1 Last Event Pos VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 Mvarh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
Default: 0.000 Mvarh
This value shows the logged value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.
Pwr1 Last Event Neg VarHours

This value shows the logged value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.
Pwr1 Today Pos WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated since the start of the day, that is time
00:00 (midnight). At the end of the day this value resets to zero and the total accumulated energy value is
logged as Yesterday Pos WattHours.
Pwr1 Today Neg WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.
Pwr1 Today Pos VarHours

This value shows the current value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.
Pwr1 Today Neg VarHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.
Pwr1 Yesterday Pos WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
1601-0651 653
This value shows the current value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated during the previous day. This value is
logged at the end of the day, midnight, or 23:59 hrs.
Pwr1 Yesterday Neg WattHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated during the previous day.
Pwr1 Yesterday Pos VarHours

This value shows the current value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated during the previous day.
Pwr1 Yesterday Neg VarHours

Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated during the previous day.
Note:
All Energy Log values can be reset to zero using the command Energy Log Data under Records > Clear Records or by the
Flexlogic operand programmed by the setpoint ENERGY LOG DATA under Device > Clear Records. The Reset Energy Log
D/T in either case is recorded and displayed.
654 1601-0651
14.15 DEMAND
14.15.1 CURRENT DEMAND
Note:
The number of Current Demand supported is Order Code dependent.
The relay measures Current Demand on each phase, and three phase Demand for real, reactive, and apparent
power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier Demand penalties or for statistical metering
purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected under Monitoring > Functions >
Demand. For each quantity, the relay displays the Demand over the most recent Demand time interval, the
maximum Demand since the last maximum Demand reset, and the time and date stamp of this maximum Demand
value. Maximum Demand quantities can be reset to zero at Records > Clear Records > Max Current Demand.
14.15.1.1 CURRENT DEMAND 1(X)

Path: Metering > Current Demand 1(X)
Cur1 Ph A/B/C Demand

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Cur1 Max Ph A/B/C Demand

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Cur1 D/T Ph A/B/C Demand MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
14.15.1.2 CURRENT DEMAND K1

Path: Metering > Current Demand K1
Reset (K1 Reset Demand Date/Time) MM/DD/YY 00:00:00
Phase A Demand (K1 Ph A Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase B Demand (K1 Ph B Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase C Demand (K1 Ph C Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Maximum Phase A Demand (K1 Max Ph A Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
1601-0651 655
Maximum Phase B Demand (K1 Max Ph B Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Maximum Phase C Demand (K1 Max Ph C Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Date/Time Phase A Demand (K1 Date/Time Ph A Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Date/Time Phase B Demand (K1 Date/Time Ph B Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Date/Time Phase C Demand (K1 Date/Time Ph C Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
14.15.1.3 CURRENT DEMAND K2

Path: Metering > Current Demand K2
Reset (K2 Reset Demand Date/Time) MM/DD/YY 00:00:00
Phase A Demand (K2 Ph A Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase B Demand (K2 Ph B Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Phase C Demand (K2 Ph C Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Maximum Phase A Demand (K2 Max Ph A Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Maximum Phase B Demand (K2 Max Ph B Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Maximum Phase C Demand (K2 Max Ph C Demand)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Date/Time Phase A Demand (K2 Date/Time Ph A Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Date/Time Phase B Demand (K2 Date/Time Ph B Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
Date/Time Phase C Demand (K2 Date/Time Ph C Demand) MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
656 1601-0651
14.16 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FUSE FAILURE

Path: Metering\VT Fuse Failure
VTFF 1(2) 3V0 3rd Harm

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Default: 0.0 %
This value represents the percentage of third harmonic content in 3V0. This value is calculated based on the
Phase VT Secondary
1601-0651 657
14.17 ARC FLASH

Path: Metering > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1
HS Phase Current A/B/C

Range: 0.00 to 120000.00 A in steps of 0.01
HS Ground Current
Range: 0.00 to 120000.00 A in steps of 0.01
658 1601-0651
14.18 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS

Temperature can be displayed in Celsius or Fahrenheit. The selection is made in Setpoints > Device > Installation
> Temperature Display.
Path: Metering > RTDs
RTDx
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RTD.
Path: Metering > RRTDs
RRTDx
Range: -40 to 250°C
Temperatures < -40°C or temperatures >250°C are displayed as Trouble RRTD
Path: Metering > RTD Maximums
Reset RTD Date/Time

Range: DD/MM/YY hh/mm/ss
Maximum RTD values can be cleared (reset) by setting the value of Setpoints > Records > Clear Records >
RTD Maximums to ON. Executing this command loads -40°C (or -40°F) as the initial Maximum RTD value.
RTD x Max
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RTD.
RTD x Max Date/Time

Path: Metering > RRTD Maximums
Reset RRTD Date/Time

Maximum RRTD values can be cleared (reset) by setting the value of Setpoints > Records > Clear Records >
RRTD Maximums to ON. Executing this command loads -40°C (or -40°F) as the initial Maximum RRTD value.
RRTD x Max
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RRTD.
RRTD x Max Date/Time

1601-0651 659
14.19 ANALOG INPUTS

Path: Metering > Analog Inputs
Analog Ip x
Range: -500000 to 500000 units in steps of 1
660 1601-0651
14.20 FLEXELEMENTS
Path: Metering > FlexElements
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the definitions of the base units in the
Definitions of the Base Unit for the FLEXELEMENT table. This table can be found in Setpoints > FlexLogic >
FlexElements.
FlexElement Operating Signals:

● FlexEI 1 Op Signal
1601-0651 661
662 1601-0651
CHAPTER 15
RECORDS
Chapter 15 - Records
664 1601-0651

Events 666
Transient Records 670
Fault Reports 671
Data Logger 673
Breakers 674
Digital Counters 676
Remote Modbus Device 677
Clear Records 680
1601-0651 665
15.2 EVENTS
The relay has an event recorder, which runs continuously. All event records are stored in non-volatile memory such
that information is permanently retained. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an event number equal to the
number of events that have occurred since the recorder was cleared. The event number is incremented for each
new event.
The Event Recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events listed in chronological order from
most recent to oldest. Events for a particular element are captured, if the setpoint EVENTS is selected as
“Enabled”. By default, the EVENTS setpoint from all elements is enabled.
Path: Records > Event Records
The events are cleared by pressing the pushbutton corresponding to the tab CLEAR, or when issuing clear event
records command from the general clear records menu.
15.2.1 EVENT VIEWER

The Event Viewer provides a consolidated view of up to 1024 events from a single 8 Series device or up to as many
as ten connected 8 Series devices or event files (10 x 1024 events in total).
666 1601-0651
To open the Event Viewer for a connected device, follow these steps in the EnerVista D&I Setup software:
2. Select the Setpoints > Records > Events menu item.
3. A small Events window opens displaying the following:
○ Date/Time of Last Clear
○ Events Since Last Clear
○ Date/Time of Last Retrieval
4. In addition, the Event Viewer launches for a detailed view of up to 1024 of the most recent events.
The Event Viewer window runs as a separate application, and can be moved outside of the main window and
resized as needed.
If EnerVista D&I Setup software is closed, the Event Viewer remains open but offline (no further events are received
from running devices, however event data is still available).
The Event List includes all events in descending chronological order. For multiple sources, a Source column
showing the device name or file name is shown between the Date/Time and the Event columns.
1601-0651 667
To add an additional connected 8 Series relay to the open Event Viewer, follow these steps:
2. Select the Setpoints > Records > Events menu item.
3. The Event Viewer adds up to 1024 of the most recent events to the open window, labeled with the new
device name in the Source column.
The Event column is only shown when Show Event Numbers is selected on the Data tab.
On the left side of the Event List a checkbox column with a toggle button at the top allows selection of specific
events. Only the selected events are saved or copied by the Save to File and Copy to Clipboard options in the
File tab.
Use the following keys to navigate quickly through the Event List:
● End scrolls to the bottom of the Event List
● Home scrolls to the top of the Event List
● Page Down scrolls one page down in the Event List
● Page Up scrolls one page up in the Event List
When the Event Viewer and the EnerVista D&I Setup software are both open, new events from connected devices
are added to the Event Viewer as they occur and oscillography and fault report records are gradually retrieved from
the device, in order of oldest to newest (assuming oscillography records and fault report records are saved in a
common location).
Oscillography record events (such as Trans. Rec Trigger shown above) have a symbol in the Data column that
includes a link to launch the oscillography record in the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Fault report events (such as Fault Rpt Trig shown above) can be opened in the same manner by clicking the fault
report symbol in the Data column.
668 1601-0651
FILE TAB
Use the File tab to open event files in the Event Viewer, save events to a file, or copy events to the clipboard.
● Open File: opens a window to browse to an events file (of type .eev, .txt. or .evt) and opens it in the existing
Event Viewer window, or in a new Event Viewer window.
○ Check In New Window to open the file in a new Event Viewer window.
● Save to File: saves the selected events to a file. Hidden (filtered) events are not saved.
○ Select the events to save using the checkboxes on the left of the events list.
○ Check Include Event Data to save full details of each event instead of just a summary.
● Copy to Clipboard: copies the selected events to the clipboard. Hidden (filtered) events are not copied.
○ Select the events to copy using the checkboxes on the left of the events list.
○ Check Include Event Data to copy full details of each event instead of just a summary.
HOME TAB
Use the Home tab to select the events shown in the detailed view, measure time between events, and view the
current Event Viewer statistics.
By default, the Event Viewer opens displaying the Home tab with the last three events selected. Details of these
three events are displayed in the lower pane of the Event Viewer window.
To select up to three events from the list displayed in the Event Viewer, follow these steps:
1. From the Home tab, choose which event to set by clicking button 1, 2, or 3 above the Event Selector label.
2. Click an event from the list of displayed events.
3. The event changes color to match the selected button (blue for 1, green for 2, or red for 3) and the event
details display in the lower pane, highlighted in the same color.
The absolute times between the three selected events are displayed above the Delta Times label.
The Statistics area in the Home tab includes the following information:
● Sources: the number of event sources (devices and files) currently available.
● Events: the number of events being managed by the Event Viewer.
● Filtered: the number of events shown after any active filters are applied. (Filters are applied in the Data tab).
DATA TAB
Use the Data tab to filter the events shown in the Event Viewer.
● Show Event Numbers: toggles on and off the event number column in the list of events. The event number
can be useful for reconciling events between the Eevnt Viewer and local HMI.
● Select Event Sources: provides a drop-down list of all available event sources (devices and files). Uncheck
a device or file to hide the associated events from the main list.
● By default events from all sources are shown.
● Cause of Event Filter: provides an alphabetized list of all event names, allowing different event types to be
shown or hidden.
● By default all events are shown.
1601-0651 669
15.3 TRANSIENT RECORDS

Path: Records > Transients > Transient Records
Using the EnerVista D&I Setup software, select a record and then click the Launch Viewer button to view the
waveform.
670 1601-0651
15.4 FAULT REPORTS

The latest fault reports can be displayed.
Path: Records > Fault Reports
NUMBER OF REPORTS
This value shows the number of reports since the last clear.
LAST TRIP DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY/ HH:MM:SS
This value is the date and time on which the last report was generated.
LAST CLEAR DATE/TIME

This value is the date and time on which the record was cleared.
TYPE OF FAULT
Range: N/A, AG, BG, CG, AB, BC, CA, ABG, BCG, CAG, ABC
Default: N/A
This record displays the type of fault.
DISTANCE TO FAULT
Range: 0.00 to 99.99 km/Mile in steps of 0.01 km/Mile
Default: 0.00 km/Mile
This record displays the distance to fault, in kilometers or miles as selected by the UNITS OF LENGTH setpoint.
FAULT REPORT X TIME

This value is the date and time on which the specified fault report was generated.
1601-0651 671

"#$ % % &

"#$ +) &

"#! % % &

"#! +) &

+ % +?

+?

"#! %(% % % &

"#! %(% +) &
! +
./00123 425/36

+ , - ! @A@B

7089:3:;28< =;<38>1 425/36 )
'( )
& & C
) %+
& & + (
& &
& * & ! ) %+
GHI =;<38>1 425/36
JKLMNNOPQRST
&
&
&
&!
DE * ,
,F *
Figure 237: Fault Locator Logic diagram
672 1601-0651
15.5 DATA LOGGER

The Data Logger record can be retrieved and seen from this window. It displays the oldest and newest timestamps,
and the total number of samples captured for all channels programmed in Setpoints > Device > Data Logger
menu.
Path: Records > Data Logger
1601-0651 673
15.6 BREAKERS

Path: Records > Breakers Records > Breaker x
ARCING CURRENT PHASE A

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01
ARCING CURRENT PHASE B

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01
ARCING CURRENT PHASE C

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01
TOTAL ARCING CURRENT

15.6.2 BREAKER HEALTH

The menu displays the breaker monitoring values. The latest value, average of last five values and average of
values since last reset are recorded, calculated and displayed.
When the DETECTION mode is selected, the values displayed here can be used as the reference for user settings.
The values are saved into non-volatile memory to avoid the loss of data during the power down period.
Path: Records > Breakers Records > Breaker Health
TOTAL BREAKER TRIPS

TRIPS SINCE LAST RESET

ALARM COUNTER
LAST TRIP TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1
AVG. OF 5 TRIP TIME

AVG. OF TRIP TIME

674 1601-0651
LAST CLOSE TIME

AVG. OF 5 CLOSE TIME

AVG. OF CLOSE TIME

LAST PH A/B/C ARC TIME

AVG. OF 5 PH A/B/C ARC TIME

AVG. OF PH A/B/C ARC TIME

LAST SPRING CHARGE TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001
AVG. OF 5 CHARGE TIME

AVG. OF CHARGE TIME

LAST PH A/B/C ARC ENERGY

AVG. OF 5 PH A/B/C ARCENER

AVG. OF PH A/B/C ARC ENERGY

1601-0651 675
15.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS

The present status of the sixteen Digital Counters is shown here. The status of each Counter, with the user-defined
Counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label also appears). Also included, is
the date and time stamp for the frozen count. The Counter microseconds frozen value refers to the microsecond
portion of the time stamp.
Path: Records > Digital Counter 1 (16)
COUNTER X ACCUMULATED
COUNTER X FROZEN
DATE/TIME FROZEN
Range: Date/Time Format (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
Default: 01/01/70 00:00:00
COUNTER X us FROZEN
Range: 0 to 999999 µs in steps of 1
676 1601-0651
15.8 REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE

Up to 64 FlexAnalog operands and 32 FlexLogic operands are supported in the configurable Remote Modbus
Device. Profiles are configured under Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1, with
details provided in Chapter 5. Up to 10 format codes enumerations (by default GMD_FC1 to GMD_FC10) can be
defined separately for each Modbus Device Profile. For the default BSG3 device profile, 27 analogs and 27 digital
operands are pre-configured in the default CID settings file.
All parameters are polled consecutively. Each FlexLogic value can be read from a different Modbus address and bit
mask which is then mapped into any of the available 64 bit locations.
Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Status
DEVICE STATUS
Range: Offline, Online
Default: Offline
The DEVICE STATUS operand is asserted when the last communication attempt has failed. The operand is
deasserted following a successful communication attempt.
LAST SUCCESSFUL POLL

Range: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Default: 01/01/2000 00:00
This is a timestamp value for the last successful read. The LAST SUCCESSFUL POLL is updated if the update
of all pooled data is successful.
Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Digital States
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 1-32

Range: Defined by Remote Modbus Device Profile
Default: Off
Up to 32 FlexLogic operands can be shown here.
The displayed text is the FlexLogic name defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor Label field for each
Digital Point in the current profile. See Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1.
The value displayed is based on the Enumeration field defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor for each
specific digital point.
1601-0651 677
Figure 238: Example of Digital States for the default BSG3 RMD profile
Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Analog Values
678 1601-0651
RMD-FLEXANALOG 1-64
Default: 0
Up to 64 FlexAnalog operands can be shown here.
The value displayed is based on the Enumeration field defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor for each
specific digital point.
The displayed text is the FlexAnalog name defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor ‘Label’ field for each
Analog Point in the current profile. See Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1.
The value displayed is based on the Data Type, Multiplier, Decimals, and Units fields defined in the Remote
Modbus Device Setpoint for each specific analog point.
Figure 239: Example for Analog Values of the default BSG3 RMD profile
1601-0651 679
15.9 CLEAR RECORDS

The Clear Records command is accessible from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Path: Device > Clear Records
Records can be cleared either by assigning “On” or a FlexLogic operand to the appropriate setting.
With the optional 10 PB Membrane Front Panel all Clear Records commands related to Demand default to PB7 ON.
This includes Clear Records for Max Current Demand, Max Real Power Demand, Max Reactive Power Demand
and Max Apparent Power Demand.
Note:
The Clear Records command is also available from Records > Clear Records, however there the allowable settings are only
ON and OFF. (FlexLogic operands cannot be used.)
680 1601-0651
CHAPTER 16
TRANSFORMER MONITORING AND

DIAGNOSTICS
Chapter 16 - Transformer monitoring and diagnostics
682 1601-0651

Overview 684
DGA Monitoring 685
Device Data 687
Dissolved Gas Analysis 688
Learned Data Records 689
Energization Records 690
Digital Fault Records 691
Models 692
Historical Maximum Record 694
Transformer Health Report 695
DGA Historical Trend 696
1601-0651 683
16.2 OVERVIEW
Transformer M&D
The 845 Transformer Protection Relay and M&D (monitoring and diagnostics) devices are connected and operated
in client-server mode of operation. The contents from the M&D device are organized as per the menu tree shown
below under the Transformer M&D menu.
Detailed information on the Transformer M&D menu tree contents is available in the M&D User Guide.
684 1601-0651
16.3 DGA MONITORING

The 845 relay provides configuration parameters to establish communication with DGA devices on Modbus TCP/IP
protocol. Four DGA devices are supported – Transfix, DGA 500, Minitrans, and HM2. The relay supports MODBUS
TCP client protocol which acts as the master or client to M&D devices.
The following configuration parameters are used for establishing the communication between the relay and DGA
device.
IP ADDRESS
Range: standard IPv4 address
Default: 0.0.0.0
This setting specifies the IP address of the M&D DGA device that communicates with the relay.
SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 0 to 254
Default: 0
This setting is the slave ID field (unit ID) within the Modbus protocol. It is the ID of the M&D device, and each
M&D device in general has a unique ID.
PORT
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 502
1601-0651 685
This setting is the standard port setting of the Modbus protocol. Port setting 502 is the setting most often used
for all Modbus based communications.
DEVICE TYPE
Range: None, Transfix, DGA 500, DGA 900, Minitrans, HM2
Default: None
This setting defines the type of M&D DGA device being used with the relay on the Modbus protocol. Supported
device types include Transfix, DGA 500, DGA 900, Minitrans and HM2.
686 1601-0651
16.4 DEVICE DATA

The Device Data menu item provides the device ID and serial number of the DGA device connected to the relay.
Figure 240: Device Data
1601-0651 687
16.5 DISSOLVED GAS ANALYSIS

The relay reads gas ppm values at regular intervals of time based on the DGA device type and displays the latest
gas ppm values along with a measurement date/timestamp.
For HM2 DGA device types, data is read at 15 minute intervals. For Transfix, DGA 500 and Minitrans device types,
data is read based on the scheduler configuration in the device. In addition to gas ppm data, basic diagnostic
information on DGA device hardware and components is also provided.
Figure 241: Dissolved Gas
688 1601-0651
16.6 LEARNED DATA RECORDS

The Learned Data recorder measures and records up to 365 data record sets from actual transformer operation.
This data can be used to evaluate the changes/trends over time in transformer models. The records can only be
retrieved using the EnerVista D&I Setup software. Learned Data records are calculated each day at mid-night
12:00:00 AM with a total of 365 records supported based on the FIFO concept.
Figure 242: Learned data records
1601-0651 689
16.7 ENERGIZATION RECORDS

The relay generates a Transformer Energization record for every successful transformer energization event. The
energization record can only be retrieved using EnerVista D&I Setup software. The relay supports the six latest
energization records on a FIFO basis.
Each energization record contains:
● Transient record data with 10 cycles of user configured energization winding source voltage, and current
waveform data of each phase sampled at 64 samples/cycle
● Computed energization parameters through data captured in the metering module from the initial 10 cycles of
captured raw data during an energization event and downsampling this data to 64 samples/cycle.
● The latest available calculated, measured or monitored values for the selected winding source after
successful energization.
Figure 243: Energization records
690 1601-0651
16.8 DIGITAL FAULT RECORDS

The relay generates a Transformer Digital fault record for every successful transformer trip event that occurs. The
recorder can only be retrieved using the EnerVista D&I Setup software. The relay supports the six latest
energization records on a FIFO basis.
Each Digital fault record contains:
● Oscillography and pre/post configured electrical phasor data generated during a trip condition
● Pre and post fault gas ppm data
● Electrical and thermal data captured during fault
● DGA models computed with pre/post fault gas ppm data, and
● A PDF report capturing integrated fault data
Figure 244: Digital fault records
1601-0651 691
16.9 MODELS
Models consist of transformer operational data represented in a constructive manner using electrical, thermal and
DGA data. This section contains transformer models and DGA models.
16.9.1 TRANSFORMER MODELS

Transformer models represent transformer operational electrical, thermal and DGA data based on learned data in
the form of a trend chart. Each trend chart consists of computed or monitored parameter trends, classified based on
relevancy as a group of 10 parameters.
The Data correlation model in this section is a customized trend chart where the user can select the required
parameter trends to display.
Figure 245: Transformer models
16.9.2 DGA MODELS

DGA models consist of the standard Duval Triangle and Gas Ratios model which is computed based on the latest
50 DGA data samples. The Key Gas model is computed based on the latest DGA data.
692 1601-0651
Figure 246: DGA models
1601-0651 693
16.10 HISTORICAL MAXIMUM RECORD

The Historical maximum record consists of lifetime operational maximum values along with a time stamp of the
parameter.
Figure 247: Historical maximum record
694 1601-0651
16.11 TRANSFORMER HEALTH REPORT

The Transformer health report gives an executive summary on transformer operational data within a user-selectable
date/times range in the form of a PDF report. The health report PDF consists of report data, online DGA status,
nameplate data, energization summary, protection events summary, key learned data parameter trends, historical
maximum data, DGA data and DGA models based on the order code.
Figure 248: Transformer health report
1601-0651 695
16.12 DGA HISTORICAL TREND

DGA historical trend provides a trend chart of DGA parameters with the latest 100 gas ppm values displayed as a
varying trend based on the DGA device type.
Figure 249: DGA historical trend
696 1601-0651
CHAPTER 17
MAINTENANCE
Chapter 17 - Maintenance
698 1601-0651

This chapter provides some information about the device maintenance.
Environmental Health Report 700
General Maintenance 702
1601-0651 699
17.2 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH REPORT

Prolonged exposure to harsh environments and transient conditions that exceed those stated in the device
specifications will reduce the life of the product. The relay has a patented Environmental Awareness Module (EAM)
to record environmental data over the life of the product. The module measures temperature, humidity, surge pulses
and accumulates the events every hour in pre-determined threshold buckets over a period of 15 years. Using
EnerVista D&I Setup software, you can retrieve this data in the form of a histogram. This will help you to quickly
identify any changes in the operating condition of installed products and arrange necessary remedial action. An
example of a report is provided below.
700 1601-0651
Figure 250: Environmental Report
1601-0651 701
17.3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE

The relay requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over
time. The expected service life is 20 years when the environment and electrical conditions are within stated
specifications.
The relay performs continual self-tests, however we recommend scheduling regular maintenance activities. This
maintenance can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
17.3.1 IN-SERVICE MAINTENANCE

In-service maintenance consists of the following activities:
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices
on the corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
17.3.2 OUT-OF-SERVICE MAINTENANCE

Out-of-service maintenance consists of the following activities:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification.
Calibrated test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries
against relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part
of the system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
17.3.3 UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE (SYSTEM INTERRUPTION)

Unscheduled maintenance consists of the following activities:
● Viewing the event recorder and oscillography for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
702 1601-0651
CHAPTER 18
SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 18 - Specifications
704 1601-0651
18.1 DEVICE
18.1.1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
Number of Elements: 1 (36 indicators)
Layout: Grid of 2x2 or 3x3
Data Storage: Non-volatile memory
Mode: Self-reset, latched, acknowledgeable
Display Text: 3 lines of 15 characters maximum
Visual Indication: Flashing: 2Hz @ 50% duty cycle
18.1.2 CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS

CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS
Config Mode: Simplified, Regular
1601-0651 705
18.2 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

To obtain the total operating time, i.e. from the presence of a trip condition to initiation of a trip, add 8 ms output
relay time to the operate times listed below.
18.2.1 TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87T)
Differential/Restraint Characteristic: Dual Slope, Dual Breakpoint
Minimum Pickup level: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Slope 1 range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Slope 2 range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Breakpoint 1: 0.50 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Breakpoint 2: 2.00 to 30.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
2nd harmonic inhibit level: 0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
2nd harmonic inhibit mode: Per-phase, Average, 2-out-of-3, 1-out-of-3
5th harmonic inhibit level: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%

Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Operate time: < 16/22 ms at >3 x Pickup @60Hz (harmonic inhibits disabled/
enabled)
< 18/26 ms at >3 x Pickup @50Hz (harmonic inhibits disabled/
enabled)
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading current, or ±1% of rated
18.2.2 TRANSFORMER OVERLOAD

TRANSFORMER OVERLOAD
Operating Parameter: Winding 1, 2, 3 loads
Pickup level: 50 to 300% in steps of 1%
Level Accuracy: Per current input
Operate time: <25 ms at >3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
<30 ms at >3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ± ¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.3 INSTANTANEOUS PHASE DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION

INSTANTANEOUS PHASE DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION (50/87)
Pickup level: 3.00 to 30.00 per unit in steps 0.01
<12 ms at >3 x Pickup@60Hz
Operate time:
<15 ms at >3 x Pickup@50Hz
706 1601-0651
18.2.4 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT (87G)

RESTRICTED GROUND (EARTH) FAULT (87G)
Operating Parameter: Ia, Ib, Ic and Ig (Fundamental Phasor Magnitude)
Pickup Level: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT (phase CT)
Ground Supervision Level: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT (ground CT)
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Slope Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater.
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Operate Time: <25 ms at 1.1 x slope x Imax at 60 Hz, typically
<30 ms at 1.1 x slope x Imax at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.5 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67P)

PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67P)
Relay Connection: 90°(Quadrature)
Quadrature Voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (Vbc), phase B (Vca), phase C (Vab)
ACB phase seq.: phase A (Vcb), phase B (Vac), phase C (Vba)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Polarizing Voltage Threshold (from FW 4.10): 0.015 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Current Sensitivity Threshold: 0.05 x CT
Characteristic Angle: 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy: ±3°
Operation Time (FlexLogic™ operands): Reverse to Forward transition: < 12 ms, typically.
Forward to Reverse transition: <8 ms, typically.
18.2.6 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing: Voltage, Current, Dual
Polarizing Current: Ig
Operating Current: I0
Level Sensing: 3 x (|I0| – K x |I1|), Ig
Restraint, K: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Characteristic Angle: -90° to 90° in steps of 1°
Limit Angle: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°, independent for forward and reverse
Angle Accuracy: ±3° (both voltage and current (1A/5A only) polarizing signals)
1601-0651 707
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)

Pickup Level: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Operate Time (no direction transition): < 16 ms at 3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
< 20 ms at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
18.2.7 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67G)

GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67G)
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing (845): Voltage
Polarizing (850, 889): Voltage, Current, Dual
Polarizing Voltage: V_0 or VX
Polarizing Current: Ipol
Operating Current: Ig
Level Sensing: Ig, Ipol
Characteristic Angle: -90° to 90° in steps of 1°
Limit Angle: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°, independent for forward and reverse
Angle Accuracy: ±3°
Pickup Level (up to FW 3.xx) 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001
Pickup Level (from FW 4.10) 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001
Dropout Level: 97 to 98%
Operate Time (no direction transition): < 12 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
< 15 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
18.2.8 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P)

PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P)
Operating Parameter Ia, Ib, Ic (Fundamental Phasor Magnitude or RMS)
whichever is greater, for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading.
(For Neutral IOC, Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)where K = 1/16 and |
I_0| = 1/3 * |In|))
Operate Time: <12 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
<15 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 50 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC)
Timer Accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.9 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)
Operating Parameter Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
708 1601-0651
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

whichever is greater, for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading.
(For Neutral IOC, Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)where K = 1/16 and |
I_0| = 1/3 * |In|))
Operate Time: <16 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC)
<20 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.10 GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50G)

GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50G)
Operating Parameter Ig Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Level Accuracy (for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT): ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy (for > 2.0 x CT): ±1.5% of reading.
Operate Time: <12 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Timer Accuracy from pickup to operate ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)
18.2.11 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/V)

PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/V)
Current: Phasor or RMS
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 in steps of 0.001 x CT
whichever is greater.
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading 50:0.025A CT:
For 0.5A to 4A: ±0.1A; For > 4A: ±0.2A (889 only)
Curve Shape: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF,
IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse,
ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid
Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Curve Multiplier
TDM: 0.01 to 28800.00 in steps of 0.01
TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005
K (RI): 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay: 0.01 to 28800.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Char: DT, Inverse
Reset Time: 0.000 to 28800.000s in steps of 0.001 s
1601-0651 709
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/V)

Reset Time: Instantaneous, Timed
Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
Voltage Dependent OC (51V): VCO (Voltage Controlled Overcurrent), VRO (Voltage Restraint
Overcurrent)
18.2.12 NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N/G)

NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N/G)
Operating Parameter: In/Ig (RMS or Fundamental)
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 in steps of 0.001 x CT
Level Accuracy for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Curve Shape: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve
C, FlexCurve D
Time Delay: 0.000 – 200.000 in steps 0.001
Curve Multiplier
TDM: 0.01 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005
K (RI): 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
IDG Is: 1.0 -4.0 in steps of 0.1
IDG Time: 1.00-2.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: 0.000 – 100.000 in steps of 0.001 s
Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle
18.2.13 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50_2)
Current: I_2 Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Level Accuracy for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater,
Level Accuracy for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading. (For lop = |I_2| - K * |I_1|, where K = 1/8
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Overreach: < 2%
710 1601-0651
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50_2)

Operate Time: < 12 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
< 15 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.14 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (51_2)
Operating Parameter: I_2 (Fundamental Phasor Magnitude)
whichever is greater, for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Curve Shape (from FW 4.10): Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Time Delay: 0.000 – 200.000 in steps 0.001
Curve Multiplier
TDM: 0.01 – 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005
K (RI): 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: 0.000 – 600.000 s in steps of 0.001
DT, Inverse
Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3% of curve delay or ±½ cycle
18.2.15 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)
Voltage: Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level (up to 3.xx): 97 to 98% of Pickup
Dropout Level (from 4.10): Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of pickup or 95 to 97% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Phases Required for Operation: Any one, Any two, All three
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)
Pickup Accuracy: Per phase voltage input channel error
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60Hz
< 35 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50Hz
1601-0651 711
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.2.16 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)
Operating Parameter: 3V_0 calculated from phase to ground voltages
Dropout Level: Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of Pickup, or 95 to 98% of
Pickup.
Neutral Overvoltage Curves: Definite time, FlexCurve A/B/C/D, Inverse time (from FW 4.10)
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s (Definite Time)
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s (Definite Time)
< 35 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50Hz
Curve Timing Accuracy: at > 1.1 x Pickup: ±3% of curve delay or ±1 cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate
18.2.17 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)
Operating Parameter: Vx (Phasor)
Overvoltage Curves: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Pickup Accuracy: Auxiliary voltage input channel error
Curve Timing Accuracy: at >1.1 x PKP: 3.5% of operate time ±½ cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater)
18.2.18 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59_2)

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59_2)
Operating Parameter: V_2
712 1601-0651
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59_2)

Operate Time: < 25 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60 Hz
< 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50 Hz
pickup to operate
18.2.19 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)
Voltage: Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Minimum Voltage: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: Selectable. Either 101 to 103% of pickup or 103 to 105% of
pickup
Phases Required for Operation: Any one, Any two, All three
Undervoltage Curves: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Pickup Accuracy: Per phase voltage input channel error
Reset Time Delay: 0.000 – 6000.00 s in steps of 0.001s
Reset Mode: Definite Time, Dependent Time
Curve Timing Accuracy: At < 0.90 x pickup: ±3.5% of curve delay or ±½ cycle (whichever
is greater) from pickup to operate
18.2.20 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)
Operating Parameter: Vx (Phasor)
Minimum Voltage: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Undervoltage Curves: Definite Time, GE IAV Inverse Time or FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Curve Timing Accuracy: At < 0.90 x pickup: ±3.5% of curve delay or ±½ cycle (whichever
is greater) from pickup to operate
1601-0651 713
18.2.21 VOLTAGE INTERRUPTION

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)
Operating Parameter: V1
Minimum Voltage 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 VT
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 VT
18.2.22 VOLTS PER HERZ (24)

VOLTS PER HERTZ (24)
Voltages: Phasor only
Pickup Level: 0.80 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 pu
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.02 pu
Timing Curves: Definite Time; IEC Inverse A/B/C; FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
TD Multiplier: 0.05 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset Delay: 0.00 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.01
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±15 cycles (whichever is greater) for
values greater than 1.1 x pickup
Operate Time:
< 2 cycles
Number of Elements:
6
18.2.23 OVERFREQUENCY (81O)

OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup Level Normal Frequency: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level High Frequency: 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: Pickup -0.03 Hz
Minimum Operating Voltage: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Level Accuracy Normal Frequency (40 to 70 Hz) ±0.01 Hz
Level Accuracy High Frequency (40 to 70 Hz) ±0.02 Hz
Timer accuracy
Operate Time: Typically 7.5 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change.
Typically 7 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change.
Typically 6.5 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change.
714 1601-0651
Note:
Typical times are average Operate Times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may
vary by ±0.5 cycles.
18.2.24 UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)

UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup Level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
High-speed Frequency Input 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: Pickup +0.03 Hz
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Minimum Operating Current: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Level Accuracy (Normal Frequency Input): ±0.01 Hz
Level Accuracy (High-speed Frequency Input): ±0.02 Hz
pickup to operate
Operate Time: Typically 7.5 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change.
Typically 7 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change.
Typically 6.5 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change.
Note:
Typical times are average Operate Times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may
vary by ±0.5 cycles.
18.2.25 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY (81R)

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)
df/dt Trend: Increasing, Decreasing, Bi-directional
df/dt Pickup Level: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 Hz/s
df/dt Dropout Level: 96% of Pickup Level
df/dt Level Accuracy: 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater
Frequency (normal): 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency (high-speed): 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Minimum Voltage Threshold: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Minimum Current Threshold: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
pickup to operate
95% Settling Time for df/dt: < 24 cycles
1601-0651 715
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)

Typical Operate Time: 6.5 cycles at 2 × Pickup
5.5 cycles at 3 × Pickup
4.5 cycles at 5 × Pickup
18.2.26 DIRECTIONAL POWER

DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
Measured Power 3-phase
Number of Stages 2
Characteristic Angle 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Calibration Angle 0.00° to 0.95° in steps of 0.05°
Power Pickup Range –1.200 to 1.200 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001
Pickup Level Accuracy ±1% or ±0.001 x Rated Power, whichever is greater
Hysteresis 2% or 0.001 x Rated Power, whichever is greater
Pickup Time Delay 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Operate Time
±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
Timer Accuracy
pickup to operate
18.2.27 RTD PROTECTION

RTD PROTECTION
Pickup: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C
Hysteresis: 2°C
Timer Accuracy: <2 s
Elements: Trip and Alarm
18.2.28 ARC FLASH HS PHASE/GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

(50P/50G)
ARC FLASH HS PHASE/GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT HS 50P/50G
Current: Phasor Magnitude (special high speed algorithm)
For 0.1 to 0.2 x CT: ±0.2% of reading or 1.5% of rated,
Level Accuracy: whichever is greater
Operate Time: 2ms for light-only detection using FlexLogic operands
4 ms at > 6 x Pickup at 60 Hz
5 ms at > 6 x Pickup at 50 Hz
4-8 ms at > (3-6) x Pickup at 60 Hz
4-10 ms at > (3-6) x Pickup at 50 Hz
716 1601-0651
18.3 CONTROL
18.3.1 SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Maximum Frequency Difference: 0.01 to 5.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz for frequency window of fnom
±5 Hz
Maximum Angle Difference: 1° to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Voltage Difference: 10 to 600000 V in steps of 1 V
Hysteresis for Maximum Frequency Difference: 0.01 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Breaker Closing Time: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dead Source Function: None, LB & DL, DB & LL, DB & DL, DB OR DL, DB XOR DL
Dead/Live Levels for Bus and Line: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
18.3.2 BREAKER CONTROL

BREAKER CONTROL
Operation: Asserted FlexLogic Operands
Function: Opens/closes, blocks, bypasses blocks to the feeder breaker
18.3.3 LOCAL CONTROL MODE

LOCAL CONTROL MODE
Number of Elements: 1
Select Before Operate Mode: Disabled, Enabled
Mode: Local Mode ON, Local Mode OFF
Display Status: LM (local mode) displayed in banner
Tagging: Disabled, Enabled
18.3.4 SWITCH CONTROL

SWITCH CONTROL
Operation: Local (PB control and SLD) and Remote (asserted FlexLogic
operands)
Function: Opens/Closes the disconnect switch
Timers: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
18.3.5 TRIP BUS

TRIP BUS
Number of Elements: 6
Number of Inputs: 16
1601-0651 717
TRIP BUS
Operate Time: < 2 ms at 60 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.3.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements: 64
Operating signal: Any FlexLogic operand
Operate time: Digital Elements are processed once per cycle(16 ms at 60 Hz,
20 ms at 50 Hz)
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Timer accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate 20 ms at 50 Hz)
718 1601-0651
18.4 MONITORING
18.4.1 WINDING HOTTEST SPOT

WINDING HOTTEST-SPOT
Operating Quantity: Computed temperature in °C
Pickup Level: 50 to 300°C in steps of 1°C (122°F to 572°F in steps of 1°F)
Dropout Level: 1°C below pickup
Pickup Delay: 0 to 60000 minutes in steps of 1 min
18.4.2 AGING ACCELERATION FACTOR

AGING ACCELERATION FACTOR
Operating Quantity: Computed Aging Acceleration Factor, per-unit
Pickup Level: 1 pu to 10 pu in steps of 0.1 pu
Pickup Delay: 0 to 60000 minutes in step of 1 min
18.4.3 TRANSFORMER LOSS OF LIFE

XFMR LOSS OF LIFE
Operating Quantity: Computed Accumulated Transformer Loss of Life, hours
Pickup Level: 0 to 300000 hours in steps of 1 hour
18.4.4 HARMONIC DERATING

HARMONIC DERATING
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±3 cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.4.5 TAP CHANGER FAILURE

TAP CHANGER FAILURE
Operating Parameter: Tap Changer Position
Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±2 cycles (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.4.6 POWER FACTOR (55)

POWER FACTOR (55)
Switch-In Level: 0.01 Lead to 1 to 0.01 Lag in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: 0.01 Lead to 1 to 0.01 Lag in steps of 0.01
Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
1601-0651 719
POWER FACTOR (55)

Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Mode: 3-pole
Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I2t) during fault
Initiation: any operand
Alarm Threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1 kA2-cycle
pickup to operate
18.4.8 BREAKER FAILURE

BREAKER FAILURE
Mode: 3-pole
Current Supervision: phase and neutral current (fundamental phasor magnitude)
Current Supervision Pickup: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Current Supervision Dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup
Current Supervision Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater)
Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
pickup to operate
Reset Time: 19 to 30 ms at 1.5 to 20 x Pickup
18.4.9 BREAKER HEALTH

BREAKER HEALTH
pickup to operate
18.4.10 TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORING

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR (TCM)
Applicable Voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle Current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timing Accuracy: ±3 % or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
720 1601-0651
18.4.11 CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING

CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR (CCM)
Applicable Voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle Current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timing Accuracy: ±3 % or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
18.4.12 DEMAND
DEMAND
Measured Values: Phase A/B/C present and maximum current, three-phase
present, maximum real/reactive/apparent power, minimum real/
reactive/apparent power
Measurement Type: Thermal Exponential, 90% response time (programmed): 5 to
90 min in steps of 1 min.
Block Interval / Rolling Demand, time interval (programmed): 5
to 90 min in steps of 1 min.
Current Pickup Level (845, 850, 889): 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 A
Dropout Level: 96-98% of Pickup level
Level Accuracy: ±2%
18.4.13 HARMONIC DETECTION

HARMONIC DETECTION
Operating Parameter: Current 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th harmonic or THD per phase
Timer Accuracy: Harmonics: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate. THD: ±3% of delay setting or
±3 cycles (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
1601-0651 721
18.5 RECORDING
18.5.1 TRANSIENT RECORDER

TRANSIENT RECORDER
Default AC Channels: 12 currents + 4 voltages
Configurable Channels: 16 analog and 64 digital channels
Sampling Rate: 128/c, 64/c, 32/c, 16/c, 8/c
Trigger Source: Any element pickup, dropout or operate, digital input or output
change of state, FlexLogic operand
Trigger Position: 0 to 100%
Storage Capability: Non-volatile memory
18.5.2 EVENT DATA

EVENT DATA
Number of Records: 1024 (matches the existing Event Recorder)
Time-tag Accuracy: One microsecond
Settings: 64 Configurable FlexAnalog parameters, Event Selector
Actuals: Selected Event Number, Timestamp of Selected Event, Cause
of Selected Event, 64 Configurable FlexAnalog values
Commands: None (using existing Clear Event Recorder)
18.5.3 DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER
Data Logger channels: 16
Data Logger Rate: 1 cycle, 1 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 15 min., 30 min., 1 hour,
6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours
Inputs: Any analog parameter from the list of available analog
parameters
Data Collection Mode: Continuous, Triggered
Trigger Source: Any digital flag from the list of digital flags
Trigger Position: 0 to 50% in steps of 1%
Channel 1(16) Mode: Sample, Min, Max, Mean
18.5.4 EVENT RECORDER

EVENT RECORDER
Number of events: 1024
Header: relay name, order code, firmware revision
722 1601-0651
EVENT RECORDER
Content: any element pickup, any element operate, digital input change
of state, digital output change of state, self-test events
Data Storage: non-volatile memory
Time-tag Accuracy: to one microsecond
18.5.5 LAST TRIP DATA

LAST TRIP DATA
Number of Records: 1
Time-tag Accuracy: One microsecond
Actuals: Event Number of Last Trip, Timestamp of Last Trip, Cause of
Last Trip, 64 Configurable FlexAnalog values
Commands: Clear Last Trip Data
18.5.6 FAULT REPORTS

FAULT REPORTS
Number of Reports: 15
Pre-fault and fault phasors for all CT and VT banks, pre-fault
Captured Data: and fault trigger operands, user-programmable analog channels
1 to 32
1601-0651 723
18.6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
18.6.1 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC
Lines of code: 1024
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to
16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge
detectors, timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Number of timers: 32
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Timer accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
18.6.2 FLEXELEMENTS
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: 8
Operating signal: Any analog actual value, or two values in a differential mode
Operating signal mode: Signed, or Absolute value
Operating mode: Level, Delta
Comparison direction: Over, Under
Operate time: FlexElements are processed once per cycle (16 ms at 60 Hz, 20
ms at 50 Hz)
Pickup Level: -30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Delta dt: 40 msec to 45 days
Pickup and dropout delays: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
18.6.3 FLEXSTATES
FLEXSTATES
Number of States: 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand, any digital input, any virtual input, any
remote input
18.6.4 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
724 1601-0651
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Range: 16 individually programmed
Output: Stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence: As input prior to protection, control and FlexLogic
18.6.5 FLEXCURVES
FLEXCURVES
Number: 4 (A, B, C, D)
Reset points: 40 (0.00 to 0.98 x pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1.03 to 20.0 x pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 200,000,000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Saturation level: 20 times the pickup level
18.6.6 TAB PUSHBUTTONS

TAB PUSHBUTTONS
Number of elements: 1 (20 Tab Pushbuttons)
Mode: Self-reset, latched
Display Message: 2 lines; 15 characters per line
Dropout Timer: 0.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.005
Auto-reset Timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold Timer: 0.1 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
pickup to operate
18.6.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: 17 (14 + 3 PB LEDS)
Programmability: any logic variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset mode: self-reset or latched
18.6.8 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 3 (Membrane and Rugged Front Panels)
Mode: Self-reset, latched
Display message: 2 lines of 13 characters on each line
Dropout timer: 0.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.005
Auto-reset timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold timer: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
1601-0651 725
18.7 METERING
18.7.1 RMS PARAMETERS

Currents
Parameters: Phase A, B, C, Neutral, Ground
Accuracy: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT±1% of reading > 2.0 x CT
Voltages
Parameters: Wye VTs: A-n, B-n, C-n, A-B, B-C, C-A, Average Phase, Neutral
and Residual. Delta VTs: A-B, B-C, C-A, Neutral and Residual
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 15 to 208 V±2% for open Delta
connections
Sensitive Ground
Parameter: Isg
Accuracy (from 0.01 to 0.2 x CT): ±1.30% of rated
Accuracy (> 0.2 x CT): ±0.30% of reading or ±0.60% of rated (whichever is greater)
Real Power (Watts)

Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Parameters: Wye VTs: 3-phase and per phase. Delta VTs: 3-phase only
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kW (whichever is greater) at -0.8 < PF ≤
-1.0 and 0.8 < PF < 1.0
Reactive Power (Vars)

Range: -214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kvar (whichever is greater) at -0.2 < PF
≤ 0.2
Apparent Power (VA)

Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kVA (whichever is greater)
Power Factor
Parameters: 3-phase; per phase if VT is Wye
726 1601-0651
Power Factor
Accuracy: ±0.02 for 50 Hz and 60 Hz; ±0.05 for 25 Hz
Watt-hours (positive and negative)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update Rate: 50 ms
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
Var-hours (positive and negative)

Parameters: 3-phase only
Update Rate: 50 ms
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
18.7.2 PHASORS
Current
Parameters: Phase A, B, C, Neutral and Ground
Magnitude Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT
±1.0% of reading > 2.0 x CT
Angle Accuracy: 2° (3° for 25 Hz)
Voltages
Parameters: Wye VTs: A-n, B-n, C-n, A-B, B-C, C-A, Average Phase, Neutral
and Residual
Delta VTs: A-B, B-C, C-A, Neutral and Residual
Magnitude Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 15 to 208 V
±1% for open Delta connections
±10% for 25 Hz with 150 V <V < 208V
Angle Accuracy: 0.5° (15 V <V < 208 V)
18.7.3 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Accuracy at: V = 15 to 208 V: ±0.01 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz);
I = 0.1 to 0.4 x CT: ±0.020 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz);
I > 0.4 x CT: ±0.01 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz)
1601-0651 727
18.7.4 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE HARMONICS

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE HARMONICS
Parameters: Magnitude of each harmonic and THD
Range: 2nd to 25th harmonic: per-phase displayed as % of f1
fundamental frequency THD: per-phase displayed as % of f1
728 1601-0651
18.8 INPUTS
18.8.1 TAP CHANGER INPUT

TAP CHANGER INPUT
Operating Parameter: BCD, ohms In 1, Analog Ip 1
Tap Changer Range: -19 to +39
Accuracy: Per Input accuracy
18.8.2 AC CURRENTS
AC CURRENTS
CT Rated Primary: 1 to 12000 A
CT Rated Secondary: 1 A or 5 A based on relay ordering
Burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Short Term CT Withstand: 1 second at 100 x rated current
2 seconds at 40 x rated current
Continuous 3 x rated current
18.8.3 AC VOLTAGES
AC VOLTAGE
VT Range: 10 to 260 V
Nominal Frequency: 20 to 65 Hz
Burden: <0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion Range: 1 to 275 V
Voltage Withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral. 1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral
18.8.4 ANALOG INPUTS

ANALOG INPUTS
Current Input (mA DC): 0 to 1mA, 0 to 5mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
(configurable)
Input Impedance: 375 Ω ±10%
Conversion range: 0 to +21 mA DC
Accuracy: ±1% of full scale,
Type: Passive
Sampling Interval: Typically 500 ms
Cable: Twisted-pair shielded cable
1601-0651 729
18.8.5 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Sampling frequency: 64 samples per power cycle. 128 samples per power cycle
(available for transient recorder)
Tracking frequency range: 3 to 72 Hz
18.8.6 ARC FLASH SENSOR/FIBER

ARC FLASH SENSOR/FIBER
Number of Point Sensors: 4
Detection Radius: 180 degrees
Fiber Length (Point Sensor): 18 ft standard, 32 ft maximum
Fiber Size: 1000 um
Mode: Multi-mode
Connector: Small Media Interface (SMI)
Fiber Type: Plastic Optical Fiber
Bend Radius: >25 mm
18.8.7 CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS
Number of Inputs: Based on relay order code
Type: Wet or Dry
Wet Contacts: 300 VDC maximum
Selectable thresholds: Programmable: 17 VDC (For 24 VDC Operating Voltage) 33
VDC (For 48 VDC and 60 VDC Operating Voltage) 84 VDC (For
110 VDC and 125 VDC Operating Voltage) 166 VDC (For 220
VDC and 250 VDC Operating Voltage)
Tolerance: 17 VDC: Vlow (off) <10V, Vhigh (on) >19V. 33 VDC: Vlow (off)
<23V, Vhigh (on) >38V. 84 VDC: Vlow (off) <70V, Vhigh (on)
>88V. 166 VDC: Vlow (off) <140V, Vhigh (on) >176V.
Recognition time: 1 ms (typical)
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 ms
Continuous current draw (burden): 2 mA
CLOCK
Setup: Date and Time, Daylight Saving Time, UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time)
Backup Retention: 31 days
Note:
For relays with Hardware Revision A, Clock Backup Retention is only 1 hour
730 1601-0651
18.8.8 IRIG-B INPUT

IRIG-B INPUT
Auto-detect: DC and AM
Amplitude Modulation: 1 V to 10 V pk-to-pk
DC Shift: TTL
Input Impedance: 40 kΩ
Isolation: 2 kV
IRIG-B Format: IEEE 1344-1995 (with control bits extension)
18.8.9 RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 120 Ω Nickel, 100 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω Copper
(RMIO only supports 100Ω Platinum)
Sensing current: 5 mA
Range: –40 to +250°C (-40 to +482°F)
Accuracy (onboard): ±2°C (±4°F)
Accuracy (using RMIO): ±3°C (±5.4°F)
Isolation: 36 V pk-pk (a group of RTDs to ground) 2 kV from base unit
(RMIO only)
Lead Resistance: 25 Ω max. per lead for platinum or nickel and 3 Ω max. per lead
for copper RTDs
RTD Inputs Available: 6 RTD inputs with one module or 12 inputs with 2 modules (IO
cards R or S). 1 RTD input with IO card L.6 to 12 RTD inputs
with RMIO modules 1 through 4
Cable: Three-wire shielded cable
18.8.10 OHMS INPUT

OHMS INPUT
Type: Resistance (ohms)
Range: 0 to 500 Ω or 0.5 to 5.1 kΩ
Bias current: 1.9 mA through the full range
Accuracy: ±1% (of full scale based on input range)
18.8.11 TAP CHANGER INPUT

TAP CHANGER INPUT
Operating Parameter: BCD, ohms In 1, Analog Ip 1
Tap Changer Range: -19 to +39
Accuracy: Per Input accuracy
1601-0651 731
18.9 OUTPUTS
18.9.1 ANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUTS
Range (configurable): 0 to 1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Max. load resistance: 10 kΩ @ 1 mA, 600 Ω @ 20 mA
Accuracy: ±1% of full scale
Isolation: 500V DC for one minute (functional isolation between analog
inputs and output group; and each group of chassis)
Driving Signal: any Analog quantity
Sampling Interval: Typically 100 ms
Upper and lower limit (for the driving signal): -90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
Cable: Twisted-pair shielded cable
18.9.2 FORM C OUTPUT RELAYS

FORM C OUTPUT RELAYS
Maximum Working Voltage: 300VDC/300VAC
Make and short-time carry current: 30A/0.2s per IEEE C37.90
Maximum Continuous Current per contact: 10A
Total maximum current for contacts connected to common 10A
potential:
Breaking Capacity (DC inductive) with respect to source 24 V-1 A; 48 V-0.5 A; 125 V-0.3 A; 250 V-0.2 A
voltage, @L/R = 40 ms (10000 Operation, per IEC 60255-1
2009-08):
Breaking Capacity (DC resistive) with respect to source 24 V-10 A; 48 V-1.5 A; 125 V-0.4 A; 250 V-0.3 A
voltage:
Breaking Capacity (AC inductive) with respect to source A300, Pilot duty 720 VA
voltage, @PF= 0.4 or less:
Breaking Capacity (AC resistive) with respect to source 277V-10A
voltage:
Operating Time (coil energization to contact closure, resistive <8ms
load):
Contact Material: Silver alloy
Mechanical Endurance (no load): > 10,000
Maximum Frequency of operation: 360/h
Protection Device across contact: EMI Suppression Cap, 1nF
732 1601-0651
Note:
For order codes with a combined total of 2 or 3 type A and M I/O cards, the following ratings are applied to meet UL508
requirements: 1 second on / 10 seconds off, 9% duty cycle
18.9.3 FORM A VOLTAGE MONITOR

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)
18.9.4 SOLID STATE RELAYS

SOLID STATE RELAYS ON I/O CARD M
Maximum Working Voltage: 300 VDC
Make and short-time carry current: 30A/0.2 s per IEEE C37.90
Maximum Continuous Current per contact: 10 A
Total maximum current for contacts connected to common 10 A
potential:
Breaking Capacity (DC inductive) with respect to source 250 VDC - 10 A (or 2.5 kW) (Maximum 10 A and 300 VDC)
voltage, @L/R = 40 ms (10000 Operation, per IEC 60255-1
2009-08):
Breaking Capacity (DC resistive) with respect to source 250 V - 30 A (or 7500 W)
voltage:
Breaking Capacity (AC inductive) with respect to source N/A
voltage, @PF= 0.35 or less:
Breaking Capacity (AC resistive) with respect to source N/A
voltage:
Operating Time (coil energization to contact closure, resistive <0.2 ms
load):
Contact Material: Hybrid
Mechanical Endurance (no load): > 10,000
Maximum Frequency of operation: 360/h
Protection Device across contact: MO V, rated @ 250 VAC/320 VDC
18.9.5 PULSED OUTPUTS

PULSED OUTPUTS
Mode: 3-phase positive and negative active energy measurement,
3-phase positive and negative reactive energy measurements
Principle: Pulsed output is energized for one second and then de-
energized for one second after the programed energy
increment.
1601-0651 733
18.9.6 COIL ACTUATOR OUTPUTS

COIL ACTUATOR OUTPUTS
No. of Coil Actuators: 3 (1 per phase)
Open Maximum Current: 5 to 20 A
Close Maximum Current: 5 to 20 A
Open Pulse Time: 15 to 100 ms
Close Pulse Time: 15 to 100 ms
Operate Time: < 8 ms
Intervals between full sequence operation: Minimum 60 s between two consecutive full sequence
operations.
Minimum 30 mins after 6 consecutive full sequence operations
with minimum interval.
734 1601-0651
18.10 POWER SUPPLY
18.10.1 VOLTAGE SUPPLIES

(FOR H AND R OPTIONS ONLY)
Nominal DC Voltage: 125 to 250 V
Minimum DC Voltage: 88 V
Maximum DC Voltage: 300 V
Nominal AC Voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC Voltage: 88 V at 50 to 60 Hz
Maximum AC Voltage: 265 V at 50 to 60 Hz
(FOR L DC OPTION ONLY) (not in 859)

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 V to 48 V
Minimum DC Voltage: 20 V
Maximum DC Voltage: 60 V
18.10.2 POWER CONSUMPTION

POWER CONSUMPTION
Typical: 20 W / 40 VA
Maximum: 34 W / 70 VA
18.10.3 VOLTAGE LOSS RIDE-THROUGH

VOLTAGE LOSS RIDE THROUGH
Typical (at typical power consumption): 50 ms
For R order code: 200 ms
1601-0651 735
18.11 COMMUNICATIONS
18.11.1 ETHERNET
ETHERNET – BASE OFFERING (“SE” OPTION)
Modes: 10/100 Mbps
One Port: RJ45
Protocol: Modbus TCP, DNP
ETHERNET – CARD OPTION “C” - 2X COPPER (RJ45) PORTS

Modes: 10/100 MB
Two Ports: RJ45 (with this option both enabled ports are on the
communications card; the Ethernet port located on the base
CPU is disabled)
Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Ed.2,
IEC 61850 Ed.2 GOOSE, IEEE 1588 (PTP version 2), SNTP,
IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)
ETHERNET – CARD OPTION “S” - 2X ST FIBER PORTS

Fiber type: 100 MB Multi-mode
Two Ports: ST (with this option both enabled ports are on the
communications card; the Ethernet port located on the base
CPU is disabled)
Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Ed.2,
IEC 61850 Ed.2 GOOSE, IEEE 1588 (PTP version 2), SNTP,
IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP), OPC-UA
Wavelength: 1310nm
Typical link distance: 4 km
18.11.2 USB
USB
Standard specification: Compliant with USB 2.0
Protocols: Modbus TCP, TFTP
18.11.3 SERIAL
SERIAL
RS485 port: Isolated
Baud rates: Supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 kbps
Response time: 10 ms typical
Parity: None, Odd, Even
Protocol: Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
736 1601-0651
SERIAL
Maximum distance: 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation: 2 kV
Cable: Belden 9841 or similar 24 AWG stranded, shielded twisted-pair
18.11.4 WIFI
WIFI
Standard specification: IEEE802.11bgn
Range: 30 ft (direct line of sight)
18.11.5 REMOTE MODBUS

REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE PROFILE
Device Name: BSG3 (13 alphanumeric characters maximum)
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 – standard Ethernet address
Slave Address: 254 (1 to 254)
Modbus Port: 502 (0 to 10000, default 502)
Poll Rate: 1 minute (OFF, 1 to 120 minutes), the continuous mode poll
interval is defined as the poll rate interval
Trigger: Off (any FlexLogic Operand), the trigger mode is based on the
FlexLogic operand designed to trigger the poll
18.11.6 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK

CAN (RMIO)
Maximum Distance: 250 m (820 ft)
Cable Type: Shielded or unshielded twisted pair
Cable Gauge: Belden 9841 or similar 24 AWG for distances up to 100m; 22
AWG for distances up to 250 m.
1601-0651 737
18.12 CERTIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
18.12.1 APPROVALS
APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO
CE compliance Low voltage directive EN60255-27
EMC Directive EN60255-26
R&TTE Directive ETSI EN300 328, ETSI EN301 489-1,
ETSI EN301-489-17,
RoHS Directive RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU, 2015/863
North America cULus UL508, e57838 NKCR, NRGU
CSA C22.2.No 14, e57838 NKCR7,
NRGU7
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality ISO9001
program
18.12.2 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
Testing and Certification

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand EN60255-5/IEC60255-27 2.3 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-5/IEC60255-27 5 kV
Insulation resistance IEC60255-27 500 VDC
Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-18 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM, 1 MHz
Electrostatic Discharge EN61000-4-2 Level 4
RF immunity EN61000-4-3 Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000-4-4 Class A and B
Surge Immunity EN61000-4-5 Level 3
Conducted RF Immunity EN61000-4-6 Level 3
Power Frequency Immunity IEC60255-26 Class A & B
Voltage variation, interruption and Ripple IEC60255-26 PQT levels based on IEC61000-4-29,
DC IEC61000-4-11 and IEC61000-4-17
Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 /CISPR22 Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Power magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-10 Level 4
738 1601-0651
TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL

Voltage Dip & interruption IEC61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips, 250/300 cycle
interrupts
Harmonic Immunity IEC61000-4-13 Class 3
Conducted RF Immunity 0-150kHz IEC61000-4-16 Level 4
Ingress Protection IEC60529 IP54 front
Environmental (Cold) IEC60068-2-1 -40C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat) IEC60068-2-2 85C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6 day humidity variant 2
EFT IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 4kV, 5 kHz
Damped Oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
Dielectric Between contacts IEEE C37.90 1500Vrms
Make and Carry IEEE C37.90 30A /200 ops
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3 8kV DC/ 15 kV AD
Product Safety IEC60255-27 As per standard
Rated Burden, IEC60255-1 Sec 6.10
Contact Performance IEC60255-1 Sec 6.11
Note:
May contain components with FCC ID: XF6-RS9110N1122 and IC ID: 8407A-RS9110N1122
1601-0651 739
18.13 ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Storage/Shipping: -40°C to 85°C
Operating: -40°C to 60°C
Humidity Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55°C (As per
IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6 days)
Altitude: 2000m (standard base reference evaluated altitude)
5000m (maximum achievable altitude)
Pollution Degree: II
Overvoltage Category: II
Ingress Protection: IP54 Front (845,850, 869, 889)
IP 50 Front (859)
Insulation Class: 1
Noise: 0 dB
740 1601-0651
18.14 LONG-TERM STORAGE

The device should be stored in an environment that is dry, corrosive-free, and not in direct sunlight.
Correct storage will prevent premature component failures caused by environmental factors such as moisture or
corrosive gases. Exposure to high humidity or corrosive environments will prematurely degrade the electronic
components in any electronic device regardless of its use or manufacturer, unless specific precautions, such as
those mentioned in the Environmental section, are taken.
We recommend that you power up all stored relays once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration
of electrolytic capacitors and subsequent relay failure.
1601-0651 741
742 1601-0651
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
Appendix A - Appendix A
744 1601-0651
1 WARRANTY
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for
10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the GE Digital Energy Terms and
Conditions on the GE website.
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
1601-0651 745
746 1601-0651
Imagination at work
GE Vernova
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
+44 (0) 1785 250 070
[email protected]
© 2023 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is
given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and
commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third
parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.
1601-0651

Multilin: 8 Series 845

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multilin: 8 Series 845

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multilin: 8 Series 845

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Vernova

2.25 Typical Wiring Diagrams 69

3.4.10 FlexLogic Favourites 123

Chapter 4 About Setpoints 127

Chapter 5 Device Setpoints 147

5.12.4 Annunciator 213

Chapter 6 System Setpoints 231

Chapter 7 Input and Output Setpoints 295

Chapter 8 Protection 317

8.1 Chapter Overview 319

Chapter 9 Monitoring 445

9.5.2 Demand 482

Chapter 10 Control 525

Chapter 11 Flexlogic 569

Chapter 12 Testing 589

12.3.3 Simulation Fault 595

Chapter 13 Status 601

Chapter 14 Metering 621

14.19 Analog Inputs 660

Chapter 15 Records 663

Chapter 16 Transformer monitoring and diagnostics 681

Chapter 17 Maintenance 697

Chapter 18 Specifications 703

18.2.4 Restricted ground fault (87G) 707

18.5.6 Fault reports 723

Appendix A Appendix A 743

1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

1.2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

1.2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

1.3 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 8 SERIES

Analog Input and Waveform Capture

Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics

Processing of AC Current Inputs

1.5 FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES

       -.

 $ $ % %

! ,#  ,#  %& %&

& & &

@AB 12345672892 :27;9<;=74 >?5;98

ANSI Device Numbers and Functions

Other Device Functions

1.6 SECURITY OVERVIEW

GENERAL RULES FOR USER ROLES WITH CYBERSENTRY

1.7 ORDER CODES

845 order codes

845 - P5 R G5 H N N A N N G A P F M 2 E S W A N 845 Transformer Protection System

PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT J:

N Two windings, no voltage

P5 5A three-phase current inputs (J1), voltage inputs (J2)

PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT K:

M 1A three-phase current inputs (K1), 1A three-phase current inputs (K2)

G1 1A ground input (1 per phase current bank)

G5 5A ground input (1 per phase current bank)

Q1 5A ground input (J1), 1A ground input (K1)

Q2 5A (J1) + 1A (K1) + 1A (K2)

Q3 1A (J1) + 5A (K1) + 5A (K2)

H 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC

R 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC - Extended Ride-through

-.

$ $ % %

! ,# ,# %& %&

& & &

7,-6:-;7"# ; "& <&=

!"#$ !%&&'

7 8"8 !'"9 #"